Skip to main content

20 New Songs To Add to Your Holiday Playlist

Sometimes our holiday playlists can get a little outdated and dull from year to year. The good news is that finding new songs just takes a little patience and digging.

Here are 20 suggested “freshen-up” songs from across many genres — a blend of old and new to spruce up your holiday festivities.

FIVE SONGS TO ADD TO YOUR PRESENT WRAPPING PLAYLIST

Mariah Carey, “All I Want for Christmas Is You” (1994)

No holiday gift-wrapping playlist would be complete without Mariah Carey’s hit, “All I Want for Christmas is You.” Serving as the lead single from her first holiday album, 1994’s Merry Christmas, the record features the singer’s infamous dog-whistle register, layered vocal runs and festive bell chimes.

Gwen Stefani, “Santa Baby” (2017)

In 2017, Gwen Stefani shared a version of the classic “Santa Baby” on her album You Make It Feel Like Christmas. Like Eartha Kitt’s 1953 original release, Stefani’s rendition features pared-down drums and strings as she offers her tongue-in-cheek list of what she wants from Santa.

Britney Spears, “My Only Wish (This Year)” (2000)

Britney Spears’ only wish for the holiday in this song is to meet her true love. She asks Santa to wrap the person up and leave them under the tree so they might meet on Christmas morning.

Jessica Simpson, “Let It Snow, Let It Snow, Let It Snow” (2004)

Jessica Simpson gives the holiday staple “Let It Snow, Let It Snow, Let It Snow” an upbeat, funky makeover. While the song’s lyrics are simple, it’s not a real holiday if we don’t wish for some snow — no matter what city you live in. (See next entry.)

PJ Morton, “Winter Wonderland” (2018)

PJ Morton takes the classic song “Winter Wonderland” and gives it a tropical, light-hearted twist, with reggae aesthetics and horns. The Maroon 5 keyboardist is clearly also hoping for some snow in his native New Orleans — giving listeners a fresh take on one of the season’s essentials.

FIVE SONGS TO ADD TO YOUR SHOPPING PLAYLIST

Run-D.M.C., “Christmas in Hollis” (1987)

Run-D.M.C.’s take on a holiday song, with “Hollis” referring to the rap group’s native Queens neighborhood in New York City. Here, the three members riff on a casual run-in with Santa Claus and the cash he deliberately leaves them.

Meghan Trainor and Earth, Wind & Fire, “Holidays” (2020)

From Meghan Trainor’s 2020 album, A Very Trainor Christmas. Here, the singer taps Earth, Wind & Fire for the rosy, festive song “Holidays.” Turning on this tune will surely brighten your spirits if the task of shopping for presents seems overwhelming.

Ariana Grande, “Santa Tell Me” (2014)

For Christmas, Ariana Grande just wants one thing: to not fall in love with her crush. That’s the gift she requests from Santa Claus, pleading for him to help her out because she wants to make sure the relationship is strong enough to last.

Ne-Yo, “This Christmas” (2019)

Ne-Yo’s 2019 “This Christmas” covers Donny Hathaway’s seminal classic of the same name, originally released in 1970. Here, Ne-Yo also sings about all the accoutrements that accompany the perfect Christmas, including mistletoe, presents and a roaring fire.

Tyler, the Creator feat. Fletcher Jones, “I Am the Grinch” (2018)

What is Christmas without the Grinch? Tyler, the Creator’s new take on the vintage villain for the 2018 film Dr. Seuss’ The Grinch shows the rapper speaking from the Grinch’s point of view, announcing the havoc he plans to wreak on the unsuspecting people of Who-ville.

FIVE SONGS TO ADD TO YOUR COOKING AND CLEANING PLAYLIST

Sia, “Santa’s Coming for Us” (2018)

Sia’s bouncy song delivers a promise that Santa Claus is on his way this Christmas Eve, with a hope that Santa grants whatever wish the listener asks for this year.

The Eagles, “Please Come Home for Christmas” (1978)

While “Please Come Home for Christmas” is a bit of a melancholy song, no holiday is complete without it — especially The Eagles’ 1978 cover version. Here, the singer beseeches his love to come home for Christmas so they may partake in all the festivities.

Chuck Berry, “Christmas” (1970)

“Run Rudolph Run” may be Chuck Berry’s most well-known holiday hit, but his 1970 song “Christmas” is another solid addition to your playlist. On the track, he makes a list of what he and his love could do if they spent just one more Christmas together.

John Legend, “Bring Me Love” (2018)

John Legend’s holiday wish is also something non-materialistic: he wants Santa to bring him his love because he feels like that’s what he deserves in the new year.

The Who, “Christmas” (1969)

The Who’s 1969 song “Christmas” (from their rock opera Tommy) is an atypical Christmas song, rife with classic rock chords and vocals — raucous elements that can help break up the monotony of getting your home ready for guests.

FIVE SONGS TO ADD TO YOUR DINNER PLAYLIST

Kelly Clarkson, “It’s Beginning to Look a Lot Like Christmas” (2021)

Kelly proves again and again that there’s a reason she won the first American Idol. In her cover of “It’s Beginning to Look a Lot Like Christmas,” from her latest seasonal offering, When Christmas Comes Around…, she shows off her powerhouse singing chops while describing the seasonal trappings that make the holiday what it is.

Brenda Lee, “Rockin’ Around the Christmas Tree” (1958)

Brenda Lee’s 1958 song “Rockin’ Around the Christmas Tree” has sold over 25 million copies, and it’s the fourth most digital downloaded Christmas single ever. For many, it brings the 1990 film classic Home Alone to mind as it underscores the scene where Kevin McCallister pretends he’s hosting a holiday party at his house.

Destiny’s Child, “8 Days of Christmas” (2001)

The title song from Destiny’s Child’s 2001 album 8 Days of Christmas sees the three singers breaking down what their significant others gave to them over the course of the holiday, including a candlelit dinner.

Justin Bieber and Usher, “The Christmas Song (Chestnuts Roasting on an Open Fire)” (2011)

There have been a lot of covers of Nat King Cole’s 1946 hit, “The Christmas Song (Chestnuts Roasting on an Open Fire),” but Justin Bieber and Usher’s 2011 version is unmatched. After Bieber opens the song, the two singers duet, trading some of the most famous lines from the record.

Ella Fitzgerald, “Sleigh Ride” (1960)

Ella Fitzgerald released her version of “Sleigh Ride” in 1960. Backed by horns and drums, the jazzily ethereal track welcomes the holiday season with open arms, as she sings about a cozy sleigh ride amid the winter’s snow.

5 Tips to Start and Run an Audition-Only Ensembles

Many high schools have audition-only ensembles. While larger pep bands and regular concert band give you more instruments to work with, an audition-only ensemble holds a special place in a directors’ heart. Oftentimes, this ensemble is full of upperclassman who are about to graduate, so time becomes limited and precious.

Here are some tips on how to make the most of your audition-only ensemble — from making it run smoothly, to growing your group for years to come.

1.     Try Student-Lead Literature

With audition-only ensembles, you can see which musical direction your students would like to move toward. Block out the end of a rehearsal period to ask your pupils what kind of literature they’d like to play one day. Maybe it’s Holst’s Suite in Eb, Xerxes or even variations on a Korean folk song.

Why try student-lead literature? Because if your students make the selection, they are going to have an extra incentive to want to learn it. Even if it seems above their technical ability, order the score. This is the method one of my own directors, Mr.Koch, employed. He had us playing Persichetti before we were 16. Talk about a feat!

2. Consider Charging Admission to Concerts

small string ensemble performingYou might face some resistance and difficulties if you start to charge $5 to $10 for admission to concerts, but here are some reasons to consider it with an audition-only ensemble:

  • It will help cover the cost of new scores and instrument repairs.
  • You and your students won’t have to work as hard at fundraising and will have more time and energy to focus on rehearsing.
  • It clarifies the concert date.
  • It helps set a professional tone for performances and the ensemble as a whole.

The more difficult the music, the more expensive the scores. Not to mention, you may find yourself in need of rarer (and pricier) instruments such as grenadilla wood piccolos, English horns and auxiliary percussion like thunder sheets and theremins.

Some directors might fear that charging admission will decrease the size of the audience, but it can have the opposite effect. If parents and other family members pay for the event, they will likely remember the date more than if the concert was free. This small increase in stakes can lead to bigger audiences.

Even if the initial result to charging admission is a smaller crowd, keep in mind that it’s more important for an audience — no matter the size — to be captivated. Charging admission will certainly weed out the audience members who are noisy and disrespectful. Furthermore, charging admission to your audition-only concert helps set the tone — what was previously an informal event, just became a formal event.

3. Work with Your Local Orchestra

In my area, many members of the Toledo Symphony visit surrounding high schools as guest artists. They provide guest conducting experiences and musical feedback before band festivals. They also do sectionals and sometimes, one-on-one lessons for soloists.

While it might seem like a hefty cost to compensate a professional from the symphony, it is worth it. The more professionals you can have in the room with your students before a competition or concert in a large venue, the better. In addition to this, it actually helps out the symphony as well: Members of the orchestra are exposed to your pool of students, who may want to study with them later down the road.

4. Provide Incentive for Newcomers

You should never play favorites with your ensembles. But there are many advantages to making your audition-only ensemble markedly different than your concert band.

pizza partyHere are some tips for providing incentives:

  • Make it a little competitive — During concert band rehearsals, mention what your audition band is playing, what the chair testing repertoire looks like, what they are doing for their new concert, etc. Hype up the audition ensemble because a little friendly competition and nudging can help grow your audition band’s try-out pool for the next year.
  • Change up concert black to something more elegant — Change the basic “concert black” to more formal attire to help set this ensemble apart from the others. Tuxedos and long black gowns are a good place to start.
  • Host audition-ensemble exclusive events — something as simple as a short homeroom pizza party can go a long way. Make sure to only do this after an audition-only ensemble concert. Remember, no playing favorites!

5. Get Involved with the Community

male student playing the saxophoneAudition-only ensembles are a great way to provide services to your community. Students who sign up for audition-only bands are more likely to want to perform at events outside of school.

Here are a few performance opportunities you can explore for your audition-only ensemble:

  • Have students play at the grand opening of small businesses.
  • Get your band involved in their summer community day.
  • Make a yearly event inside the school (such as audition-only students caroling from classroom to classroom, playing music over the intercom during game days or other special events).
  • Collaborate with the orchestra director if your school has one. Put together a symphonic orchestra and get students from both ensembles together, which will allow for even more advanced literature to try.

Getting involved in your community is a two-way street. Performances attract community attention, which can garner enough recognition for articles on the front page of your local paper!

Twice the Work? Twice the Fun!

While audition-only ensembles can seem like twice as much work, they can also be twice as much fun! Try some new literature that seems too hard — you’ll be pleasantly surprised at how your students will stretch their talent.  Get your band out there, get involved and most importantly, enjoy yourself!

Case Study: Strategic Storage and Scheduling Solutions

When Vincent Vicchiariello began his transition to Director of Bands at Nutley High School in New Jersey in 2018, the program boomed. “We had our biggest [group] of 95 students in our marching band,” he says. “We were busting at the seams.”

As the band department increased in size, so did logistical challenges including where to store equipment and when and where to rehearse. Clear communication and support from the community led to interesting solutions.

Vicchiariello compares band directors to mathematicians or firefighters. “Every band director is the same — we’re problem-solvers,” says Vicchiariello, who has been a teacher with the school district for more than 11 years since earning his music education degree in 2009. “We’re always finding a way to make something happen.”

Equipment Expansion

Part of the band’s growth occurred with the formation of an indoor percussion ensemble in 2016. The group had its first competitive season in the winter of 2017 and now has about 30 participants. Starting then and in the years since, the band has steadily acquired pit equipment, including three marimbas, four vibraphones, a drum set cart, a synth cart, speakers — “all that good stuff,” Vicchiariello says.

Much of the front ensemble opportunities have been incorporated into both the winter and fall marching groups. “We consider ourselves to be a decent-sized program, but our percussion section was [previously] just … battery on the field [and] a small front ensemble,” Vicchiariello recalls. “We’ve really grown our front ensemble to be something that is comparable to what is behind it on the field.”

While accumulating the equipment, Nutley experienced storage constraints. “Percussion instruments take up a lot of room,” says Vicchiariello, who is a percussionist himself and graduated from Nutley in 2005. “One thing that I still battle on a daily basis is facilities storage,” he says. “Where do we put everything?”

Just 15 miles outside of New York City, Nutley High School sits in the center of town with no room for development. “The problem here is that there’s no space to build anything else,” Vicchiariello says. “We can’t toss on an addition to the high school to expand the music wing because there’s no land to build on — everything is so tight.”

Having just a small closet shared with the theater department and the rehearsal room itself, the band began by putting large equipment on the stage. But when the auditorium was used for theater performances, that solution wouldn’t be viable.

Nutley band storage trailer from sideVicchiariello and the school district solved its storage problems in a variety of ways. Most importantly, the board of education purchased an enclosed trailer exclusively for the band’s use in March 2018. Previously, the district had transported the band’s equipment to competitions, games, and other events in several multi-use box trucks. As the board looked at buying a new box truck, it incorporated the purchase of the trailer. Vicchiariello coordinated with the director of grounds to research the size and internal features as well as bid out the project. A student’s uncle paid for the custom exterior paint.

In addition to travel, the trailer is used as a storage facility for marimbas, vibraphones, xylophones, any stands or racks, as well as other items that are made of metal or plastic. “Whatever is going in there doesn’t need to be temperature controlled,” Vicchiariello says. “We are constantly in and out of there, and we do check up on it if there are any leaks or if anything gets too hot. Nothing is in there with wood or drumheads.”

Nutley band room In addition, Vicchiariello built shelves and a rack in the back of the band room to house battery equipment and harnesses, respectively. Unfortunately or fortunately, the band received new marching band uniforms in 2018 as well, so the shelves now hold boxes of extra uniforms instead. “It’s like the ever-turning carousel that doesn’t want to stop,” Vicchiariello says.

As a temporary solution, the band is taking advantage of an unused general music and computer classroom to house battery equipment, low-brass instruments and uniform racks. In the future, the band and choir hope to jointly create a uniform storage system in the choir office.

Organization Guru

Vicchiariello also organizes the storage closet to donate, sell, repurpose or pass along old equipment. “I did a lot of work with clearing out most of the old and sorting through things and making piles to see how we can use the space to the best of our ability,” he says. “Everyone who knows me says that I’m a great organizer whether it’s an Excel sheet or the way that I keep my area.”

Most of the time at Nutley, when teachers decommission an item, the school system decides what to do with it. Large instruments like a bass drum or marimba were handed down to the middle school, for example.

As a self-proclaimed “neat freak,” Vicchiariello will clean out his storage spaces on a rolling basis, “If I have time, I’ll go and do it,” he says. “I did it in the fall. I find myself doing a lot of it during the summer. When I’m here for a marching band rehearsal, I’ll come in early.”

In addition to being an organizer himself, he teaches his students to be the same way. “It’s become part of the culture,” Vicchiariello says. “It’s like raising our own kids. … We don’t just take a cover off an instrument and roll it into a ball. We fold it and hang it over the instrument. When you take your instrument out of your locker, you don’t leave the case on the floor. The case goes back into your locker. We’re constantly brainstorming ideas on how to make the small things we have [feel] bigger and how to maximize the space.”

In and Out of “The Swamp”

Nutley band practicing at In the same vein, Vicchiariello solved challenges that the marching band faced with rehearsal space. With only one multipurpose field used for football, baseball, soccer, lacrosse and marching band at the high school, the band’s rehearsal schedules conflicted with sports practices and games. Therefore, the band members often walked to Yanticaw Park, directly behind the school and affectionately called “The Swamp,” when they couldn’t use the main field. During the last competitive season in 2019, the space didn’t have enough room for 95 students or even an area for the front ensemble. “We would have to do split practices and were only able to practice certain parts of our show,” Vicchiariello says.

To be able to rehearse the full show, the band changed its twice-a-week practices to the evenings after football practices and soccer games. Since the stadium has no lights, the band would use a portable generator to see, Vicchiariello says.

Overcoming these obstacles, the Nutley Raider Marching Band won the USBands New Jersey State Championships and achieved 2nd place in the USBands National Championship in Group IVA that season.

As if the prior facility conflicts weren’t enough, the school returfed its field in the summer of 2020, restricting its use, and groups couldn’t use indoor bathrooms due to COVID-19. So, the band held a modified band camp at Owens Park on the other side of town. “Owens field had a full bathroom and a very big open space,” Vicchiariello says.

In the end, Vicchiariello credits the community for coming together. “Every road or every connection leads back to Nutley,” as he has certainly experienced. “We have a community, an administration and teachers who support what we do. And our parents are the best in the business.”

Top Stocking Stuffers

Okay, we have to admit that not all of these gift suggestions will fit in a stocking. But they’re all sure to put a smile on the face of the musician or music lover in your life this holiday season, and since they’re all priced at under $500, they may well put a smile on your face too.

URBAN GUITAR BY YAMAHA

“I think acoustic guitar is a great way to start learning,” says world-renowned recording artist and four-time GRAMMY® winner Keith Urban, “because you can play it anywhere.” There’s no better way to begin that journey than with the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha.

Designed with beginners in mind, the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha includes everything needed to start playing right away. The guitar is a finely crafted instrument featuring a concert cutaway body and a thin, short-scale neck that makes it easy to play. It sports a beautiful spruce top with a tobacco brown sunburst finish and a tortoise-shell pickguard, plus it comes with a custom guitar strap and picks. The accompanying interactive lesson app provides step-by-step instruction from Keith Urban himself, as well as his teaching partner JUNO. Together, they offer inspiration and encouragement, along with cutting-edge features that will keep budding guitar heroes engaged and looking forward to their next lesson.

An acoustic guitar.

AG03 / AG06 COMPACT MIXERS

Anyone who regularly attends online meetings — as well as every podcaster, gamer, teacher, social media content creator and musician — will be thrilled to discover a Yamaha AG03MK2 or AG06MK2 compact multi-purpose mixer in their holiday stocking. Both models have built-in USB interfaces, making them ideal for live streaming applications of all types, including interactive video gaming, online instruction and podcasting, as well as music production and mobile recording.

The AG03 offers three microphone/instrument inputs and a dedicated headphone output, making it easy to mix your voice with background music, while the AG06 doubles the inputs for more advanced productions. Both come with Steinberg WaveLab Cast and Cubase AI software, which provide a wide range of simple-to-use recording, editing and distribution tools and enable high-resolution 24-bit/192 kHz two-track recording and playback. And even though it provides professional quality audio, you don’t have to be a pro to use the AG06/AG03: Simple operation and a handy 1-TOUCH control allows the user to instantly add compression, EQ and onboard effects like reverb and guitar amp simulation with the turn of a single knob.

Two small mixers.

PSR-E373 PORTABLE KEYBOARD

There’s no better way of encouraging a love of music than by giving someone a portable keyboard, and the Yamaha PSR-E373 is ideal for both beginners and hobbyists. It offers hundreds of built-in sounds, dozens of studio-quality effects and an expressive touch-sensitive keyboard. In addition, auto-accompaniment “Styles” provide a virtual backing band that can jam along in a variety of musical genres from around the world, such as jazz, R&B, and Latin, and a “Smart Chord” function allows the player to add great-sounding chords with just a few fingers.

Even when there’s no piano teacher available, onboard lesson functions help beginners learn how to play complete songs and improve their playing skills, and they can also download a song book that includes the complete scores and provides tips for mastering the lessons. In addition, a special Duo mode allows two students to do duets and practice together. The PSR-E373 makes learning and practicing fun … and isn’t that what it’s all about?

Child playing portable keyboard and smiling.

TW-E3B TRUE WIRELESS EARBUDS

Who wouldn’t like to find a set of earbuds in their holiday stocking? Yamaha TW-E3B true wireless earbuds are small in size yet detailed in sound. Ergonomically shaped for all-day comfort, they come with four eartip sizes for a custom fit and non-slip coating for improved hold. They also provide up to 24 hours of battery life, with an enhanced charging case that features easy-to-read indicators

TW-E3B earbuds are Bluetooth 5®-compatible, with aptX technology for stable wireless connectivity and superior sound. They’re water- and sweat-resistant, so they can be worn outdoors and during exercise, with easy controls for taking phone calls, adjusting music playback and Siri®/Google Assistant activation, plus Listening Care intelligent equalization for full-range sound at lower listening volumes. In short, TW-E3B earbuds offer everything the on-the-go streamer needs, and at an extremely affordable price too.

A pair of earbuds in their cases.

PIANICA

At first glance, you might take this for a toy, but the Yamaha Pianica is actually a serious instrument. This small, portable keyboard is breath-powered — all the player has to do is simply blow air into it while pressing down the keys. While the sound it makes is similar to an accordion or a harmonica, the Pianica uses the same familiar black-and-white keys as a piano, so anyone can begin playing music right away.

There are several different Pianica models available. The P32D offers 32 keys, while the P37E model (shown below) has an extended keyboard with 37 keys for a full 3-octave range. It also comes in three different colors — red, brown and black — with the red model actually having a slightly brighter tonality than the other two, allowing the player to choose his or her individual sound as well as making a fashion statement. Whether you’re buying a gift for a friend or relative hoping to discover the joy of making music, or you’re a parent who wants to introduce your child to music for the very first time, the Pianica is an easy and fun way to get started.

Yamaha Pianica keyboard wind instrument on table with coffee cup.

THR10II AND THR10II WIRELESS DESKTOP AMPS

The family of Yamaha THR-II compact desktop amplifiers provide guitarists of every level with a perfect combination of professional-quality tones and stylish good looks — whether they are practicing, recording or playing along with their favorite music.

The THR10II and THR10IIWL Wireless models provide 20 watts of power and 15 different amp tones as well as modeled microphone sounds, stompbox-style modulation effects and studio-quality reverb and delay. There’s a USB port for recording and playback, plus Bluetooth® support that allows wireless audio playback through the built-in stereo speakers; there’s even a free mobile editor for remote control from a smartphone. The THR10II Wireless model adds convenient wireless operation — no guitar cable required!

A small amplifier.

CS-865 DOUBLE BRACED BOOM STAND

Cymbal boom stand.

Drummers are always looking for creative ways to expand their kits, and what better way than with a new cymbal stand? The Yamaha CS-865 double braced boom stand features an infinite adjustment tilter that allows virtually any angle adjustment, so cymbals can be placed right where the drummer wants them. The hinged tilter clamp grips the boom securely, with a memory lock that adds extra security to keep cymbals precisely positioned. Large rubber feet keep the stand from moving around, and plastic plugs in the vertical tubes prevent them from rattling — an annoyance that can be picked up by microphones in the recording studio. In addition, the boom arm stores inside the main arm, so the CS-865 can be used as a straight stand too — a “hideaway” feature that also means it takes up less space when stored … or even when it’s hiding under a tree.

AXE PACK

Guitarists can always use accessories, and the Yamaha AXE PACK provides all the essentials to maximize their playing time and enjoyment. This comprehensive kit includes an A-frame stand to hold electric and acoustic guitars — even ukuleles — along with a nylon strap, a string winder, a Yamaha GCT-1 clip-on tuner for guitar and bass (ukulele too), a polishing cloth, plus a supply of picks.

Guitar stand kit.

SR-C20A COMPACT SOUND BAR

Think a small sound bar means small sound? Think again. The Yamaha SR-C20A compact sound bar makes no compromises when it comes to audio fidelity, plus it’s packed with features such as virtual surround sound and a built-in dialog enhancer — there’s even a built-in subwoofer for those all-important rumbles that make movies and games come to life.

The SR-C20A has built-in Bluetooth too, so in addition to adding great sound to any TV or computer, it can also be used for streaming audio such as music and podcasts. And with the use of a free app, it can be turned on or off from a smartphone or tablet — the user can even switch content or change sound modes. Best of all, at just 23″ in length, the SR-C20A can fit anywhere, from entertainment cabinets to bedroom dressers to gaming stations to dorm room desks — it even includes rear keyholes for easy wall-mounting.

Yamaha sound bar on desk beneath computer monitors.

MPH-MT5 HEADPHONES

Yamaha studio headphones.

An extra pair of quality headphones always comes in handy. The Yamaha HPH-MT5 high-grade monitor headphones deliver a balanced sound that is always faithful to the source, making them perfect for home recording, where accuracy is a must. They’re lightweight and comfortable, and employ an over-ear closed back design for excellent isolation, with an extended frequency range that allows you to hear the entire sound, from the lowest lows to the highest highs. Moveable earcups enable single-ear monitoring, and thick, durable ABS housing and folding arm make the HPH-MT5 ideal for travel and use in even the toughest working environments. Carrying bag and 1/4″ adapter included too!

P-45 DIGITAL PIANO

Digital pianos provide full-sized 88-note keyboards that have the same feel as those of acoustic pianos. The Yamaha P-45, geared toward players at all levels — from beginners to professionals — provides precisely that, in an affordable package.

Its keyboard boasts a weighted action that has a heavier touch in the low end and a lighter touch in the high end, just like the hammers inside an acoustic piano. And not only does the P-45 sound just like an acoustic piano, it can also emulate the tonality of an electric piano, harpsichord, organ or vibraphone — even a complete string section! It comes with its own built-in sound system, and four varieties of onboard reverb allow the player to choose just the right kind of ambience, plus a headphone output allows private practice any time of the day or night without disturbing friends, family or neighbors. And unlike an acoustic piano, the P-45 is portable and lightweight — just 25 pounds — so it can be easily moved anywhere in your home or used for performance in other venues.

An electronic keyboard with 88 keys.

Venova™ Casual Wind Instrument

The trailblazer in your family is sure to appreciate Venova. It’s a completely new type of wind instrument — Yamaha calls it a “casual” wind instrument — that is easy to learn and fun to play. With simple recorder-like fingerings (the same kind taught in elementary schools everywhere) and a sound like a saxophone, anyone can be playing music in no time!

There are three models of Venova to choose from: The YVS-100 uses a real soprano sax mouthpiece and reed; the larger YVS-120 uses an alto mouthpiece to produce a lower and more mellow sound; and the YVS-140 uses a tenor saxophone mouthpiece and reed that make it easy for anyone — even beginners — to produce a rich, low sound. All three models are are water-washable, durable, lightweight and extremely portable — simply stick a Venova in a backpack and take it to the park or to a barbeque, or toss it in a suitcase and take it along on a business trip or on vacation. And there are no add-ons to buy: Everything needed to start making music is provided, including mouthpiece, ligature, synthetic reed, mouthpiece cap and a durable carrying case with strap.

Young man playing a Yamaha Venova casual wind instrument.

 

For more information about these and other great Yamaha music products, click here.

Expand Your Digital Keyboard, Expand Your Music

Many new instrument owners ask the question, “What else can I do with my keyboard once I get it home?” Yamaha keyboards are designed with expansion in mind! From new Voices and Styles to songs and sheet music, you can find everything you need to fully enjoy your instrument on the online Yamaha Downloadables page.

Here are some of the ways you can expand your instrument:

1. ADD NEW VOICES AND STYLES

Looking to expand your musical vocabulary? Want to open the door to new creative ideas? There’s no better way than to add new sounds and arrangements to your keyboard. Yamaha Voice & Style Expansion Packs and Premium Packs & Voices literally place the sounds and genres of music from around the world at your fingertips — and best of all, they’re free!

Voice & Style Expansion Packs are compatible with most Yamaha PSR-S, PSR-SX and PSR-A arranger workstations (to determine compatibility for your instrument, check the specific expansion pack listing). They offer everything from Indian Taals to Vietnamese instruments, as well as Latino Cumbia, Bolero and authentic Mexican, Caribbean and Central/South American party music accompaniment Styles.

Premium Packs & Voices are regional-themed collections that are compatible with Yamaha Tyros and Genos arranger workstations (to determine compatibility for your instrument, check the specific premium pack listing). These include a wide variety of musical genres — everything from Salsa to Banda to Italian folk music — as well as traditional European, Indonesian and Central/South American instruments.

If you’re the proud owner of a Yamaha synthesizer, you’ll want to check out our Synth Voice Libraries for MONTAGE and MOTIF, which give your instrument even more sonic range and flexibility. These include collections of classic analog and FM synth sounds as well as grand pianos, electric pianos (such as Chick Corea’s custom Mark V), organs, strings, pads and evolving soundscapes.

2. PLAY ALONG WITH THE SONGS YOU LOVE

MIDI songs are collections of data — digital files that tell your keyboard what to play. Because they’re standardized, they work with pretty much every modern digital keyboard, including all current Yamaha digital keyboards, digital pianos, arranger workstations and synthesizers. They offer numerous advantages over simple audio files in that you can freely change their key and/or tempo with no change to the sound quality. You can also mute or solo selective instruments to create your own custom “minus-one” versions of the songs, or change the instrumentation altogether — something that’s not possible with audio files.

Yamaha offers literally hundreds of professionally arranged and performed MIDI songs — including many current and past hits — available for immediate downloading (click here to view the available titles). So what are you waiting for? Start playing along with all your favorites today.

Disklavier owners can avail themselves of special PianoSoft Songs that take advantage of the special features offered by these innovative world-class reproducing pianos. Professional performances of many popular songs and classical compositions, as well as film and show music, are available for the entire Disklavier family of instruments.

3. EXPLORE STYLE FILES

Styles are controlled by the chords you play with your left hand. When you play a chord on your Yamaha keyboard, a backing ensemble joins your performance based on the structure of the chord being played.

Style Files allow you to play along with complete backing tracks in a variety of musical genres. These are not only useful in live performance but also extremely helpful in refining your improvisational skills. From rock to jazz, classical to country, easy listening to R&B, Style Files will make you sound like a pro! Versions are available for most Yamaha digital keyboards and digital pianos — click here for a complete compatibility list.

4. IMPROVE YOUR PROFICIENCY WITH SHEET MUSIC

Incorporating printed music (called sheet music) into your learning and playing is a great way to increase your keyboard proficiency while at the same time allowing you to expand your musical repertoire. Yamaha offers nearly a thousand printable sheet music titles for instant download — everything from pop and rock hits to movie and show tunes to gospel, liturgical and other genres.

As a bonus, the online Yamaha sheet music store allows you to preview the first page of each selection so you can try it before you buy it, along with a number of helpful “widgets” that make the experience interactive. One of these actually plays the song automatically so you can hear the music on the page as well as see it; other onscreen tools allow you to adjust the playback speed, transpose the song to another key, change the “top line” melody from vocal to a wind or string instrument, increase or decrease the note sizes, and save the preview as a printable PDF file.

 

Check out these related blog articles:

You Are The Artist

What are MIDI Songs?

How Sheet Music Can Improve Your Playing Skills

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha Voices & Style Expansion Packs.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Premium Packs & Voices.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Synth Voice Libraries.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Style Files.

Click here for more information about Yamaha MIDI Songs.

Click here for more information about Yamaha PianoSoft Songs.

Click here for more information about Yamaha sheet music.

Tips for Recording Acoustic Guitar

Capturing the sound of acoustic guitar may seem a bit challenging at first, but there are really only a few techniques for doing so, and once you have your parts down, there are additional ways to help your guitar sit perfectly in the mix or stand out on its own, depending on the musical context.

In this article, we’ll share some tips for getting a great recorded acoustic guitar sound and making it the star of the session.

Microphone Techniques

The most basic method of recording acoustic guitar — or any acoustic instrument, for that matter — is to put a microphone in front of it. Knowing where to position the mic is the tricky part.

I find that I generally get the best results by placing a directional (cardioid) mic about six inches away from the front of the guitar, near where the end of the fretboard meets the sound hole, as shown in the photo below. (Listen closely over headphones while moving the mic around to find the ideal “sweet” spot.)

Closeup of someone's hands as they play acoustic guitar with a small directional microphone positioned directly at strings.

As you can hear in this audio clip of me playing the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha, this mic placement yields a nice balance of lows, mids and highs and delivers an overall natural sound inherent to the instrument.

Note that if you move a cardioid mic closer than six inches from the guitar, you’ll get more bottom end due to a phenomenon called the “proximity effect.” If you move it further from the guitar, more room sound will be introduced, which may not be a good thing if the room you’re recording in is not acoustically treated (typically, an untreated room will make things sound more boomy and/or reverberant).

You can also use two microphones to capture the sound of acoustic guitar, though you really won’t want to place any more than two on it (or any sound source, for that matter) due to the potential for phase cancellation issues. If I opt to use two mics, I will place the second one near the body to capture additional low frequencies, as shown in the photo below.

Closeup of someone's hands playing acoustic guitar with microphone positioned at strings.

By combining the first microphone (the one near the fretboard) with the second one on the body, you’ll get a good, overall sonic picture of the instrument’s full tonal range, as you can hear in this audio clip:

Another very popular method of using two mics on acoustic instruments is called the “XY” technique. This is where you use two identical cardioid microphones set to a 90 degree angle from each other, as shown in the photo below. Some engineers actually place the tips of the microphones slightly on top of each other, which is fine as long as the mics are not touching each other.

Closeup of someone playing acoustic guitar with microphone .

Especially when the resulting tracks are panned fully left and right, the XY mic technique captures a very wide stereo image of the guitar — one that’s almost larger than life, as you can hear in this audio clip, especially if you listen over headphones:

That said, two microphones are not necessarily better than one. If one mic sounds better than two, by all means just use it on its own. Note that there is, however, one drawback to recording acoustic guitar with a microphone (or two), which is a potential problem if you are recording live along with loud instruments like drums, and that is that the mic will capture the sound of everything else in the room too, unless the other instruments are especially well-isolated. For that reason, I have found it best to record acoustic guitar on its own whenever possible. This also offers the best production options during mixing, since you’ll have more control over the sound.

DI Recording

If your acoustic guitar has a built-in pickup (not all do), then another method of recording it is available to you: Simply plug a guitar cable into its output jack (this is called taking the “DI” or “direct” output) and connect it to an instrument input on your audio interface, or to a “DI box,” which takes the instrument level signal and boosts it to microphone level, after which it can be connected to any mic input on your audio interface or mixing board.

One advantage of using a DI instead of a mic is that the sound will not be affected by external noise coming from other instruments in the room or the sound of the room itself. DI recording works especially well if your acoustic guitar has a high-quality built-in pickup and preamp (such as Yamaha FG/FS Red Label guitars, which employ the company’s revolutionary three-way Atmosfeel™ system).

I usually record acoustic guitar with a single microphone and DI blended together. I actually do this even when using my Yamaha FG-TA TransAcoustic guitar, which is capable of creating its own chorus and reverb effects in the air, even when it’s not plugged in (click here for more information about how this remarkable technology works). Two simple knobs on the side of the instrument give me complete control over the effects, making it easy to “dial in” the ideal sound.

Here’s what the FG-TA DI sounds like on its own:

And here’s what the FG-TA sounds like miked, with a single microphone placed at the 12th fret:

With this guitar, I like to use a blend of the two. In this next audio example, the mic signal is panned to around 11 o’clock and the DI signal is panned to around 4 o’clock:

The bottom line is that there is no right or wrong way to get a good recording when it comes to choosing between using a microphone or the DI output. Both approaches can work well, depending on the particular instrument, the musical context, and the quality of the mics you have on hand. Best of all, you can use them together at the same time.

Double Trouble

One of the ways I get big acoustic guitar sounds is to simply double the part (a recording technique known as double-tracking) and pan the resultant tracks left and right. This utilizes the natural differences in the two performances (the “rub,” as I like to call it) to create a wider guitar sound. Sometimes I will change up the tonality of the guitar for the double-track when using a DI, or alter the mic position to get a slightly different sound.

Doubling also helps you bring the guitars more upfront in the mix, as they are in the left and right speakers independently, as opposed to the often-crowded center of the soundstage where the snare and kick drums, along with the bass, usually sit. Here’s an audio clip that demonstrates the power of double-tracking:

EQ and Compression Tricks

How you equalize (EQ) your acoustic guitar tracks depends on the needs of the song. I rarely apply EQ during recording, but often do during mixing. I tend to use some EQ on a DI signal to help bring the guitar forward in the mix since there is no room sound involved. Another way to move the acoustic guitar signal forward in the mix is to cut some of the low midrange frequencies out of the DI signal at around 200 Hz; creating this kind of frequency “hole” leaves sonic room for the other instruments. I will also sometimes carefully boost some of the high frequencies above 7 kHz for additional sparkle and clarity. You can do this to the microphone tracks too if need be.

For a bit of extra punch, I will also sometimes apply a small amount of gentle compression to the acoustic guitar during mixing. However, you have to be careful not to cut off the transients (the very beginning of the signal), so back off on the attack time. I tend to use a very small amount of gain reduction so as to keep the natural sound of the instrument intact.

All DAWs come with EQ and compression controls, plus there are a number of specialized plug-ins that add their own unique sonic footprint, such as digital emulations of vintage analog equalizers or compressors. You can also use a channel strip plug-in that includes both controls. A good example of this is the Steinberg Cubase Channel Strip, which allows you to apply various processing modules to the audio as needed.

Use Fresh Strings

This may sound obvious, but putting a fresh set of strings on your guitar right before you record can make a world of difference. Especially when it comes to steel-string guitars (nylon strings do not need to be changed as much), the extra clarity and brightness you get out of the instrument can be significant … and remember, what you hear in your ears is pretty much what is going to be amplified by the microphone and/or pickup. Not only do new strings tend to sound better, but the guitar will stay in tune better as well, and that’s critical to the big picture of capturing a great acoustic guitar sound.

One final piece of advice when it comes to recording acoustic guitar: Just use your ears and don’t worry about how things look on the screen. If it sounds right, it is right.

All photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha TransAcoustic guitars.

Click here for more information about Yamaha FG/FS Red Label guitars.

12 Holiday Shows To Stream This Season

It’s a great time of year to snuggle indoors and stream some classic TV shows! These episodes are guaranteed to get you into the holiday spirit.

1. The Honeymooners: ‘Twas the Night Before Christmas (“Classic 39,” Episode 13)

Ralph Kramden has just purchased a Christmas gift for his wife Alice when he discovers that Alice’s friend has given her the same gift. Feeling guilty that he spent $22 on a bowling ball, Ralph decides the only thing to do is hock the ball and use the money to buy Alice a nicer gift. We won’t spoil the ending, but Ralph realizes how lucky he is to have a woman who loves him. Don’t miss the scene where Ralph snoops around the apartment trying to sneak a look at his gift. Check it out here.

2. The Twilight Zone: The Night of The Meek (Season 2, Episode 11)

Art Carney (who found fame as Norton in The Honeymooners) plays Henry Corwin, a department store Santa who is fired after showing up drunk. When he finds a bag of presents and starts handing them out to passing children, Mr. Dundee (the department store manager) tells the police that Corwin stole the gifts, but Officer Flaherty opens the bag to find just empty cans and a stray cat. What happens after Corwin walks out of the police station is pure holiday magic, leaving Dundee and Flaherty looking up at the sky in amazement. Find out where to stream it here.

3. The Lucy Show: Together For Christmas (Season 1, Episode 13)

Lucy and Vivian (Vivian Vance, who played Ethel in I Love Lucy) decide that for the first time, they’re going to stay home with the kids for Christmas. Each has their own unique perspective on the holiday, and they argue over everything, including what to eat for dinner, when to open the presents, and the color of the tree. Their disagreement escalates into a hilarious tree-trimming scene, but it’s the kids that bring them back together to find the true meaning of the holiday. Find out where to stream it here.

4. The Mary Tyler Moore Show: Christmas and The Hard Luck Kid (Season 1, Episode 14)

Mary plans to drive home to be with her parents for the holiday, but is broken-hearted when she learns that she’s slated to work on Christmas Day. Mary then makes arrangements to spend Christmas Eve with her friend Rhoda, but when she discovers that her co-worker Fred is supposed to work the night shift alone, she takes his shift instead. Everyone goes home except for Mary, and just when all looks most bleak, a surprise arrives. Anyone who’s ever worked on a holiday will appreciate this episode! Find out where to stream it here.

5. The Odd Couple: Scrooge Gets an Oscar (Season 1, Episode 12)

Felix tries to convince Oscar to play the role of Scrooge in an upcoming charity production of “A Christmas Carol,” but Oscar wants nothing to do with it. When their discussion becomes heated, Oscar throws Felix out of the apartment. Later that night, Oscar falls asleep on the couch and Felix appears in a dream as Marley’s Ghost, showing Oscar his Christmas past, present and future. Can Oscar reform his grouchy ways? Find out where to stream it here.

6. The Golden Girls: Have Yourself A Very Little Christmas (Season 5, Episode 12)

Dorothy’s ex-husband Stan comes to the door asking the girls for money to finance a shady business deal, but they refuse. Rose explains that she’s getting into the holiday spirit by volunteering at her church to serve Christmas dinner to the homeless. The rest of the girls think it’s a great idea and join her. While serving food, they spot a homeless man dressed as Santa. It’s Stan, whose wife has thrown him out of the house. Stan views the situation as a disaster, but in the end, the girls help him see that he is in fact more fortunate than many other people. Find out where to stream it here.

7. Seinfeld: The Strike (Season 9, Episode 10)

Jerry, Elaine and George attend a Hanukkah party where George is reminded of Festivus, a holiday invented by his father, Frank (played by Jerry Stiller). When an intrigued Kramer contacts Frank to learn more, Frank decides that this is an excellent opportunity to revive the holiday, and invites the gang to a celebratory dinner. They are joined by George’s boss Kruger, Jerry’s soon-to-be ex-girlfriend Gwen, and workers from an off-track betting establishment that are chasing Elaine. Mayhem ensues, bringing Festivus to a boil! Find out where to stream it here.

8. The X-Files: How the Ghosts Stole Christmas (Season 6, Episode 6)

Mulder calls Scully on Christmas Eve, asking for help with investigating a haunted house where years ago, a young couple made a lover’s suicide pact. Scully shows up to humor Mulder, but when the door to the house slams shut, locking them inside, it’s not so funny. Ed Asner and Lily Tomlin portray the two ghosts in this spooky take on Christmas Eve. Find out where to stream it here.

9. Everybody Loves Raymond: The Toaster (Season 3, Episode 12)

Laughs abound in this holiday episode where Ray gives engraved toasters to his friends and family as holiday gifts. Everyone seems to love them, but Ray never gets a reaction from his parents, Frank and Marie. Naturally, they hate it and exchange the toaster before opening it to see the engraving. The ensuing treasure hunt by Frank and Marie to retrieve the engraved toaster is nothing short of hilarious. Don’t miss the scene where they argue at the department store. Find out where to stream it here.

10. Girlfriends: Merry Ex-mas (Season 4, Episode 11)

Though none of them sing very well, Joan tries to groom Maya, Lynn, Toni and William to croon some Christmas carols. Meanwhile, in an attempt to be nice to her ex-husband Darnell, Maya invites Darnell and his girlfriend Lena to her Christmas party. Later in the episode, Maya catches Lena with another man in a bar, resulting in a serious discussion between the two about relationships. There’s plenty of drama and lots of laughs in this one … and Maya’s spin on “a partridge in a pear tree” will have you rolling on the floor! Find out where to stream it here.

11. 30 Rock: Ludachristmas (Season 2, Episode 9)

Jack’s mom surprises him in New York by escaping a hurricane in Florida, while the Lemons arrive with their son Mitch, who, traumatized by a skiing accident, thinks it’s 1985. Jack’s mom is determined to show him that Liz’s family isn’t as perfect as he thinks, and instigates trouble. Be sure to watch the closing credits so you can hear Tracy’s exquisite rendition of “It’s A Jordan Christmas.” Find out where to stream it here.

12. New Girl: LAXmas (Season 4, Episode 11)

Jess and the gang arrive at LAX to find chaos due to a storm in the Midwest. All flights have been delayed so they resort to all sorts of mischievous tactics to get to their destinations, in the process encountering irate ticketing agents, a Santa who steals Jess’ gifts, and a business mogul (played by Barry Bostwick) who takes a run at Cece. Don’t miss the final scene, which delivers the punchline. Find out where to stream it here.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

Gifting Creativity

Wouldn’t it be cool if creativity was something we could wrap in a box and give as a gift? The problem, of course, is that creativity isn’t a product, nor is it a commodity. It’s energy. Imagination. Or perhaps … an experience?

Experiential gifts aren’t difficult to buy. In fact, they’re actually right at our fingertips. Anyone can easily purchase a voucher for a show or a meal, the adventure of two nights of camping (or “glamping”), a ticket to ride, a cooking class, a dance lesson — all offerings I personally would be truly thankful for. And, while we may not be able to will somebody to make art, it is within our power to arrange an environment in which they’d have the freedom and privacy to do so; to write a sonata, start a novel, pick up a paint brush.

What a welcome reprieve it would be for a new exhausted mom or dad to receive a note in a pretty box that says something like:

Dear significant other, For the next three Sundays I’m taking the kids to the park from 12 to 4 so you can find your muse again. I know you’ve missed it. I’ll even tune your guitar, light a fire, make a pot of coffee, light you a candle.

or …

Dear bestie, I know how many songs you have in your heart. I’m also aware you don’t have epic recording skills. So next weekend I’m all yours. Come to my studio and I’ll produce some tracks for you.

or …

I’ve curated a small audience as a listening party so you can perform you new EP.

Imagine the recipient’s delight!

Yes, these kinds of offerings require sacrifice and time and possibly even having to vacate the premises. An experience, however, is something we’ll always remember, as opposed to something we might forget, outgrow or return. As author Jessie Sholl writes in Experience Life Magazine, “If you want to give a gift that lasts, keep in mind that experiences may provide more enduring happiness than physical presents.”

As a bonus, research has shown that experiential gifts actually strengthen relationships, whether or not the giver and the receiver experience it together. So “even if you don’t go to the concert you gave your husband for his birthday, you are still a part of his story,” as Lizzie Dragon writes in Outdoorsy.

When my daughter was a toddler, my husband and I showered her with holiday presents. Just to see her face in the morning made the excess worth it! But in recent years, we’ve reevaluated what matters to us and it’s become more and more likely that we skip going to the mall (or even ordering online). Sure, our pile of wrapped gifts may look a little smaller these last few years, but our hearts are full.

Now I’m not suggesting I’d be the least bit unhappy to receive a new Yamaha instrument for the holidays. (Hint, hint.) But what I am saying is that the carving out of time and space for a loved one to re-connect with their muse is a fine alternative.

In my opinion, search engines would be wise to offer us some listicles for how we can give the gift of creativity. Hey, maybe I just wrote one.

Have a happy, creative holiday, my friends. See you next year!

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

The Best Console Games for Dolby Atmos® and Surround Sound

In a video game, localization of sound is essential for realism. An enemy’s footsteps come from behind you, an alien aircraft approaches from above, a gunshot emanates from a cluster of buildings. The more accurately your sound system or headphones can place those cues, the more authentic the gameplay will feel.

More speakers mean additional options for sound localization. That’s why 5.1-channel surround sound is better than stereo, why 7.1 is better than 5.1, and so on. The ultimate audio format for gaming is Dolby Atmos®. Rather than being reliant on fixed speaker positions, it’s an object-based system that allows almost unlimited placement of audio in a full three-dimensional sound field that includes height as well as soundstage width.

Currently, Microsoft™ Xbox™ is the only console that supports Atmos for gaming. Sony™ PlayStation® 5 doesn’t, at least for now. For games, PS5 has its own immersive format called Tempest 3D Audio, although it does support Atmos for streaming video or when using the built-in 4K Blu-ray player. There have been reports about future support in PS5 for object-based audio formats like Atmos and DTS:X™, but nothing has been confirmed … yet.

Here are six games that offer excellent implementation of multichannel audio, including 7.1 surround and, where noted, Dolby Atmos.

1. Call of Duty Warzone (Xbox X|S, Xbox One, PlayStation 4/PS5 compatible)

(Atmos-compatible when played on Xbox) Set in the city of Verdank, in the fictional Eastern European country of Kastovia, this first-person shooter is part of the massive Call of Duty franchise. It’s an online-only game that you can download for free.

One of the game’s two main modes is Battle Royale (Plunder is the other), in which you play against up to 149 other gamers in real time. The area in which the battle takes place shrinks continuously as the game progresses, ratcheting up the pressure.

Sound localization is crucial as you run through the war-torn city, trying to survive. The more accurately you can hear where sounds are coming from, the better you can defend yourself against (or attack) other soldiers, who could be lurking almost anywhere or even sneaking up on you. If the system you’re listening on is Dolby Atmos-compatible, you’ll have an advantage over your online rivals. Watch the trailer.

2. Gears 5 (Xbox X|S, Xbox One)

(Atmos-compatible) A third-person shooter with both single and multiplayer modes, Gears 5 is a sequel to Gears of War 4 and, despite the “5” in its name, is actually the sixth game in the Gears of War series, developed by The Coalition. Like the previous versions, Gears 5 takes place on the earth-like planet Sera, menaced by the Swarm, an alien race created by the Locust Horde. The main character is Kait Diaz, who searches for the truth about her Locust blood while fighting off the Swarm with her buddies JD, Dell and Marcus.

The soundtrack kicks it into gear right away, during opening credits that feature a haunting orchestral score interspersed with sound effects as you see lava flowing, creatures slithering, burning rocks falling and more. In the end, it segues into game action with the sound of a helicopter with Kait inside it, flashing by over lush tropical scenery.

The sound design utilizes both Atmos and, to a lesser extent, other surround formats to create a larger-than-life sonic landscape that fits the gorgeous visuals and pulse-pounding action scenes. Watch the trailer.

3. God of War (PlayStation 4/PS5 compatible)

This game lets you roam the realm of Norse Mythology with the hulking warrior Kratos, son of Zeus, and his son Atreus. They encounter all manner of adventures and dangers as they try to fulfill the last wish of Kratos’s late wife: to scatter her ashes from the highest peak in the land. The main bad guy is Baldur, who is Thor’s half-brother. This third-person action/adventure features swords, bows and arrows and battle axes — even a giant serpent.

The God of War soundtrack offers a cinematic-style orchestral and choral score, and lots of massive effects such as booms and wooshes, augmented by unique Foley sounds, a multilayered voice characterization for the serpent and more. Its larger-than-life audio cues are most impactful when listened to in 7.1 surround sound. Watch the trailer.

4. Red Dead Redemption 2 (Xbox One, PlayStation 4/PS5 compatible, Google Stadia)

This Western role-playing adventure, which has both first- and third-person gameplay, takes place in 1899, at the very end of the Wild West era. The protagonist is an outlaw named Arthur Morgan, who’s in the Van der Linde gang. The game features gunfights, fistfights and lots of action on horseback, all of which allow for plenty of captivating sound design.

The soundtrack boasts incredibly detailed natural sounds that add to the realism. The horse chases, for example, happen in surround sound, with thundering hooves coming from different areas in the sound field. Equally noteworthy is the musical score, which includes authentic Western instruments such as banjos and harmonica. Somewhat surprisingly, RDR2 does not support Dolby Atmos, even when played on an Xbox. Watch the trailer.

5. Uncharted: The Lost Legacy (PlayStation 4/PS5 compatible)

Continuing the treasure-hunting story from Uncharted 4, hero Chloe searches for the Tusk of Ganesh in India’s Ghats mountains, accompanied by her mercenary sidekick Nadine. Presented in the third-person perspective, this game offers an Indiana Jones-like vibe as Chloe and Nadine try to find the missing Tusk while fending off a warlord army. The protagonists use everything from martial arts to handguns to bazookas in their fight scenes, which provide plenty of impressive sound design.

In addition to sound effects, the game has a lot of dialog and a compelling score, both of which provide further opportunities for spectacular surround sound. Watch the trailer.

6. Overwatch (Legendary Edition) (Xbox One, Nintendo Switch, PlayStation 4/PS5 compatible)

(Atmos-compatible when played on Xbox) This game takes place on late-21st-century Earth. Humanity has overcome the threat of hostile robots during the “Omnic Crisis,” thanks to super-soldiers created by the Soldier Enhancement Program, part of Overwatch, a multi-county task force. The game starts six years after the robots were defeated. Overwatch has been disbanded and the world is once again in turmoil, this time from terrorism and wars. To the rescue comes an intelligent gorilla named Winston, who seeks to rekindle Overwatch and end the threats.

Overwatch is an online, multiplayer, first-person shooter, for which you can choose which hero you want to be from a large selection. Because it’s purely sci-fi fantasy, there’s lots of creative sound design, especially when it comes to the non-human, enhanced human and robot characters. Watch the trailer.

Surrounded by Sound

There are several different ways to experience multichannel audio in games. The best is through an Atmos- or multichannel surround sound-compatible audio system with 7.1 or more discrete speakers. (Two or four overhead speakers are highly recommended for listening in Atmos.)

In such a setup, you’d connect the HDMI® output of your game console into an AV receiver like the Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A8A — a powerhouse that supports up to 11.2-channel surround sound and Dolby Atmos, as well as other formats.

Digital AV receiver.
Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A8A AV receiver.

Another way to go is virtual surround sound, which you can get by connecting your game console to a sound bar that offers this feature. For example, the Yamaha SR-C20A compact sound bar can reproduce 5.1-channel Dolby® Audio™ content, while the company’s SR-B20A model supports DTS® Virtual:X™ technology, which simulates surround sound through sophisticated digital filtering and time domain processing techniques to create the sensation of height.

Long thin horizontal speaker.
Yamaha SR-B20A sound bar.

In addition, some specialized gaming headphones offer surround sound support, and even stereo headphones can provide a convincing surround mix when connected to a console that offers a format like DTS® Headphone:X™, which Xbox X and S support for compatible games.

So if you don’t yet have an Atmos or multichannel audio system for your gaming, what are you waiting for? You’ll find the entire experience to be even more immersive and a lot more enjoyable.

 

Check out these related blog articles:

How to Configure an AV Receiver for Gaming

How to Shop for a Surround Sound System

Virtual Surround Sound and Yamaha Sound Bars

How to Install In-Ceiling Speakers

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

Make Band a “Home” for Everyone

How can you make band a place that everyone enjoys? From student musicians who want to be the very best in the all-state contest, to those who are more casual and never practice outside of class, to athletes who want to participate in band, to students who want to be in choir, orchestra, theater and band.

You must create a band experience that builds program numbers through multiple and flexible ways to participate. 

A Look Back

It has been nearly 20 years since I graduated from high school. When I visit family in New Jersey, I am always excited to catch up with my closest friends from the South Brunswick High School band. Although the time since our last ride on a yellow school bus together increases with each visit, I am always amazed at how we pick up right where we left off, usually listening to Billy Joel or Buddy Rich and laughing until the wee hours of the morning.

We used to blast the Piano Man’s music on the rides to and from competitions and football games. I always identified with the lyrics from “Only the Good Die Young,” where Joel sings about the company he keeps. He says, “We ain’t too pretty, we ain’t too proud … we might be laughing a bit too loud … but that never hurt no one.”

I have never laughed harder in my life than on those bus rides with my best friends in band (although riding a drum corps bus through Arkansas in July with no A/C may come close!). These are the memories from high school I cherish the most.

As the band director at Claudia Taylor “Lady Bird” Johnson, a competitive Texas 6A high school program, I frequently reflect on the experience our students have every day. The namesake of our school once said, “How fortunate are we to have such a treasure of memories.” This quote resonates with me because I want our students to graduate from our program with the same “treasure of memories” that my friends and I share to this day.

Fortunately, my high school experience provided a familial environment that challenged me to reach new levels of musical excellence that I did not even realize was possible. My high school band director, Mark Kraft, and his wife, Ginny, the school’s choir director/visual designer, pushed us as musicians and set the highest standard for our level of musical achievement. Our marching band was very competitive during my four years of high school. In my sophomore year, our wind ensemble performed at the National Concert Band Festival. And, in my senior year, our jazz band was a state medalist. We had a well-rounded musical experience rooted in teamwork in an environment where kids of different backgrounds and motivation levels could be satisfied.

My goal is that the students at Johnson benefit from a similar approach, one that balances a pursuit of excellence while fostering a love for music and teammates.

Create a Culture that Values All Levels of Engagement

With many choices and mounting pressures on students, it’s easy to forget that kids “elect” to continue participating in the activities they enjoy most. By the time students have been a part of band for a few years, they may find that it has become increasingly difficult to balance the challenges of academics, band and pursuing another interest.

Always remember that kids do band for their reasons and not those of their parents or teachers. Band is a large part of my life, but it doesn’t have to be as prominent a part for all my students.

Johnson High School band at 2021 Bands of America Grand National ChampionshipsFor students, band can be:

  • A social experience
  • A musical experience
  • A competitive experience
  • A learning experience
  • A safe space

Understanding that kids do band for their reasons, encourages me to find common ground with them. It makes me work harder to create an environment where students who are more casual about their love for music can still find the same joy in our program as the kids who strive to be all-state musicians. I said earlier that many of my favorite memories from band are the bus rides — not the performances. Allowing students to see the value in participating in music at any level of commitment will increase a sense of belonging across the program.

Johnson’s program has more than 300 students, and about one-third of them are driven to be all-state musicians. Another one-third are very competitive about marching band, but not necessarily concert band. And the final one-third are there more for the bus rides and football games. As band directors, we must help our students understand and respect that there are many different reasons to be in band, and each one adds value to the team and plays a critical role in the success of our program.

We also work tirelessly to teach our students the importance of tolerance and sensitivity toward their peers. We want students of all racial, sexual and socioeconomic backgrounds to feel and be safe and valued. Our program has a zero-tolerance policy for hate, which means we must constantly teach students what hate looks and sounds like. This involves a few different steps in the process to help students learn appropriate behaviors:

  • Directors model compassionate, appropriate and accepting behavior. We work to create an environment where all students feel safe and accepted. The behavior must come from the top. Be willing to apologize and admit when you make a mistake.
  • Meet with student leaders before the season to define our culture as compassionate and caring. If it is not kind, helpful or necessary, it does not need to be said. If the leaders model appropriate behavior, they can also monitor it in their sections.
  • Teach digital citizenship lessons. Define cyberbullying and show examples of hateful or discriminatory posts or comments online.
  • Complete a hazing training session with all band members prior to the start of camp. This includes a discussion on what hazing is, what behaviors could be considered hazing, and the consequences of hazing. In our case, students who haze another student will be dismissed from band and could face further penalties on campus.
  • Provide a system to anonymously report bullying. Students have a box on campus they can anonymously report suspected mistreatment of others for a follow-up investigation.
  • Define consequences for hazing, bullying or discrimination and follow-through. Kids are perceptive, if they do not believe there will be follow through, they are less likely to report.
  • Reinforce through weekly student leadership meetings or conversations with band members the importance of patience, tolerance and compassion as the season progresses so that the early season discussions are not just a “box to check.”

Our staff believes wholly that a team cannot function without mutual respect and care. We want every student to find that sense of belonging in our organization.

You Don’t Have to Choose

When Johnson High School opened in 2008, our first principal, Kris Wickerham, established a campus “edict” that coaches and directors needed to work together to allow students to participate in multiple activities. Simply put, our campus would not make kids “choose” between sports and fine arts or between different disciplines within fine arts. Nearly 15 years later, this policy now shapes the culture of our community, and while it is not perfect, I am amazed at the efforts made to allow kids to pursue what they love.

band members holding instruments and wearing sports uniforms, ROTC uniforms and other cosumesThere are examples across the country of football players marching in the half-time show, band students singing in the musical or choir, and fine-arts students excelling in athletics. And at Johnson, we are proud to have students in all grades and band levels who participate in multiple other activities, and some do it for all four years.

To achieve an environment where kids can participate in many activities takes planning, patience and often sacrifice on the part of the coaches, sponsors, directors and parents. Ideally, keeping kids out of the middle of conflict always helps their experience, but this is not always possible. Some suggestions to help students achieve success in multiple activities:

  • Create a hybrid calendar that lists music and athletic events for the upcoming season side-by-side to address conflicts early
  • Consider a policy that prioritizes competitions/games/performances over practice so that the student is there for the most valuable events
  • Allow students the time to attend training and summer camps for both activities
  • Communicate frequently with parents and sponsors of the other activity to see what is working and what is not
  • Ensure students have adequate time for tutoring and allow them to miss rehearsal to catch up on homework during their busiest seasons
  • Be willing to share and encourage this as a part of your culture
  • Don’t give up; it won’t be perfect, but it will be worth it for the student
  • Be willing to allow students to follow their heart, even if it guides them toward the other activity — and try not to take it personally.

Your students will learn from being a part of many disciplines, and they will bring those skills to band (as well as all their future endeavors). They will also share lessons learned from your program with other teams and groups. The culture of sharing can translate into a great relationship with athletics, spirit and the other fine-arts programs.

Directors must recognize that students may not be 100% for the band program all four years in high school as they work to juggle other activities. That’s what makes high school such a wonderful time of discovery for students. Allowing band members to be a part of a high-achieving band while still enjoying different activities and focusing on academics is a worthy goal. Life is messy. I am the first to admit that in a competitive program, band sometimes gets in the way. We keep working to find the balance every year, knowing we will make mistakes along the way and recalibrate to find the best possible experience for our students.

For example, early on we were very literal with our attendance policy as it related to competitions and performances. Sometimes students approached us with important birthday parties, graduations or other major life events, and we would almost always require that they be at a performance no matter what. Our reasoning was that everyone on the team was sacrificing for the performance. This came from a fear that we would see a lot of kids missing performance days. In truth, most conflicts are few and far between, and we felt a growing resentment from parents and students that band was taking over their lives. Kids were giving up significant events with families like weddings or possibly leaving other organizations because they felt like they could not balance everything. We have since modified this policy to encourage students to see the value in major milestone events, and we work to communicate about those as early as possible to find an understudy or create a dynamic where the student can possibly attend the performance and their family event. We want our organization to be the very best. We also want our students to enjoy every experience possible.

Coming Full Circle

Jarrett Lipman (center) with Ginny and Mark Kraft, his high school choral and band directorsAt Grand Nationals in Indianapolis this year, my high school band and choir directors, Mark and Ginny Kraft, spent three days with us, supporting our students and me. Believe it or not, I keep in touch with the Krafts two to three times a week, even 20 years after my high school graduation!

I value their advice and mentorship, and I would not be the teacher I am without them. I vividly remember Mark sharing a clear philosophy with our high school band that I have applied to my own program: “Do the right thing, because it’s the right thing to do.” This statement is simple but far more challenging to actually live out. The Krafts preached and modeled this behavior with students and were the first to self-reflect and admit when they made a mistake. I try to do the same in my interactions with my students.

Our band song, selected by Mark and Ginny, was Whitney Houston’s “Greatest Love of All,” and the opening lyrics influenced me as a student and now as a teacher — “I believe the children are our future, teach them well and let them lead the way, show them all the beauty they possess inside, give them a sense of pride to make it easier.” My experiences as a student in the South Brunswick band provided me a sense of belonging and afforded me confidence that carried me through my tumultuous teenage years

While in Indy, Ginny remarked, “It’s like being grandparents for the students in the program.” The Krafts have had a profound influence on my teaching but an even more significant impact on my desire to provide the students at Johnson High School with positive life-changing adventures.

Navigating Vibrato on Woodwinds

Woodwind players who are in private lessons often begin using vibrato well before their school music director has addressed it.

Private lessons are great, but vibrato can quickly trickle down to the rest of a section and without proper instruction, you will have mismatched sound and beating sound waves within the ensemble.

Include Vibrato Exercises in Daily Warm-ups

Vibrato on the Woodwinds

First, let’s look at the use of vibrato on the most popular woodwind instruments.

Flute: Because flutes are very flexible instruments (by that, I mean the pitch is bent very easily), vibrato can quickly get out of hand. Watch flutist Gina Luciani describe how to perform vibrato on the ocarina in this video.

Vibrato is performed the same way on all flutes. Luciani describes it as a “Ha Ha Ha” sound that feels like it is coming from the throat, combined with a bit of a “Huh” or “Hah” syllable. You will also feel the diaphragm and lower stomach tense, while the throat and mouth remain open and relaxed.

Luciani says that many musicians begin vibrato on the flutes far too early — and I agree. Flutes seem to be the first section to figure out vibrato … for better or worse.

Oboe: Because oboe players are often switched from the flute, it is best to hold off on vibrato within the oboe section until students are very confident in their pitch.

YouTuber and oboist Oboeron explains vibrato on the oboe. He describes oboe vibrato as throat vibrato and says that it feels like a little cough. From my experience as a multi-instrumentalist, I’ve noticed that vibrato on the oboe feels very similar to vibrato on the flute.

Saxophone: Saxophonists create vibrato on their instruments with lower jaw movements. So, it is much more difficult for your sax section to end up with unintentional vibrato than your flutes and oboes. Watch Jay Metcalf demonstrate proper saxophone vibrato technique.

Clarinet: Most band directors will not need to consider vibrato on the clarinet. Traditional concert band literature calling for vibrato on the clarinet is practically obsolete. However, there are a handful of scenarios that may lead to, or call for, clarinet vibrato.

For example, high school flutists who have just switched to the clarinet may automatically add vibrato to their clarinet playing by using their flute methods — manipulating the air with their throats. Vibrato can be created on the clarinet most likely with embouchure (like the saxophone) or by manipulating the air stream by changing the mouth, throat and diaphragm.

One situation where you will lean heavily into teaching clarinet vibrato is in jazz band. Jazz clarinetists use large amounts of vibrato, especially when soloing.

Clarinetist Michelle Anderson provides an excellent explanation and example of vibrato on the clarinet in this video.

Enlist the Help of Sectional Leaders

Whether your band has the funds to outsource sectional leaders to your local orchestra or if group sessions are led by your first chairs, setting aside the time for sectionals is well worth it. Section leaders (or guest musicians) can help small groups practice instrument-specific vibrato exercises. This method is really effective because it creates more time for one-on-one feedback.

CHECK IT OUT: State-of-the-art clarinets for your classroom!

Teach Vibrato to the Band as a Whole

high school winds ensemble

Vibrato isn’t commonly taught in high school bands. This is surprising, given that it is an essential skill for players who want to reach intermediate to advanced levels.

So why is it so often shrugged off by directors? Vibrato is hard to teach. It’s one of those squirrely things that is better practiced than explained.

I recommend something unconventional: Teach vibrato to your whole band, all at once. Audition-only symphonic groups will greatly benefit from this method.

Addressing the entire band is the fastest way to get the group on the same page. If you aren’t ready for your students to start adding vibrato into your band festival literature, just tell them so! That being said…

  • Remain Encouraging: It’s all too easy to become “that band director” who “doesn’t let us.” Make it clear that directing a band and being a private music instructor have similar goals that are not exactly the same.
  • What About the Brass? While the focus here is to address the trickle-down effect vibrato often has in woodwind sections, if you are discussing vibrato with the whole band, you should start teaching brass players the proper way to add vibrato, too. Brass vibrato is most commonly achieved by manipulating the corners of the embouchure in a small “Oo-Ee” motion.

female student with backpack listening to music through headphones

Add Online Listening Assignments

Listening assignments are a really easy want to get your students to hear proper examples of vibrato on their instruments. Put samples online with a short quiz to ensure that students actually listen to them. Another plus to putting assignments online is that you won’t need to compromise valuable rehearsal time to listen to solos for each instrument.

Include Vibrato Exercises in Daily Warm-Ups

While percussionists may be twiddling their thumbs for a few minutes, it is worth it to add vibrato exercises alongside your chorales and long tones during your band’s daily warm-ups.  Again, please note that I would only recommend this for auditioned, high school bands. You want to make sure that most of your students have a well-developed sound (and have been on this instrument for several years) before beginning these exercises.

Here are some recommendations:

  • Start with Note Bending — Note bending is an exercise that helps students focus tone, relax their lips and gain better control over their instrument as a whole. While the technique for each instrument varies somewhat, it can be replicated on every woodwind. Here is an example of flutist Denis Bouriakov note bending.
  • Perform Vibrato to a Steady Beat — After students are comfortable with note bending, create a simple exercise in your favorite notation program with slurred quarter notes. Encourage your students to think or feel the syllable “Oooo-Eeeee Oooo-Eeeee.” Audiating contrasting syllables can help students vary the pitch more easily. Tell them to not be afraid to exaggerate.
  • Increase Speed of the Steady Beat — Once your students are ready, raise the bar. Create an exercise with 8th note vibrato. Before you allow students to use expressive vibrato, have them perform the emphasis on 16th notes. If your students struggle to get from the 8th note vibrato to the 16th note vibrato, have them practice on triplets instead. This helps bridge the gap between the 8th and 16th note vibrato “rhythms.” After your students are comfortable doing this, they can begin working on vibrato in an expressive setting like a solo.

Don’t Give Up!

While vibrato can quickly get out of hand, it’s important to remember the end goal: beautiful, expressive playing. Plus, if you teach vibrato to your band as a whole, members of the section who don’t have the time or funds to receive private lessons will still have a chance to learn a more advanced technique.

With a little extra help from section leaders and some emphasis on daily warm-ups, your band will be sounding polished in no time.

A Guide to Effects Settings for Acoustic Guitars

We generally think of an acoustic guitar as an instrument without amplification. After all, its naturally generated sound emanates from the sound hole, with a rich tonality that’s shaped largely by the physical construction of the instrument. What’s more, the size and reflective properties of the space the guitar is played in create varying degrees of ambience that affect the sound.

Yamaha TransAcoustic guitars expand on this further still, offering onboard reverb and chorus without the use of amplification. (Click here for more information about how this amazing technology works.) Of course, pickups can be added to any acoustic guitar, and many of today’s models have built-in pickups and a direct (“DI”) output jack, allowing you to further enhance the sonic potential by plugging into an amplifier. There are even amps specifically designed to shape the pickup signal coming from an acoustic guitar — for example, the Yamaha THR30IIA, which features equalization (EQ), compression, two kinds of reverb (room and hall), plus chorus and delay, as well as modeling parameters that emulate condenser, dynamic and tube microphones. In addition, the THR30IIA allows you to widen the stereo field and set delay, chorus and reverb times that match the song using a handy Tap Tempo switch — there’s even a built-in guitar tuner.

Small portable guitar amp.
Yamaha THR30IIA desktop amp.

Having all these options at your disposal is amazing, but how do you harness all that potential to create musically usable tones? In this article, we’ll explain how and why certain effects lend themselves to acoustic guitar, then wrap things up with two videos that demonstrate various tonalities that you can use for your own music.

EQ and Compression

Equalization fine-tunes the frequency attributes of the guitar, while compression can be used to even out the dynamic response of your performance for a smoother overall sound. In both cases, you’ll want to apply as little as is needed, because overuse of EQ can make the tonality somewhat artificial, and overuse of compression can deaden the sound.

Effects

Guitar effects such as reverb, delay and chorus replicate and enhance the audio spectrum by manipulating the time and distance between the original sound and the effected sound.

  • Reverbs simulate acoustic spaces and reflective surfaces. They generally offer controls that allow you to vary the size of those virtual spaces. These simulations can be used to add presence, depth and sustain to guitar tones. A mix control typically allows you to blend the original “dry” sound with the effected “wet” sound.
  • Delay can add subtle slap-back or longer repeats for more dramatic chordal parts and single-note lines. I like to use delay to add energy to an arpeggiated part or additional melodic content to single-note phrases. Controls are typically provided that allow you to blend the amount of the original sound with the delays; often there’s also a “feedback” control to thicken the result by looping some output signal to the input.
  • Chorus adds repetitive pitch modulation (ranging from subtle to extreme) to the original signal to create a wider sound that seems to go in and out of tune … but in a very pleasant way.

I also like to double-track acoustic guitar parts by recording them twice. In addition to the thickening this creates, the slight variations in timing and pitch from the two different performances imparts a subtle chorusing sound. I often pan the two guitar parts “hard” left and “hard” right (the furthest distance from each other in the sound field) in order to spread the stereo image and enhance the effect further still.

Five Examples

Here are five examples of effects that enhance the tone of acoustic guitar. I’ve given each a unique name, and screenshots of the THR Remote mobile app settings are also provided so you can replicate these effects in your own setups. (Using this app allows you to apply compression and fine-tune the amp’s built-in reverb, delay and chorus effects; those settings can be saved to the five location buttons on the THR30IIA for instant recall or to an expansive library of user patches.)

1. “Ballerina” – This effect works extremely well on nylon-string guitar and is useful for playing jazz, Latin and pop styles. Here’s what it sounds like, with me playing a double-tracked, fast arpeggiated fingerpicking part on a Yamaha NTX5 nylon-string guitar:

Screenshots of app.

I started by setting the THR30IIA Tone Select control to Nylon Str, then applied moderate compression to even out the picking dynamics. I then rolled off some middle (midrange) frequencies to carve a small frequency “hole” to help the percussion poke through the mix without interfering with the guitar.

Next, I added a little delay with a small amount of feedback to add some extra energy (and double notes) to the arpeggios, using the tap tempo to match the delay time to the backing track tempo of 80 BPM (Beats Per Minute). (See the video below.) Finally, I dialed in some short reverb (set to “small room” on the amp) to allow the guitars to sit nicely with the backing track.

2. “Iglesias” Here’s another effect that works well on nylon-string guitar. The audio clip below is a single-note melody played on a Yamaha NTX5.

Screenshots of app.

Here, I’ve kept the basic tonality of the nylon-string guitar sound intact, though I again rolled off some middle frequencies to carve a small frequency “hole.” I also added a touch more compression than in the “Ballerina” effect to help the longer melodic notes sustain, as well as setting the stereo imaging control to “Wide” in order to spread the sound a little more in the sound field.

Using a long (hall) reverb here adds extra ambience to the sound and helps separate this lead line from the backing track. (Check out the video below.) However, I’ve kept the same delay settings as “Ballerina” to broaden the melody and help the guitar sit nicely within the reverb.

3. “Voices” – This effect, and the two that follow, is designed to be used with steel-string acoustic guitar. All work well in ambient styles of music; however, any of them can be modified slightly to fit almost any genre and playing style. Here’s an audio clip of me applying the “Voices” effect to a Yamaha FSX3 Red Label as I play a fingerpicked progression:

Screenshots in app.

Here, I’m using the dynamic mic model and wide stereo mode. I rolled off some middle frequencies, then added compression to even out the dynamics, as well as a subtle delay, along with a long reverb with the Wet/Dry mix dialed back to keep the notes nice and clean.

4. “Giclee” – Another nice steel-string effect, but this one works especially well on chords. Here’s what it sounds like when I play spread chords with open voicings on a Yamaha FSX3 Red Label:

Screenshots in app.

Here, I’m using the condenser microphone model, a slight cut in the bass frequencies, moderate compression, a short room reverb, and the “wide” Tone Select setting to broaden the stereo field. Note that no delay is being applied, as this tends to muddy chordal parts.

5. “Strata” – This one is designed to be used when playing slide guitar parts on acoustic guitar. Here, I am playing an ambient slide melody on a Yamaha FSX3 Red Label with the effect applied:

Screenshots in app.

This time, I’m using the tube microphone model for an authentic vintage sound. I cut the treble frequencies and added a touch more bass to give those high notes a little extra warmth. I then added a significant amount of compression for sustain, a long delay time with some feedback, and a large hall reverb to give extra breadth to the legato notes.

The Videos

These two videos demonstrate the five effect settings described above. You’ll see and hear me play each example in layers to build the composition to a full mix and crescendo. This shows how each part, phrasing, dynamics, EQ and effects work together with the bass and drums to create stylistic genres of music. All the tones and effects in both videos were created solely with the Yamaha THR30IIA desktop amp.

This first video shows me playing a Yamaha NTX5 nylon-string acoustic guitar with the “Ballerina” and “Iglesias” effects applied to the rhythm and lead guitar parts respectively:

You’ll notice that I’m using my fingernails to pick the notes. This adds a nice percussive clarity to the softer-sounding nylon strings. In addition, the Latin percussion in the backing track is quite dry compared to the guitars. Choosing the reverb type and decay times carefully will help you define each instrument in the mix.

Next, here’s a video that shows me playing a Yamaha FSX3 Red Label steel-string acoustic guitar with the other three effects:

The main harmonic structure of this progression is carried by those nice descending fingerpicked arpeggios with an upper voice-leading melody and the “Voices” effect applied. I wanted to accent the downbeat of each of the four chord changes with “spread” open chord voicings, played with the “Giclee” effect, which imparts a cleaner, less effected tone than the other guitar parts; this also lets the chords find their own place in the mix. Finally, I wanted the slide guitar melody to have a dramatic, ambient sound that really stands out against the other guitar parts and overall instrumentation, hence the application of the complex (and rather intense) “Strata” effect.

The Guitars

The gorgeous-sounding (and gorgeous-looking!) Yamaha NTX5 nylon-string features solid walnut back and sides, a solid European spruce top and a narrow-ish electric guitar player-friendly mahogany neck. The three-way Atmosfeel preamp system allows the player to blend the microphone, body sensor and the undersaddle piezo pickup for excellent studio and live performance tones.

Acoustic guitar.
Yamaha NTX5.

The retro-inspired FSX3 Red Label steel-string boasts all-solid wood construction with mahogany back and sides, a scalloped Sitka spruce top and an ebony bridge and fingerboard. It also features the Atmosfeel preamp system for onboard tone sculpting.

Acoustic guitar.
Yamaha FSX3 Red Label.

The Wrap-Up

Acoustic guitars possess a naturally earthy tonal quality that we’ve come to love and appreciate in all styles of music. But when you add effects to those tones, you broaden your musical palette even further, opening up new vistas of unique “ear candy” and expanding the depth and space for multiple layering when recording. It’s a concept well worth exploring!

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha THR30IIA desktop amp.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha NTX5 nylon-string guitar.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha FSX3 Red Label steel-string guitar.

JEN

Jazz Education Network 2025 Conference

Welcome! We are thrilled to join the Jazz Education Network (JEN) in presenting its 2025 Conference in Atlanta. We applaud how JEN members embrace an improvisational spirit as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you!

The JEN conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development.

See our Yamaha Performing Artists’ Clinics and Presentations

We want to express our appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

Stop by our booth to say hello and check out our newest products. We’re eager to talk with you about your needs as a performer or educator. 

If you need help or have additional questions, please feel free to reach out directly to us at educators@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

Yamaha Featured Panels

Consider a Career in Music

Join moderator Natalie Morrison, Senior Marketing Specialist for Education for Yamaha, and a panel of experts who will share insights into the various career paths available in the music industry.  

  • Thursday, January 9
  • 9:00-10:00 a.m.
  • Hanover A-B
The Power of Taking Chances: Embracing Vulnerability and Change

Join moderator John Wittmann, Associate VP of Artist Relations for Yamaha, and an all-star panel of Yamaha Performing Artists — Sherrie Maricle, Bethany Robinson, Wayne Bergeron and Michael Dease — who will share how they took BIG chances, turned things upside down and put their vulnerability out there. Their stories will leave you inspired and encouraged to take your own chances.

  • Friday, January 10
  • 5:00-5:50 p.m.
  • Hanover A-B

Meet Yamaha Artists

Come by the Yamaha booth (#509) to meet, talk to and even participate in jam sessions with Yamaha Performing Artists:

Friday, January 10, 10:00-11:00 a.m.
Friday, January 10, 3:00-4:00 p.m.
Saturday, January 11, 10:00-11:00 a.m.
Saturday, January 11, 3:00-4:00 p.m.

Yamaha Performing Artists’ Clinics and Performances

Wednesday, January 8
  • 8:10-9:00 p.m. — Laila Biali (piano) and Jeff Coffin (saxophone), concert (Inspirations/Centenial Ballroom)
Thursday, January 9
Friday, January 10
  • 11:00-11:50 a.m. —  Ryan Middagh (saxophone), “Herding Cats: A Playbook for Today’s Big Band Leader” (Hanover A-B)
  • 11:00-11:50 a.m. — Mike Steinel (trumpet), “The Poetics of Jazz Improvisation” (Chicago)
  • 12:00-12:50 p.m. — Sherrie Maricle (drums), “Elevate Your Rhythm Section Through Creative, Responsive Interaction” (Embassy Hall C-D)
  • 2:00-2:50 p.m. — Caleb Chapman (saxophone), “Giant Steps to Soloing” (Embassy Hall C-D)
  • 9:10-10:00 p.m. — Jeff Coffin (saxophone), The Sax Loft (Inspirations/Centenial Ballroom)
    Saturday, January 11

    For a full list of clinics, sessions and performances, check the JEN website

    Professional Development Resources

    Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

    Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

    PRODUCT SHOWCASES
    WINDS


    Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


    NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone

    Clarinet Synthetic Reeds

    Saxophone Synthetic Reeds


    STRINGS

    Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble

    SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


    DRUMSETS

    DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview

    Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice

    Stage Custom Hip: Full Sound, Compact Size


    PERCUSSION

    NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


    GUITARS

    C40II Nylon Guitar

    SLG SILENT guitar™

    FG Red Label Guitar

    TRBX 504


    PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

    STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System

    Remote Music Education and Live Streaming

    YH-L700A Wireless Headphones


    DORICO

    Why Switch to Dorico?

    What is Dorico?


    Continue reading

    Here’s What the Metaverse Might Look Like

    Coined originally by Neal Stephenson in his 1992 sci-fi novel Snow Crash, the “Metaverse” is simply a term for an alternate digital world — think virtual reality headsets and total computer immersion, a potential successor to the internet and its clunky web browsers. It’s a concept since expanded on by movies and video games such as Second Life, which was just that — a simulated digital second life — and now even tech companies.

    Here are seven memorable films that give us a glimpse at what that future could look like.

    1. Ready Player One

    Based on a novel of the same name, this 2018 movie, directed by Stephen Spielberg, depicts what it would be like if Second Life became a much more advanced, immersive community. It’s set in 2045, in a world barely worth living in. Yet there is a virtual reality escape known as the OASIS, where the film’s lead, Wade Watts (played by Tye Sheridan) finds himself trying to save the planet from an evil corporation. (Stream on Amazon Prime)

    2. Tron

    One the earliest depictions of the Metaverse in film (predating even Stephenson’s coining of the phrase), this 1982 release shows programmer Kevin Flynn (played by Jeff Bridges) entering a software world. There, he must interact with various digital entities in the hope of escaping. With their help, Flynn manages to defeat the villain who’d trapped him. He then reappears in the real world, where his victory has led to a workplace promotion, proving that selflessness — even when a computer brings you into a parallel universe — can lead to positive results. (Stream on Amazon Prime)

    3. The Matrix

    In the beginning of this 1999 film, we meet Neo (played by Keanu Reeves) as he is about to be kidnapped by evil agents. But Morpheus (Laurence Fishburne) calls from another realm to intervene and Neo learns that the world he knows is actually a simulation; in reality, his body is a pod, feeding machines. Offered the blue pill or the red pill — learn more or go back to sleep — he chooses to stay awake and fight. It’s possible this movie shows the way our world is right now; how would we know? And if we did, would we take the blue or red pill? (Stream on Amazon Prime)

    4. Vanilla Sky

    In this 2001 remake of the excellent 1997 Spanish movie Open Your Eyes, David Aames (played by Tom Cruise) suffers a disfiguring car accident and hires a virtual reality firm to give him a better future. All seems copacetic until Aames’ mind begins to wake up and he remembers what’s happened, and what he’s done. Much like The Matrix, this film asks the question: Is ignorance bliss? (Stream on Amazon Prime )

    5. Avatar

    This 2009 film, winner of three Oscars®, is all about looking for new land, which, in essence, is what the Metaverse is all about. It’s set in a future when humans have depleted Earth’s natural resources, leading to a severe energy crisis. In response, a government agency begins mining a densely forested moon inhabited by a species of 10-foot tall blue-skinned humanoids called the Na’vi. There, paraplegic soldier Jake Sully (played by Sam Worthington) uses technology to cognitively inhabit a genetically engineered Na’vi body. During his journey, Sully is healed by a Na’vi princess (played by Zoe Saldana) and, as his bond with her grows, he is drawn into a battle for the survival of her world. (Stream on Disney+)

    6. Minority Report

    In the year 2054, new psychic technology allows the police to track and arrest criminals before they commit crimes, and police officer John Anderton (played by Tom Cruise) is utilizing it to try and clear his name of a crime he’s accused of committing. Yet if found guilty, Anderton would be kept in a prison made of a state of pleasant virtual reality, which causes us to wonder: Is this better than the potentially brutish prisons of today? Humanity may find out sooner than later. (Stream on Amazon Prime).

    7. Free Guy

    In this recent release, Guy (played by Ryan Reynolds) discovers that he is an NPC (non-player character) in a video game, where, one day, he wakes up when “Molotov Girl” — the avatar of real-life person Millie Rusk (played by Jodie Comer) — sings his favorite song. Upon realizing what’s happening to him, Guy decides he must save his friends from potential deletion … and he falls for Molotov Girl in the process. All of which begs the question: If you found love in a digital world, would you follow your heart? (Stream on Amazon Prime)

    FMEA 2022

    Florida Music Education Association 2022 Conference

    Welcome! We are thrilled to join the Florida Music Education Association (FMEA) in presenting its 2022 Conference.

    Florida’s nearly 2.7 million public school students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. We applaud how you embrace the pioneering spirit of Florida as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you!

    Welcome from Dino Riccio

    Adam FrankThe Florida Music Education Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We know how difficult this past year has been as we have navigated through these uncertain times, and I want to express my appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

    Stop by and say hi to me in the exhibit hall. We’ll be showing some new instruments in the booth, including the Harmony Director, the YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone and the MS-9414 Marching Snare Drum.

    If you need help or have additional questions, please feel free to reach out directly to me at driccio@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

    Have a wonderful conference!

    — Dino Riccio, District Manager, School Services Division, Yamaha Corporation of America

     

    Professional Development Clinics at FMEA

    Yamaha Master Educator Michael Pote, Director of Bands, Carmel High School (Carmel, Indiana)

    • Session Title: “Yamaha Harmony Director 101”
    • Session Date and Time: Saturday, January 15, Time TBA
    • Description: The new Harmony Director HD-300 combines the HD-200’s powerful ear training with dynamic new educational features and a simplified user interface. The addition of a mobile app that can act as a stand-alone tuner as well as a hardware controller makes the new HD-300 a complete package that can not only make a teacher’s job easier but also help their students play “IN TUNE, IN TONE, IN TIME and at the CORRECT VOLUME.”

    Professional Development Resources

    Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

    Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

    Product Showcases

    HARMONY DIRECTOR

    HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1


    HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


    WINDS

    NEW Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


    NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


    STRINGS

    YVN Model 3 Violin: The Most Innovative Student Violin


    How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


    SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


    PERCUSSION

    NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum


    NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


    NEW CFM Series Concert Field Drum


    Concert Chimes


    SOFTWARE

    Dorico for iPad


    Cubase Recording Software


    Dorico Music Notation Software


    Introduction to Dorico for iPad


    DRUMSETS

    DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview


    Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice


    Stage Custom Hip – Full Sound and Compact Size


    PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

    STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System


    Remote Music Education and Live Streaming Can Sound Good!


    Midwest Clinic

    Midwest Clinic

    Welcome music educators! Our team is looking forward to meeting you at this year’s Midwest Clinic International Band, Orchestra and Music Conference and serving your professional needs in any way we can. Ask us about the free resources we have on program planning, advocacy, funding and other teaching and professional development needs.

    The Midwest Clinic gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. Learn about ways to expand your music program to meet students where they are.

    Attend our Yamaha Master Educator Sessions at Midwest.
    ChicagoSkyline

    We want to express our appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

    Stop by our booth to say hello. We’re eager to talk with you about your needs as a performer or educator. See you in Chicago!

    If you need help or have questions, please reach out directly to us at educators@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

    Yamaha Master Educator Clinics

    Getting Their Story Right: What Composers Want You to Know About Interpreting Their Music 
    Clinician: Omar Thomas
    Wednesday, December 18, 1:30 p.m. – 2:30 p.m.  
    Room: W185 

    Product Showcase: The Yamaha Harmony Director: HD-300 – The Ultimate Rehearsal Assistant 
    Clinician: Michael Pote 
    Wednesday, December 18, 3:30 p.m. – 4:30 p.m.  
    Room: W176 

    High School Band Rehearsal Lab 
    Clinician: Dana Sedatole
    Thursday, December 19, 8:30 a.m. – 9:30 a.m.  
    Room: W183 

    Teaching Through Rain, Sleet, Snow, and a 7th Grade Fire: Individualized Assessment for Beginning Band 
    Clinician: Marguerite Wilder  
    Thursday, December 19, 11:30 a.m. – 12:30 p.m.  
    Room: W187 

    A Connected Conductor: The Nexus of Artistry, Technique, and Emotion 
    Clinician: Emily Threinen 
    Friday, December 20, 8:30 a.m. – 9:30 a.m. 
    Room: W183 

    REPENT! Shun These Sins…and Make Great Music 
    Clinician: Richard Floyd 
    Friday, December 20, 1:30 p.m. – 2:30 p.m. 
    Room: W187 

      For a complete list of clinics and performances, visit the Midwest Clinic Schedule.

      New Product Highlight: Marching Hardware

      Learn about the innovative design and manufacturing process behind the new Yamaha marching hardware products, which are scheduled to hit the market in early 2025. 

      In an exclusive interview, Joel Tetzlaff, Product Marketing Manager of the drums and percussion team, provides insight into how the new line of carriers and stands were developed. 

      More Voices = More Music

      Below are five common challenges music educators face and some organizations that offer help and resources. 

      CHALLENGE #1: I want my music program to reflect the diversity of my students but finding music that represents their cultures and experiences can be difficult.

      SOLUTION: United Sound Composer Project supports emerging composers from diverse and minoritized backgrounds. United Sound helps teachers find and program music that resonates with their classrooms. They make it easy to access new compositions and provide resources to inspire your students to start creating.

      CHALLENGE #2: I want to include students with special needs in my music program, but I don’t have the staff or specialized training to support them.”

      SOLUTION: United Sound removes barriers by providing teacher and student training, peer mentor programs, and a comprehensive curriculum. With their support, music programs can be truly inclusive, giving ever student the chance to play and perform alongside their peers.

      CHALLENGE #3: My students are interested in music technology and production, but I lack the know-how to teach it.

      SOLUTION: Technology in Music Education (TI:ME) supports educators with the training and resources needed to integrate music technology into the classroom. From conferences to professional development sessions, they make sure you’re equipped to give students hands-on experiences in music production and technology. 

      CHALLENGE #4: I’d love to reach more students by integrating guitar glasses into my program but I don’t have the experience or resources to get started.

      SOLUTION: Teaching Guitar Workshop provides hands-on training for educators to start or expand guitar programs. NAfME’s Council for Guitar Education offers curriculum, program expansion ideas and professional development. 

      CHALLENGE #5: I’d love to reach more students by integrating popular music education into my program but I don’t have the experience or resources to get started.

      SOLUTION: Association for Popular Music Education (APME) advocates for popular music education at all levels, helping you integrate modern music into your programs. 

      Technology Sessions at Midwest

      S.H.O.P Talk: It’s Time to Teach Music Production! Now What? Everything You Need to Know to Get Started 
      Clinician: Matthew Lyons 
      Thursday, December 19, 3:30 p.m. – 4:00 p.m.  
      Room: W193* 

      Inclusion Through Creativity: Games, Activities, and Projects for Learning Digital Composition at the Middle Level 
      Clinician: Gillian Desmarais (Yamaha 40 Under 40) 
      Friday, December 20, 8:30 a.m. – 9:30 a.m.  
      Room: W187 * 

      Beyond the Score: Integrating Composition into Rehearsals for Deeper Learning 
      Clinician: Theresa Hoover 
      Friday, December 20, 3:00 p.m. – 4:00 p.m.  
      Room: W179* 

      PRODUCT SHOWCASES

      Harmony Director

      HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1

      HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


      WINDS

      Tomplay

      NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


      STRINGS

      YVN Model 3 Violin

      How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


      PERCUSSION

      NEW Marching Hardware

      NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum

      NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone

      CFM Series Concert Field Drum

      Concert Chimes


      GUITARS

      C40II Nylon Guitar

      SLG SILENT guitar™


      DORICO

      Why Switch to Dorico?

      What is Dorico?


      DRUMSETS

      DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview

      Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice

      Stage Custom Hip: Full Sound, Compact Size


      PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

      STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System

      Remote Music Education and Live Streaming


      Continue reading

      Creating Vocal Chops and Other Sampler Tricks, Part 1

      Vocal chops are short vocal samples that you trigger via MIDI and use as melodic and rhythmic ornaments in song arrangements. They’re pretty easy to create, as we’ll demonstrate in this article.

      Keeping It Simple

      Most contemporary DAWs offer sampler plug-ins. In Steinberg Cubase, sampling functionality is available by creating a Sampler Track. There are multiple ways to do so, but probably the easiest method is to right-click (or option-click if you’re using a Mac with a one-button mouse) in the Track List to get the context menu, then choose Create Sampler Track:

      Screenshot.
      Creating a Sampler Track.

      You’ll then get the Add Track dialog, where Cubase offers you the opportunity to name the track. After doing so and hitting Add Track, you’ll see the area in the Lower Zone. From there, you can drag and drop a sample from inside your session or from a directory on your computer. (like Cubase, most DAWs support dragging and dropping audio files into samplers.)

      Screenshot.
      The Sampler Track window after dragging in a sample.

      Choose Your Mode

      There are a couple of different ways to create vocal chops. Let’s start with the most straightforward way: creating a vocal chop instrument. For that, you only need a one-note sample. If you drag in a longer sample, you can adjust the start and end points of a note of your choosing.

      Cubase’s Sampler Track window features three different playback modes: Normal, Audiowarp and Slice (we’ll cover Slice mode in Part 2 of this article).

      Screenshot.
      The three Cubase sampler playback modes.

      Let’s start with Normal mode, where the sample gets transposed up and down on the keyboard, playing back faster as you play higher notes, and slower as you play lower notes. As with all speeded-up or slowed-down recordings, it changes timbre too, so you get the “chipmunk effect” if you play a note more than a few semitones higher than the root pitch and the “monster effect” if you go a similar distance in the other direction.

      In the following audio clip, you’ll hear a vocal line loaded into the Sampler Track in Normal playback mode, repeated five times. The first time it’s triggered by the root note (in this case, E3), followed by the notes F#3, G#3, B3 and E2 (an octave below the root). Notice how both the timbre and the speed change.

      This next audio clip demonstrates AudioWarp mode, where Cubase time-stretches and formant-corrects the audio to keep all notes at the same speed and timbre as the root note. (Formants are resonances in your vocal tract that help shape the tone of your voice.) You’ll still notice timbral differences, but they are much less extreme:

      Since a Vocal Chop instrument takes a single note you’ve defined from your source audio file and transposes it across the keyboard, it makes sense to use AudioWarp mode to keep it from getting too extreme sounding, unless that’s what you’re going for.

      Chop That Vocal

      Start by finding a vocal sample that you want to use. Often, it makes sense to use a section of the vocal track of the song you’re working on so that the sound of the chops will relate to the song. That’s an artistic decision, however; you can certainly opt to go with a completely different voice if you want to. If you can, use a dry sample rather than one with reverb and delay, because it’s better to have the flexibility of adding those effects yourself.

      Make sure your Sampler Track is record-enabled so you can trigger it from your MIDI keyboard and listen for a note that’s steady pitch-wise. I’ve found that it also helps to select a word that starts in a hard consonant like P, B, T or G when creating vocal chops since it gives a more powerful attack than if the word starts with a vowel.

      Start by clicking the blue root key on the keyboard at the bottom of the Sampler Track window, which is C3 by default in Cubase. Alternatively, you can use your MIDI keyboard to play that note. Then zoom in (you may have to zoom pretty far) and place the Start and End markers to outline the boundaries of the word you’ve selected.

      Screenshot.
      Select a vocal chop by adjusting the start and end points.

      Use the built-in keyboard at the bottom of the Sampler Track window or your MIDI keyboard to check your placement of the markers. You don’t want any space before the note, or it won’t immediately sound when you press a key to trigger it. Also, just above each marker is a box you can drag to create a short crossfade; especially at the end of a chop, a short crossfade can make it sound cleaner if you hear any clicks.

      Line ’Em Up

      Next, check the pitch of the note you selected by finding its match on another virtual instrument or an actual guitar or piano in your studio. Once you figure out the pitch of the selected note, use the sampler’s transpose function to make the note match with concert pitch. (Important tip: You want your sample to correspond to concert pitch on your MIDI keyboard. That way, the C key triggers a C note, the D key a D note and so on.) In a Cubase Sampler Track, you can use the Coarse transpose field in the red Pitch section or the Root Key setting above the waveform display.

      Ensure that you selected AudioWarp mode and then play your MIDI keyboard and check out how the chop sounds on various notes. Also make sure it sounds in tune. If not, use your sampler’s fine-tuning control to adjust it. If you can’t make it sound in tune within at least a one-octave range, you might try defining a different note to use as your vocal chop.

      Assuming all is good, it’s time to make your chop more interesting with effects, especially if you’re starting with a sample of a dry voice. I often like to add a little reverb, delay, and maybe some compression and distortion as well.

      Screenshot.
      Vocal chops usually sound better with effects.

      A trick I sometimes use is to insert an amp simulator with effects, such as Steinberg VST Amp Rack on the vocal chop track. That way, you have multiple effects within a single plug-in.

      Here’s an example of a vocal chop instrument made in Cubase as just described. In this clip, it only has a little reverb on it, so it sounds pretty plain:

      Compare that with this clip, where the chop has added reverb, delay, amp and cabinet simulation, as well as some modulation and compression:

      Although vocal chops are mainly single-note parts, you can also create chords, giving you an unusual sound, like this:

      In Part 2, we’ll demonstrate a couple of cool ways to use Slice mode. One enables you to create vocal chops that include multiple samples, and the other allows you to make drum kits from drum loops. We’ll also show you how you can open your samples in other instruments in Cubase for additional sonic possibilities.

       

      Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

      Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

      7 Self-Care Tips for Music Educators

      Teaching music is a creative job that relies heavily on human interaction and personal connections with your students. While this profession is immensely rewarding, it is also very challenging, and if you don’t take care of yourself, you run the risk of burnout.

      In this article, we look at how music teachers can set a self-care routine.

      three smiling women talking

      1. Surround Yourself with the Right Kind of People

      Let’s face it — music teachers have demanding jobs! To make this challenging job a little easier, it’s paramount that you have a support network that you can count on. Surround yourself with people who have a positive outlook on life because you become who you spend time with.

      In addition to friends and family, reach out to other music educators at your school, in your district or across the country. Having easy access to a network of people is one of the perks of being a teacher.

      During the pandemic when social distancing and quarantining were the norm, it’s even more crucial to maintain healthy social connections, especially with people who share similar aspirations and interests.

      If possible, schedule regular check-ins with your network of music teachers where you can share your success stories as well as your struggles and challenges. You can even brainstorm creative lessons plans and assessment strategies.

      2. Flex Your Brain

      man thinking with finger to his temple

      Any time you have some extra time on your hands — which isn’t very often! — take the opportunity to learn something new and flex your brain. Below are some ways in which you can build new neural connections for a healthier brain:

      • Get a new instrument you’ve always wanted to play
      • Find some interesting videos on YouTube to play along with
      • Play brain games like sudoku or crossword puzzles in the newspaper
      • Watch live performances of your favorite artists
      • Watch inspirational TED talks
      • Rock out on your favorite instrument just for fun without worrying about the quality of music

      Always find something new and interesting to learn.

      3. Reflect on Your Feelings and Needs

      Whenever you feel overwhelmed, try to recognize and write down your emotions. Become aware of your feelings and take some time to reflect on them. Ask yourself, why are you feeling that way? What is it that you need at that exact moment?

      female writing in journal sitting next to window

      For instance, perhaps there has been a change in the curriculum that’s stressing you out. You’re worried about how you will incorporate this change into your classroom. You may need some time to process, reflect and write down some possible solutions. Consider collaborating with a colleague and have a brainstorming session to work on a solution.

      It’s also a good idea to set aside dedicated time to do nothing but reflect on your emotions, thoughts and needs. Journaling is an incredible way to do that. Or try exploring art and other creative subjects, which are excellent means of healthy expression.

      4. Acknowledge Moments of Happiness

      Look for moments of beauty and joy every day. Be grateful and enjoy whatever fleeting moment of happiness you experience. Never pass an opportunity to have a hearty laugh or share a joke. Life is all about moments that make you smile and feel appreciative.

      Write down those moments of beauty and happiness in a journal or in your daily planner to etch them into your memory. Share interesting anecdotes or stories with your colleagues and students to spread joy.

      5. Feed Outside Interests

      Make sure you find work-life balance. Don’t allow your profession to become the be-all and end-all of your life. Find new interests and hobbies. What activities nourish your soul? What things are on your personal to-do list? Perhaps there’s a book you’ve been meaning to read. Or a spin class you want to join.

      Grab some paints and a canvas and create a quick painting. Try a new recipe. Take a walk or go hiking. Paint your nails or play your guitar. Savor these moments.

      6. Get Enough Sleep

      When you’re in a creative field, it’s easy to get swept up in the moment and become so engrossed in your craft that you sacrifice sleep. In the long run, this is an unhealthy practice and not sustainable.

      How can you ensure that you have a regular sleep schedule?

      • man sleepingResist the Phone: Smartphones emit blue light, which can disrupt your circadian rhythm and mess up your sleep cycle. It’s tempting to reach for your phone every five minutes to check on work-related emails — but don’t do it! The best thing is to turn off your mobile phone when it’s bedtime. Also, keep the phone brightness on “reading mode.”
      • Keep Your Feet and Hands Warm: When you have warm feet and hands, it’s much easier to sleep. Try wearing socks or rubbing your hands to produce some heat.
      • Avoid Pulling All-Nighters: During exam season, you may feel that pulling an all-nighter is the only way to get through your heavier-than-normal workload — but don’t do it! This will negatively affect the hippocampus, the part of the brain that controls short- and long-term memory. Quality sleep is essential for your brain health.

      7. Don’t Measure Your Success by Productivity

      Most creative people can relate to being addicted to perfection and productivity. Don’t be too hard on yourself. Avoid measuring your work by how much you can produce or how productive you are.

      Wherever you are in your music journey, all you should expect of yourself is to do the best you can. Take and do things at a reasonable pace and be flexible when circumstances change. It’s easy to feel trapped and think you’re not good enough or doing enough — don’t do that! Treat yourself gently and with respect.

      No matter what your profession, these tips can go a long way in helping you live a more fulfilling and enriched life.

      Spotlight on the Yamaha PSR-E360 Portable Keyboard

      Looking to buy the perfect keyboard for beginners? The ultra-portable Yamaha PSR-E360 — available in three different finishes — offers the perfect solution. Its interactive lessons, touch-sensitive keys and wide variety of Voices and accompaniment Styles make practice more fun, keeping young players engaged.

      Let’s take a look at some of its main features.

      Great Sound

      An electronic piano keyboard.
      PSR-E360DW (dark walnut finish).

      The better an instrument sounds, the more it inspires. For over a hundred years, Yamaha has been manufacturing just about every kind of musical instrument, so when it comes to reproducing their sound in a keyboard, you can count on the results being detailed and high-quality.

      The PSR-E360 provides 384 great-sounding Voices — not just pianos, electric pianos and organs, but other instruments like guitar, bass, strings, trumpets, flutes, percussion and choir, as well as fun sounds like telephone rings, bird tweets, dog barks, doors slamming, sirens, laughs, heartbeats and applause. There are also 16 drum kits, plus reverb and chorus, as well as an “ultra-wide” stereo setting that envelops the player with sound.

      Auto Accompaniment

      The built-in Auto Accompaniment feature transforms the PSR-E360 into a full “band in a box” by generating appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment) when the user plays chords with their left hand. There are 130 Styles in a wide range of musical genres — everything from pop and rock to swing and jazz to R&B, latin and world music — so your child can practice the type of music they love best.

      Touch-Sensitive Keys

      Closeup of someone's hand playing a chord on a keyboard.

      The PSR-E360’s 61-key touch-sensitive keyboard provides full dynamic control, accurately reflecting every nuance of the playing to make performances musically expressive. When your child plays the keys heavily, they hear louder tones; when they play softly, quieter sounds are heard — just like a real piano.

      Onboard Lessons Make Learning Fun

      Closeup of an electronic piano keyboard.
      PSR-E360MA (maple finish).

      The PSR-E360 provides numerous interactive lessons to help your child build their keyboard skills as they play along with the 112 preset songs. There are simple “listen and learn” lessons, as well as more advanced ones designed to improve timing and master chords. A special Duo mode splits the keyboard in two so parent and child (or teacher and student) can play and learn together.

      The tempo of each song can easily be adjusted over a wide range, so a student can slow things down while learning, then speed it up again as they gain more confidence. Songs can be transposed at the touch of a button too, making it easy to learn in any key, and to accompany singers in the range in which they feel most comfortable. Your child can even record an original song of their own directly into the PSR-E360.

      Play Along With The Band

      Electronic keyboard on a table with an iPhone attached to the keyboard via a cable.

      A standard 1/8-inch Aux input jack on the rear panel allows a smartphone or portable music player to be connected so your young keyboardist can hear their favorite music through the PSR-E360’s speakers — allowing them to play along and feel like they’ve joined the band!

      Built-In Speakers … And A Headphone Output Too

      Electronic keyboard.
      PSR-E360B model (black finish).

      The PSR-E360 comes with built-in high-quality stereo speakers, as well as a standard headphone jack that enables silent practice. Simply plug in a set of headphones or earbuds and your budding keyboard star can hone their skills without disturbing others in the household.

      Take It Anywhere

      The PSR-E360 is both lightweight and portable, weighing in at less than nine pounds and measuring just 37 inches wide — small enough to fit on any student’s desk … plus they can easily take it to school or wherever they want to put on a show. It comes with an AC adapter, and can also run on batteries.

       

      Want to learn more? Check out the video:

      Click here for more information about the Yamaha PSR-E360 Portable Keyboard.

      Open a School, Create an Ideal Program

      Congratulations! Opening a new school is a fantastic opportunity to start fresh and create the ideal music program for the community you’re about to serve. Take a moment to appreciate the path you’ve traveled to reach this milestone but don’t celebrate too long because there’s work to be done!

      Get Involved Early

      blueprints for schoolA majority of the plans for the new school’s buildings have likely been in place for a while, but it’s important to find out what decisions you can still impact. If the music room building is still in the planning stages, inquire about wide doors for moving instruments, extra storage space, stage access, dropped ceiling tiles for sound dampening or exposed ceiling for a livelier sound. If the building is already under construction, ask if your room will be painted to match the school’s color scheme or if you can choose a custom color that you won’t mind looking at every day. Even if all decisions are made, you can still be a part of the purchasing process.

      Most school districts have a purchase list for new schools, but that doesn’t mean the list can’t benefit from a modern revision. For instance, my school’s purchase list included three upright pianos and two electric keyboards. In my wildest scenarios, I couldn’t justify needing five keyboard instruments distributed between the classroom and stage. I could have stored the unused instruments in my closet, or I could negotiate for those funds to be used for things that I knew I would need on Day 1 of school, such as more instruments for the students.

      On the topic of instruments, make sure the ones that are selected fit your curriculum’s needs. My elementary general music classroom was slated to receive three roto toms. As cool as roto toms were in the 1980s, they are breakable and require students to use drumsticks, an occupational hazard for me and kindergarteners!  Instead of buying the roto toms, I used the money to buy stage equipment like microphones, risers, lights and chairs — things you will need for your first concert. Don’t just make sure this equipment was purchased but define which items belong to your music program and which ones belong to the general population. There’s nothing worse than discovering that your microphone is locked in the lunch duty closet right before your concert.

      Stay in close contact with the front office and head custodian about when packages should be arriving and where they are stored on campus. For security purposes, packages should be locked in closets because many people have access to the building and alarms won’t be installed until all construction is completed. With that being said, use the power of smiles, food and favors to ensure that your items end up in the closet closest to your classroom. Open your packages immediately to check that the correct items were sent and that they are undamaged. In case of breakage, you should have plenty of time for the item to be replaced before the school year begins.

      Room Design

      Themes and decorations aside, design your classroom to fit your school’s largest class size. That data may not be available yet, but we all agree that the more floor space available for students to create music, the better.

      Utilize vertical storage with tall shelving, cabinets and lockers. Before you hang musical posters, use as much of your wall space for practical storage for ukuleles, guitars, boomwhackers, frame drums and any other daily-use items that students will need easy access to.

      Your classroom may come with bulletin boards. Depending on your needs, removing the bulletin boards and using that real estate for storage could give you the room you need to squeeze more chairs into the room.

      Installing a Culture

      The complex topic of school culture can be addressed by the music teacher with a succinct school song. Do you know the school song from your prior school? Does your current school have a song?

      My first school had the school song’s lyrics framed on the wall, but we never sang it because I didn’t know the accompaniment. Frankly, I was waiting for someone to want to hear it before I worried about it. I realized the flaw in my logic when I opened a new school, and it became apparent that I needed to be the biggest advocate for what the school song means and how often we sing it.

      I partnered with the principal to discuss the school’s mission statement so that there was agreement across the board about our school values. For those who don’t like to write songs, here is a simple formula to follow:

      School Name + Mascot + Mission Statement + Metaphor for Success + School Motto = School Song

      Choose how often students will sing the school song, but I encourage you to have it ready for the first assembly so that students can see it is a pivotal part of attending your school.

      Be Seen, Be Present

      Make a great first impression with the community by volunteering to perform a solo at the ribbon-cutting ceremony for your new school. Whether you play “The Star-Spangled Banner” while the flag is being raised, sing the school song or even just rip a solo over some sweet changes, show your coworkers and community your skillset. If you don’t have a chance to teach a large group of students the school song before the first assembly, bring a small group of students together to learn a chant, cadence or chorale that can be used as the standard for your program. Consider scheduling a daytime performance of your first concert so that students can see what your program is all about.

      elementary students singing

      Create Tradition

      The first year at a new school will feel like the longest year ever. Take note of which events the students and community responded to the most during the school year, and mark those down as your new traditions. The smallest event may have had the largest impact on morale. Singing the school song at the right time or playing the fight song for other school organizations could become the new staple that students look forward to every year. And don’t underestimate the power of matching shirts!

      Be a Beacon

      It’s easy to feel undeserving of a new program at a new school. Instead, reflect on what the administration saw in you during the interview process. You were able to show traits that the administration considered useful and essential to the success of their new school. Part of that success will be your commitment to spread school culture through the school song, traditions and your overall presence. Go forward and be a beacon of your musical community!

      Ultimate Buying Guide

      Sometimes you’ve just got to splurge. When that “special someone” is a really special someone, you need to find a holiday gift to match. And if that someone happens to be a musician or an aficionado who takes their music seriously, your task might seem a little harder.

      Fear not! Here are some great high-end gift suggestions for that talented spouse, child or grandchild in your life.

      Extravagant? A little.

      But, hey, they’re worth it.

      GB1K Grand Piano

      Baby grand piano with lid open.
      GB1K grand piano.

      A piano is more than a gift. It’s a gathering place where the spirit of the season comes to life, and where memories are made that will last for years to come.

      The compact size of the 5′ Yamaha GB1K baby grand piano makes it perfect for any room — even rooms with limited space — yet it offers a full, resonant tone comparable to that of many substantially larger models. Available in six different colors and finishes, including Polished Ebony, Polished American Walnut, Polished White, Polished Mahogany, French Provincial Cherry and Georgian Mahogany, the GB1K can fit into any décor … and it looks every bit as beautiful as it sounds. Check out the video here.

      FG Red Label

      An acoustic guitar.
      FGX5 Red Label guitar.

      FG Red Label steel-string folk guitars are inspired by the iconic Yamaha “red label” guitars of the 1960s — the instruments that were onstage at the original Woodstock. They blend modern inspiration with a timeless design for an authentic vintage aesthetic and amazing sound.

      There are lots of features that make these guitars special: A solid mahogany back and sides; a premium solid Sitka spruce top treated with our proprietary Acoustic Resonance Enhancement process (A.R.E.) for genuine aged-wood tone and sustain; a new scalloped-bracing design for warm tonality along with plenty of volume; and a groundbreaking Atmosfeel™ three-way pickup system with built-in microphone that delivers a natural acoustic sound when amplified. The end result? A guitar that sounds and feels like you’ve been playing it for years — right from the very first note. Check out the video here.

      YH-L700A Wireless Noise-Cancelling Headphones With 3D Sound

      Wireless headphones on a modern wood stand on a bookshelf surrounded by stylish holiday decorations.
      YH-L700A wireless headphones.

      The music or video streamer in your life is sure to appreciate the pristine sound quality and extraordinary feature set offered by top-of-the-line Yamaha YH-L700A wireless headphones.

      The YH-L700A provides a three-dimensional sound field coupled with head tracking that allows the wearer to experience movies and videos on their mobile devices with cinema-like sound that immerses them in the action. Not only does it utilize active noise-cancelling to reduce ambient noise, the sound is optimized in real time, continuously adapting to the size and shape of the wearer’s ears and head as well as the surrounding environment. Bluetooth 5® compatibility with aptX™ Adaptive technology ensures stable wireless connectivity and premium streaming quality, and simple onboard controls allow the user to make phone calls, activate Siri®/Google Assistant and adjust their music with the touch of a button. A folding/swiveling earcup design ensures comfort even when worn for long periods of time, and the included rechargeable battery provides up to 34 hours of battery life. Check out the video here.

      DTX8 Series Electronic Drum Kits

      An electronic drum kit.
      DTX8K-X electronic drum kit in Real Wood finish.

      Every drummer can benefit from an electronic drum kit for a variety of reasons — they offer a huge variety of sounds that an acoustic drum set cannot deliver, plus they’re much lighter in weight and far more portable. And for those living under the same roof as a drummer (or nearby neighbors), they offer the distinct advantage of silent practice … just plug in a set of headphones and absolutely no one but the drummer hears a sound.

      The DTX8K-X and DTX8K-M DTX-8 Series drum kits are some of the newest additions to the Yamaha family. They come with over 700 high quality sounds and offer a natural playing experience wrapped in beautiful wood drum shells, available in premium Black Forest or Real Wood finishes. DTX8 Series kits can be ordered with a choice of two different head materials — two-ply mesh or Textured Cellular Silicone (TCS) — according to the player’s personal preferences. The advanced DTX PRO module at the heart of the kit offers a unique Kit Modifier that gives the drummer the ability to easily adjust compression, ambience and effects with the quick turn of a knob, as well as onboard recording, the ability to connect up to 11 pads or drum triggers, a USB port and a Aux input jack so the player can practice along with their favorite songs. Check out the video here.

      YTR-8335LAII B♭ TRUMPET

      A shiny brass trumpet.
      Yamaha YTR-8335LAII trumpet.

      More than a decade ago, internationally acclaimed trumpeter Wayne Bergeron joined the Yamaha development team. The initial result of that collaboration was the company’s YTR-8335LA(S) Custom model, which has now evolved to the second-generation YTR-8335LAII — an instrument sure to be coveted by trumpet players everywhere.

      The valve casing of the YTR-8335LAII (which serves as the vital “heart” of any trumpet) has been revised, resulting in brilliant high notes, accurate pitch, and rich harmonics that raise custom trumpet performance to soaring new heights. In addition, Xeno Artist Model parts (favored by top orchestra players worldwide), combined with heavy phosphor-bronze bottom valve caps, are utilized to achieve improved tonal definition and significantly better feedback to the player. The result is an instrument that is extremely efficient, with flexible tonal characteristics that can easily match the sound the player hears in their head. Available in both gold lacquer and silver-plated finishes, the YTR-8335LAII makes the ideal gift for professional and aspiring trumpeters alike. Check out the video here.

      DXR12mkII Powered Speaker / DXS15mkII Powered Subwoofer

      Performing musicians know that relying on the sound systems of the venues they play in can sometimes be a ticket to audio disaster. The best insurance policy against bad sound is to carry your own system, so one or more Yamaha DXR12mkII powered speakers paired with a DXS15mkII powered subwoofer will be a welcome gift to any budding musician, whether they belong to a band or are trying to forge a solo career.

      Because both are powered, no external amplifiers are required: simply plug microphones and instruments directly into the DXR12mkII — it has its own 3-channel mixer built in — and then make a simple connection to the DXS15mkII subwoofer for the addition of deep, rich bass that will get the audience up and pumped. And, because they can be used either as “Front of House” (i.e., facing the audience) speakers or as “monitor” (i.e., facing the performer) speakers, the DXR12mkII provides the ultimate in flexibility. This is one powerhouse combination that will fill any room with pristine sound, enabling the audience to hear every nuance of the performance. Check out the videos here and here.

       

      For more information about these and other great Yamaha music products, click here.

      Fix It: Tips for Teaching Basic Piano Technique

      Piano students often say, “My technique isn’t good enough” or “I really want to play this piece, but it’s too hard, and I feel really tight and tense.” These insecurities are often the result of not establishing healthy habits at the piano. These issues should be addressed from their very first lessons so that students can achieve their playing potential.

      In this article, I’ll address common errors seen in basic piano technique and how we, as teachers, can help our students.

      THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

      Fix It: Unbalanced Posture

      New pianists often don’t think about the way they sit at the piano. This is particularly an issue for young children who are still growing and need to sit higher and closer to the instrument. Older children and young teenagers may experience sudden growth spurts and must adjust their sitting position from week to week.

      Another common error is not keeping one’s feet flat on the ground. This can be tricky for young students whose legs aren’t long enough yet. Instilling good habits for balanced posture is the first step toward good technique, a comfortable position at the piano and continued interest in playing. So how do we fix posture?

      • Solution — There are four main components to good posture:
        • student sitting on books to be at the right height at the piano Height of the Bench: It’s important to be like Goldilocks — the bench height can’t be too high or too low. It must be just right. Generally, when someone is sitting at the piano, the arms should be about parallel to the ground, and the angle of the arms at the elbow should be about 100 degrees. I say “about” because there will be slight variations for each person. If you don’t have an adjustable bench and your student needs to sit higher, grab some books or any other type of hard surface. I keep foam squares readily available in my studio so that I can customize the height for each student.
        • Distance of the Bench from the Piano: Again, just like Goldilocks, you can’t sit too far or too close to the piano. Students should learn to be sensitive to this distance (along with the height of the bench) so they can make adjustments as they grow. Keep in mind that the angle of the arms, as mentioned earlier, should be about 100 degrees. It’s also important to sit on the front half of the bench.
        • Sitting Up Tall: In order to have full freedom and use of the whole body while playing, it’s important to sit up tall at the piano. The back shouldn’t be overarched but the student shouldn’t be slouching either. Ask students to pretend a puppet string is holding them at the top of their head.
        • Keeping Feet Flat: If a student’s legs are long enough, the feet should rest comfortably and flat on the ground. If the legs are dangling, find something to prop under the student’s feet to keep them flat. A step stool or some type of sturdy support will do. Alternatively, a few foam squares will also create the right adjustment

      Fix It: Tension in Arms

      When people start learning to play the piano, it is often tricky to find a sense of release in their arms. This will easily hamper one’s ability to play with ease.

      • Solution — To help acquire this sensation, I like to do something I call the “floppy arm exercise.” Try it for yourself!
        • Extend your arm out and have your friend to hold it. Let go of all control of your arm so that your friend is bearing all the weight. Check to make sure you’re not holding any weight in your upper arm either. Your arm should look or feel like that of a rag doll. One young student told me it felt like she had no bones. If you’re doing it correctly, your arm should fall like a dead weight once your friend removes the hand supporting your arm. If you’re not doing it correctly, your arm will remain in the air once your friend removes the support OR your arm will slightly hesitate before it “realizes” it needs to fall back down. Watch this video of the “floppy arm exercise.”
        • Another way to gain this feeling is by using a headband or some other type of elastic. Allow your wrist to hang in the headband. Move the headband up and down and from side to side. Your hand and arm should be dangling. Do this with the other arm too in order to capture the feeling on both sides.

      Once you’re able to acquire this feeling yourself, you can help your students to gain the same feeling of release.

      Fix It: Inconsistent Hand Shape

      student making Os with her thumb and index fingersStudents often will play with overly flat fingers, collapsed joints and collapsed knuckles. Playing with a compromised hand position will lead to injury and prevent students from reaching their potential. It is important to understand the key aspects of good hand position when playing the piano.

      • Solution — There are three aspects to be aware of:
        • The bridge of the hand must be round and supported. To keep the bridge, which is around the knuckles, from collapsing, ask students to hold a small ball or imagine their hand holding a bubble or an egg. I use a small dolphin toy to help my students understand the shape of the hand.
        • The fingertips must be firm, and the joints have to avoid collapsing. To help strengthen the joints, have students make O shapes with each finger connecting to the thumb (see top photo to the right). Frequent reminders will also help. At the piano, you can also assist students to understand the feeling of playing with joints that don’t collapse.
        • closeup of hand on piano keys with optimal hand position The wrist should be flexible and supple with a floating sensation. It will definitely move around depending on what the student is playing. However, the wrist should always come back to a neutral position, which is generally parallel to the ground (see bottom photo to the right). Once the bridge of the hand and finger joints have strengthened, students can practice maintaining their hand position while moving the wrist in circles. They won’t be doing this motion while playing the piano, but it will help them to understand the range of motion.

      By addressing these important physical aspects early on in lessons, you’ll be setting up your students for success. They’ll be able to play progressively more difficult music, and they’ll feel physically comfortable doing it. It will help to keep them interested in playing piano for years to come!

      Prioritization: Accentuate the Right Things

      I once heard a music professor say, “if everything is accented, nothing is accented.” We’ve all seen a 16-bar phrase of music with every note accented. When we play the ink precisely as it is written, the music sounds like the teacher from Charlie Brown — monotonous, boring and predictable.

      I’ve often translated this lesson to other parts of my life, specifically my career and personal workload. Accent means an emphasis on a pitch. Emphasis means to put stress on something. Stress is not always bad, but we risk becoming overloaded and burned out if everything is stressed.

      Enter teaching in 2021. School, state and federal mandates must be adhered to, on top of the typical teacher requirements like planning, grading and other tasks that are not student contact hours.

      Every year, the fight to keep teaching as one of the top priorities becomes more difficult. Just because something is noisy doesn’t mean it’s the most important.

      Furthermore, when you ask anyone for advice on prioritizing tasks, you may get some helpful advice, but usually, you hear people’s opinions on what is important to them. I’ve had many colleagues and supervisors tell me that it’s OK to say “no” or “no big rush on this” — and sometimes, they mean it.

      Bottom line, there are specific non-negotiable tasks and projects you must do. As an employee of a business, you signed a contract agreeing to fulfill these tasks. Some of these tasks are directly laid out in your job description, but many fall under a catchall statement that says something like “all other tasks as required by the supervisor.”

      Even so, I believe that teachers have some agency in what we can prioritize. We can be productive in a healthier sense by setting some boundaries, properly managing our workload and determining what is essential.

      Boundaries: Protect Classroom Time

      male music educator conducting in front of band Our jobs must remain focused on the following two items: 1) ensure the safety of our students and 2) educating our students.

      We already know how vital safety is, and it’s a good bet that your school has many systems in place to ensure this. So, on to our classroom time.

      As a teacher, the direct contact we have with our students in our planned classroom and rehearsal time is of the utmost importance. This time should be treated as precious and non-negotiable. Even if you have little control over your classroom time, this is the most direct impact you will have on students. There is no substitute for human interaction and direct teaching, guidance and learning.

      Teachers should make every effort to avoid the insidious nature of administrative tasks infecting classroom time. This is easier said than done. I’ve been teaching for 15 years, and I occasionally break this rule but quickly recognize when I do and get back on the tasks that actually matter. I regret the early years in my career when I put students into sectionals simply to catch up on administrative work.

      Some teaching moments can organically come out of administrative tasks. For example, some instruments may have common faults. Depending on the age of your students, you can show them during class how to do some minor repairs to instruments. Take five minutes to adjust a loose screw with an eyeglass screwdriver, and you’ve potentially saved yourself time in the future. Furthermore, you’re providing an opportunity for student autonomy.

      Other administrative tasks can wait. When we say “yes” to checking email, we are saying “no” to interacting with our students. You may also be in a situation where other teachers want to pull kids out of your class to finish a test or project. We have field trips and events that occasionally pull students out of a day, but I never ask students to complete work for me during another teacher’s class. The more this is entertained, the more other teachers will ask for your kids to leave your class. And then you have more work, later on, to catch them up.

      Besides administrative tasks, there are other “time burglars” that can rob you of your precious time without you even knowing it. Read my article on some common time burglars and how to address them.

      Manage Your Workload

      tablet with

      Work Within a System: I love lists and organization systems and have tried almost every system under the sun. After years of vetting, combining and tweaking systems, I’ve come up with a practical, reliable and boring system that works for me. It’s primarily based on David Allen’s Getting Things Done (GTD) system combined with the Todoist app and a notebook.

      I put all my tasks in Todoist. If I’m ever without a digital device and think of a few to-dos, I write them down in a notebook and transfer it over to Todoist later. Within the app, I list my projects, and the tasks within projects are managed by what is actionable, when I can do it, where I can do it and how long it’s going to take. Tasks are worded in a clear, direct and actionable way. For example, “Call performance venue to get price for three-hour concert rental on November 21.”

      The GTD system says to engage with all your projects consistently. This did not work for me because I like to dig in and complete at least one project every week or two. So, I rank my projects and focus on getting to completion as best as I can. If I have to wait for someone to complete a task to move forward on a project, that project is demoted to “waiting.” I then make a note to follow up with that person.

      focus on the 2 on a clock One list I particularly like is my two-minute task list. According to the GTD system, if a task takes two minutes or less, you should just do it and not have it take up valuable real estate in your schedule or brain. I agree with this but learned that these small tasks can get out of control if not approached correctly. First and foremost, planned-out tasks come first. Emergencies can wedge their way into my planned time, but nothing else. I reserve two-minute tasks for either a specific time of day or transition time. Sitting at a meeting and the presenter is 10 minutes late? Use that time to complete five tasks. Teaching a private lesson, and the student is pulled out for an early release by the office? Knock a couple of two-minute tasks off the list.

      A word of caution: don’t get addicted to completing two-minute tasks to feel a sense of accomplishment. Focus on these tasks during breaks or short specific times of the day; otherwise, you might get caught up trying to complete as many as possible instead of focusing on more profound work.

      Bring Solutions, Not Problems: One of my cooperating teachers shared an insightful piece of wisdom: “When you complain, people have two reactions — 1) they don’t care or 2) they’re just glad whatever you’re going through isn’t happening to them.”

      Most people are sympathetic and even empathetic to our issues, but they aren’t likely to actively work to find a solution that will further us. If you need help from an administrator, by all means ask them for help, but bring them at least a few examples of what you have done to help your situation or some thoughts on possible solutions. For example, say, “I have a situation I need help with. I have tried these three things, but I haven’t been able to gain any ground on this issue. Do you have any other ideas?”

      Use Your Teaching Assistants: I have 120 teaching assistants — they just happen to be my students. Every week, set aside some time for planning. Go through your list of what needs to happen and who can do it. At my school, students cannot submit attendance due to privacy issues, but they can set up chairs and stands, file music and monitor the supplies cabinet.

      We’re a Title I school, and we provide all items for students, and most items are stored in a cabinet. I designate a student to be our supplies cabinet manager, and he or she monitors the stock and distribution of reeds, valve oil, grease, sticks and related articles. When we are running low, the student emails me a list of what needs to be reordered. I show the student how to format the email so I can forward it directly to our music store rep (budget permitting).

      We regularly have parents who help out as well, especially with smaller-scale projects. One year, I needed 200 letters stuffed into envelopes. I called a parent and asked if she could help with this. This parent had expressed in the past that she wished she could help more but couldn’t commit a significant time to help because of work. She said she could help, and I sent the envelopes and letters home with the student. They came back stuffed the next day, ready for labeling. The parent was proud she could help out with her child’s music program, no matter the size of the job. I used my free time to fix yet another broken instrument.

      Outsourcing Is OK:  If you have the money or resources, outsource what you can. This section includes some harsh realities and things I have said to myself.

      • the word delegate written on transparent wipe board Harsh Reality #1: Only I can make the perfect concert program. I spent hours selecting all fonts, finding the ideal graphics and template, and triple-checking all names. 
        • People don’t care who designs the program, as long as you don’t use Comic Sans or Papyrus fonts (sorry, not sorry). They just care that it’s done. Spend $50 at the local print shop to create the program or ask a music parent volunteer to take on this task. Just triple-check the names yourself, so you don’t leave off the euphoniums again.
      • Harsh Reality #2: I listened to every single student play their chair placement assessment because I am a devoted music educator. At 120 kids submitting three-minute assessments, this was 360 minutes of recordings. Assuming I did at least three minutes of writing and feedback for each student, this was now 720 minutes on this task. I spent close to 12 hours on this one task, but it was worth it because I listened to every kid and gave feedback! 
        • Yes, it’s important to hear each student individually, but you may be able to do this during class and provide real-time feedback in a quicker, more organic way. This took two or three hours out of your day for at least a week. Based on your energy levels, did the kid that had their assessment listened to at hour three get the same quality of feedback as the kid in hour one of your listenings? Or did you maybe get a little tired and rushed to get through these? Save time. Although you are good at giving feedback to students, so are others. If you digitally record assessments, send them to trusted colleagues who are experts in the specific instrument or voice parts. Use an ID number instead of student names to protect privacy, email the recording and Google Doc, and set a deadline.
      • Harsh Reality #3: I feel guilty about outsourcing certain items that aren’t necessarily in my job description because I feel that I should be doing them myself.
        • Who said you should be doing these items yourself? Besides, if you have the money in your budget to ease your workload while benefiting the students, there’s nothing to feel guilty about! If you don’t have money in your budget, you have two options: do it yourself or find volunteers. Think of it this way — you are already participating in outsourcing because you are the one being outsourced to teach music as an employee in your district. You may also be hiring someone else to teach voice lessons, write drill or fix instruments.

      You will soon realize that no one cares who did a specific job; they just want the job done correctly and on time. Just give credit where credit is due.

      Determine Importance

      a pile of important signs with exclamation point What is actually important? As a professional, you know there are certain non-negotiables in your job. Teachers must complete IEP/504 reports, attendance, grades, mandated reporter tasks and promptly return parent emails and phone calls. If you ask yourself, “What are they going to do, fire me?” and the answer is “yes,” then those tasks are important and must be completed accurately and on time.

      Now, let’s move on to some other tasks. Here’s an activity: Rank these tasks in order of importance:

        • Complete an IEP report that is due in one week
        • Complete an IEP report that is due tomorrow
        • Respond to an administrator email about contract tracing in your class
        • Replace the cork on a saxophone neck
        • Select music for the next concert cycle
        • Book a piano tuner and request payment
        • File music from the previous concert
        • Clear your email inbox
        • Lesson planning
        • Respond to a superintendent’s request for a group to play at a local event.
        • Reply to a parent email marked “high priority” about a fundraiser that is due in three weeks.

      Now ask yourself a few questions:

        • Who is the best and most appropriate person for each of these jobs?
        • What happens if I just don’t do the task?
        • Do I have to do this today?
        • Will it make things worse if I put this off?
        • Can someone else do this?
        • Will it take me longer right now to teach someone else to do this?
        • If this is not a legally/contractually required task, will my group learn/sound better if this task is completed?
        • When is the best time to complete a specific task?
        • Who is this task actually crucial to?
        • Is this a task that must be done, should be done or that I want to be done?

      You can quickly figure out what will and won’t put students’ safety and education at risk or your job in the above list. Some of the tasks genuinely are important, but are they important right now? Sure, the superintendent is contacting you, but saxophone kid can’t play until that neck-cork is fixed. The word “superintendent” holds a lot of mental weight, but I know that my superintendent would completely understand if I didn’t get back to her immediately because I was making sure a kid was able to play his instrument.

      Other tasks could be done by someone else. Most of these tasks must be done by you, but there’s no reason you couldn’t show and then ask student helpers to file music. Another option is to simply not do specific tasks. In the case of filing music, you could actually just leave it in a pile. You may be a person that’s OK with the mess, or you may be a person who gets mentally drained seeing unorganized things, but not doing some of these lower-level tasks is an option.

      Depending on the time of year, energy level, etc., I would separate this list into the following three groupings.

      • today's list in spiral bound notebook Today / High Priority / Must Be Done
        • Respond to an administrator email about contract tracing in your class — high priority, safety issue.
        • Complete an IEP report that is due tomorrow — this is a hard deadline and a document that has legal ramifications.
        • Lesson planning — this will require a significant part of my mental energy, so I would complete this before moving on to the next set of tasks
      • Today / Would Be Nice to Get Done
        • Replace the cork on a saxophone neck — if I have a stock of saxophones necks that I can clean and loan out, this is pushed to a later date
        • Book a piano tuner and request payment — do this within the next two days because district finances take a long time to process
        • Respond to a superintendent’s request for a group to play at a local event — our superintendent is busy and knows how busy everyone else is; she will understand if I have other pressing tasks to get to first
        • Clear your email inbox — this would be helpful, but if I can’t get to it, I will at least check email to make sure there are no new action items.
      • Not Today — if on the slim chance, I finish everything above, I may engage with this list a little
        • Complete an IEP report that is due in one week — this can be done up to the due date; it’s on my radar, but other items take priority.
        • Select music for the next concert cycle — this is important, so I want to carve out a chunk of time to dig into it. I would rewrite this task as “schedule two one-hour time blocks to begin selecting music for next concert” and put it on my tasks for tomorrow.
        • File music from the previous concert — take this off my plate and delegate to some students
        • Reply to a parent email marked “high priority” about a fundraiser that is due in three weeks — respond during my next email engagment time OR delegate to the parent running the fundraiser

      You Decide What Is High Priority: Just because someone says a task is important doesn’t mean that it actually is. You will receive emails that are marked high priority, and in some cases, this is true. But in most cases, you are the one to determine whether a task is a high priority to you. The email sender feels that this is an important task, but he or she does not know your schedule or priorities.

      You may also find yourself in a situation where the superintendent, principal and your department chair each sends you something that is a high priority. This can be a real dilemma, especially for newer teachers. In these cases, use your best judgment. You have a few options. If two tasks will be five minutes apiece and one will take at least half an hour, knock out the quick tasks first and then focus your energy on the more extended task. If they are all equal in energy and time, you can complete them by paygrade/ranking. That’s right — the higher position in the district gets his or her task completed first.

      Don’t Be Surprised by Things You Know Are Going to Happen: Every year, I have colleagues who get upset that they have to complete tasks for their teaching evaluation. They don’t want to do it, don’t think it helps and complain about it. This is wasted energy. This is a requirement of your school, district and state — you have to do it. Accept it. Complaining about it may be therapeutic, but it does absolutely no good for you.

      If you are incredibly passionate about things like this, consider lobbying or directing your efforts toward places or organizations that may impact these things. I’m not saying to be a mindless zombie and accept everything at face value, but certain aspects of teaching are never going away. People who have jobs must be evaluated regularly. You know it’s coming. Accepting things like this doesn’t change the fact that they’re frustrating, but it can free up some mental energy.

      This acceptance strategy can be applied to your daily schedule as well. If you know that every day will have interruptions, including administrative requests, broken instruments or surprise reports, plan on this. In my position, I can count on about 50% of my planning time as my own and 50% allotted for surprises, emergencies or wherever else I would like to give my time to. Days that don’t have emergencies or surprises are counted as a bonus.

      woman with serious look on face and open hand held out in front of her as if to say stopJust Say “No”: Many of us already say “no” frequently. When you say “yes” to something, you will end up saying “no” to something else. This isn’t a bad thing; the reality is that everything just takes time, and time is finite.

      I’m naturally a people pleaser, so I’ve had to work hard on this one. If you are overwhelmed, and something is presented to you where you have a choice, say “no.” And unless it’s a part of your contract, do not explain why! When you explain why you are saying “no,” other people will automatically go into problem-solving mode to convince you to take on this oh-so-important task. All you need to say is, “Thanks for thinking of us, but we’re unable to help.”

      Being direct is OK. If you want to be polite, say, “No, I can’t do this right now, but check with me in a few weeks,” but you have to be OK with someone checking back with you in a few weeks. I’ve found that people are tougher than I give them credit for; they can handle a direct “no.”

      Saying “yes” to someone else for something you really don’t want or need to do is potentially saying “no” to yourself. And you should treat yourself well. People look out for their own best interests, and you should do this as well.

      Sometimes the medium can distort the message. If you are concerned with getting misconstrued over email or text due to someone misreading your tone, pick up the phone or visit the person to deliver the “no.” It’s also good practice if you’re not used to standing up for yourself. If you follow a script, you will be surprised at how assertive you can be.

      A music teacher’s job continually presents more challenges, opportunities and work. Remember, you are responsible for getting your work done and taking charge of your personal and professional growth. Others may try to make their priorities your priorities. We are employees, and we do have to adhere to whatever system we are in, but with some adjustments, a push toward personal agency and putting your kids and yourself first, you can reduce the noise of urgency put upon you. You are in charge of what is important to you!

      5 Time Burglars to Avoid

      Time is a precious commodity. As music teachers, we not only have to protect classroom time, but we have to carve out a few minutes (or hours!) here and there to take care of our must-do, non-negotiable tasks.

      In order to be as productive as possible, you must be mindful of the things that distract you — time burglars — and how to deal with them. Here are my top 5 time burglars and how I have learned to take my time back from them.

      Time Burglar #1: Email

      email envelopes flying off a smart phone In 2007, I remember thinking, “Wow, this is so cool! I can get my email on my phone!” That was before I knew better.

      Digital boundaries are challenging ones to enforce. Email is one of the biggest time burglars. Think of an email inbox as a to-do list where other people ask or tell you what to do. Unless you are a mid- to upper-level administrator, there is little to no reason why you should be accessible by email 24 hours a day.

      I check email three times a day, and I also use those times to send out any messages. I write a note on my to-do list if I think of a message I have to send someone, but I don’t send out emails outside of school hours.

      I’ve also been guilty of writing novels over email. My new rule is to pick up the phone and call if it takes longer than three sentences. I break this rule when I know I’m dealing with a professional human-time burglar.

      If your very first task is to check email every morning, you may be subconsciously telling yourself that other people’s work comes first. Yes, this may be work that only you can do, but consider experimenting for a week. Take just 10 minutes to knock out something small that you know you have to do at the start of your day. Then, check email to see what others want you to do.

      Time Burglar #2: Active Procrastination

      Have you ever carved out time to do a crucial task, only to get distracted by dozens of other small tasks? You probably fib a little to yourself, don’t you? I sure do. I tell myself, “No, I didn’t actually do the thing that I needed to get done, but I did check off 10 other minor tasks!” Never mind the fact that those minor tasks could have waited, been done by someone else or not been done at all.

      Active procrastination is hands down my worst time burglar. If I even stray a little bit and check my email or take a look at another project, I’m toast. It’s a focus thing for me, and it’s incredibly addicting to keep racking up those checked-off tasks.

      Remember Dug, the dog from the Pixar movie “Up?” He’d cut off mid-sentence to exclaim “Squirrel!” whenever he thought he saw something move. My solution? I remove the possibility of being distracted by “squirrels.” First, I lock my phone and smartwatch in a drawer. Then, I write down the action items for my current project on a sheet of paper or a notecard. I focus best when I work without a computer and away from everyone. My wife and I have five kids, so it can be challenging to find time alone, but it’s not impossible. Sometimes I’ll sit in the yard or on the patio with my back facing the house.

      man sitting in a coffee shop in front of laptop with headphones on If I use my computer, I stay focused thanks to a few timers that block certain time-wasting websites. Furthermore, recognizing locations where you work best will help you avoid burgling time from yourself. When I have some extended writing or computer work to do, my go-to productive environment is a coffee shop where I sit with my laptop and headphones, listening to idle chatter and the ambient sounds of a café from a website called Coffitivity. (And yes, I see the redundancy of sitting in a coffee shop while listening to fake coffee shop sounds, but it keeps me from getting up and socializing with every table.)

      According to a theory called Parkinson’s Law, the work you have to do will expand to fill the time you have. In my case, active procrastination often works hand in hand with Parkinson’s Law. For example, if I allot two hours for preparing concert programs, programming literature or checking email, it will take two hours. Add a few tasks to that list, and the workload magically adjusts to fit the timeframe. So, in an accidental “Inception”-type moment, our planning and perception of time itself may be a time burglar. And now I’ve gone farther away from reality, so back to Earth, and on to…

      Time Burglar #3: Broken Instruments/Equipment

      clarinets during marching band event Oh, the countless times I’ve had an excellent plan for my free period, only to be presented with a pile of plastic, rods, screws and unidentified objects. (It’s always bass clarinets, right?)

      Some of these broken instrument issues can be addressed with preventive and routine maintenance, such as regular reminders to oil valves, grease slides and corks, loosen bows when not in use and complete standard instrument care checks. Once a month, ask students to check for any loose screws on their instruments (because tightening a screw takes five seconds but looking for a screw on the floor is a lost cause).

      But instruments and equipment will eventually require surprise repairs. In my case, this is a time burglar that I allow to happen. If you’re lucky, you’ll have a stock of extra instruments that can quickly be loaned out to a student rather than making a quick fix during class. I have come to accept that broken equipment is inevitable and that it is a priority for me to address the situation quickly. However, do not get too far into problem-solving mode because you’ll end up wasting time you don’t have. My general rule is that if I don’t have the proper tool to fix the instrument, I can’t complete the job. So, I’ll send it to the shop and focus my efforts on finding a short-term replacement instead.

      Time Burglar #4: Things You Don’t Have to Do

      This is a big one and a relative to active procrastination. Ask yourself: Does a specific job actually need to be done? If it does, does it have to be done by you? (In my article, “Prioritization: Accentuate the Right Things,” I list several tasks you can outsource.)

      Tasks that are unnecessary or that are better suited to be done by others, rob you of time you can spend completing your goals, projects and missions. We have a finite amount of energy each day and if we spend time on unnecessary tasks, burnout is a real possibility. Do not take time away from chasing and living your passion because once you go bankrupt, it’s hard (but not impossible) to build back up.

      Take a look at your current list of tasks. Is there at least one that can be deleted, shelved temporarily or deferred politely to someone else? Think of it in another way — if you do all the work yourself, you are now the burglar! You are stealing all the opportunities for yourself, instead of giving others the chance to grow, experience and be a part of your team. This is a harsh statement, but it has kept me in check over the years.

      Time Burglar #5: Colleagues

      man sitting at desk in front of laptop looking annoyed at a female colleague

      You know who these people are. You enjoy talking with them. They’re probably even friends. But you had 20 minutes to get some reports and grading done, and this person stole all this time! You always end up behind on your work when they visit. You might even wonder, “don’t they have any work to do?” You’ve just come face-to-face with a time burglar.

      Confession time: I’m a reformed-time burglar. I used to come in very early at a previous job to get most of my work done. I had a 20-minute break in the middle of the day, and I would drop in and visit the orchestra director. This became a habit and something that I looked forward to. I completely missed the social cues of his “uh-huh, uh-huh, yeah” responses while simultaneously typing on his computer.

      These are the most challenging time burglars to deal with. You don’t want to be mean, and you might actually welcome the break from all your work. If you have conflict-avoidance tendencies, this may be absolute torture to address. But ask yourself, “Who’s time is more important?”

      Consider packaging it this way. Say, “I really love talking to you, and I enjoy sharing these war stories with you. I’m apprehensive about bringing this up, but I only have so much time to get some pretty important things done. Can we chat later?”

      So, how did my colleague handle it? He was a little blunter, but I needed to hear it. He calmly yet firmly said, “I love chatting with you, Don, but this is the only 20 minutes I get to work on some particular tasks. You are welcome to come and sit in the office, but I’m just letting you know that this work is my priority right now. Pick a bar and grill for you and me to go to next week, and we can have a couple of uninterrupted hours to visit.”

      Finally, there’s this option — put them to work. “Hey, it’s great that you stopped by. I need some help with a few tasks. Can you help out?” Two things will likely happen: 1) the time burglar will say “yes,” and you get some help, or 2) the time burglar will suddenly have some work that he or she has to do on their own and exit gracefully. Win-win situation.

      Let us know about time burglars that you have encountered and conquered. Email us at educators@yamaha.com.

      How to Clean Earbuds and Headphones

      Earbuds and headphones get gross. Quick.

      That’s a simple fact. So if you don’t clean your headphones and earbuds regularly, here are two good reasons to rethink things. First, especially when it comes to earbuds, it’s a matter of health. You don’t want to continually put something in your ear that might have bacteria on it. Cleaning earbuds also helps them function better because you’ll be removing ear wax, dirt, dust and other foreign substances from the drivers that can impede the sound waves.

      Headphones get dirty too. Although they don’t contact your ear like earbuds do, they have a lot more surface area that can pick up dust and dirt.

      In this article, we’ll show you a simple, effective method for cleaning earbuds and headphones without doing any damage.

      Cleaning Earbuds

      Experts recommend cleaning earbuds (whether wired or wireless) once a month, though it depends on how heavy your usage is; if you wear them a lot every day, you might want to clean them more often. If you’re not sure if they’re ready for cleaning, just take a close look at them. You’ll know right away.

      You can purchase kits made for cleaning earbuds (they’re the same as the ones for cleaning hearing aids) that come with all the necessary supplies, but you really don’t need to go to that expense, because you can do a fine job with some common household items. Here’s what you’ll need:

      • A clean, dry soft toothbrush
      • Cotton swabs
      • Some rubbing alcohol or a couple of rubbing alcohol pads
      • A toothpick
      • A couple of small microfiber cloths — the kind you use for cleaning glasses
      • (Optional) A small amount of a moldable putty such as Blu-Tack® or Loctite® Fun-Tak®
      Closeup of the elements of an earbud cleaning kit.

      Important: If you’re cleaning wireless earbuds, make sure to turn them off before you get started. If you leave them on and accidentally get liquid into the drivers, you could damage or ruin them.

      Here are step-by-step directions for cleaning earbuds:

      IMG 1630 X 1000
      1. If your earbuds have ear tips, gently pull them off and put them on a flat surface nearby.
      IMG 1634 X 1000
      2. Do the first cleaning pass with the toothbrush. Gently brush the driver (speaker) area of each earbud. Brush gently, and don’t put a lot of downward pressure on the driver, or you can cause damage. As you brush, use gravity to your advantage: try to keep the earbuds pointed down, or at least angled down more than 45 degrees. If you have them right-side-up, some particles might stay on the grille of the driver, particularly around the edges. You want the gunk that you dislodge to fall off.
      IMG 1639 X 1000
      3. Brushing should get rid of a lot of the foreign matter, but probably not all of it. If you still see dirt and gunk on some parts of the earbuds, dampen one side of a cotton swab with a small amount of alcohol or water (check the manual for your earbuds to see which is recommended; rubbing alcohol is recommended for cleaning Yamaha headphones and earbuds). Make sure it’s just damp, not dripping wet. Now use the swab to clean the earbud anywhere you see dirt, keeping the pressure light.
      IMG 1640 X 1000
      4. Use the toothpick to gently scrape away any gunk around the edges of the driver. Go slowly and carefully!
      IMG 1644 X 1000
      5. If you still can’t get your earbuds completely clean, take a small amount of moldable putty and press it gently against the dirty area, then remove it. The stickiness of the putty should be able to pull the dirt off.
      IMG 1646 X 1000
      6. Now that the earbuds themselves are clean, let’s go back to those ear tips that you put aside. Assuming they’re the silicone type (which most are), you can wipe them down with an alcohol-dipped swab or an alcohol pad. Make sure to turn them inside out and clean the inner surface — that’s where most of the dirt, dust and gunk accumulates. Unless contraindicated in your earbud’s owners manual, alcohol is a better choice than water here because it not only cleans, it disinfects too, plus it evaporates quickly. Alternatively, you could just dip the ear tips in warm, soapy water. Either way, give your ear tips and ear buds time to dry completely before you use them.

      Cleaning Headphones

      Headphones typically don’t get as filthy as earbuds because they only go on your ears, not in them. Still, they can get dusty and dirty.

      The illustration below shows the names of the parts of a pair of headphones: The earcups (sometimes known as earpieces) are the left and right-side housings connected by the headband. The earcups have ear cushions on top of them. Those cushions are the only part of the headphones that touch your ears directly.

      Diagram of headphones with parts identified.
      Headphone part names.

      Here are step-by-step directions for cleaning headphones, using the same materials listed above:

      IMG 1650 X 1000
      1. Extend the headband to its maximum length so that all the surface area is showing. Lightly dampen a microfiber cloth with water and wipe down the band and any outer plastic or metal parts, including the outer sides of the ear cups if your headphones are of the closed-back variety. If they’re open-back (which you can tell because the ear cups have vents on the outside), use only a dry cloth on the outer ear cups since you don’t want to get any moisture in the electronics.
      IMG 1658 X 1000
      2. How you clean the ear cushions depends on the material they’re made of. If they’re some sort of rubber or leather (faux or real), wipe them down with a microfiber cloth that’s been lightly dampened with warm, soapy water, then dry them with another microfiber cloth. If the cushions are made of foam, don’t use any water at all — just wipe them with a dry microfiber cloth to remove any loose dirt.
      IMG 1661 X 1000
      3. Replaceable ear cushions can be removed before cleaning the driver-side surface of the ear cups, but it can sometimes be difficult to get them back on as tightly as they were when new, so this isn’t recommended. Instead, simply clean around their inside edges. Take a dry cotton swab and, without putting any downward pressure on the driver, rub it around the inner circumference of the ear cups, going under the ear cushions.
      IMG 1667 X 1000
      4. Finally, use a soft, dry microfiber cloth to lightly dust the mesh of the drivers. Again, avoid putting downward pressure onto the driver.

      Cleaning Connectors

      If you’re using wired earbuds or headphones, you can keep the connector clean by wiping it with an alcohol-dampened cloth or alcohol pad; then, wipe it again with a dry cloth to get all the alcohol off (it can leave a residue). You can wipe the cable down in a similar fashion. You can also clean connectors with a can of compressed air, but compressed air should not be used to clean drivers or cushions, as it can damage them.

      One last note: It’s always a good idea to check the cleaning section in the manual for your particular earbuds or headphones first, in case the manufacturer has specific instructions or caveats when it comes to cleaning.

       

      Click here for more information about Yamaha wireless earbuds and headphones.

      Learning to Solo

      For many listeners, there is no greater thrill than when the song allows one of the musicians to step out and take a soaring solo. In fact, in jazz and blues, it is often the improvisational soloing that is the entire point of the performance, with the song merely serving as a vehicle to allow the musician to express themselves in their own unique way.

      For the beginning keyboardist, it can be difficult to comprehend how to create a memorable solo over nothing more than a chord (or chord progression) and the groove provided by the rest of the band. If you’ve been wondering just that, read on …

      You Need a Foundation

      The best place to start is to learn what notes sound good with the chord that is being played. And the obvious first choice is the notes of the chord itself! That’s the concept that we discussed in this posting, when we started arpeggiating through chord progressions.

      But many opportunities to solo on pop, rock and blues songs require you to play over a single chord for several bars (or more), so just using the root, third, fifth and seventh of a chord won’t allow you to create the types of interesting solo phrases you’ll want to play. Let’s explore two different scales so common in pop/rock music that they will give you a jump-start on sounding good right away.

      The Blues Scales

      There are two versions of what are known as blues scales; becoming comfortable and proficient with them is a great place to begin learning how to solo. The first is called the Major blues scale, shown below:

      Musical annotation.

      This scale contains the root, third and fifth of the major and dominant seventh chords shown above the stave, along with the 2nd and 6th notes of the major scale. What makes it bluesy is the added flatted-third tone (in this case the E-flat). While these are good notes to use to craft solos from, all too often beginning players just play the scale in succession, which is alright, but not very interesting. You want to use these notes to create interesting melodies, not just run up (or down) the scale. Here are two suggestions (the audio clip starts with two bars to establish the groove):

      Musical annotation.

      Notice that at no time in either of these phrases do I just play the scale — in fact, I don’t even start on the root C note. I also varied my rhythms to keep the lines interesting. (The rhythm and feel of your solos can be almost more important than the note choices.)

      These suggestions don’t include the flatted seventh that is an important part of the chord, despite the fact that this scale can be used on a Dominant seventh chord. Here’s a variation of the scale that adds in that important note:

      Musical annotation.

      Now we can craft some melodic ideas that support the full sound of the Dominant seventh chord, like this:

      Musical annotation.

      The second blues scale (shown below) is actually the most common one:

      Musical annotation.

      When this scale is played over a major or Dominant seventh chord, the flatted third, sharp fourth/flatted fifth and flat seventh all contribute to the tension and character of the phrases, which is what makes it sound bluesy. Notice that this scale doesn’t even include the major third. It sounds equally good on a minor seventh chord, where the flatted third fits in as expected. Here are a few licks crafted from the scale, played against both Dominant seventh and minor seventh chords:

      Musical annotation.

       

      As we did with the major blues scale, if we add the note that’s missing to help outline the Dominant seventh chord, we get an even more interesting version. Here’s what the scale looks and sounds like when we add in the major, or natural third:

      Musical annotation.

      Here are a few phrases using this scale variation against the Dominant seventh chord:

      Musical annotation.

      Blues Scales in Action

      Now let’s apply these blues scales in the context of a song. The blues form is a classic song style, consisting of 12 bars that repeat, as follows:

      The illustration below shows the notes of the corresponding major blues scale (with the added flatted 7) for each chord to give you a reference for the notes we are going to use.

      Musical annotation.

      Here are some melodic solo ideas that utilize a different scale for each chord change:

      Musical annotation.

      When it comes to the basic blues scale, it’s common practice to use only the scale from the key center, and to not change to the related blues scales for the other chords in the progression. In fact, many blues players just stick with the key center blues scale for their entire solo, even if the progression has more chords than the basic blues form.

      That said, you can add some variety to your solo by changing your major blues scale note choices for each chord, and then occasionally just play a key center blues lick over any chord. As an example, check out this next solo, where I always use the C blues scale over the F7 and G7 chords, even though I vary between regular and major blues scale notes for the C7 chords:

      Musical annotation.
      All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

       

      Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

      Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

      Step Up to a Better Bass

      Many beginner basses are fairly well built and relatively easy to play, but they can be limiting for players who want more refined qualities and the kind of playability and tonal flexibility that a starter instrument simply can’t deliver. Here are some key reasons why you should consider stepping up to a better bass.

      Better Tone

      One area where intermediate- and professional-level basses tend to offer a distinct improvement is the selection of tonewoods used for their bodies and necks — a factor that has a huge impact on sound quality. With beginner basses, manufacturers often utilize non-traditional, cost-effective options, but “step-up” basses are almost always constructed from premium tonewoods.

      For example, Yamaha BB400 Series basses like the four-string BB434 and five-string BB435 feature alder bodies for strong, full-focused mids and lows, along with a five-piece maple/mahogany bolt-on neck topped with a rosewood fingerboard for crisp highs coupled with the earthy warmth of mahogany and rosewood. The BB434M model features the same construction, except it comes equipped with a maple fingerboard for a slightly brighter tone.

      BB434 X 350
      Yamaha BB434.

      BB434M X 350
      Yamaha BB434M.

      All three BB400 models benefit from a bridge that incorporates diagonal “body-through” stringing for improved transfer of string vibrations to the body. They also utilize a unique six-bolt miter neck joint design, which can be found on many higher-end Yamaha basses. This holds the neck closer and tighter to the body than standard bolt-on designs. It’s a subtle feature that could easily be overlooked, but it’s important since that joint is the critical connection point where vibrational energy is transferred from the neck to the body.

      If you’re in search of that deep “played-in” bass sound, you should consider stepping up to a Yamaha BB Pro Series bass such as the four-string BBP34 or five-string BBP35. These utilize the company’s proprietary Initial Response Acceleration (I.R.A.) technology, which accelerates the maturation of the basses by applying specific vibrations during the manufacturing process. These vibrations release the stresses between the wood and finish, neck and fingerboard, and body and hardware to deliver better sound and playability. Whenever I play my BBP34, I’m struck by how perfect it sounds … and I suspect this treatment is a big part of the reason why.

      Bass guitar.
      Yamaha BBP34.

      Better Feel

      Perhaps the biggest difference between a starter bass and an intermediate or pro model lies in the feel of the instrument — things like the contours of the body, how it balances around your neck when slung over your shoulders, and the comfort of the neck’s profile, curvature, width and thickness from the nut all the way up to the upper register where the neck meets the body.

      Manufacturers of starter basses must make difficult sacrifices in order to be able to produce a great beginner instrument at a low price point. This often means you get a solidly built bass with a simpler approach that bypasses some finer details. Yamaha TRBX600 Series basses provide a great example of what you may have been missing out on. Both the TRBX604FM four-string and TRBX605FM five-string models sport a curvaceous alder/maple laminate body that’s carefully sculpted to nestle up against you (rather than bang into you) while playing. Furthermore, they hang perfectly balanced around your shoulders — and when a bass’ weight is well-distributed, it leaves you free to focus on playing rather than worrying about lower back pain after standing upright for an entire set.

      Bass guitar.
      Yamaha TRBX604FM.

      TRBX600 Series basses also feature a super-comfy neck design with a satin polyurethane finish that’s fast to the touch and a profile that enables easy access to the upper frets without requiring hand contortions and awkward stretches. It feels right wherever you are on the neck — not too skinny, not too fat — making it a great choice for whatever style of music you play.

      Better Looks

      Whether it’s a worn-in pair of shoes or an older car that gets great mileage and never breaks down, there’s a soft spot in my heart for function over form. But when I can get my hands on function and form at the same time, sign me up — who wouldn’t want a great-looking bass that plays and sounds great?

      To my eyes, the Yamaha TRBX Series basses qualify as serious eye candy (as well as being top-notch instruments), particularly the ones with the flamed maple tops, such as the aforementioned TRBX604FM and TRBX605FM models. No matter which finish you choose — translucent black, dark red burst, gloss polyurethane, matte amber or natural satin — it’s enough to get my heart pumping.

      Bass guitar.
      Yamaha TRBX605FM.

      I’m also a sucker for Yamaha Signature basses such as the Attitude 30th and Attitude Limited 3 (both Billy Sheehan models), as well as the John Pattituci TRBPH2, Nathan East BBNE2 and Peter Hook BBPH, in part because of their looks. Breathtaking beauty is to be expected from highly customized instruments such as these, and they all deliver just that.

      Attitude30th X 350
      Yamaha Attitude 30th.

      Trbjp2 X 350
      Yamaha TRBPH2.

      BBNE2 X 350
      Yamaha BBNE2.

      BBPH X 350
      Yamaha BBPH.

      Better Craftsmanship

      It almost goes without saying that the better the bass, the better the craftmanship that goes into it. My favorite way to demonstrate this to friends is to put my Yamaha BBP34 in their lap with the neck joint facing upward and point out how perfect it is. No gaps, no wiggling in the pocket, no uneven tolerances — it’s dead-on.

      When it comes to basses (in fact, when it comes to most musical instruments), you often get what you pay for. When you step up to a higher-level bass, you’ll notice the difference in craftsmanship, which, along with other factors we’ve discussed (such as choice of tonewood, as well as things like neck design and bridge type), leads to improved tonal quality.

      Better Technology

      You’re more likely to encounter features like extra tone controls, extra pickups and active electronics (as opposed to passive) in a “step-up” bass. Intermediate- and professional-level basses also tend to have better quality pickups than starter instruments. For example, the YGD Custom V5 pickups found in Yamaha BB400 Series basses have been tweaked to deliver the classic BB Series vintage tone, along with the capability to dial in extra brightness to cut through the mix in live performances. And then there are the advanced Yamaha technologies we’ve already discussed — like I.R.A. and a six-bolt miter neck joint design — which come standard in many premium Yamaha basses.

      So if you find yourself unable to stop listening to the voices in your head telling you that you’re ready to graduate from your starter bass to a better instrument, give in! You’re bound to find a new axe that will excite and inspire you … and there’s nothing wrong with that.

       

      Check out these related blog articles:

      A Brief Guide to Bass Guitar Tonewoods

      Bolt-On vs. Neck-Through Basses

      A Guide to Bass Fingerboards

      A Guide to Bass Bridges

      Exploring the Yamaha Signature Basses

      Here are the New Peter Hook and Billy Sheehan Signature Basses

      A Guide to Bass Pickups

      Choosing the Right Bass Guitar: Active vs. Passive

       

      Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

      Seven Thanksgiving Movie Scenes to Stream This Season

      Thanksgiving is a time of family, food and remembering what you’re grateful for. It’s also a time to stream your favorite flick and bask in how other people celebrate the holiday. What could be better than that? Nothing — except doing so with a high-quality audio system, of course.

      So turn the volume up a little, sit back in your sofa or favorite easy chair and enjoy these classic Thanksgiving movie clips.

      1. Planes, Trains, and Automobiles – In Wichita

      Perhaps one of the most beloved Thanksgiving movies, this comedy stars two all-time greats: John Candy and Steve Martin. The two meet as strangers but, thanks to a hectic travel schedule, they become good friends. Martin’s character is trying to get out of Wichita (and away from Candy) and home to his family in time for the holiday. The planes are packed, but maybe … a train could be an option? Watching these two actors work together is a joy … as is listening to them. Every tone of voice, every inflection in a joke’s delivery — even the rockabilly tune in the background of this scene — is a hit. Check it out here.

      2. Charlie Brown Thanksgiving – Peppermint Patty

      It’s not the holiday season without Charlie Brown, whether you’re talking The Great Pumpkin on Halloween; the scene with the frail pine tree during the famed Christmas episode; or here, when Charlie gets a talking-to from Peppermint Patty on Thanksgiving. It’s an indelible (and inedible) moment during the kids’ outdoor feast, which Snoopy ensures is replete with jellybeans, popcorn and toast. But Patty isn’t having it; she wants turkey legs and cranberry sauce. And like an angry sax solo, she berates Charlie over signature Peanuts smooth jazz rhythms, which ends up being as timeless as the cartoon itself. Check it out here.

      3. Scent of a Woman – The Dining Room Fight

      It’s always worth turning the volume up when the great Al Pacino is on screen. The actor has been nominated for an Academy Award® nine times, but his sole victory came not for his work with The Godfather, but in 1993 with Scent of a Woman. In this scene, Pacino’s character, a blind retired army man, is a bit racy, but that’s just the sort of cringe-worthy atmosphere we’ve come to expect at the holiday dinner table at times, right? Once things get heated, you can hear each picture frame rattle. Check it out here.

      4. The Big Chill – The Kitchen Cleanup

      Kicking off any scene with the Temptations is always a winner. This clip utilizes the group’s unforgettable song, “Ain’t Too Proud to Beg,” combining a classic American hit record with a classic American hit movie scene, along with one of the most relatable moments of Thanksgiving: the post-dinner cleanup and leftover foil wrapping. We should all take a note from The Big Chill and listen to a little Motown while we take care of our holiday chores. Check it out here.

      5. Rocky – Turkey Time Introduction

      In this scene from the Oscar®-winning film, brother Pauly is trying to do right by his sister, Adrian, by introducing her to his friend, boxer Rocky (Sylvester Stallone), who has long had a crush on her. Adrian is reticent, though; she’s cooked a modest dinner for herself and Pauly and wasn’t expecting company. Soon, the rage of their collective lower-class lives rises, and shouting fills the small Philadelphia home. Yet amidst the uproar, there’s charm to every small attempt at dignity from Adrian and Rocky, and Stallone’s distinct voice will have you hanging on every syllable. Check it out here.

      6. Spider-Man – Meet the Parent

      It can be a bit awkward when friends and families mix during the Thanksgiving feast, but that normal human experience is made even more heart-racing in this scene because we know that Spider-Man and his enemy, The Green Goblin, are actually in the same room together, about to share some of Aunt May’s stuffing. While the protagonists themselves aren’t aware of this yet, suspicion is growing by the second. Enjoy the superb acting from a bevy of big names (from Tobey Maguire to Willem Dafoe to Kirsten Dunst) and the unique sounds of our hero’s web-slinging … not to mention the subtle splash of a drop of his blood on the hardwood floor. Check it out here.

      7. Home for the Holidays – The Bird Can Fly

      This movie is not about flashy special effects or outlandish plot twists — it’s just pure, good acting. In this memorable clip, a Thanksgiving meal is ruined after the turkey falls onto an unsuspecting family member’s lap. The rest of the guests find this hilarious, but the accidental recipient is none too pleased about what has happened, to the point where she begins spinning out of control. Our hearts pound, wondering how this will be resolved. If it will be. Check it out here.

       

      The sounds of these memorable Thanksgiving movie moments can be best enjoyed when listening on a quality audio system such as Yamaha sound bars and surround sound systems.

       

      Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

      Eight Great Tips for Learning Steel-String Acoustic Guitar

      With the recent release of the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha and its companion lesson app (featuring instruction from Keith Urban himself), lots of folks are getting excited about learning to play steel-string acoustic guitar … to which I say, great! In my opinion, it’s one of the most enjoyable things you can do in your life. (Okay, I’ll admit I may be a little biased.)

      The URBAN Guitar lesson app (available for both iOS and Android™) covers all the basics you need to get started, but here are eight tips of my own that beginning acoustic guitar players might find helpful.

      1. Find the Right Body Position

      By the “right” body position, I mean what’s right for you. If you already feel comfortable with how you’re holding the guitar, that’s a great start.

      One piece of advice: Even though the URBAN Guitar comes with a strap that allows you to play standing up right away, I recommend that, at least in the beginning, you practice while sitting, not standing. That’s because it’s easier to focus on what your hands are doing when you’re seated. (Feel free to attach the strap to the guitar as soon as you want, of course, and don’t worry — you’ll be standing soon enough!)

      Once you’re seated comfortably, hold the guitar so that the narrowest point of the inside curve on its bottom half is balanced around the middle of your thigh, as shown in the photo below. Be careful not to place the guitar too close to your knee or it might slip off while you’re playing.

      Closeup of someone seated on a couch playing an acoustic guitar.

      Then cradle the guitar with the arm of your picking hand, and bend that arm so that the crook of your elbow is right against the top edge of the body and your forearm makes a diagonal angle across the instrument:

      Closeup of someone playing guitar.

      2. Establish Good Hand Placement

      Again, keep in mind that “good” hand placement for you may not necessarily be the same as it is for other people. That said, your picking hand should more or less follow the line of your forearm, making a diagonal angle to the guitar strings when laid across them, like this:

      Closeup of someone seated on a couch playing an acoustic guitar.

      Your fretting hand should wrap around the guitar’s neck so your fingers naturally form an arch over the fretboard, like this:

      Closeup from side angle of someone playing an acoustic guitar with focus on hand placement on neck of guitar.

      By the way, the neck on the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha is thinner than the average acoustic, so wrapping your fingers around it is a lot easier than on many other guitars.

      The thumb of your fretting hand is there to provide support for the rest of your hand as you play, so make sure it’s actually touching the back of the guitar neck. Where it touches the neck really doesn’t matter too much. Some guitarists like to keep their thumb anchored at the back all the time; others like to move it around, depending on what their other fingers are doing. I suggest you try both approaches and see which one feels best to you.

      3. Get Your Fingers Going

      One of the hardest parts of learning guitar is building finger dexterity and strength. Take it easy at first; your fingers (and especially your fingertips) are probably going to be a little sore after practice sessions of half an hour or more. But don’t get discouraged: Your fingertips will quickly adjust with regular practice and the muscles in your fingers will get stronger. In fact, you’ll be shocked at how quickly you progress simply by setting aside fifteen minutes to a half hour every day just to play. It’s also worth noting that the string tension on the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha is lower than on many other beginner instruments, so your hands have a lot less to fight against right from the start.

      In the URBAN Guitar lesson app, Keith and his co-pilot JUNO take you through several of the basics and guide you through 14 fantastic songs that are easy to learn. However, if you’d like to go a little bit further with your lessons, try scales. Scales are a great way to build finger strength, and they’re the first steps towards guitar solos!

      An E major scale starting on the low open E (6th) string, ending on the high E (1st) string at the 4th fret (G-sharp), and then going back down will get you used to alternating open and fretted strings. (Fretting a string means that you’ve placed your finger behind a fret, as indicated in the illustration below by the numbered circles on the fretboard; the small, blank Os at the far left end of the grid stand for open strings — that is, those that aren’t fretted. The numbers inside the circles indicate the finger you should be fretting with: index = 1, second finger = 2, and so forth.)

      Fingering chart for guitarist.

      Or try a G major scale starting on the 3rd fret of the 6th string, as shown below. Playing this up and down repeatedly will get you comfortable with playing in one hand position (sometimes called a “box”): Your 1st (index) finger stays on the 2nd fret, your 2nd (middle) finger on the 3rd fret, your 3rd (ring) finger on the 4th fret, and your 4th finger (pinky) on the 5th fret.

      Fingering chart for guitarist.

      A G minor pentatonic scale starting in the same place will get your pinky accustomed to a little stretching, since it has to go all the way up to the 6th fret of the 1st string:

      Fingering chart for guitarist.

      4. To Pick or Not to Pick? Try Both

      Playing steel-string guitar with a pick is definitely something you’ll want to learn how to do, but you should also try playing without one because it feels and sounds different … and because it means you won’t become dependent on a pick (which, believe me, is reassuring if you can’t find one when you need it!).

      The standard way to hold a pick is firmly between the thumb and index fingers of your picking hand, so that the bottom (thinnest) edge of the pick is parallel to the strings, as shown here:

      Closeup of someone picking guitar strings on acoustic guitar.

      There are also many non-standard ways of holding a pick, including the way Keith Urban himself holds one … but you’ll need to check out the URBAN Guitar lesson app to learn more about that. The most important thing to remember here is: If it feels good and it sounds good, it is good!

      Be sure to try out different sizes and thicknesses of picks to find your favorite. When you’re not using a pick, lead with the edges of your pick-hand fingernails; you can even use your thumb as a “shadow pick” placed under one or more fingers to support your strumming and single-note playing.

      Closeup of someone playing an acoustic guitar.

      In both cases, get used to strumming all the strings down and then up alternately, then see how it feels to strum down and/or up repeatedly without alternating.

      5. Start with Open Chords

      The basics of guitar are built around open chords (so called because they incorporate open strings). Of these, the easiest to play are D, G, A, E and C, along with D minor, E minor and A minor. (The lesson app included with the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha shows you all these chords.) Again, the small Os on the left side of these illustrations stand for open strings. The small Xs stand for strings that you don’t play: just skip over them when you strum.

      Fingering charts for guitarist.

      A few other open chords are a little tougher to master because they require you to either skip a bunch of strings while strumming (such as B minor) or fret multiple strings with one finger (such as F):

      Fingering charts for guitarists.

      But even with just these ten chords, you can play a lot of songs. Pick a few favorites of yours that use these chords and start strumming. Work on making the changes between chords as clean as possible so that each string keeps ringing out while you strum.

      6. Work Your Way Up to Bar Chords

      Once you’re familiar with the shapes of open chords, you can easily move many of them — like E, A, and D — up the neck to form “bar” chords. These chords have the same notes, but because they’re played on different strings (and in some cases, in different octaves), they have a different sonic quality — a little brighter, a little ringier.

      Here’s how to do it: Lay your fretting-hand index (1st) finger across all six strings on one fret; that’s the bar. Then form those familiar chord shapes with your other fingers on the frets above the bar, as illustrated below. As you can see, an E chord with a bar on the 3rd fret becomes a G chord, while an A chord with a bar on the same fret is a C chord; the same two fingerings on the 7th fret yield B and E chords, respectively.

      Fingering charts for guitarists.

      Play the same simple songs you played before, but now try them with bar chords. Yes, they’re the same songs, but they sound quite different, don’t they?

      7. Mix In Some Fingerpicking

      Just as you should challenge your fretting hand with bar chords, I suggest you also give your picking hand a test by learning to play fingerstyle — which, besides sounding cool, can also help you hear and improve how you’re doing on those bars. (If you can hear all the strings ringing, great; if you can’t, press that fret-hand index finger down harder.)

      Here’s how: Assign the top three strings (the thickest strings closest to you) to your picking-hand thumb and the bottom three (the thinnest ones) to your index, middle and ring fingers, respectively, as shown here:

      Closeup of someone's hands as they play acoustic guitar.

      Try plucking the strings simultaneously, then alternating between fingers. If you want to incorporate your pinky, you can assign it to the 1st string (the thinnest string, furthest from you) and place the others in-between, as shown here:

      Closeup of someone's hands playing acoustic guitar.

      Alternatively, you can just let the pinky hang or place its tip on the body of the guitar below the strings to help anchor your hand while you pick:

      Closeup of someone's hand as they play acoustic guitar.

      8. Be Patient

      In the beginning stages, much of guitar practice is about building muscle memory. The effort needed to change cleanly from an A chord to a D chord, or to pluck the low E string with your thumb right after you’ve plucked the B string with your middle finger, will feel new and awkward for your hands. You’re asking them to do things they’re not used to doing, so don’t be surprised — or get mad at yourself — if it takes them a while to figure it all out. Just keep on practicing, knowing that you’ll gain speed and accuracy as you go. Best of all, you’ll end up learning to play guitar … and how cool is that?

       

      Want to find out more about the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha? Click here.

      Check out the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha.

      Five Podcasts With Great Sound Design

      Podcasts are exclusively a sonic medium, yet many don’t take advantage of the power of sound design (things like sound effects, music, environmental sound, etc.) to enhance their content. Instead, many podcasts tend to use the same format over and over again: theme music at the top, followed by a voiceover intro and either a recorded interview or people having a discussion, then at the end, a reprise of the theme music.

      Fortunately, not all are like that — in fact, there are some that get incredibly creative with sound design. In this article, we’ll spotlight five podcasts that use imaginative sonics to bring their episodes to life.

      (Note: In films, sound design typically gets split up among different specialized professionals, such as Foley artists who recreate real-life sounds like door slams and footsteps, and music supervisors, who are in charge of finding appropriate music. On a podcast, most of those tasks are more likely to be done by one person, often the producer.)

      Dust

      Dust is a science fiction podcast that focuses on a different theme or storyline each season, featuring well-known actors such as Lance Reddick, Corey Hawkins and Toni Colette. The first season contained one-off sci-fi episodes. The second covered multiple stories around the single theme of an airplane that disappears and lands in the future. The third season, called “Chrysalis,” was a multipart space opera.

      Dust episodes include plenty of creative sound design to spice up the stories. You’ll hear the internal sounds of spaceships, explosions, robot noises and alien voices, as well as some Foley. The use of music is subtle but effective. It features a lot of droning synths and is designed to heighten tension. The sound designers also use the stereo field to good effect, which makes this show an even better listen on headphones.

      Theatre of Tomorrow

      This is also a sci-fi series, but one with a twist: It’s done in the style of an old-time radio drama, though very much tongue-in-cheek. It offers over-the-top stories, often with multiple episodes, always filled with superb sound design. The voice characterizations are impressive and quite funny, including the intro, which features an old-style radio announcer voice.

      The episodes are typically short — usually in the 15-to-20-minute range — but the action is non-stop. You’ll hear plenty of corny orchestral music stabs, occasional Foley and fantastic sound effects, including massive explosions and impact sounds.

      For fun voice characterizations, check out the Nightkeeper character in “Theater of Terror 4 ‘Night of the Nightkeeper,’” and the creatures in “The Amazing Audio Adventures of Moonman Manscout! – Episode I.” You can find all the episodes on the Theatre of Tomorrow page of the Midnight Disease Productions website.

      30 For 30 Podcasts

      This show comes from the same producers of ESPN’s 30 For 30 film series, who describe these podcasts as “audio documentaries.” The topics are all sports-related but focus on off-the-field issues and are frequently edgy. However, you don’t have to be a sports fan to be fascinated by 30 For 30 Podcasts, because the episodes are captivating, both for their narrative power and their sonic excellence.

      With a company as big as ESPN behind it, it’s no surprise that this show has excellent production values. The voiceovers and interviews are clean and professionally recorded — which isn’t something you can say about some of the shows in the podcast universe — and, when appropriate, the producers mix in clips from sports broadcasts and location interviews.

      But what’s most sonically striking about this show is its use of music. You hear it (primarily instrumental music in a variety of styles) underneath most of each episode, though it will sometimes stop when the dialog cuts to a new character. Variations like that change up the pacing in a way designed to hold your attention. Overall, the music serves as an underscore that heightens the drama of the stories, which are already quite compelling.

      The current season focuses on the impact the death of rapper Nipsey Hustle has had on NBA players. Previous episodes have featured subjects like Romanian gymnastics coaches Bela and Martha Karolyi, WNBA stars Sue Bird and Diana Taurasi’s experience playing Russian professional basketball, and the “curse” of the Louisiana Superdome, among others.

      Twenty Thousand Hertz

      Hosted by Dallas Taylor, the creative director of the successful sound design studio Defacto Sound, Twenty Thousand Hertz offers an entertaining and educational look at myriad topics related to sound and sound design.

      For example, the “Creature Speakers” episode focused on how sound designers create monster sounds. “Blind Sports” looked at how blind athletes play games like beep baseball, where sound, rather than sight, informs them of the action. One of the show’s most popular episodes was “The Windsor Hum,” which investigated the mystery of a strange rumbling noise heard for years in Windsor, Ontario.

      As you might expect from a show created by professional sound designers about sonic subjects, it sounds great! Taylor brilliantly uses instrumental music and sound effects to move the episodes along. In addition, each episode features its own superb illustration to accompany its online link, so you have something cool to look at while you’re listening.

      Unsolved Mysteries

      An audio adaptation of the popular TV show of the same name, this true-crime podcast looks at unsolved homicides and paranormal occurrences and presents them in a dramatic documentary style.

      The Unsolved Mysteries podcast consists of episodes that are typically 30 to 40 minutes in length. Steve French, who has what people used to call “a voice made for radio,” narrates each show. Unlike the narrator in Theater of Tomorrow, French’s voiceovers have a modern sound that would be appropriate on a TV car or beer commercial.

      Each episode focuses on a different unsolved case. The stories get told with spoken words from the people involved, interspersed with French’s narration. Underneath is a variety of eerie and mysterious music, which helps set the mood and emphasize specific bits of dialog. Overall, the production is first-rate and the stories compelling. If you’re looking for a true crime / mystery podcast that sounds great and keeps you riveted, this one’s for you.

       

      Podcasts are best enjoyed when listened to on quality headphones. Click here for more information about Yamaha wireless headphones.

      Tips for Playing Rhythm Guitar

      Most budding guitarists spend more time developing their melodic chops than perfecting their rhythm skills. Yet any professional will tell you that 95% of covering the gig depends on playing solid, stylistic rhythms while supporting the vocalist or lead instrumentalist. Even if you are the lead guitarist in a band, you’ll still spend the majority of your time playing chords and rhythmic embellishments.

      And though this may sound like a contradiction in terms, great rhythm guitarists actually make excellent soloists due to their strong sense of timing, phrasing and rhythmic feel. Here are some tips for developing that kind of solid foundation.

      1. Use a Metronome

      Whether it’s a traditional pendulum metronome like a Yamaha MP-90 or a precision electronic device such as the Yamaha ME-55BK clip-on model, a metronome should be a staple of your practice routine. It will help you build an internal sense of tempo and timing, and will give you a good feel for the music you’re playing.

      2. Tap Your Foot

      Tapping your foot in time with the metronome provides a visual cue that you can use to coordinate with your strumming hand. I recommend tapping on the downbeats only. This equates to the tempo of the music and is equal to quarter notes in rhythmic notation (i.e., 4 beats in a measure when playing in 4/4 time). Strum downwards (these are called downstrokes) on the downbeats (i.e., when your foot is on the floor) and upwards (upstrokes) on the upbeats (when your foot is off the floor).

      3. Verbalize the Rhythms

      Verbalizing rhythms (that is, saying them out loud) helps to give you a strong understanding of the rhythmic feel before you even play a single note. Here’s a list of common verbalizations:

      There are a couple of other verbalizations used to call out triplet rhythms. Words with three syllables, like blueberry and “tri-puh-let,” work extremely well. Triplet shuffle rhythms can be verbalized with a long and short sound such as Da – Dit. All these verbalizations are demonstrated in the video below.

      4. Listen to the Hi-Hat

      In most pop music, the kick drum accentuates the downbeat of one and three, with other syncopations added for “pushes” and shuffle rhythms; the snare drum acts as a counterpart, typically accenting beats two and four.

      But the hi-hat plays the subdivisions, and therefore carries the rhythmic feel of the music. That’s why you should always listen carefully to it when playing rhythm guitar! For example, in a straight-eighth feel, the hi-hat will generally be playing eighth notes. In a shuffle or triplet feel, the hi-hat will be playing triplets, and in a sixteenth-note feel, the hi-hat will be playing sixteenth notes.

      5. Practice Playing in the “Pocket”

      Of course, not all rhythm parts need to match the subdivisions, but if you want to orchestrate intricate layers and guitar overdubs, you’ll need to be adept at crafting parts that sit in the “pocket” of both the strong pulses provided by the kick and snare, as well as the subdivisions carried by the hi-hat.

      I define “playing in the pocket” as the rhythmic placement of a specific guitar part. There may be many parts and “pockets” for you to lock into in any given musical situation. Having a solid understanding of time, feel and subdivisions will allow you to craft the perfect parts and aid you in finding the “pocket” for each of them.

      Rhythm Practice

      Here are the eight simple rhythm patterns that I demonstrate in the video below. (Click here to download the manuscript as a PDF.) Above the beats and subdivisions are strumming directions: Downstrokes are indicated by a downward bracket (“⊓”) and upstrokes with an upward “v” shape. The verbalizations are also shown. Verbalizing a rhythm before playing it can help you internalize and understand the sound of each rhythmic pattern.

      Sheet music.

      To add complexity to these examples, try playing the shuffle rhythm backwards or combine triplets with the sixteenth note examples.

      The Video

      Here’s a video of me playing these eight exercises, plus, at the end, I play all eight of them back-to-back. Watching this will help you see and hear the strumming directions as well as learning how to verbalize each rhythm and develop hand and foot coordination with the upbeats and downbeats.

      This may look easy, but I assure you it isn’t — in fact, it may well be a challenge for even the most seasoned players!

      The Guitar

      Beautiful blue electric guitar standing upright on a blue couch with a wood wall behind it.
      Yamaha Pacifica PAC612VIIFM.

      The Yamaha Pacifica PAC612VIIFM I’m playing in this video has become one of my “go-to” guitars for recording sessions and film projects. The Wilkinson tremolo can be used to add perfectly tuned “shimmers” to chordal parts, and the Seymour Duncan pickups add a professional sheen to every note.

      These coil-tappable humbucker and single-coil pickups pair extremely well with the lightweight alder body and flame maple veneer to produce some of the best rhythm (and lead) tones you’ll ever hear.

      The Wrap-Up

      When you devote time (no pun intended) to rhythm guitar studies, you’ll find that your phrasing chops improve, your sense of time graduates to “groove and pocket,” and your value as a guitarist soars above and beyond the competition.

      Photographs courtesy of the author.

       

      Check out Robbie’s other postings.

      Click here for more information about the Yamaha PAC612VIIFM electric guitar.

      Case Study: Use Personal Values to Juggle a Heavy Workload

      Most music educators are adept at managing a heavy workload, but Michael Gamon, chair of the department of fine and creative arts at Harrisburg Academy in Wormleysburg, Pennsylvania, has mastered the art of juggling.

      He teaches 37 different classes per week. And with 350 students enrolled in the International Baccalaureate (IB) World School that spans junior kindergarten to 12th grade, Gamon teaches every student up to 8th grade and directs all instrumental ensembles plus the theater program at the high school. In addition, Gamon has a viola studio with four students at Kutztown University and performs locally himself. With so many classes to prep, activities to balance, as well as his family — his wife, who plays viola professionally, and four children — Gamon has created his own unique solution in order to stay organized and motivated.

      “There are some categories of things that I need every day in order to be successful, and these things help me manage my time,” he says. “For example, I have to do something creative every day. … I’ve [also] learned that I love solving problems. Each day, if I haven’t solved a problem, I feel like I didn’t accomplish anything tangible, and I can’t rest. I also need to laugh and smile with somebody. … And I need to connect with my family in some way, even if it’s a phone call on a long day when I [won’t] get home until after they’ve gone to bed. … These things help me put my challenges into perspective.”

      A New Type of Chunking

      At the early childhood level, Gamon teaches the Suzuki Method. The program had existed since 2002 at Harrisburg, although Gamon began at the academy in 2012.

      In 2019, violin education extended to 1st through 5th graders for one day per week. “There was enough buy-in for the [violin] program that we really needed to expand it to the lower school grades,” Gamon says.

      However, Gamon noticed in the program’s first year that the elementary students and parents were not enthusiastic. In addition, he worried about the pandemic’s effect on students’ desire and ability to play an instrument. Last but not least, Gamon needed a fresh approach for his own sake. He had previously been using a conservatory prep approach that combined individual student lessons, small group sessions and large group rehearsal.

      close up of RPG set with Michael Gamon playing violin in the background As a result, Gamon created an innovative role-playing game (RPG) that uses goals in the violin curriculum and overall grade units to unlock puzzles that advance the story. Called “Novice to Ninja” (read “Portal to Another World: A Role-Playing Game Enhances Beginning Violin Lessons”), the RPG “came out of the reality that I needed to be able to chunk my curriculum and differentiate it at the same time,” Gamon says. “There was no way that I could prep for 30 classes to be 30 distinct classes. … The RPG allowed me to create a framework through a story and an adventure that I can teach through six separate grades [including kindergarten] and have them move through the story together each week. But I can differentiate for each of the students and each of the classes. … If I had to come up with separate back-to-back-to-back lessons, I wouldn’t be able to teach anything about violin.”

      The RPG not only reignited students’ enthusiasm for learning violin but also fulfilled several of Gamon’s own needs as a person and a teacher. “We really needed a way to create adventure, excitement, interest and escapism for students who were handling the stress of the environment [being in pods] in the same space all day… and the larger stress of being in the middle of a pandemic.I love teaching violin, but if enough of the students and parents were no longer interested in violin, I’d lose the whole program, and I wouldn’t get to teach what I love. … ‘Novice to Ninja’ came out of that stressful situation and showcased how to solve a problem by being creative.”

      Previously, Gamon had tried checklists and spreadsheets to manage his priorities. However, he found the approach didn’t work for him. “As a musician, whenever I got to the end of the list, I would feel anxious because part of what gives a musician stability is knowing that there’s a project coming. … Some of those more traditional ways of managing time aren’t effective for an artist, a creative person, a freelancer or a teacher. … The spreadsheets, lists and very careful task management are all tools to help solve problems, but they’re not the solution in themselves.”

      Perspective and Fun

      The “Novice to Ninja” RPG also fits in well in an IB school, which teaches students and staff to examine a process from the research phase through to development and further ways to improve. “I’ve learned that perspective and fun are tied together,” Gamon says. “Thinking through the perspective of the student as well as my perspective as the teacher and then moving back to the big picture perspective and the goals of the school and the community injected the fun in teaching for me. It hasn’t been [as] stressful or as overwhelming as I thought it might be, and it helped me as a person to enjoy what I’m doing.”

      The interest in the RPG has spread throughout the entire school. “It’s definitely changing the lives of the students,” Gamon says. “For the first time since I’ve taught at Harrisburg, high school seniors are really interested in what’s happening in kindergarten.”

      In fact, the middle school’s Dungeons & Dragons club is now in on the action. “I have some students who have risen to the rank of co-authors. They are writing additional articles and stories and campaigns for the RPG.”

      In addition, 3rd graders have been building dioramas in Minecraft and Fortnite. “They’re adding to the story, too … and I can link and connect to that,” Gamon says. “This inspires students to understand that it’s more than violin.”

      Though Gamon has never played Dungeons & Dragons, he says that he loves fantasy, storytelling, logic systems and game theory. “Gamifying music is tricky to do,” he says. “Now that I’m on the vanguard of people who are doing it, I started to lean into my own naivete, which allowed me to not get too sentimental whenever [students] want to change something. It’s easy as a creator to feel that it’s all yours. But it should be theirs, not mine. This is their world. They need to be looking at ways to engage in it and ways to leave their mark. And that’s true for music, too.”

      High Stakes and High Payoff

      Michael Gamon with three students from Harrisburg Academy's Center for Creative Arts Starting in 5th grade, Harrisburg students can choose a new instrument in strings, winds or brass. At the middle school, Gamon conducts the symphonic orchestra.

      In high school, most students are involved in music to some capacity. About 20 students at a time choose to participate in The Center for Creative Arts, one of five in-school programs that high schoolers must join. Within the centers, students work on individual non-graded quarterly projects that have some sort of service component — for example, to learn piano and play for a morning meeting or to put together a band for a community holiday concert. The centers “help encourage lifelong learning and experiential learning,” Gamon says. “As a prep school that’s very academic and rigorous, creating a space for students to learn for their own sake and learn for their own passion are skills that we must teach our students. … [As center director, my] job is to help students stay on task and on target and build a plan and follow through with that plan.”

      Gamon also teaches the two-year IB diploma program music course in which students must put on the hats of a researcher, creator and performer. Students analyze a type of musical piece, composer or genre, then they create and perform a program. The class, therefore, is very individualized while following a framework. Their work is evaluated by an IB panel.

      Harrisburg Academy's Stagecraft class where students are working on building a setFurthermore, Gamon teaches Stagecraft and directs the school’s spring musical, which rehearses from September to March. In Stagecraft, students learn about lighting, sounds, props, costumes, construction building, design and marketing.

      Every grade has two concerts that may combine differently. In the winter, Gamon has put on a full holiday concert with kindergarten to 12th grade. “It’s a huge concert that’s a big community affair,” he says. The spring concert is more flexible with various grades performing together or separately, depending on what happens in the classroom.

      Gamon, who was recognized as a 2021 Yamaha “40 Under 40” music educator, says that teaching students from preschool to college and interacting with the families at two private institutions results in “high-stakes teaching and … high-payoff teaching.”

      “The parents and the students are really invested in the programs and are interested in growing and building an active community,” he adds.

      In the end, Gamon understands the need to be efficient and has figured out the best ways to achieve his own maximum potential. “I have had so many opportunities to fail and succeed at [time management] because I’m so busy,” he says. “I feel like I’ve learned a couple of things along the way and continue to learn every single day.”

      Fix It: Tips for Teaching Snare Drum Basics

      The snare drum is the foundational instrument for all percussion instruments. We learn technique and develop our hands while learning snare drum.

      In a beginning band ensemble, the music director must teach all the instruments at the same time. They face the impossible task of teaching students how to get the first sound out of their instrument. This is a daunting task, especially for the non-percussionist educator.

      I created this guide to help music educators — percussionists and non-percussionists — teach young students the proper snare drum technique. It is broken down into multiple sections, including setting up the snare drum, creating the grip and teaching the basic stroke. This video explains each technique — the timestamp for each technique is listed below.

      Download this Yamaha Drums and Percussion Care Checklist for Students now!

      Click on the links below to find out how to fix:

      Fix It: Snare Drum Height (video timestamp — 2:10)

      snare drum height 2I have witnessed students just walk up to a snare drum and start playing. However, it is important to adjust the drum to the proper height so that the bead of the stick hits the drumhead at the optimal point. If the drum is not at the proper height, students will have tension in the shoulder.

      Have students step back from the drum. Let their arms hang down the side of their body (they should not be holding drumsticks). Tell them to slowly lift their forearms at the elbow to a point that is comfortable. The angle of their arms will be approximately 110 degrees. The elbow should stay even with the body with space between their body and the elbow. Their body and arms should be relaxed and without tension.

      Once this position is established, adjust the drum height to meet the end of the drumsticks. Remember to do this exercise away from the drum because you do not want the height that the drum is already set at to influence where students put their hands.

      drum set up 2Fix it: Drum Set Up (video timestamp — 5:42)

      The snare drum should be set up so that the student is perpendicular to the snares (on the bottom of the drum), and the throw-off is closest to the player. If the student does not play over the snares, the sound will be thin, and snares will not vibrate clearly. Students should play over the snares to get the most snare response and characteristic sound of the snare drum.

      Fix It: Find the Fulcrum on the Drumstick (video timestamp — 14:23)

      Creating a good fulcrum on the drumstick is one of the most important things we can teach a percussion student. Without a good fulcrum, it will be difficult to produce a good roll.

      fulcrum 2Tell students to use their dominant hand and put the drumstick inside the first knuckle of their pointer finger. They should position the drumstick so that approximately two-thirds of the stick is coming out the front of their hand. Let the drumstick drop and count how many bounces are created. Tell students to reposition the drumstick and try a different fulcrum. Again, have them count the number of bounces. If there are less bounces, students should move the drumstick the opposite way and see how many bounces are achieved.

      The optimal fulcrum is when you find the position on the drumstick where you achieve the most bounces. Ask students to use a black felt-tip marker and draw a circle around the drumstick where the first knuckle of their pointer finger rests, so that they will know where to hold the drumstick. Once the optimal fulcrum is achieved, repeat this process with the students’ non-dominant hand.


      Fix It: Teaching Matched Grip (video timestamp — 18:33)

      match grip 2There are two grips that can be used on snare drum: matched grip or traditional grip. Because matched grip is used on snare drum, marimba, xylophone, timpani, bells and most percussion instruments in a concert ensemble, I have found that it’s best to start a student on matched grip.

      Once students have marked the fulcrum on the drumstick, tell them to take their thumb and put it opposite the first knuckle of their pointer finger. The thumb must be parallel to the drumstick. Once students have the fulcrum, the back of the drumstick touches the love line on their palm as it goes out of their hand. Students should then wrap the other fingers loosely around the drumstick. They should not squeeze or clench the drumstick. Their hand should be relaxed, and there should be no tension in the hand or in the fingertips.

      Building a Strong Foundation (video timestamp — 23:10)

      Once students have adjusted the height of the drum, are standing perpendicular to the snares, have marked their fulcrum and have proper matched grip, it’s time to play. Have students bring the tips of the drumstick to the center of the drumhead. (Note: On a snare drum, I suggest that students play approximately one inch above the center of the drumhead).

      The drumsticks should create a “V” with the tips of the drumsticks, and the angle should be approximately 60 degrees. Using the wrist, students should bring the drumsticks up eight inches above the drum. Drop the drumstick and return it to the original starting point. This is a full stroke.

      At the beginning of every class, go over this quick checklist:

      • Step back from the drum. Bring up the arms to determine the height of the drum.
      • Step up to the drum and set the height.
      • Set the snare drum so the player is perpendicular to the snares and the throw-off is closest to the player.
      • Create a good fulcrum by finding the spot on the drumstick where you get the most bounces.
      • Place the thumb on the drumstick opposite the first knuckle of the pointer finger. The thumb should be parallel to the drumstick. Do not squeeze.
      • Bring your drumsticks to the drum and create a V the with tips of the drumsticks.
      • Using your wrist, bring the tip of your drumstick eight inches above the drum. Drop the drumstick and return it to the original starting point.

      As Gordon B. Hinckley said, “You can’t build a great building on a weak foundation.” A strong foundation is key in learning any new technique or method. Tell students to take their time and go slow. Make sure they are deliberate about the small details. Reinforcing these small details will contribute to building a strong foundation.

      Please feel free to reach out to me via e-mail at dgerhart@yamaha.com if you have any questions.

      It’s About the Vibrations: An Interview With JUNO

      Photograph of a young woman wearing sunglasses.
      JUNO.

      When four-time Grammy Award® winner Keith Urban comes knocking on your door, it’s best to answer! That’s exactly what happened to renowned guitarist / instructor / musician extraordinaire JUNO. With a highly successful online presence and stints playing with artists such as Bruno Mars, Machine Gun Kelly, Fifth Harmony and Camila Cabello, she has always been one to carve her own path.

      Now, as Keith Urban’s teaching partner in the URBAN Guitar lesson app (created in conjunction with the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha and available for both iOS and Android™), she has ventured into exciting new territories using her passion, skill and dynamic presence.

      I recently had the opportunity to speak with JUNO about her background and her experience working with Keith Urban and Yamaha, as well as her extraordinary insights into the healing power of music. What she had to say was truly inspirational.

      RT: How did you first get started playing music?

      JUNO: For me, it all started in church. One day, the pastor’s wife wasn’t there, so they just sat me down behind the piano, and I had to figure it out. I just picked up on it, played by ear and learned some stuff. My family was so excited that I was doing this! Every second they could, they asked me to play, sing and perform. I was so embarrassed that I actually stopped for a few years. Later, after I graduated from college, I began playing piano for the gospel choir at Illinois State University.

      RT: When did you first begin playing guitar and why?

      JUNO: My first job was an internship at a drug rehab facility and my first client was this 15-year-old heroin addict who was obsessed with the guitar. He would play Lil Wayne songs and hip-hop on the guitar and mash it up with Jimi Hendrix. I thought that was so cool! I had never heard or seen that before. Everybody was scared of him but I’m from Chicago, so I was like, “You send that boy to me!” (Laughs) I thought by entering his world of the guitar, it would change his life, but to my surprise, learning to speak his language changed my life.

      So I started playing guitar and the first song he taught me was “Purple Haze.” It was a challenge but we were bonding and I saw how he smiled and how his eyes lit up when we played together. He was letting me into his world and the language we were speaking was a neutral ground. I felt like I was accomplishing something and I could feel a passion for the guitar too. I literally had never felt anything like it before!

      After that, I went to Berklee for awhile even though I couldn’t read music and had no idea what a scale or a key signature was. These were all completely foreign to me. But when you’re coming up in church, you actually do know it; you just don’t know that you know it. I was learning to form a vocabulary around things that I understood conceptually — I just didn’t have a language for it. When I heard the different scales, I made associations with the concepts. I started to sit outside the rooms where the guitar classes were being held and recorded them on my phone. I was an audible learner, not a visual one, so I took it all in and made the best of it. I just did it my way.

      My history with guitars is very random and unchosen. Whether it’s a crappy guitar or the best one I ever played, I adapt and try to get the most out of each of them. I have to make it sound good and feel good for me. That’s what I love about the guitar — it’s so diverse, depending on the one you’re playing and the style you’re playing in. It’s really coming from your soul, your perspective and your experience.

      RT: How did you come to collaborate with Keith Urban on the Lesson app and what has the experience been like?

      JUNO: So many of my opportunities have come from social media. I got a DM from Keith Urban’s team, who probably saw some of the videos I have up on YouTube, and it all started there. I was just floored because I grew up listening to country music and I loved Keith Urban. It was a full circle moment because I realized he wouldn’t have anybody teaching with him that didn’t add value to the project. I felt like I could exhale and say, before I leave this earth, I’m getting to be a part of something that’s going to pour into the next generation … and when I’m not here any longer, it will still be here. It’s truly an honor.

      An acoustic guitar.
      The URBAN Guitar by Yamaha.

      The respect and love I have for Keith and for Yamaha is special. They took the time to get to know me, and to recognize that I was a good fit for the project. It made me bring my A game because I understood the value of what they were creating. I appreciate that I was able to contribute to the curriculum. It was all about what we were teaching and how we could accomplish that in the most creative and successful way possible.

      RT: What are your thoughts on music’s ability to bring people together and act as a power for healing?

      Quote "If you can learn how to remove your ego and fully be open, I truly believe anything is possible."

      JUNO: It challenges me constantly. Not just the skill of it, but how I’m using it to connect with people. If you can learn how to remove your ego and fully be open, I truly believe anything is possible. I remember when I first started, my biggest concern was how impressive I could be during my guitar solo. I wanted to have the perfect tone and the right kinds of licks. When I matured and got past that, I started to realize that I was a part of something bigger than that … and when you’re part of something, it goes farther than you can even imagine.

      You know, I went down to Brazil and got off the bus and jammed in communities that didn’t even speak English. I saw the impact and tears. I’ve played in hospitals where people were so sick they couldn’t even speak, but I saw their monitor jump. It wasn’t because of me, it was because of the music. These notes that have been around for thousands of years go beyond style and genre. It’s the frequencies that ring out of the strings that I think genuinely go into people’s souls and remind them of things they forgot and teach them things they never knew and make them feel things they haven’t felt in a long time. You can’t do that with words. It’s about the vibrations. I want to make sure those vibrations come from a pure and honest place.

      Photograph of JUNO courtesy of Cooper Hopkins @cooper_hopkins

      To learn more about JUNO, click here.

      To learn more about the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha, click here.

      Check out the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha.

       

       

      Fix It: Teaching Tips for Playing Even Scales on the Piano

      Major and minor scales and arpeggios are some of the simplest and most useful music patterns and exercises available to pianists to build and maintain their technique.

      Moreover, these patterns are the building blocks of all tonal music, so practicing them not only helps develop technical facility at the keyboard, it also helps to train our ears to listen critically and our fingers to respond accordingly.

      For example, learning to listen for, recognize and then find that raised leading tone on the keyboard in a harmonic minor scale is developed through scale practice. Practicing scales and arpeggios also helps to improve students’ ability to sight-read fluently because their kinesthetic and topographical familiarity with the keyboard is enhanced through the practice of these patterns. In addition, familiarity with scale and broken chord constructions enriches the pianist’s theoretical and analytical understanding of music.

      As a high school student, my piano technique was admittedly underdeveloped. While learning a piano sonata by Haydn, I struggled to play the scale passages within the piece with rhythmic evenness and technical control, and I couldn’t figure out how to fix the problem.

      Just before the winter break, my piano teacher offhandedly commented that “two hours of scale and arpeggio practice a day will fix those passages and go a long way to improve your technical facility in general.” Young and impressionable, I took this advice literally and spent my winter vacation diligently practicing scales and arpeggios for two hours each day.

      Unsurprisingly, my piano technique did improve and my Haydn sonata started to sound better! In addition to my committed practice, my teacher also offered several suggestions for improving my physical approach to technique. These insights together with my dedicated scale practice were vital to improving my scale playing, and my playing in general.

      So, while scale and arpeggio practice can be highly beneficial, it is all too common for students to play these patterns without considering their physical approach to the keyboard. If their approach is unhealthy, technical progress can be slow or even thwarted. Teaching a student to find and maintain a healthy hand position including correct finger action that facilitates rhythmically even, fluid, lucid and musically played scales and arpeggios can be challenging.

      Students can develop any number of errors or bad habits in their physical approach to the keyboard, playing position and motion across the keys, and these poor habits can be challenging to correct later on. Some of the most common errors in the physical approach to playing scales and arpeggios include:

      Most worryingly, these poor physical habits may result in inefficient technique, uneven and unmusical scale and arpeggio playing, and even injury. Below, I have considered each of these common errors and provided some teaching suggestions for improvement.

      Fix It: Flat or Curled Fingers

      incorrect laying with flat fingersStudents often play with flat fingers — with their nails visible on the keys — so they can see that they are playing the desired keys. However, a curved hand position where the tips of the fingers are used allows for more dexterous scale playing because the fingers are able to move with greater ease and speed. The fingers simply cannot move as quickly in a flattened position. When playing with flat fingers, there is also more friction between the fingers and the keys, which makes it difficult to play scales fast. Think of flat-fingered scale playing as akin to sprinting flat footed.

      incorrect playing with curled fingers On the other end of the spectrum, students may overdo curved hand positions and end up curling their fingers. As such, they grip the keys and play with what some teachers call “the claw.” Playing scales in this way necessitates a lot of physical effort as one muscle or set of muscles is needed to keep the fingers in this curled position, while another muscle or set is needed to lift and move the fingers.

      In the article, “Pianist’s Injuries,” Thomas Mark writes: “When one muscle contracts, the opposing muscle must release and lengthen to permit movement. If this does not happen — that is, if the opposing muscle remains tense — then both muscles are contracting simultaneously, which is called co-contraction.” This idea of co-contraction not only causes tension and inhibits the player’s ability to play scales and arpeggios quickly, evenly and efficiently, it can also lead to serious injury. Thomas Mark’s book, “What Every Pianist Should Know About the Body” is an invaluable resource to all pianists and teachers.

      correct playing with curved fingers SOLUTION: The solution to correcting flat or curled fingers is similar. First, help your students understand that neither flat nor curled fingers are the most comfortable or ideal finger position for fast scale playing. In a neutral position, the fingers of the hand curve naturally, and this position is best for achieving superior scale and arpeggio playing. Here’s a simple exercise to help students find the natural curve of the fingers: Have them lift their arms to shoulder height at their sides and then drop their arms freely. Looking down, they will notice that their fingers are now in a naturally curved position.

      In the book, “Chopin: Pianist and Teacher as Seen by His Pupils,” Chopin’s advice for finding good hand shape on the keyboard was to place the right-hand thumb on E, the longer fingers 2, 3 and 4 on the group of three black keys, and finger 5 on B (or C for a larger hand).  The mirror image works for the left hand (thumb on B and 5th finger on E/F with fingers 2, 3 and 4 on the black keys). Teachers can then adjust this position as needed. Take a picture of this proper hand position and send it to your students, so they can refer to it during future practice sessions.

      THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

      Fix It: Incorrect Thumb Position and Motion

      incorrect playing with the side of the thumbMany students misunderstand the correct position of the thumb on the keys and try to play using too much of the thumb, or even attempt to play on the very tip of the distal phalanx rather than on the corner of it (the spot on each thumb where the nail meets flesh). As such, students sometimes incorrectly play with a straight rather than a slightly bent thumb.

      incorrect playing with tip of thumb In addition, when passing the thumb in ascending right-hand and descending left-hand scales or arpeggios, many students begin moving the thumb under the hand too late, or keep the thumb straight rather than slightly bent at the proximal interphalangeal joint when moving it.

      These errors can result in a bump in sound or “lumpy thumb” patterns and jerky movements as the student struggles to move the thumb with ease and on time. The bump often happens because the thumb is moving with speed to play in time. As such, the key played by the thumb is played faster and the resulting tone is louder — i.e., a “bumped” note and a scale that sounds tonally uneven. Alternatively, some students drop the entire forearm when passing the thumb under the hand as they play on the incorrect part of the thumb or try to play with the thumb at the wrong angle, and thereby create a thumb “bump” or accent at every hand position change in scale or arpeggio playing.

      finger pointing to where the thumb should hit the piano key SOLUTION: The best way to help a student understand where to play on the thumb is to simply point it out to them — touch the part of thumb that should make contact with the key. If a student has been playing with the wrong part of their thumb, or without bending it from the proximal interphalangeal joint, or at the wrong angle in relation to the key, the correct procedure will feel strange and unfamiliar to them. It will take time for them to change their habit and learn to use the thumb properly and effectively.

      correct position of thumb when playing To facilitate improved thumb motion under the hand in scale and arpeggio playing, break down this small, but surprisingly challenging, movement into several steps. I recommend working on this motion first in scale playing versus arpeggios and start with a scale with many black keys. According to the book, “Chopin: Pianist and Teacher as Seen by His Pupils,” Chopin advocated for having students start with B major (right hand) and then D flat major (left hand) scales with the position of the thumb in mind. These are also some of the easiest scales to coordinate in hands-together playing as the thumbs of each hand come together on the white keys. Together with G flat major, these are the first octave scales I teach a student to play hands together. These scales are also excellent for achieving good passing of the thumbs as fingers 2, 3 and 4 play black keys, which are raised, allowing for a natural space to emerge on the keyboard in which the thumb can move freely and easily.

      The C major scale is the hardest to play with the passing of the thumb in mind as there are no black keys. As a result, it was the last scale Chopin apparently used to teach to his students and is the last scale I teach as well. Of the scales starting on a white key with the same fingering as C major in both hands, E major is physically easiest to play, in my opinion, as it has four black keys.

      For my sample exercise below, which is demonstrated in this video, I have referenced the E major scale, ascending in the right hand and descending in the left hand as follows:

      1. Tell students to get ready to play the first three notes of the scale: E, F sharp and G sharp in sequence with fingers 1, 2 and 3 on the right hand or E, D sharp and C sharp on the left hand.
      2. As soon as the thumb has finished playing the E, tuck it under the hand.
      3. To help facilitate a bending motion of the thumb, brush/touch the inside of the hand, just below the fourth or third finger.
      4. Teachers must ensure that the student uses the motion of the arm to help prepare the hand position change and that the wrist is high enough (but not too high) to facilitate the passing under motion of the thumb.
      5. Then have students play A with the right-hand thumb or B with the left-hand thumb. Thereafter, go back and forth playing these first four notes of the scale ascending and then descending with the right hand (and vice versa with the left hand) until the thumb is moving optimally, and the wrist, arm and hand are helping to facilitate a smooth and efficient thumb movement and hand position change.

      Fix It: Suboptimal Wrist Position

      wrist too low when playing Some students try to play scales with a hand(s) that is not kept in line with the arm at the wrist, such that the position of the wrist joint is overly high or overly low.

      In his article, “Pianist’s Injuries” on pianomap.com, Thomas Mark calls these “awkward positions” and states that,“the mid-range position of the wrist, with the wrist in a straight line with the arm, gives the greatest mechanical advantage to the fingers.”

      wrist too high when playing As such, ease of movement is lost, tension can develop and injury can ensue when utilizing awkward wrist positions while playing.

      SOLUTION: An old trick for helping students play with the wrist in a mid-range position is to place a quarter on the wrist. If the coin falls while the student is playing, the wrist has either dropped too low or lifted too high.

      neutral hand shape with curved fingers, thumb, wrist and bridgeSome teachers prefer to use the image of a “floating wrist” to help students achieve an improved mid-range position. When I inherit a student  who has been taught to make a dropping motion of the wrist on every finger action to achieve a weighty sounding scale, I encourage them to strive for “beautifully gliding” scales. As such, the arm guides the fingers so that the hands and arms move laterally (or horizontally) over the keys like a figure skater glides effortlessly over a glassy lake, rather than creating the visual and sonic effect of choppy waves. Gliding scales can be further enhanced with a gradual and even crescendo ascending and diminuendo descending. In this way, they are rhythmically even and musically shaped.

      Fix It: Collapsing Finger Joints and No Bridge Support

      collapsed final finger joint on finger 2 (index finger) Some students are able to implement the natural curve of the hand in their scale playing, but then they allow the final knuckle or distal interphalangeal joint of fingers 1, 2, 3 and/or 4 to collapse as one or more fingers depress the keys (this happens most often with finger 4, in my experience). According to Carolyn and Jamie Shaak in “The Shaak Technique Book,” all three finger knuckles (metacarpophalangeal, proximal interphalangeal and distal interphalangeal joints) of fingers 1 to 4 should remain “firm and fixed” and not collapse at any point when playing scales or arpeggios.

      collapsed knuckle (no bridge) Collapsing joints can result in two-handed scale playing in which the hands are unaligned or unsynchronized because the final finger joint in one or both hands is not firm and, therefore, not moving with control, resulting in differing speeds in the dissent of the keys played by each hand.

      Also common is the lack of knuckle support at the metacarpophalangeal joints within the hand. Strong knuckles are visibly pronounced in piano playing and together form what is sometimes called the “bridge” of the hand. When this so-called bridge is not well developed or implemented in piano playing, it can cause lack of dexterity and clarity of tone, especially when playing scales. It can also cause tension in the hand and lead to injury.

      hand making O shape to feel the correct part of the fingertip used in piano playing SOLUTION: Collapsing knuckle joints are a bad habit and teachers must be vigilant and tireless in their efforts to correct this bad habit among their students. First, students must be aware of how it feels to use the fingertips correctly versus incorrectly.

      I recommend reading the article, “Synergy at the Primer Level,” by Randall Faber. He describes one way to help students feel the correct part of the fingertip used in piano playing. This is done by having students create an “O” shape (see photo to the right) by placing the thumb behind the final knuckle joint of each of fingers 1 through 4 in turn, thereby reinforcing or “bracing” the part of the fingertip used in piano playing of whichever fingertip needs to be (re)discovered. Students can then take that reinforced fingertip and tap it (or “peck” it) on a tabletop or have it touch/depress a key on the piano. I frequently review this exercise with students when one or more of their fingers show some weakness in the final joint and start to collapse when playing.

      In addition to playing with strong fingertips, alignment between the hands can be improved with various practice strategies, such as:

      1. playing with differing articulation in each hand (legato versus staccato) as shown in this video
      2. playing with different dynamics in each hand (forte versus piano) as shown in this video
      3. playing in various rhythmic patterns and rhythmic groupings (both the same rhythm or differing rhythms in each hand) as shown in this video and in this video
      4. purposely playing the hands out-of-sync or in a staggered style (left before right or vice versa) as shown in this video
      5. various combinations of these strategies as shown in this video

      The ear will then be able to hear each hand independently while the hands play together. Poorly aligned scales are often a result of both unhealthy physical habits and weak listening skills.

      As for achieving a strong bridge in the piano playing hand, Carolyn Shaak helps her students visualize this position using the analogy of snowcapped mountain peaks (i.e., raised or pronounced metacarpophalangeal joints) versus a valley (collapsed metacarpophalangeal joints). In “The Shaak Technique Book,” which she wrote with her daughter Jamie, Carolyn uses several other effective analogies for improving hand shape, including: “Make a dog house, and make a muffin not a pancake.”

      Another tip is to have students stretch out their fingers on a tabletop and then gently bring their fingers together to a point, thus raising the knuckles. Students then need to learn how to lift and drop the fingers from each metacarpophalangeal joint effectively.

      Fix It: Ulna Deviation

      ulna deviationUlna deviation is all too common in piano playing. According to Medical News Today, it is  defined as “a medical condition that causes the joints in the wrist and hand to shift so that the fingers bend toward the ulna bone on the outside of the forearm.”

      Ulna deviation is particularly prevalent when students move to playing scales and arpeggios over several octaves and must reach the highest and lowest registers of the piano. Rather than playing with correct alignment of the arm behind the fingers, a twisted position develops such that the thumb dominates the hand position and is aligned with the arm.

      When the pianist navigates the keyboard in this position, the fingers are left unsupported and unguided by the arm. As such, piano tone can be compromised, dexterity is lost and injury can happen.

      arm behind palm (no elbow) SOLUTION: To help curb this harmful habit, make students aware of their ulna deviation and show them how to correctly align the arm behind the palm instead of aligning it with the thumb, so that the arm guides the fingers. It is also helpful to have students think about the position of their elbows in relation to each hand. Tell your students to keep each of their elbows farther away from the trunk of their body to help facilitate better coordination in scale, and even more so when playing arpeggios. It is sometimes helpful to have students imagine a bunch of flowers growing from their armpits and not squish them, or an armpit balloon and not pop it.

      When I first teach scales, I begin with five-finger major pentascales; first played by each hand separately, then hands-together in contrary motion (as shown in this video). To help facilitate arm support behind each finger, I have students play with a semi-circular motion of the forearm from the elbow (counterclockwise, ascending in the right hand and vice versa in the left hand). Carolyn Shaak cleverly uses the image of a protractor to help her students achieve this motion and fluid five-finger playing.

      I begin with contrary motion so that the movements of each hand and arm are a mirror image of one another, and the same fingers of each hand are aligned and played in sync. As such, the fingers are provided support, and the arm, hands and fingers learn to create fluid, rounded and beautifully shaped pentascales.

      Developing a Well-Rounded Piano Technique

      In short, scale and arpeggio practice are vital to building and maintaining a well-rounded piano technique. Knowledge of scale and chord patterns helps support elements of musicianship, such as ear training, critical listening, and theory and analyses. In addition, practicing scales and arpeggios can assist in improving keyboard skills like sight playing, score reading and keyboard harmony.

      Developing a healthy physical approach to piano playing includes achieving a good hand shape and finger action in all scale and arpeggio playing. This will result in more even and musically played scales, injury prevention and, most importantly, lifelong music-making at the keyboard.

      Fix It: Piano Pedaling Teaching Tips

      I started taking piano lessons when I was 6 years old. I loved the music of Chopin and Schumann and was thrilled when I grew tall enough to reach the pedals.

      It wasn’t until graduate school when I learned “Phrygian Gates” by John Adams that anyone talked to me specifically about the wide range of possibilities with piano pedals. Now it is one of my favorite things to teach and explore with students.

      Note: While the sostenuto and una corda pedals are both invaluable and under-utilized tools, for the purposes of this article, I am only discussing the damper pedal.

      THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

      Fix It: Foot Position

      close up of foot on piano damper pedal with heel on ground One of the most common pedaling problems I see is when students lift their entire foot and leg to change the pedal. (I informally call this “horse pedal” because it reminds me of a horse pawing the ground.) This motion not only takes away all control of pedal depth and timing, but it also causes an interruption in the phrase. Horse pedal usually occurs when a student is not aware of the musical and physical implications of pedaling incorrectly. Luckily, it can be fixed with a bit of focus and attention to the problem.

      piano pedal extenderIn order to use and change the pedal efficiently and effectively, your student’s heel should remain on the ground, and the pedal should be played with the ball of the foot, right below the first and second toes. If a student is too short to reach the pedal comfortably, use a pedal extender (see picture to the left), which can be purchased for a relatively low cost.

      I have also seen students lean against the piano bench, rather than sitting on it, in order to reach the pedal. This can cause arm and hand position issues, and I do not recommend it.

      Fix It: Changing Pedals

      Are you hearing gaps in your student’s phrasing or blurry harmonies? There is only a very small window in which to clear or change the pedal to create a connected sound. Do it too early, and you will hear a sort of hiccup in the phrase. Do it too late, and the music becomes muddy or unclear.

      In order to change pedals correctly, the ankle must move the foot up and down very smoothly and quickly a split second after the new notes have been played (while the fingers are still on the keys). There are three names for this time of pedaling: legato, syncopated or overlapping.

      A great way to practice this is to just slow the whole process down. Have students play a basic blocked chord progression like I – IV6/4 – I – V6/5 – I, while thinking about, or even saying out loud, the timing of the change: “Play, Up/Down. Play, Up/Down.” Remember to keep the heel on the ground!

      When students can play the blocked chord progression with no gaps in the sound or overlapping harmonies, have them play broken chords and try to change the pedal on the first note of each chord. When they can do this cleanly and smoothly, they are ready to apply this to their repertoire.

      Note: If the student hasn’t learned chord progressions yet, have them play a simple five-finger pattern while pedaling after each note.

      Of course, there are times when the pedal is used to open up the sound of a chord and are not connecting the sound to any notes afterward. This is called direct or rhythmic pedaling and does not usually create challenges in terms of timing. Pedals can also be used to help create beautiful music when strumming strings inside the piano or using prepared piano techniques.

      Fix It: How Much Pedal

      female playing piano from sideIt is very common for pianists to jam down the pedal when they feel nervous or uncomfortable with a passage. (Raise your hand if you’ve ever done that!) When teachers and students are nervous or not as well prepared as they would like, their focus becomes much more limited.

      As with pretty much everything in music, the answer for determining the perfect amount of pedal is listening. While this is determined to a certain degree by the style of the piece and the composer’s markings, the instrument and space are also key factors. Students should not only listen to great pianists, but they should also record and listen to themselves playing so they are aware of how the pedal affects their overall music-making.

      It is also important for students to practice with and without pedaling so they are really listening to the sounds their fingers are creating without relying solely on the pedal. Sometimes students will lift their fingers off the keys and just use the pedal to hold the sound, but releasing the fingers actually changes the quality of the sound. Be aware of rests and lifts at the ends of phrases — it’s easy for students to continue holding through if they are not listening very carefully.

      Too often, students think of the pedal as either up or down, when there’s a variety of depths available. Quarter pedal, half pedal and flutter pedal (moving the foot up and down quickly and continually) are also ways to change the timbre or color of the sound. (I know I said I would only talk about the damper, but the una corda can be used at varying depths, as well.)

      Pedal Adds Color to Playing

      Learning how and when to use the pedal takes time and practice. Just as with most things, it can be a frustrating process, but the reward in the end is worth it.

      Anton Rubinstein said, “The pedal is the soul of the piano.” When used with purposeful intent, the pedal can elevate and bring even more beauty and color into one’s playing.

      If you would like to learn more about pedaling, I recommend these two books:

      10 Tips for Teaching Students with Autism

      Autism (or autism spectrum disorder) is a pervasive developmental disorder that affects 1 in 54 children in the United States, according to a 2020 report from the Center for Disease Control and Prevention.

      Because autism is a spectrum disorder, no two children are alike and deficits range from low-functioning (no vocabulary, not toilet-trained, needs help with feeding) to high-functioning (able to hold a job and drive a car) and everything in between. These children experience deficits in three areas:

      • autism multicolored puzzle ribbonCommunication — deficits include one or more of the following: very little or no spoken language, lack of conversational skills, echolalia or repetition of others’ words and no make-believe or imitative play.
      • Social Skills — deficits include two or more of the following: lack of eye contact or facial affect, inability to develop peer relationships and lack of interest in sharing joy, interests and achievements with others.
      • Behavioral Skills — deficits in this area are exhibited in one or more of the following ways: preoccupation with one or more patterns of interest that is abnormal either in intensity or focus, adherence to certain routines/rituals and difficulty adjusting to changes or transitions, repetitive motor mannerisms (such as hand flapping or finger flicking) and preoccupation with parts of an object.

      With the prevalence of autism, there’s a high probability that you will have students who are on the spectrum. I began teaching students with autism in 2001 as a graduate student and have continued working with this population ever since, which has helped me grow so much as a musician and teacher. I’d like to share 10 basic tips that can help you feel more comfortable teaching students with autism, including:

      1. Use Person-First Vocabulary

      young male student playing pianoSay “a child with autism” rather than “an autistic child.” This might seem like a small and unimportant distinction, but to the child and his or her parents, this is a big deal.

      Person-first vocabulary means that we recognize that the child is a person first who happens to have a development disorder. You might surprise yourself and find that your way of thinking changes, too.

      2. Each Child is Different

      I am sharing some general tips that will help guide your teaching approach. Some methods you try will be successful with one student and will completely fail with another. Also, things you try might work one week and not the next.

      Just as every typically developing child is different, every child with special needs is, as well. If something doesn’t work, don’t give up on your plan or the child — that particular teaching strategy just didn’t work that day.

      Each child is different, and each day is different.

      3. Don’t Assume Anything

      Start from square one. Many children with autism like to play piano with just their index fingers. They might not even be aware that they have other digits to use or that those digits are called fingers.

      On the other hand, many children with autism have really great ears and can play difficult songs by ear.

      Start with the very basics. Break every new concept or activity into achievable steps.

      4. Use Clear, Concise Language

      Students with autism are very literal in their understanding of language and don’t necessarily make transfers easily. Give directions that tell them exactly what you want them to do and how.

      For typically developing students, I might reference a seesaw or “sticky fingers” when teaching them how to play legato and describe it as playing the keys with gum on their fingers. However, for a child with autism, that imagery would not be helpful.

      Instead, I would demonstrate and explain to students with autism how the first finger remains down on the key until the second finger plays the next note. Or, I would slowly move their fingers up and down and even help them with their fingers until they understand the coordination. (Remember to always ask permission before touching a student.)

      Also, avoid using multiple terms for the same concept, such as thirds, skips, line to line, space to space — all of which describe the same concept.

      5. Establish a Routine, Which Allows for Flexibility

      picture scheduleSome children with autism are used to using picture schedules (see photo to the right) at home or school, and I often incorporate that into lessons. (You can easily make one with Velcro and poster board.) Others like to begin and end with the same song but are able to have more flexibility during the lesson. An example of a sample lesson would include: 5-Finger Patterns, Improvisation, Repertoire Piece, Notes Names, Student’s Choice, “Hokey-Pokey.”

      It’s good to have a set structure and lesson plan, but sometimes something triggers the student, and the plan needs to change. Or, the student is doing really well at something and requires a new plan.

      Breaks are also very helpful and can still incorporate musical aspects. For example, try a movement activity or dance break, even flashcards away from the piano. Be flexible with lesson length, as well. With the same student, I have had lessons that are 20 minutes and lessons that are one hour.

      6. Be Aware of Distractions in the Environment

      Most children with autism have sensory processing difficulties. A shirt made of itchy material or the humming of a light can make it hard for them to focus. Changes in the environment can also be unsettling. Before a student with autism arrives, I make sure that my studio is clean and that any distractions, including teaching manipulatives, are out of sight.

      7. Tackle One Issue at a Time

      It can be overwhelming for any student to try to think about notes, hand position, rhythm, pedal, etc. at the same time. Students with autism sometimes need more processing time, so don’t try to change everything at once. Work on getting the student to use all of their fingers. Then you can talk about rhythm (teach rhythms aurally!) or dynamics or something else.

      8. Don’t Get Stuck on Note Names

      Note-reading is not the most important part of music. Some children with autism might learn to read note names while others might not, and that is OK. Use familiar music. Teach aurally. Ask for input from students as to what kind of music they would like to learn.

      Some children might never reach the stage of polishing and perfecting a piece, and that is OK. Performing at a recital may not be a motivating factor for a child with autism. It could even have the opposite effect.

      Although, learning and progressing are important for us as teachers, we want to make sure that the musical experience students with autism receive is positive and uplifting.

      9. Parents Are Your Biggest Resource and Fans

      Nobody knows your student better than their parents. If you get stuck, ask how they work on new skills in the home or what they use to help motivate their child. Parents of children with special needs are unfortunately used to having their child excluded from activities on a regular basis, so to have someone invest time and energy in their child’s success is a wonderful thing.

      I remember one parent telling me that her child had been kicked out of soccer and swimming and that piano was his only extracurricular activity. This parent also gave me tools for helping to redirect the student if he got distracted and encouraged me to include a fun song at the end of every lesson. For this child, it was “Hokey-Pokey”.

      10. Be Patient with Yourself and Your Student

      Don’t take it personally if something doesn’t work right away or if a student doesn’t respond in the way you predicted. We all have bad days and, for a child with autism, there are so many factors that can affect their reactions.

      Dr. O. Ivar Lovaas, a clinical psychologist known for his work with children with autism, said, “If a child does not learn in the way we teach, we must teach in the way they learn.” Challenge yourself to step out of your comfort zone and reach out to someone who might learn and process information differently than you do. In doing so, you might change their world and yours, too.

      Songs of Thanks

      Is there a better time to express our thanks in a song than during the month that hosts Thanksgiving? Whether it’s appreciation for family, a partner, a teacher, or food and shelter —  and even if life isn’t going the way we’ve planned at the moment — writing about being grateful for what we do have can help us count our blessings and maybe even land us a lovely song at the end of the day.

      The concept of songs-of-gratitude goes back decades and knows no boundaries when it comes to genre. The Beatles did it (“Thank You Girl”), as did Alanis Morissette (“Thank U”), country’s Carrie Underwood (“Thank God for Hometowns”), even classic rock’s Led Zeppelin (“Thank You”). Oh, and there need not be a “thank you” in the title — check out Aretha Franklin’s (“You Make Me Feel Like) A Natural Woman” or Chance the Rapper’s “Blessings.” Everyone’s doing it! Because it works, it’s cathartic and worthy of our attention.

      Professional songwriters often have to conjure up material when we’re writing to a brief (like, for example, if you’re writing music for a film or television show), and if we’re working with a recording artist, we need to lean in to their point of view. But expressing our own gratitude is right at our fingertips. It isn’t something we have to calculate, since most of us already have something that we’re thankful for. (Hopefully, anyway.)

      Even just listening to these kinds of song can put us in touch with gratitude, for reasons that are chemical as well as emotional. In a recent online article, author Kate Wight points out that “Listening to a song that reminds you of happy times may lead to a release of dopamine. That’s a neurotransmitter that makes you feel good.”

      I suppose it’s like following your smile.

      On Thanksgiving there’s traditionally a post-turkey jam session in my living room. We play fun-loving joyful classics and debut our originals. (For those of us who aren’t musically inclined there’s a box of percussive accoutrements — tambourines, maracas and an array of ganzá [those egg-shaped shakers actually have a name!]) It’s a highlight of our holiday.

      In that same article, Ms. Wight also states that “Music is inextricably linked with human emotion. If you’ve resolved to try and be more thankful this year, consider using music to get you there.”

      We all can agree it’s been a challenging couple of years. It’s been difficult to carry on our normal routines, like traveling and visiting the people we love. Not too long ago when I was missing my daughter terribly, I made a decision to be optimistic. I sat down with my Yamaha baby grand and then … a song came out. (Video below.)

      Notice I didn’t say I “wrote” a song but that it “came out.” That’s because writing a thank-you song wasn’t necessarily the plan. It doesn’t have to be. Instead, my heart was in my hands and my hands landed on the keys, and the song simply happened.

      Gratitude is a powerful feeling. It’s a natural and selfless place to begin and quite the fodder for song.

      Simply the process of writing a song of gratitude will remind us of what is easy to forget during uncertain times or in the fog of life. There’s always a story to be told about a friend who lifts us up and pulls us out of the darkness … or a child who reminds us that the best day of our life was the day they were born. This the time of year we take stock.

      Here’s my thank you:

       

      Check out Shelly’s other postings.

      Case Study: A Rocky Road to PASIC

      When V.R. Eaton High School in Haslet, Texas, opened its doors in 2015, director of percussion Matt Moore immediately started a percussion ensemble. In its inaugural year, the group of 11 went to the North Texas Percussion Festival and finished last.

      Five years later in 2020, the then 40-member ensemble not only finished first at the same festival but was also invited to perform at the Percussive Arts Society International Convention (PASIC), held in Indianapolis most Novembers, after being named a winner in the organization’s International Percussion Ensemble Competition. Unfortunately, COVID-19 hit and shut down in-person schools in the United States. Since then, Moore and his co-teacher, Luke Vogt, have prepped — over and over again — for its PASIC appearance.

      Fueling a Passion

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble practicing Moore feels passionate about percussion ensemble as a relatively new genre. “We’re in the golden age of concert percussion composition right now,” Moore says. “A lot of the best music written for the art form is coming out every year.”

      In addition, Moore says that percussion ensemble complements the already competitive fall marching season, especially for Eaton High School, a 6A school in Texas with more than 200 participants. “Marching percussion is fun for the performers and fun to teach, and it’s very much art, but there’s also a heavy athletic side,” Moore says. “Percussion ensemble is just art. Coaching an athletic activity goes away, and we get to be only musicians. … I enjoy having both. … it’s an incredible thing to dive deep into the marching arts and then shift focus and just experience this pure musical art form and develop it with my students.”

      According to Moore, most schools that have percussion-specific groups concentrate on either percussion ensemble or indoor drumline during the winter or spring seasons. While indoor drumline includes marching and tends to involve full ensembles in a story-based performance, percussion ensemble provides more variation. For example, pieces in a percussion ensemble program have three to 15 performers. Selections often focus more on mallet apparatuses but can also include non-pitch instruments like drums as well as electronics. 

      The diversity of the genre allows Moore’s students to prep about 25 pieces for its spring concert without overwhelming the group. Often, upperclassmen are chosen to participate in smaller subsets and at festivals. Moore’s ensemble often collaborates with other departments, including strings, choir and dance.

      Each student, often playing an individual part, must be confident and independent with “dynamically changing listening responsibilities around the group,” Moore says. “We enjoy developing that.”

      Growing in Ability

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble practicing Moore grew Eaton’s percussion ensemble, which meets between the end of November to mid-March, partly from the organic expansion of the school. As the third high school in the Northwest Independent School District, Eaton began with only freshmen and sophomores and added higher grades as students moved up. As the program increased in size and the students improved in ability, Moore added more opportunities. In 2018 and 2019, Eaton hosted its own festival in addition to participating in the North Texas Percussion Festival. And in 2019, the group submitted a video to the Black Swamp Percussion (BSP) Ensemble Showcase.

      Moore grounded his students on striving for musical excellence rather than specific achievements. “Competitive success is never our goal,” he says. “We’ve talked about that from the very first day in 2015, and we talk about that every school year. We are not a program that’s in it for trophies. We’re not trying to win stuff.”

      Moore typically starts each season with a casual meeting to watch some videos of top high school groups. During the 2018-2019 school year, “I remember asking [the students]: ‘Do you want to play at this level? I think we can.’ The answer was a resounding ‘Yes!’”

      That year, the percussion ensemble played upper-level collegiate literature and achieved second place in the high school large percussion ensemble division in the BSP Percussion Ensemble Showcase. “For us, that was our moment of discovering that maybe we can play these kinds of pieces in a way that is on level with the groups we’ve been looking up to,” Moore says.

      PASIC Good News

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble practicing In 2020, Eaton won the North Texas Percussion Festival for high school large group on the weekend that started spring break in early March. “This festival was the very last in-person thing that anybody did [before COVID shutdowns],” Moore says.

      Luckily, performing at the festival allowed Moore to submit its PASIC application, which required unedited song selections from live concerts. That April, Eaton submitted the following three pieces:

      • “Surfacing” by Dave Hall for large-scale percussion orchestra (that the ensemble performed at the Eaton Percussion Festival in May 2019)
      • “Donner” for four percussionists by David Skidmore
      • “Crown of Thorns,” a piece by David Maslanka originally commissioned by the University of Oklahoma Percussion Orchestra for PASIC 1991 (both “Donner” and “Crown of Thorns” were from Eaton’s most recent North Texas Percussion Festival performance)

      With song selections overall, Moore often focuses on how the sound matches his group and how the pieces can educationally help his students stretch their skills.

      In June, Moore learned that his ensemble was named one of three high school winners. PASIC also selected three college groups and one junior high group. “We got all the kids together on a Zoom call and shared the news,” he says.

      Moore’s team immediately began creating different scenarios for how they could make PASIC 2020 fit into the ensemble’s plans during the middle of a pandemic. But just a few weeks later, on July 1, 2020, the Percussive Arts Society (PAS) announced that PASIC would be fully virtual. Instead of being featured in a 50-minute performance, the group was asked to submit a recording. “Our plan last summer was to have this really cool experience and make the most of it without complex in-person demands from our kids.”

      Changing PASIC Plans

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble practicing As a composer himself, Moore had written a marimba choir piece, titled “Together,” to help musicians get through the early days of the pandemic. Moore had posted the composition on social media and requested video submissions. With 111 submissions from middle school to adult performers, including some Eaton High School students, the song was produced into a compiled video by Cameron Sather and aired on YouTube on April 27, 2020.

      For Eaton’s PASIC virtual performance, Moore planned to record and submit “Together.” Throughout the summer, Moore brought in groups of students — the soprano line, the alto line, tenor line, bass line — to rehearse and record in groups. “Because of COVID restrictions, we didn’t want to get all of our kids together physically in person.”

      But Moore also decided to add something more — spoken word — so he commissioned poetry by Rosemerry Wahtola Trommer to match the emotional waves of the piece. The poem was then performed by a student from Eaton’s theater department. But the overall project was scratched and never fully produced when PAS canceled the winners’ virtual performances.

      A group of directors from the winning groups appealed to PAS to postpone their performances to November 2021, and PAS agreed. So, Moore’s team went back to the drawing board.

      “For a time, … we were planning on not [doing PASIC for 2021] …, especially coming out of such a weird year,” Moore says. “We wanted to just have a normal experience this fall.”

      In addition, all except one student from the winning submission video had matriculated from the school. “I did have one freshman in ‘Crown of Thorns,’ and she’s the only one who will get to play at PASIC because everyone else graduated,” he says.

      But seeing the resilience and strengths of his students persuaded Moore to push forward. In 2021, the group participated in indoor drumline competitions for the first time and became a finalist in the virtual WGI Sport of the Arts Scholastic A Class competition. “Since we didn’t have a proper fall marching season, we didn’t have any band competitions, and we didn’t put together a show. … None of our band kids had that ‘season’ experience that’s so engaging for the students and we felt we needed to add it in the winter. … What sealed the deal [to do PASIC] was how well the kids performed at indoor drumline. They did such a good job.”

      Balancing the Workload

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble practicing By April 2021, Moore accepted the invitation to perform at PASIC in November. Since groups typically don’t find out about PASIC performances until the summertime, he now felt ahead of the game. But Moore made a pact with himself and the other directors to maintain a work/life balance while preparing for the high-profile show in the percussion ensemble’s off-season.

      “There’s a big problem with burnout in our profession,” Moore says. “I have a family — my wife and a 5-year-old daughter. I decided pretty early on that if we were going to do PASIC, [preparations] would be done during the hours we already have allocated to band.”

      While Eaton normally focuses completely on marching band in the summer and fall, Moore simultaneously passed out percussion ensemble pieces for the PASIC performance in May. During its typical June percussion camp, then full summer band camp in August and during the regular season, he split the students’ time between marching rehearsal and percussion ensemble rehearsal. “The students have risen to the challenge nicely of balancing the workload,” Moore says. “We’re building a rehearsal schedule that does not go beyond what we normally do. But I’m pulling kids out of marching rehearsal all the time. I have a very supportive team.”

      A Collaborative Concert

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble practicing Moore and Vogt have crafted a 45-minute PASIC 2021 concert that he describes as “collaborative, flowing and fresh.” With a mix of smaller groupings to larger percussion orchestra, the program brings together all of Eaton’s 33 percussion ensemble members plus seven string players and five dance (color guard) students performing seven songs, each with a distinct sound and purpose.

      “The history of our program has been highly collaborative, and I wanted our programming at PASIC to reflect us, to feel like us and to sound like us,” Moore says. “We’re bringing our entire program, which is atypical. Often groups will just bring their top students. Especially with the reduced opportunities that our kids have had over the past year and half, I wanted to find a way to bring everyone.”

      The students will finally get to perform Moore’s piece “Together,” including the spoken word recording, plus another of Moore’s songs, “Vector,” that leans heavily on electronic instruments. The piece is fitting, considering that in 2020, Moore and Vogt co-founded Waveform Percussion, which brings electronic media into percussion education.

      Several other pieces are existing repertoire from other composers that have been performed by prominent professional percussion ensembles, such as Third Coast Percussion.

      In addition, Eaton commissioned a song by percussionist Ivan Trevino titled “A Spiral Made of Wires,” which has a pop/post-rock influence and includes electric guitar. Though the two didn’t know each other previously, Trevino accepted Moore’s invitation to meet the group at PASIC to premiere the piece as a guest performer on his electric guitar.

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble practicing

      “It’s common to commission new works,” Moore says. “In fact, PAS encourages it. … There’s a name that probably every high school percussionists in the country knows, and that’s Ivan Trevino. As soon as I knew that we had won PASIC, Ivan was my first reach-out. … He writes this amazing, very listenable music that’s at a perfect ability level for our kids. It’s the kind of music where you listen to it one time and you think it’s amazing. But it has this musical depth where you rehearse it for months and still find new layers.”

      As far as travel, percussion ensembles by nature involve a lot of logistics and gear with students often having their own setup that is different for each piece. With PASIC providing a specific stage size, Moore has taped off an area in the percussion room to accommodate the space that they will be given. “We started with the music and not thinking about logistics at all,” Moore says. “Now we are to the part of the year that we’re trying to consolidate our setups …, so the audience doesn’t have to watch kids awkwardly move instruments around.”

      The Eaton PASIC ensemble performed multiple times during the summer and fall for parents, to help develop the students’ stage comfort and work out its complex audio and lighting setup. To present its show to a range of audiences, Eaton is embarking on a four-part “PASIC Performance Series”: 1) a show in their home auditorium on Nov. 4, 2) a joint concert with the University of Texas – Arlington on Nov. 6, 3) a joint concert with the University of South Carolina at Center Grove High School in Greenwood, Indiana, on Nov. 10, and finally 4) its PASIC showcase concert on Nov. 12.

      V.R. Eaton High School’s PASIC 2021 Program

      V.R. Eaton High School percussion ensemble group photo standing within water feature V.R. Eaton’s 45-minute performance at the November 2021 Percussive Arts Society International Convention will comprise the following mix of pieces.

      • “Together” by Matt Moore (with commissioned poetry by Rosemerry Wahtola Trommer)
      • “Triple Point” by Ayanna Woods
      • “Minus Nine” by David Madeira (with Eaton string students)
      • “Aether” by Francisco Perez
      • “Madeira River” from “Aguas da Amazonia” by Philip Glass, arranged by Peter Martin and Third Coast Percussion (with Eaton dance students)
      • “A Spiral Made of Wires,” a commissioned piece by Ivan Trevino (with guest artist Ivan Trevino on electric guitar)
      • “Vector” by Matt Moore

      5 Ways to Keep Elementary Students Engaged

      After the first month or two of the school year, it can be very challenging to keep your elementary students engaged. Here are five lessons that I have used to keep my students motivated and excited about learning music, even on a Monday morning!

      Music Appreciation Sculptures

      Do you have a hard time getting your students to remain focused and still during listening exercises? Try music-appreciation sculptures, an idea that I picked up from a local Orff group. I adapted it slightly to make it more of an individual project rather than a group one for younger students.

      play dough unsplashFirst, purchase a set of 25 to 30 mini play doughs. Next, borrow a set of vinyl spot markers from the gym. Make sure you have one per student. Space out the spot markers across the classroom before your students arrive.

      Welcome your students and begin class with a listening exercise. Have the students think about what the music would look like. Ask prompting questions, such as “Does this sound like an animal?” or “What is happening here?”

      Next, assign each student a spot marker and pass out a play dough container to each pupil. Have students make a sculpture according to their imagination. Walk around and monitor the class and provide more prompting questions like “What emotion does this part feel like?” and “If this song was in a movie, which movie would it be in?”

      Assessment tip: It can be difficult to quantify and grade musical appreciation and responsiveness, but these individual sculpture projects make excellent assessments for the gradebook.

      Next, separate the class into groups of two or three. (This part can get tricky when it comes to teamwork and opinions, so it’s best for group work to be limited to mid- and upper-elementary students.) Have students make a multicolored, collective sculpture to the music. At the end of class, have each group present and explain the artwork. Music-appreciation sculptures will have your students listening to a symphonic suite for close to one hour without growing fidgety.

      A Dance a Day

      Not all classrooms can afford the resources to pull off manipulative-heavy lessons, such as music-appreciation sculptures, on a regular basis. But luckily, dancing doesn’t require any equipment at all.

      I know that incorporating dance into the classroom can be an overwhelming task but having a couple of go-to dances can help your students get their wiggles out in a productive way. Try swapping out your Kidz Bop dance break for the following line dances and movement games:

      • 2, 4, 6, 8 Meet Me at the Garden Gate” — this is the perfect 1st grade introduction to a structured partner dance
      • Old Brass Wagon” — try this dance game for students who are too young to do highly structured dances
      • Wolf” — this is another dance game for students who are too young to do highly structured dances
      • Alabama Gal” — Try this one if you want a challenge! This partner dance is a much more complex folk dance and works well for 3rd grade and up. This is the perfect opportunity to teach movement terms like sashay and arch. This four-section traditional dance will keep both you and your students on your toes.

      Clapping Games

      two girls clapping game pexels 9532730Clapping games are another way to give your students a fun break but still practice music. Try clapping games as a stationary break, especially when your classroom is too excitable to do line dances.

      Some examples of clapping games that help students work on internalizing steady beats and rhythms include:

      • “Double Double,” “Miss Mary Mack” and “Lemonade” — these three clapping games are all pretty similar. They teach the same principles but keep your students engaged because they are all separate songs (sneaky, right?).
      • Choco-Choco-La-La” — If you’d like to work on something that will get your Spanish-speaking students excited, try this traditional clapping game. This game uses a similar pattern to “Miss Mary Mack” but faster, and it comes with a really entertaining music video.
      • Down by the Banks (of the Hanky Panky)” — For something a bit harder (and more competitive), try this complex game, which requires the steady beat to be passed down the circle between students. Whoever gets tapped on the last note of the phrase is out!

      Bring in Unusual Instruments

      When all else fails, bring out an unusual instrument. I’ve shared the didgeridoo, djembe, piccolo or another surprising instrument to call students’ attention back. I love introducing odd musical instruments in the middle of the year or right before holiday breaks when pupils tend to have a shorter attention span.

      Orff Stories

      stack books unsplashUse Orff stories to incorporate both reading and creativity. These stories are perfect for events like reading week, when your school may ask you to read instead of play instruments: Why not do both?

      Many educators prefer to read the story through once before allowing students to add in the musical instruments of their choice. Start by giving guiding questions, such as: “Does this make a sound?” or “What instrument sound would go with the splash of the water?” After the first read-through, set out a row of instruments that students can choose from.

      The beautiful thing about Orff stories is that there are no wrong answers. One short story can actually take up an entire class period. Everyone in the class can play multiple parts and watch how their classmates interpret sounds differently.

      Music educator Matthew Stensrud created an excellent example of an Orff sound story with the children’s book “Mama, Will it Snow Tonight?” 

      Key tip: Keep in mind that not every children’s book makes for a good Orff retelling. Try finding books with repetitive themes, and a lot of onomatopoeia.

      Books that I have used for Orff stories include:

      • “She’ll Be Comin’ Round the Mountain”
      • “The Little Green Frog”
      • “Cat Goes Fiddle-I-Fee”
      • “Click Clack Boo!”
      • “Way Down Deep in the Deep Blue Sea”
      • “This Old Man”

      With a couple of extra manipulatives, a bit more movement and some creative storytelling, you can keep your classroom more engaged than ever. Even when it’s just before Thanksgiving break!

      5 Tools to Get Your Motivation Mojo Back

      Ah, if only motivation came in a bottle, and you could crack open the cap and chug it down like a sports drink. Suddenly, you’d be motivated to rocket through tasks that previously seemed daunting or tedious, like entering 194 students’ midterm grades into the system or trying out a new program for teaching chording.

      If you’re having a hard time feeling motivated, you’re not alone. The pandemic brought with it disorientation, disruption and anxiety, robbing us of motivation. According to a study by the Pew Research Center, 42% of workers age 18 to 40 say their motivation to do work has been more difficult to summon, compared with only 20% of workers age 50 and older. Especially hard hit was 18- to 29-year-olds, with 53% of them saying it’s been hard to find motivation.

      There are a lot of reasons for this, such as isolation and even stress-related reduced cognition — don’t worry, it’s temporary — but on the bright side, experts tell us there are strategies to get your motor running again, to feel more energized, and yes, motivated.

      Tool 1: Radical Rest

      You may have heard the term “revenge bedtime procrastination,” where people stay up late doing things that have little value (like mindlessly scrolling through social media) instead of sleeping. They do this because they want to regain a sense of control over their time.

      American culture places so much value on productivity that many of us feel guilty for relaxing — truly relaxing — so we skirt the issue. Reclaim your right to true R&R on your off time, and you’ll be more productive during work time. (Rest can also be a social justice issue; read more about The Nap Ministry.)

      Instead of unhealthy “revenge” time, purposefully block off time to do … nothing. What nothing means to you personally may vary. It could be puttering in the yard,  listening to music, organizing your record collection by color or reading a great new book in bed. What you do is not important; the goal is doing something you want to do with your time.

      dark chocolate unsplashTool 2: Nibble on Some Chocolate

      Eating dark chocolate boosts creativity and cognitive function, reports research presented at the 2018 annual Experimental Biology convention. A 2021 research published in the International Journal of Exercise Science found that supplementing with dark chocolate helped athletes increase their resting energy expenditure — that is, it boosted their metabolism.

      There’s no recommended daily allowance (RDA) for chocolate, but most experts suggest an ounce or two a day of dark chocolate (70% cacao or higher) will give the positive effects without too many additional calories.

      Tool 3: Serialize

      The term “serialize” comes from the work of Oliver Burkeman, who wrote the book “Four Thousand Weeks: Time Management for Mortals,” He claims that you’ll complete more projects and feel less anxiety overall if you start something, work on it and complete it before moving on.

      To be clear, projects may need to be broken down into small steps. That’s because our motivation can droop under the weight of self-doubt. “If you don’t think you can get a particular task done, you’re unlikely to muster the energy to work on it,” psychologist Art Markman told Harvard Business Review. Markman suggests turning an abstract “to do” into specific, achievable steps.

      For example, “Plan lessons for February” is too big. On the other hand, “Find six songs that represent the music of the Civil Rights Movement to use in Feb. 1 lesson” is in the realm of doable. Blocking off time for a specific task — “11 to 11:30 a.m., prepare Civil Rights song list” — is even better.

      Burkeman is also a fan of having a “done list” in addition to a “to-do” list, which gives a sense of accomplishment. While that extra step won’t be for everyone, the point is that finishing something — anything — gives us a boost and motivates us to do the next thing.

      Guitar livingroomTool 4: Use Choice Architecture

      You might not need quite as much motivation as you think. James Clear, the author of “Atomic Habits,” writes about not relying on willpower to get moving, but instead using the power of habit; that is, setting up your life so you do things without even having to think about doing them.

      Choice architecture is designing the environment with a lot of cues that trigger positive change. For example, Clear writes, “If you want to practice guitar more frequently, place your guitar stand in the middle of the living room.” By altering the home and workspaces, we flow naturally toward better choices.

      Tool 5: Create Opportunities to Discover Meaning

      “Why am I here?” many of us wonder at 2 a.m. Viktor Frankl famously wrote about this topic in his 1946 book “Man’s Search for Meaning.” But, Frankl warned, finding meaning is a side effect of pursuing other goals, not a goal unto itself. He wrote, “Don’t aim at success — the more you aim at it and make it a target, the more you are going to miss it. For success, like happiness, cannot be pursued; it must ensue.”

      Want things “to ensue”? Try activities that make you feel connected with something bigger than yourself. You’ve already chosen a career as a music educator — a fantastic choice! Other areas could include volunteer work, spending time in a natural setting that evokes awe and caring for animals.

      Because when we have a life purpose — and just a bit of dark chocolate — propelling us forward, motivation comes naturally.

      Marching Band Uniforms Do’s and Don’ts

      Picking out new uniforms for your marching band can be an overwhelming task, especially as a new band director. There are so many things to consider. You want something that is universally flattering for every member of the band.

      But should you go with a sash or no sash? Leg stripe or no leg stripe? Below are some do’s and don’ts when it comes to choosing uniforms for your high school marching band.

      Download this Yamaha Drums and Percussion Care Checklist for Students now!

      Colors

      DO consider color theory

      DO stick to solid colored pants

      DON’T select white or light-colored pants

      One of the first things to consider is color. It’s not as simple as picking uniforms that match your school colors. You have to look at complementary colors and color temperatures (try using a color wheel like this one by Canva). Keep in mind that within one color, there are various color “temperatures,” which makes your selection that much more complicated.

      If your two school colors aren’t already complementary, try and pick versions of those colors that are within the neutral range (that is, not warm and not cool). You will find neutral colors toward the center of the color wheel.

      Have you noticed how true reds look good on everyone, but red-orange makes some people look washed out? That’s because true red is neutral, and neutral temperatures of colors look universally flattering.

      Another option is to choose the brightest school color and pair it with dark pants, such as black. For high school marching bands, do NOT choose white pants. Your students will sit on grass or on a dirty gym floor during a competition break and stain their white pants. Try sticking to darker neutrals for pants, such as navy, brown, charcoal gray or black. These colors will hide grass stains and dirt marks and will last for many years.

      THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

      marching band behind 4YbssFeFwZk unsplashAccents and Accessories

      DON’T add an accent stripe on the leg

      DO consider sashes

      DO try dark gloves

      DO add a plume, but consider the material closely

      DO try suspenders

      DON’T add too many bells and whistles

      Accent stripes can look really stylish on college marching bands, but when it comes to high school, they can be a big uniform mistake. Stripes draw attention to those who are off-step. If you are looking for an accessory that is flashy and easy for your students to put on, consider sashes instead.

      Gloves are great accessories and essential for marching bands in colder states. I recommend dark gloves because they hide stains better, and they will better match the dark pants mentioned earlier.

      Plumes are a personal favorite when it comes to marching band uniform accessories. They come in many different materials, including feather plumes, fountain plumes, plasticky shako plumes and metallic shako plumes. I recommend something akin to feathers or faux feathers. While the metallic shako plumes are striking, they are easily pulled apart. Sticking to the old-fashioned plumes will ensure that you won’t be repurchasing them next year. Simply put, the older style is sturdier.

      While many high schoolers think suspenders are the anathema of cool, it’s worth getting them. Many students will end up with pants that are slightly larger than they need. Suspenders ensure that pants will stay in the right spot, especially during high-steps and run-ins.

      Keep in mind that too many accessories can quickly overwhelm the eyes. Choose one or two really nice accessories rather than getting all of them. Plus, some accessories are simply not practical. Gauntlets and spats might look great, but they are a hassle to put on and look tacky when combined with too many other extras. Less is always more.

      Fabric Types

      DO pick your fabric accord to your climate

      DO consider summer uniforms

      DON’T choose wool just because “that’s what we’ve always done”

      Assess the hottest and coldest weather your students will be marching in. For example, I am a music educator based in Michigan. Our summers are hot and humid, but it can also get quite frigid during the winter. Most music educators around here opt for a lighter summer uniform and a fall and winter wool uniform. Oftentimes, directors choose wool just because that’s what they always marched with. Wool uniforms are simply too sweltering for many marching bands, especially those based in the South. You want your students to look good and feel good.

      Hats

      DO consider bucket-style hats

      DON’T choose cowboy hats because they don’t last

      Marching band hats vary widely. One of my personal favorites is the bucket-style hat. Students are often left without pockets or storage on the marching band field. Bucket-style hats offer students a small and secure storage space for a small granola bar or a Capri Sun. Another style that band directors sometimes choose is the cowboy hat. However, this style is not built to last compared to faux-leather bucket-style (shako) hats.

      Color Guard and Twirler Uniforms

      DON’T choose a color guard/ twirler uniform that has a lot of straps

      DO ask which gender and uniform your students identify with before ordering

      Complex and strappy color guard and twirler outfits look really cool, but they are not ideal for situations where your students need to quickly and easily get in and out of uniform.

      While all members of the instrument section will be wearing gender-neutral outfits, this is not always the case with auxiliary groups. Sometimes, male-identifying students will want something a little less flashy. Organize an aux.group meeting with your section leader after school and find out what your students are comfortable with.

      Shoes

      marching band black red pexels 8884280DO have your students purchase their own shoes

      DON’T worry about the brand

      Having students purchase their own shoes through your band program will save a lot of money for the band boosters program. In addition to this, allowing students to get their own shoes will ensure that they pick the correct size and style. Make sure all students purchase the same color shoes. As for the style, provide students with a take-home buyers guide with a list of reputable brand names, such as Dinkles or Drillmasters.

      The Final Step: Student Input

      DO create a poll for your students once you’ve narrowed down your options.

      Include a comment section in your online poll, so students can write in things that you may not have thought of or overlooked. You don’t need to give in to students’ every whim, such as making uniforms tricolor with a three-layer sash, but remember that they are the ones wearing the uniforms, not you.

      Choosing new uniforms for your marching band is no easy feat. From finding a universally flattering style to securing funding, you have a big task ahead of you. But with a little research and some input from your students, you’ve got this!

      Fundraising Without Selling

      Chances are high that either as a student or teacher, you’ve attempted to sell cookie dough, chocolate, wrapping paper, popcorn or coupon books in order to raise funds for your music program. As tasty or handy as these items are, have you ever felt like there must be another option?

      Just today, I watched a young, excited sales team convince students that they can get a free Frisbee if they raise $50 for their school. “Will the school get the other $49.50?” I asked myself. Today’s assembly inspired the following list of ways for music teachers to fundraise without selling anything.

      tickets g65ae27e8b 1920Concert Ticket Sales

      The easiest way to create revenue without significantly increasing your workload is to charge admission to your concerts. Whether you use a professional service such as TicketSource or ask parents to volunteer, a reasonable fee to attend your concert can be the start of your rolling budget.

      Not every community is accustomed to paying for school events so consider distributing three or four complimentary tickets per student to encourage attendance. Whittle the complimentary tickets down each year until the demand matches your community’s accessibility and needs.

      Complimentary and discounted tickets are a fantastic way for students to invite community members to your next concert!

      Concert Donations

      While making a guest appearance at a concert in Georgia, I witnessed a band director send around a student with a bucket that had a dollar sign spray-painted on it. During the intermission, the director announced, “If you enjoy what you’re seeing right now, make a donation so we can do it again!”

      Patrons of this concert did not pay an entry fee but the average donation per person exceeded the cost of what I would have charged for general admission. This model allowed those who are able to support the program to shine while also allowing all community members to attend. The bucket successfully covered the cost of the concert, allowing the director to bring out more guest artists the next year.

      Rico reedsEnsemble and Instrument Fees

      Consider the guaranteed expenses your music program endures every year and decide which of them can be supported by families paying a small yearly fee. Departmentalize your small and recurring expenses such as reeds, pencils, guitar picks, rosin and valve grease into a category that is funded by an ensemble fee.

      Having extras of necessary items on hand will be convenient for students and families, and you no longer will have to make as many emergency trips to the music store. If you’re able to create a healthy stockpile of items, use the dividend to improve your classroom. Label this money as funds that are meant to better the student experience.

      Extracurricular Clubs

      If you enjoy running an extracurricular music club, be sure to calculate not only the value of your time but the cost of competing clubs in your space.

      When I started my first after school music club, I added the cost of a club shirt, our concert space and snacks to come up with my club fee. After distributing the paperwork, I discovered that the dance class next door was charging eight times as much and didn’t even provide snacks!

      It was a hard lesson learned because it turned out my club cost less than the onsite daycare, which led to lots of participants! Since then, I’ve found my balance of welcoming yet competitive prices that allow my program to grow year after year.

      Profit Sharing

      Family restaurant wYOPqmtDD0w unsplashLarge food chains and local restaurants are happy to profit share in exchange for increased drive-thru business and in-restaurant patrons on less busy nights. Restaurants, such as Chipotle and Raising Cane’s, have programs in place to share 15% to 33% of their profit during school fundraising campaigns. After the paperwork is completed, have your students spread the word that having a family dinner night out will support your program.

      If you prefer to keep your efforts local, reach out to business owners in your area who are interested in profit sharing. If space allows, put on a chamber performance inside the venue to bring more attention to everyone’s favorite eatery. Use your knowledge of the community to decide if food, goods or experiences are the best way to get community members out and willing to spend money.

      Mini golf competition, anyone?

      Advertising

      While on the topic of businesses in your community, do any of them want to have a banner at your next event? Many marching bands have figured out how to sell banners, logos on their yearly shirts and trailer wraps to local businesses, but the other ensembles are often left wondering how they can cash in on advertising.

      Selling ads in concert programs is a staple of the concert experience but is there something more exciting?

      I have a few instruments in my classroom that are permanently labeled with the name of the funding party, so that the students and I can always acknowledge where that instrument came from. Local businesses receive a plaque of appreciation presented at the concert, so their support can be on display in their place of business.

      With a parent-signed release form, students were able to make a “thank you” video for a local veterinarian donor who used the footage in its next online advertising campaign.

      Amazon Wish List

      Eliminate the need for some of your budget by directly asking for the items you need in your classroom. I’ve tried Donor’s Choose and GoFundMe — which are great fundraising platforms — but there is a real joy in having a community member randomly purchase an item that you need without having to beg your friends on social media.

      Include your Amazon wish list in your email signature, your dojo messages, your school’s website and social media. It is absolutely impossible for parents to help out if they don’t realize that your wish list even exists!

      Everything DealThe “Everything” Deal

      If everything on this list seems like one more thing for you to do, then I offer you the “everything” deal. At the very beginning of the school year, construct a flyer that promises parents one thing: If they pay one price for everything you want, you will leave them alone for the rest of the school year. You can avoid nickel and diming parents by rolling all your future campaigns into one.

      For example, during the school year, parents might be asked to help out in various ways — volunteer at the snack shack, pay an instrument fee, drive the carpool, organize the uniforms, collect ticket stubs at the door, etc. — OR they can pay $100 up front with the guarantee that they will be left alone for the rest of the year. That’s right. I’ll take their names off the volunteer list and put them in the Elite Gold Status Club that receives four tickets to every event. It’s the perfect deal for the parent who prefers to write one check and be done.

      What’s your favorite way to raise money? Share your experience with @SwicksClassroom on Instagram or email your story to educators@yamaha.com.

      Be Marketable: Combine Performance and Entrepreneurship

      Over the past 20 years, careers in music have become as varied as the numerous musical genres. The music business is a fast-paced, competitive and ever-changing landscape, which requires specialized tools and knowledge to survive.

      It’s not enough to learn the notes, perform the repertoire or audition for groups. Your plans will change, and you must be able to adapt to any situation. In this article, I will provide tools and resources on personal branding, social marketing and the interview process. I will share tips that I have learned and honed over my 25-year career as an educator, professional musician and businessperson.

      What is Branding?

      Branding cut outBefore we start talking about social marketing, you must understand the difference between branding and personal branding. Branding is the process for creating a name, logo or symbol that identifies and differentiates your product and services from your competitor’s (Entrepreneur.com). Some recognizable brands that come to mind are Apple, Nike, Starbucks or Netflix.

      In his book “The Brand You 50, author Tom Peters coined the phrase “personal branding.” He states that a personal brand is your promise to the marketplace and the world.”

      To develop your personal brand, first answer these questions:

      • What do you want to be known for?
      • Why will people seek you out?
      • What makes you unique?
      • What’s your story (your “why”)?
      • How can you add value?

      This step is crucial to the development of your personal brand. Once you answer these questions, it’s time to start building!

      Building Your Online Presence

      social media apps pexels pixabay 533446Ready to build your online presence? You want to control your message and how people perceive you on the internet. So, build a personal website and set up your email address and social media accounts.

      By creating an online presence, you ensure that your personal branding matches across all your digital platforms. As we all know (hopefully), what happens on the internet, stays on the internet, so it’s vital that you control your message and online presence. Where do you start?

      Namecheckr.com is a site that will research domain and social usernames and check for its availability. As you search for your online username, it is important to find a unique, memorable name that is available on multiple online platforms. You don’t want to be @funkydrummer18 on Facebook and @funkydrummer_18 on Instagram. Be consistent and find a name that works across all platforms. For example, I use @drdavegerhart on all my social media accounts so people can find me easily.

      Once you have your online platforms set up, create, or update your resume, curriculum vita, headshot, short and long bio, and your electronic press kit (EPK). It’s important to have these documents and photos on your website. Remember, it’s all about controlling your message. When someone searches for you, make sure they get your current photo and bio.

      Resources to build a website or blog: Squarespace or WordPress

      Looking for a Job?

      Now that you have answered the questions about your personal brand and built an online presence, it’s time to look for work. I believe that when it comes to finding a job you must create your own opportunities.

      job interview pexels 4344878If you want to start a private lesson studio, find a location and set up the room where you can teach. But how do you find students? I recommend volunteering at your local public school’s music program. Ask the director if you can teach a masterclass in exchange for passing out your business card (aka, your information). As you build your reputation, parents will hire you to teach private lessons to their children.

      Becoming a professional performer has become more difficult in recent years. Find networking opportunities where you can meet and talk to other performers, composers, conductors and contractors. There are also sales and marketing opportunities for performers in the music product industry.

      No matter which career path you take, be prepared for the interview. Put together a 30-second “elevator pitch” to describe why someone should hire you and what makes you unique. Do an internet search for “interview questions” and download some sample questions to help you prepare for the in-person interview. Practice answering questions just like you practice your instrument so you can become comfortable when the time comes for the actual interview.

      word map of music jobs How Do I Start?

      There’s no time like the present! Don’t wait until you graduate from high school or college. Start now.

      Work on your personal branding and online presence over the next couple of months. Take a business or marketing class at your school or see if one is available online. Volunteer at a music-related nonprofit organization or apply for an internship. Sit in during a rehearsal with the local orchestra. Complete a certification.

      As the Chinese proverb says, “The best time to plant a tree was 20 years ago. The second-best time is now.” It’s time to start thinking about your career goals. Plant your tree now and continue to nurture it as you develop your skills and career.

      Do you have other marketing tips for music professionals? E-mail me at dgerhart@yamaha.com.

       

      Resources

      10 Best Folk Albums to Listen to On Vinyl

      With fall comes the rain — something I know all too well since I live in the Pacific Northwest — and there’s something extra special about listening to vinyl on a rainy day. Maybe it’s the warmth that analog provides, but layered vocals and acoustic instruments — the keystones of folk music — are at their best when listened to on vinyl. On many levels, the subtle nuances present in these records really show off your system as well.

      Here are a few of my favorite rainy-day listening folk albums. Even if you’re not a particular fan of this type of music, you’re bound to find something compelling and comforting here.

      1. Woody Guthrie, The Ultimate Collection – Woody Guthrie

      The roots of American folk music all lead back to this man. While Guthrie was an incredibly prolific songwriter, “This Land Is Your Land” is arguably the most important folk song of all time. Because of its age, the recording quality of this album is primitive, to say the least. But the heart and soul presented in this collection make the journey worthwhile. These sparse songs truly tell the tales of America in the 1930s and 1940s.

      2. Bob Dylan’s Greatest Hits – Bob Dylan

      It would be a disciple of Guthrie’s — Bob Dylan — who would become the shining superstar of folk music, giving the concept of the singer/songwriter true validation. There are a number of great audiophile remasters of this set, offering an excellent cross-section of his most popular and accessible tracks. Grab a latte and start with “Just Like A Woman,” from side two of record two. This is minimalist production at its finest, with Dylan serving up some great guitar and harp playing. Let the rest unfold around you, and your day will be better for it.

      3. Sunshine Superman – Donovan

      Don’t let the Austin Powers-esque groovy title track fool you: the rest of this record is pure folk, in line with Donovan’s roots as a self-styled bard. “Guinevere” features a nice blend of his instantly recognizable singing and fingerstyle guitar playing (which would serve as a major influence on White Album-era John Lennon), with some tasty bongo bits mixed in. The next track, “The Fat Angel,” is heavy on sitar, hinting that Donovan’s output would become a lot more turned-on very soon.

      4. If You Can Believe Your Eyes And Ears – The Mamas and the Papas

      In a short three-year period from 1965 to 1968, the Mamas and the Papas released four records that expanded the genre of folk-rock and simultaneously became a big part of a more psychedelic “California Sound.” While “Monday, Monday” and “Go Where You Wanna Go” were both big hits, the track that best fits the autumn vibe has to be “California Dreaming.” The monster countermelodies in this song will have you longing for warmer days.

      5. Bookends – Simon & Garfunkel

      Paul Simon and Art Garfunkel also burst on the scene in a major way in 1965, combining intricate harmonies with artful (though sometimes obtuse) lyrics. While Bridge Over Troubled Water sold the most records, many consider the prior album Bookends to be their best work, as evidenced by the fact that it produced no less than five hit singles. The legendary track “Mrs. Robinson” (from the film The Graduate) won the Grammy® for Best Rock Single in 1969. It’s the perfect song to revisit their catalog, buried in a comfy chair, watching the clouds roll by. You can almost reach out and strum those acoustic guitars yourself.

      6. Ladies of the Canyon – Joni Mitchell

      Many Joni fans flock to Blue. I suggest you go off the beaten path and pick up a copy of Ladies of the Canyon instead. A bit more upbeat than the former, this record is also more complex musically, spawning a couple of Ms. Mitchell’s biggest hits: “Woodstock” and “Big Yellow Taxi,” a tune whose message is not out of touch today. The flawless recording, with its sparse, ethereal arrangements, is coffee shop music at its best. This record is also a great way to bookmark Joni Mitchell’s voice to compare to her later work.

      7. Déjà vu – Crosby, Stills, Nash & Young

      If Bob Dylan is folk music’s brightest star, Crosby, Stills & Nash (with or without Young in tow) are folk’s biggest supergroup … and this record is undoubtedly one of vinyl’s greatest treasures. With soaring voices that blend together incomparably, Déjà vu truly stands the test of time, and it remains one of my most beloved vinyl albums, even after 50 plus years of listening. If it becomes one of your favorites as well, be sure to seek out this Record Store Day release of alternate takes.

      8. Grievous Angel – Gram Parsons

      With strong accompaniment from Emmylou Harris, Gram Parsons’ second and final album Grievous Angel has become a cult classic over the decades. A bit country, a bit folk, Parsons himself described it as “Cosmic American Music.” Just before his death, Parsons was hanging out with Keith Richards, and it doesn’t take long to find that influence in the Stones’ music of the era. Even though there is a lot of country twang here, the “folkiest” song on this record might just be “Brass Buttons.”

      9. Diamonds and Rust – Joan Baez

      Dig deeper than the title track, and head straight to the Stevie Wonder tune, “I Never Dreamed You’d Leave In Summer.” Baez’ voice is so pure here, it might just bring you to tears. Along with several self-penned tunes (including “Dida,” a duet she sings with Joni Mitchell), you’ll find songs by Dylan, Jackson Browne, Janis Ian and others.

      10. American Recordings – Johnny Cash

      Most people associate Johnny Cash with country music, but the deeper you dig, the more you’ll discover a heavy folk vein in his music too, right to the very end of his life. These last four records, produced with Rick Rubin (collectively called American Recordings), contain some of the most chilling, hardcore folk songs ever put on vinyl. It doesn’t get more intense than this, and you’ll find that Cash’s deep, rich baritone not only sends shivers down your spine but really brings your system to life.

       

      Check out these related blog posts:

      Top 10 Vinyl Albums for Audiophiles

      10 Hip-Hop Albums That Sound Great On Vinyl

      Here’s What You Need to Know About Vinyl

      Appreciating Vinyl Records … and the Best Way to Enjoy Them

      Five Reasons Vinyl Is Making a Comeback

      How to Clean Vinyl Records

      Spotlight on Vinyl Subscription Services

       

      Click here for more information about Yamaha turntables.

      What is Phase?

      Even if you’re relatively new to the world of recording and music production, you’ve probably heard or read phrases such as “flipping the phase,” “phase shift,” “phase shifter,” and “out of phase.” The operative word in all of these is “phase,” and it’s a critical one to understand for many different reasons. In this article, we’ll take a look at what it all means.

      First Things First

      Before we get into phase, it’s helpful to first talk about sound waves. Sound waves are created by the disturbance of molecules in the air, causing a fluctuation in air pressure. To mix metaphors, if a tree falls in the forest and nobody hears it, it will still create sound waves.

      As the waves coming from the sound source (the source of that disturbance) move through the air, the molecules come together and spread apart — a phenomenon referred to as compression and rarefaction. A complete wave cycle consists of one compression and one rarefaction. The higher the pitch of the sound, the faster each cycle occurs.

      The duration of the cycle is called the wavelength. Once a microphone (or other transducer — a device that changes energy from one form to another) captures a sound wave and converts it to an electrical signal, you can refer to the compression part of the cycle as the “positive” part of the signal and the rarefaction as the “negative” part.

      The illustration below shows a particular kind of waveform called sine wave. This simple waveform is used for test tones and is handy for demonstration purposes because it’s regular and symmetrical. What you see here is one cycle of a sine wave. Time is the horizontal (X) axis, and amplitude is the vertical (Y) axis. As you can see, it travels upwards (into the positive portion) for a particular period of time and then returns to zero before continuing its same journey downwards (and then on into the negative portion) over that same period of time.

      Sound wave with elements indicated.
      One cycle of a sine wave.

      In contrast, here’s a waveform from a guitar recording. As you can see, it has a more complex shape, reflecting the fact that it’s a more complex sound.

      Diagram.
      One cycle of a guitar recording.

      The cycle of a sound wave is 360 degrees, with the midway points indicated in the diagram below.

      Diagram.
      The degrees of a sound wave cycle.

      When Wave Meets Wave

      Phase doesn’t become critical until you try to play back two recordings captured simultaneously from the same source, but by different mics (or by a mic and a direct box).

      Let’s say you have a recording of a guitar. If you were to duplicate it to another track in your DAW and hit play, the two tracks would start at precisely the same time and reinforce each other, causing the sound to increase. That’s called constructive interference.

      But if you play them together and one is delayed, even by a tiny amount, a phase shift occurs. When that happens, it’s considered destructive interference. Instead of reinforcing one another, the two work against each other, resulting in a phenomenon called comb filtering, in which certain frequencies in the combined signal cancel one another. Where this cancellation is partial, the level of the affected frequencies is reduced; where it’s total, those frequencies drop out altogether.

      Here you see two sine waves, with the bottom one very slightly delayed. Even such a minute timing difference would be enough to cause comb filtering.

      Diagram.
      Even tiny delays like this one can result in comb filtering.

      The sonic result of comb filtering is a thinning out of the audio and less clarity, and sometimes a kind of weird timbre to the sound that could best be described as “washy.” Comb filtering is at its most obvious when listening in mono — that’s one of the reasons why it’s essential to check your mixes in mono. Phase issues that you don’t notice in stereo (or surround) will be much more prominent in mono.

      When you use more than one mic to record the same source, the different distances that the sound waves must travel to reach each mic is what causes their start times to vary. In the screenshot below, the peak of a snare hit is highlighted in the snare (top) track. Look at the other tracks, and you’ll see that the left overhead mic (OH) captured the snare at virtually the same time as the snare mic, but the right overhead and room mic were further away and thus slightly delayed.

      Diagram.
      A snare drum recorded with multiple mics.

      In addition, some mics respond to changes in level faster than others — something that’s referred to as transient response. For example, a small-diaphragm condenser microphone usually has better transient response than a large-diaphragm condenser or dynamic mic. We’re talking about tiny differences, but it can be enough to create a phase shift between two tracks.

      Cancel Culture

      The ultimate in destructive interference occurs when two identical sound waves are 180º apart. That can cause them to cancel each other out entirely. Headphone manufacturers use that to their advantage as part of their active noise cancellation processes. Microphones on the outside of the headphones pick up background noise from either side, and the audio from one side is shifted 180º out of phase, causing the noise component to cancel itself out.

      The screenshot below shows two waves that are 180º out of phase with one another. Notice how the positive and negative peaks are aligned.

      Diagram.
      These sound waves are 180 º out of phase.

      Phase vs. Polarity

      The word “phase” is often used interchangeably with the word polarity. The two terms are somewhat related, but substantially different in that polarity is an electrical phenomenon related to positive and negative wiring. You can end up with inverted polarity from a mis-wired mic cable or other piece of gear. When the polarity is inverted, wherever the waveform was positive, it flips to negative or vice versa, which means that it shifts by a full 180º. As we’ve seen, phase, on the other hand, refers to time differences between sound waves.

      This next illustration presents a small segment of a waveform (on top, shown in blue) with its polarity inverted (on bottom, shown in red). If you were to listen to these together in stereo, you’d hear a weak low-level signal, but if you listened to them in mono you’d hear … absolutely nothing.

      Diagram.
      The polarity of the sound wave on the bottom is inverse relative to the one on top.

      The Phase Button

      In a multi-mic recording — particularly of a drum kit where there are six or more open mics — there will inevitably be phase issues, based on the different distances between the mics and the various drums and cymbals.

      To deal with this, engineers usually turn to channel “phase” buttons (which are actually “invert polarity” buttons) commonly offered by DAWs, mixers and audio interfaces, switching them in and out on various combinations of the mics. It’s not that any of the tracks are 180º out of phase, but sometimes they end up closer to being aligned when you completely invert them. It’s always helpful to check. All you have to listen to different combinations of the mic channels (usually the bass drum channel against the others, and then the snare drum against the others), hit the phase button and listen. If it sounds thinner, simply turn it off; if it sounds bigger or better, leave it on.

      Diagram.
      Channel phase buttons in Steinberg Cubase.

      By the way, if you want to use two mics to make a stereo recording, you can choose from several different coincident pair stereo miking techniques, designed to capture a stereo image without any phase problems. Do an online search for the terms “X-Y,” “ORTF” or “mid-side miking” to learn more.

      Don’t Get Phased

      The bottom line is to be aware of phase whenever multiple mics or devices are used to capture the same sound source. You can often fix phase problems on a track that’s already been recorded by manually sliding it in time in your DAW to align it with another track, though you’ll need to zoom in quite far to be able to line them up accurately.

      In addition, always be mindful of possible polarity reversals when connecting different pieces of gear. If something sounds thinner than it’s supposed to, try flipping the invert phase button — sometimes simply labeled “phase,” or indicated with a null symbol (“Ø”) on your audio interface or mixer to see if that improves it significantly. If so, you might have a cable or even a piece of gear that got accidentally wired backward.

      Fun with Phasing … and Flanging Too

      Side by side screenshots.
      Cubase flanger and phaser plug-ins.

      Being out of phase isn’t always a bad thing. Manufacturers of hardware effects processors and pedals, as well as developers of plug-ins, deliberately utilize phase differences and comb filtering to create effects called phase shifters and flangers. A phase shifter duplicates the incoming signal and delays it slightly, then adds modulation from a low frequency oscillator to give it a whooshy-sounding motion.

      Flangers are similar but use an even shorter delay between the incoming and duplicated signals. The flanger originated in the late 1950s. Engineers discovered that if they played the same recording back on two tape recorders and slowed one down slightly by grabbing the flange of the tape reel, they got a cool effect. And you know what? It’s still cool to this very day.

       

      Want to learn more about using the phase button in live sound? Check out this blog posting.

      Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

       

      Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

      How Humor Can Help Improve Your Playing

      Learning music is easy for some, difficult for others … but getting better at it requires tough sledding at times. That’s why it’s often helpful to remind ourselves: It’s better to laugh than cry.

      There are actually many benefits to maintaining a sense of humor while honing your musical skills. Here are five of them.

      1. IT HELPS YOU CREATE LASTING BONDS

      Ever heard the term “inside joke”? It’s a rhetorical question, of course. But what the concept points to is the special kind of human connection that comes from sharing a deep, hearty laugh with others. When you joke with a fellow musician or songwriting partner, close bonds can be formed and cemented. That, in turn, is the stuff of long-lasting creative partnerships.

      2. IT EASES THE TENSION

      Working with another person can be difficult. That seems to be especially true for creative folks, and musicians in particular — whether in the rehearsal room, onstage, or during a recording session. The best way to take the edge off and return the focus to the music (instead of the personalities), is to insert some humor — a strategy that many of the best recording engineers and record producers turn to when things get fraught. You can almost always count on a good laugh to ease the tension!

      3. IT CAN PROVIDE A WELCOME DISTRACTION

      Picture this: You’re on tour, traveling from one city to the next in a whirlwind of bad hotels, bad food, abbreviated soundchecks and venues with problematic load-ins and iffy sound systems. Then when you finally make your way back home, you’re facing two weeks in a recording studio to track your newest album. In one sense, it’s living the dream. In another, it’s a seemingly endless list of tasks that all require great sums of energy and attention.

      How does one cope? The best way to save a drained mind is to find a distraction.

      Find a movie, watch a cartoon, picture your fourth grade teacher slipping on a banana peel, whatever you need. But let your mind wander, let it enjoy a spike of joy, a chortle, a guffaw at something — anything — that doesn’t have to do with your musical work schedule. Then, when your mind is refreshed, you can dive back into your passions and play your heart out.

      4. IT KEEPS YOU FROM TAKING YOURSELF TOO SERIOUSLY

      People who believe their own press releases are bound to eventually fall on their faces and learn the bitter truth: they’re actually no better than anyone else. So laugh at your self-seriousness now and get it over with! That way, you’ll be better equipped to deal with mistakes when you practice, perform or record — something that also helps both personal and musical growth.

      In a similar vein, there’s another reason for turning to humor, which is especially important if you’re the front person in a band or find yourself regularly in front of a crowd: People need to see you laugh at yourself. Band leaders, take note: Let the other musicians see you make a fool of yourself occasionally. It will create trust, which only strengthens a unit.

      5. IT GIVES YOU A WAY TO LEAVE YOUR COMFORT ZONE

      That which is funny is usually a little bit weird or odd too. So often, musicians endeavor to be perfect to the point of rigidity. Using humor to counter this furrowed brow-mentality can be extremely helpful. For example, if you’re the keyboardist in your band, try writing a riff with a kazoo or ukulele instead. Or pick up a trombone just to hear the blurt of sound it can make.

      Next time you sit down to write, pen a funny tune instead of your next break-up ballad. Perform a song that might put a smile on your face instead of the same macabre thrash-metal you’re so ready to play normally. Doing the opposite of what’s expected might just shake you out of your comfort zone and open up a world of new musical opportunities.

      TRUST THE SCIENCE

      Think these ideas are far-fetched? There’s scientific proof that they’re not. Laughter causes a physical reaction in the body that’s utterly beneficial on many different levels. It increases your oxygen intake, which stimulates your heart and lungs, and also triggers the release of endorphins in your brain, which can help to lower anxiety and stress. In addition, it activates the brain’s dopamine reward system, stimulating goal-oriented motivation and long-term memory, which means that humor can improve retention as you learn music theory and technique.

      Laughter also helps your immune system’s functionality (great for sleep-deprived touring musicians), increasing mood and aiding personal satisfaction (perfect for the self-doubt that’s invariably going to creep in at times). Every musician — indeed, every creative artist — can benefit from a little laughter. No kidding!

      Top Five Reasons You Should Use an Acoustic Guitar with Built-In Effects

      Part of the joy of acoustic guitars is that you can play them anywhere. And when your acoustic guitar has effects built into it, a whole new world opens up sonically. I know this first-hand: As the proud owner of a Yamaha TransAcoustic guitar, I often use its built-in reverb and chorus effects, both onstage and in the studio. It’s inspiring, and it always delivers excellent results.

      The way a TA guitar creates those effects is pretty amazing, as detailed in this blog. Inside the guitar is a small metal device called an actuator, which vibrates when the strings are played. These vibrations then resonate with the body of the guitar and the air around the sound hole; as a bonus, the resulting effects are sent out of the output jack as well, courtesy of the instrument’s piezo pickup. It’s ingenious, and it sounds great!

      Here are five reasons for using an acoustic guitar that has its own built-in effects:

      1. IT DELIVERS A GREAT VIBE

      Front view of an acoustic guitar laying on its side with three small knobs on side of body.
      Yamaha FG-TA TransAcoustic guitar.

      Whether I am just sitting on the couch noodling away or jamming with friends around a firepit, switching on the effects in my TA guitar causes an immediate sonic “vibe” to occur. The instrument creates its own lush atmosphere, with a sense of depth and space that literally makes you play differently.

      A basic G chord on a regular guitar is simply not as much fun as a G chord played on a TA with a little added built-in reverb, chorus or both. I have many acoustic guitars in my collection, but my TA is the one I keep out all the time to pick up and play, not only because it’s a beautiful, well-crafted instrument with a solid sound, but because of the vibe it brings.

      2. SIMPLICITY: NO AMP, NO PEDALS NEEDED

      Keeping it simple is a great rule to live by when performing live. If your rig gets too complicated, things can happen that could derail you and the whole band. It’s happened to me more times than I would like to admit!

      When your guitar has built-in effects, they’re always just a few knob twists away. Best of all, those knobs are right in front of you, on the guitar itself — no leaning over to try to sneak a peek at a rack-mounted effects processor or crouching down to try to make adjustments to a stomp box in low-light situations.

      Closeup of author's hand pointing out the knobs on the side of the acoustic guitar.
      The TA knobs are right in front of you, on top of the guitar.

      Having built-in effects streamlines the whole process and lets you focus on your performance, which allows for more creativity and spontaneity.

      3. SPLIT PERSONALITY

      TransAcoustic guitars let you dial in any combination of chorus or reverb, allowing you to get inspired anytime, anyplace. It’s far more stimulating than just playing a dry instrument because, in many ways, an effected guitar takes on a whole new personality.

      For example, when you turn on the TA chorus, the sound gets a little louder and becomes reminiscent of a 12-string. The high notes sing differently, and with a capo, the upper register takes on an even brighter, more distinctive tonality.

      The TA reverb provides an extra sense of depth that helps to meld notes together. You can choose between room and hall sounds or any blend of the two. The room setting is short and sweet, like you’re in a small space; the hall setting imparts a longer “tail” with a deeper sound.

      I use a lot of open tunings (mostly DADGAD, open D and open G) on my TA acoustic. I find that the hall reverb works great with those tunings, especially when the guitar rings out. At those moments, the sonics light up like a candle!

      4. IT’S A GREAT CREATIVE TOOL

      At times, every composer gets stuck for ideas. When that happens, the fresh sound that comes from built-in guitar effects can help add that missing bit of inspiration. Suddenly, everything gets a little more lush, a little fuller … and before you know it, you have that missing chorus or bridge written and ready to go.

      With my TA guitar, my mind goes into new places because the sound I’m hearing as I strum has extra depth, dimension and character. It makes playing acoustic guitar more fun.

      5. IT’S GREAT FOR RECORDING

      Since I record a lot of television music, I often double acoustic guitar parts to enhance the overall sonic picture that the listener will hear (unfortunately all too often through a tinny, and tiny, TV speaker). When using my TA guitar, I generally combine the DI output (the one coming from the quarter-inch jack) with the signal coming from a microphone positioned roughly four inches away from where the sound hole meets the fretboard. I record these on two separate tracks so I can blend them as needed when mixing. The cool thing about this is that whatever built-in effects I dial up come out of both the jack and from the air around the guitar.

      On the first pass, I usually just add some TA reverb only, dialing in the desired amount while listening over headphones. (That way, I can hear it coming from both the DI output and the mic.) Once that’s recorded, I will immediately track a double of the part while all the nuances I just laid down are fresh in my mind. I’ll then do another pass, this time turning off the reverb and enabling the TA chorus effect instead; if necessary, I’ll double-track that pass too, sometimes with both reverb and chorus. Or I may keep one track totally dry and just use the natural sound of the guitar — it depends on the need of the cue.

      While I could use pedals or plug-ins to get similar sounds, I prefer to use the effects in the guitar because I can feel and sense them coming out of the sound hole. Also, I’m usually under tight deadlines and have to work quite fast. By having effects in the guitar, I’m thinking about nothing but the performance and not about connecting a pedal or launching a plug-in.

      So if you haven’t had the opportunity to play an acoustic guitar with built-in effects — especially a Yamaha TransAcoustic model — what are you waiting for?

       

      Check out these related blog articles:

      How Yamaha TransAcoustic Guitar Technology Works

      Discover Yamaha TransAcoustic Guitars

      Which TransAcoustic Guitar is Right for Me?

      How to Record TransAcoustic Guitar Effects

      Nylon TA on TV

      “Breaking Amish” With My Yamaha FG-TA

      Her Name is Ruby

      MJ Ultra and the FG-TA TransAcoustic Guitar

       

      Click here for more information about Yamaha TransAcoustic guitars.

      NCMEA 2021

      North Carolina Music Educators Association 2021 Convention

      Welcome! We are thrilled to join the North Carolina Music Educators Association (NCMEA) in presenting its 2021 Convention.

      North Carolina’s approximately 1,450,000 K-12 students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. From the Outer Banks to the Great Smoky Mountain National Park and every point in between, we applaud how you showcase your Tar Heel pride as you map out innovative ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you!

      Meet Adam Frank

      Adam FrankThe North Carolina Music Education Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We know how difficult this past year has been as we have navigated through these uncertain times, and we want to express our appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

      Stop by and say hi to me in the exhibit hall. We’ll be showing some new instruments in the booth, including the Harmony Director, the YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone, and the MS-9414 Marching Snare Drum.

      If you need help or have additional questions, please feel free to reach out directly to me at afrank@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

      Have a wonderful conference!

      — Adam Frank, District Manager, School Services Division, Yamaha Corporation of America

      Professional Development Clinics at NCMEA

      Yamaha Master Educator: Michael Pote, Director of Bands, Carmel High School (Carmel, Indiana)

      • Session Title: “Yamaha Harmony Director 101”
      • Session Date and Time: Monday, November 8, 12 – 1 p.m.
      • Description: The New Harmony Director HD-300 combines the HD-200’s powerful ear training with dynamic new educational features and a simplified user interface. The addition of a mobile app that can act as a stand-alone tuner as well as a hardware controller makes the new HD-300 a complete package that can not only make a teacher’s job easier but also help their students play “IN TUNE, IN TONE, IN TIME and at the CORRECT VOLUME.”

      Professional Development Resources

      Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

      Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

      Product Showcases

      HARMONY DIRECTOR

      HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1


      HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


      WINDS

      NEW Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


      NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


      STRINGS

      YVN Model 3 Violin: The Most Innovative Student Violin


      How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


      SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


      PERCUSSION

      NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum


      NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


      NEW CFM Series Concert Field Drum


      Concert Chimes


      SOFTWARE

      Dorico for iPad


      Cubase Recording Software


      Dorico Music Notation Software


      Introduction to Dorico for iPad


      DRUMSETS

      DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview


      Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice


      Stage Custom Hip – Full Sound and Compact Size


      PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

      STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System


      Remote Music Education and Live Streaming Can Sound Good!


      TFAA

      Orchestra being conducted.

      TEXAS Fine Arts Administrators

      Welcome members of the Texas Fine Arts Administrators!

      Our team is looking forward to working with you throughout the year and serving your professional needs in any way we can. Ask us about the free resources we have for you when it comes to program planning, advocacy, funding and other teaching and professional development needs.

      See our Product Showcases

      Meet Chris Manners

      Chris Manners

      The Texas Music Administrators Conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support, and professional development. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help. Stop by the exhibit hall so we can chat, or you can email me at cmanners@yamaha.com, with any questions. We’re eager to talk with you about your needs as an educator and administrator.

      Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

      Addressing Learning Loss, Health & Safety, and Equity with ESSER

      ARP Acts Funds Spent

      The American Rescue Plan (ARP) was signed into law on March 11, 2021. This COVID relief bill extends or modifies several provisions in the Coronavirus Aid, Relief and Economic Security (CARES) Act that was passed in March 2020 and the Coronavirus Response and Relief Supplemental Appropriations Act (CRRSA) that was passed in December 2020.

      As of November 30, 2022, only 27.3% of ESSER III have been spent.

      ESSER will help meet the needs of Texas public and nonpublic school students. The funds are a one-time program intended to assist with the COVID-19 response and can be used to address learning loss, student health & safety, and provide equity across school districts.

      IMPORTANT LINKS FOR ARTS EDUCATION IN TEXAS

      More ESSER Information 

      Suggested Next Steps 

      PRODUCT SHOWCASES

      Harmony Director

      HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1

      HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


      WINDS

      Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo

      NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone

      Clarinet Synthetic Reeds

      Saxophone Synthetic Reeds


      STRINGS

      YVN Model 3 Violin

      How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble

      SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


      PERCUSSION

      NEW MS-9414 Series

      NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum

      NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone

      CFM Series Concert Field Drum

      Percussion Mallet Stands


      DRUMSETS

      DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview

      Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice

      Stage Custom Hip: Full Sound, Compact Size


      GUITARS

      C40II Nylon Guitar

      SLG SILENT guitar™


      SOFTWARE

      Dorico for iPad

      Cubase Recording Software

      Dorico Music Notation Software

      Introduction to Dorico for iPad


      PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

      STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System

      Remote Music Education and Live Streaming


      Continue reading

      PASIC

      drum corps with Yamaha drums and carriers

      2024 Percussive Arts Society International Convention

      Welcome Percussionists and Music Educators!

      Our team is looking forward to meeting you at this year’s in-person PASIC convention and serving your professional needs in any way we can. Ask us about the free resources we have for you when it comes to program planning, advocacy, funding and other teaching and professional development needs.

      Please don’t hesitate to reach out — we are here for you and look forward to talking about your music program.

      Meet the Yamaha Drums and Percussion Team

      PASIC Yamaha Staff

      The Percussive Arts Society International Convention gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

      Stop by our booth to say hello and check out our new layout. We’re eager to talk with you about your needs as a performer, an educator or member of the percussion community. 

      If you need help or have additional questions, please feel free to reach out directly to us at percussion@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

      — Joel Tetzlaff, Matt Rudin, Angela Garay, Jalissa Gascho, Greg Crane,

      John Wittmann, Jeff Shipley, Dr. Dave Gerhart, Catelyn Hawkins

      JOIN THE YAMAHA DRUMS AND PERCUSSION COMMUNITY! Receive real-world resources and the latest updates on Yamaha percussion products, clinics and promotions.

      Yamaha In-Booth Activities

      Visit booth #1301 for a chance to meet and interact with some of your favorite Yamaha musicians!

      Thursday, November 14

        • 11 a.m. – 12 p.m. — Yamaha Artist Hour

        Friday, November 15

        • 11 a.m. – 12 p.m. — Yamaha Artist Hour
        • 2 – 2:50 p.m. —New Yamaha Marching Hardware In-Booth Celebration

        Saturday, November 16

        • 11 a.m. – 12 p.m. — Yamaha Artist Hour

          Yamaha Performing Artist Clinics and Performances

          Wednesday, November 13

            • 8 – 9:30 p.m. — ANTONIO SANCHEZ: Evening Concert: Antonio Sánchez & Bad Hombre with Thana Alexa, BIGYUKI & Lex Sadler (Sagamore Ballroom)

            Thursday, November 14

              • all day — MIKE SAMMONS: University Pedagogy Committee Workshop Day (Westin – Council)
              • 9 – 9:35 a.m. — JOSEPH VAN HASSEL, NICK TERRY: New Music/Research: Performance of “About Face for Drum Set Duet” by David Macbride; “A Near-Empty Space” (Room 120)
              • 12 – 1:30 p.m. — TRACY WIGGINS: New Percussion Literature Showcase: University of North Alabama Percussion Ensemble (Wabash Ballroom)
              • 1 – 1:50 p.m. — PATRICK ROULET: FUNdamentals: Ghanaian Mallet Methods (Room 116)
              • 2 – 2:50 p.m. — DAVID PANZL: Drummers’ Heritage Concert: Rudimental Roots and the Evolution of Marching Snare Drum (Room 125)
              • 3 – 3:50 p.m. — ALICE PAN: New Music/Research: Performance of “Bird” by Alex Smith (Room 120)
              • 4 – 4:50 p.m. — PIUS CHEUNG: Clinic/Performance: Udow, Daimo & Cheung Present: “My Marimba Works — An Approach to Interpretation and Expression” by Keiko Abe (Wabash Ballroom)
              • 5 – 5:50 p.m. — BEN WAHLUND: New Music/Research:Performance of “Tassa for Solo Drumset” by Ben Wahlund (Room 120)
              • 8 – 9:30 p.m. — TERREON GULLY: Evening Concert: Stefon Harris & Blackout (Sagamore Ballroom)

              Friday, November 15

              • 10 – 10:50 a.m. — ANDREW ELDRIDGE: Showcase Concert: University of Texas at Arlington Percussion Ensemble (Sagamore Ballroom)
              • 12 – 12:50 p.m. — NICHOLAS PAPADOR: Research: Vessels of Song: Precedents and Creation of Klezmer Suites for Mallet Ensemble (Wabash Ballroom)
              • 1 – 1:50 p.m. — AIYUN HUANG: Diversity Alliance Panel Discussion (Room 201)
              • 1 – 1:50 p.m. — STEVE SHAPIRO: Clinic: Studio Tips & Techniques for Mallet Players (Room 125)
              • 3 – 3:50 p.m. — JAMISON ROSS: Clinic/Performance: “Soulmates”: The Drummer’s Relationship Between Rhythm and Melody.  (500 Ballroom)
              • 3 – 3:50 p.m. — MARIA FINKELMEIER: Clinic/Performance: Multi-sensory Performance with Maria Finkelmeier. Stick around to check out Maria’s set- up from 3:50 – 4:50 p.m. (Room 120)
              • 4 – 4:50 p.m. — TERRI LYNE CARRINGTON: A Conversation with Terri Lyne Carrington (Westin – Capitol 2)
              • 4 – 4:50 p.m. — GEORGE SCHWINDT: Drumset Clinic: The Business Side of Drumming: A Watched Pot Always Boils (Room 116)

                Saturday, November 16

                • 11 – 11:50 a.m. — ELENA BONOMO: Clinic: Musical Theater Drumming: A Creative Approach to Reading (Room 116)
                • 1 – 1:50 p.m. — JOHN BECK, JUAN ALAMO: Clinic: Your Ear Drum: The Most Important Instrument You Own (Room 205)
                • 2 – 2:50 p.m. — ANDERS ÅSTRAND, OLIVER MOLINA: Shared Daytime Showcase Concert: Daniel Berg, Marimba & Anders Åstrand, Vibraphone; Ninkasi Percussion Group (Room 125)
                • 4 – 4:50 p.m. — ADÉLAIDE FERRIÉRE: Daytime Showcase Concert: Exploring the Marimba Repertoire (Room 125)
                • 4 – 4:50 p.m. — ELBTONAL PERCUSSION: Clinic/Performance: Neon(N) (Wabash Ballroom)

                  For a complete list of clinics and performances, visit the PASIC Schedule.

                  Product Showcases

                  drum corps team

                  Discover the New and Improved Marching Hardware from Yamaha

                  Gain insights into how the new Yamaha Field Corps Marching Carriers and Stands were developed in an exclusive interview with Joel Tetzlaff, Percussion Product Marketing Manager. 

                  Professional Development Resources

                  Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

                  Continue reading

                  How to Get the Best Fit from Earbuds and Headphones

                  Your ears are not the same size as each other. That’s not freakish — that’s normal! In fact, no one has the same size ears or head shape as you. It’s what makes us special. It’s also what makes getting the ideal headphone or earbud fit from one person to another that much more nuanced.

                  You’ve heard the phrase, “If the shoe fits, wear it.” But what if the headphones don’t fit? You have options. Give ’em a twist. Change the eartips. Try foam tips instead of silicone. Make sure they’re in the correct ear.

                  You get the idea. Now let’s get you the best fit.

                  Earbud Fitting

                  Most earbuds come with standard-sized eartips attached. Out of the box, Yamaha earbuds are fitted with medium size tips. Additional pairs of eartips are included in the box to fit ears of all different shapes and sizes.

                  A small black earbuds case in middle opened to show elements. On right are the two electronic earbuds and on right are the three pairs of sized ear tips to fit on buds.

                  The left and right earbuds are shaped differently. Makes sense — so are your ears. (Remember?) So make sure you identify the left and right earbuds before you begin.

                  Ready? Start by inserting one earbud at a time.

                  Young man with dreads and body art wearing earbuds. Seen in profile.

                  If the earbuds don’t feel secure, that’s a problem. Or if you don’t hear enough bass response, that’s a problem too. Thankfully, it’s an easy fix: try changing the eartips. You want to use the eartips that keep out as much ambient sound as possible while the music is stopped.

                  Take some time to change them out in order to find the best fit. You may find you need a larger size tip in one ear and a smaller size in another.

                  I’m personally a size medium in my right ear and a size small in my left ear. I also prefer foam tips over silicone. Explore which combinations work best for you. No judgement. In fact, no one will know but you!

                  Check out this video to help guide you through fitting Yamaha TW-E3B wireless earbuds:

                  Headphone Fitting

                  Young man smiling while wearing over the head headphones.

                  Headphones either sit on your ears or go over them. Just like earbuds, headphones are designed with a left side and right side.

                  Identify the left and right sides, then get started:

                  1. Gently pull the headphones open, then place them over your head and around your ears.

                  2. If the fit of the earcups over your ears doesn’t feel right, try adjusting the band to achieve the ideal fit. (Adjust the band, one side at a time, near the connection point with the earcup.)

                  3. Extend the band on the left and right sides until the headphones sit comfortably around your head and your ears are enclosed.

                  Check out this video to help guide you through fitting Yamaha YH-L700A wireless headphones:

                  Beyond Fitting

                  Getting the perfect fit is just one factor in getting the best sound from your headphones. Several Yamaha models offer Listening Optimizer, an adaptive technology that analyzes the fit of your headphones and wearing conditions in real time to optimize the sound for the best listening experience. You could also consider doing a burn-in to accelerate your path to optimal listening conditions.

                  Photographs courtesy of rachaelburgessmusic, mcarthurjoseph and officialjackel.

                   

                  Check out these related blog postings:

                  How To Shop for Wireless Headphones

                  How To Burn-In Headphones and Earbuds

                   

                  Click here to learn more about Yamaha wireless headphones and earbuds.

                  Click here to learn more about Yamaha TW-E3B wireless earbuds.

                  Click here to learn more about Yamaha YH-L700A wireless headphones.

                  Adding Keyboard Fills

                  Whether you are playing a song by yourself or backing a singer, adding some melodic elements beyond the written melody really adds to your performance. If you are used to only reading music, this may seem daunting at first, but here are some suggestions that will help guide you through these uncharted waters.

                  Respect The Melody

                  Begin by considering how busy the melody is, as well as the general mood and feel of the piece. That’s important because whatever you are going to add needs to be in the same style and character. A melody consisting of long, held notes doesn’t call for having busy licks interspersed; conversely, anything you add to a busy, highly rhythmic melody should have some space and room to breathe. Listen to the song repeatedly and get a good feel for it beforehand so that any fills you add complement it tastefully.

                  For the purposes of our explorations in this article, we’ll use this simple melody:

                  Musical annotation.

                  As you can see and hear from this next example, it can be effective to just echo a single note from the melody — often the last note, in a higher octave like a bell chime response:

                  Musical annotation.

                  This can be a single note, an octave (as in bar 4) or a broken octave, where you play a note and then immediately add a second note an octave higher or lower (as in bar 8).

                  Or, building on that concept, you can try adding a fuller chord voicing. I like to include an octave within such a voicing (as in bar 4 below), and I sometimes roll the notes so it sounds more like an arpeggio (as in bar 8).

                  Musical annotation.

                  You can also repeat part of the written melody as an echo effect. This works especially well when it’s an octave higher:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Bear in mind that your fills don’t have to be exactly the same; sometimes it’s good to vary the figure slightly so you’re not repeating it literally, as in this example:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Complement the Melody

                  Another approach is to take some aspect of the melody and create a new answering phrase that is related to that element. If, for example, the original melody has a signature melodic leap up (or down), you can mimic it with the same interval, even though you are not using the same notes:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Or you can base your fill on a rhythmic figure in the melody. In this next example, I’m using the “quarter note followed by the two eighth-notes” motif of the melody and building on it for my fill:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Outline The Harmony

                  Another way to create fills is to outline the harmony, then add some colorful tones to your arpeggiations. Even just arpeggiating the current chord as a seventh chord (major seventh, minor seventh, dominant seventh etc.) works, though that approach is a little ordinary. I like to add at least one color tone coming from more extended chords, which I discussed in this Well-Rounded Keyboardist posting. I also tend to not start on the root of the chord, which I feel sounds very predictable.

                  Here are a few examples for three common chord qualities (I suggest you explore these types of ideas for other chords as well):

                  Musical annotation.
                  Musical annotation.
                  Musical annotation.

                  Applying this concept to our melody, you can see that we don’t have a lot of beats to fill for each chord, and I didn’t want to overplay or cram too many notes into the space, so I crafted a figure to cross over both the E minor and G7 suspended chords:

                  Musical annotation.

                  I also chose to stop arpeggiating halfway through bar 4, as I felt it was getting too busy, so I used the octave chime style to complete the phrase.

                  Here’s one more example, this time changing the direction of the arpeggiation:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Preparing For Soloing

                  Learning how to arpeggiate through changing chords is a great first step in learning how to solo — the topic of this Well-Rounded Keyboardist blog posting. I suggest that you practice the following two exercises, as the proficiency you gain from doing so will help inform your fills and melodic development.

                  Start with this finger-twister, beginning at a slow tempo, then building up speed as you get better at it:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Then try this alternative version, which employs more color tones and more intricate melodic movement:

                  Musical annotation.
                  All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

                   

                  Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

                  June Test

                  Article Title

                  By Author Name

                  Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Lectus arcu bibendum at varius. Amet luctus venenatis lectus magna fringilla urna porttitor. Pulvinar mattis nunc sed blandit libero volutpat. Et malesuada fames ac turpis. Vestibulum lorem sed risus ultricies tristique nulla aliquet enim tortor. Nunc sed velit dignissim sodales ut eu sem integer vitae. Nec tincidunt praesent semper feugiat nibh sed pulvinar proin. Imperdiet massa tincidunt nunc pulvinar. Sed egestas egestas fringilla phasellus faucibus scelerisque. Consequat ac felis donec et odio pellentesque diam volutpat commodo. Duis ultricies lacus sed turpis tincidunt id aliquet risus feugiat. Rutrum tellus pellentesque eu tincidunt. Vitae auctor eu augue ut lectus.

                  Senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis. Maecenas ultricies mi eget mauris pharetra et ultrices neque ornare. Porttitor eget dolor morbi non arcu risus. Est velit egestas dui id ornare arcu. Velit laoreet id donec ultrices tincidunt arcu non sodales. Facilisi cras fermentum odio eu. Consectetur lorem donec massa sapien faucibus. Mattis molestie a iaculis at erat pellentesque adipiscing commodo. Laoreet sit amet cursus sit amet. Venenatis lectus magna fringilla urna porttitor. Velit euismod in pellentesque massa placerat. Purus in massa tempor nec feugiat nisl pretium fusce.

                  Fermentum posuere urna nec tincidunt praesent semper feugiat nibh sed. Id nibh tortor id aliquet lectus proin nibh nisl condimentum. Feugiat pretium nibh ipsum consequat nisl vel pretium lectus. Hac habitasse platea dictumst vestibulum rhoncus. Purus viverra accumsan in nisl nisi scelerisque eu ultrices. Lectus quam id leo in vitae turpis massa sed elementum. Sed odio morbi quis commodo odio aenean. Pellentesque massa placerat duis ultricies lacus sed turpis tincidunt. Et tortor consequat id porta nibh venenatis cras. At lectus urna duis convallis convallis tellus id interdum. Vitae sapien pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus. Quis lectus nulla at volutpat diam ut venenatis. Ridiculus mus mauris vitae ultricies leo.

                  Diam vulputate ut pharetra sit amet aliquam id diam maecenas. Egestas pretium aenean pharetra magna ac placerat vestibulum lectus mauris. Nisi porta lorem mollis aliquam ut porttitor leo a. Tellus at urna condimentum mattis. Quis blandit turpis cursus in hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pulvinar sapien et ligula ullamcorper. Tortor aliquam nulla facilisi cras fermentum odio eu feugiat. Cursus eget nunc scelerisque viverra mauris in aliquam. Enim sed faucibus turpis in eu. Sit amet justo donec enim diam vulputate ut. At risus viverra adipiscing at in tellus integer feugiat scelerisque. Est pellentesque elit ullamcorper dignissim cras tincidunt lobortis feugiat. Sit amet mauris commodo quis imperdiet massa.

                  Sit amet commodo nulla facilisi nullam vehicula. Quisque non tellus orci ac. At tellus at urna condimentum mattis pellentesque. Tempor commodo ullamcorper a lacus vestibulum. Posuere ac ut consequat semper viverra nam. Eu scelerisque felis imperdiet proin fermentum. Eget duis at tellus at urna condimentum. Tempus iaculis urna id volutpat lacus laoreet non. Quam pellentesque nec nam aliquam sem et tortor consequat. A lacus vestibulum sed arcu non. Justo donec enim diam vulputate ut pharetra sit. Sem fringilla ut morbi tincidunt augue. Sed ullamcorper morbi tincidunt ornare massa. At consectetur lorem donec massa sapien faucibus et molestie. Ut enim blandit volutpat maecenas. Odio facilisis mauris sit amet massa vitae tortor condimentum lacinia. Lobortis mattis aliquam faucibus purus in massa.

                  Diam vulputate ut pharetra sit amet aliquam id diam maecenas. Egestas pretium aenean pharetra magna ac placerat vestibulum lectus mauris. Nisi porta lorem mollis aliquam ut porttitor leo a. Tellus at urna condimentum mattis. Quis blandit turpis cursus in hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pulvinar sapien et ligula ullamcorper. Tortor aliquam nulla facilisi cras fermentum odio eu feugiat. Cursus eget nunc scelerisque viverra mauris in aliquam. Enim sed faucibus turpis in eu. Sit amet justo donec enim diam vulputate ut. 

                  Diam vulputate ut pharetra sit amet aliquam id diam maecenas. Egestas pretium aenean pharetra magna ac placerat vestibulum lectus mauris. Nisi porta lorem mollis aliquam ut porttitor leo a. Tellus at urna condimentum mattis. Quis blandit turpis cursus in hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pulvinar sapien et ligula ullamcorper. Tortor aliquam nulla facilisi cras fermentum odio eu feugiat. Cursus eget nunc scelerisque viverra mauris in aliquam. Enim sed faucibus turpis in eu. Sit amet justo donec enim diam vulputate ut. 

                  Diam vulputate ut pharetra sit amet aliquam id diam maecenas. Egestas pretium aenean pharetra magna ac placerat vestibulum lectus mauris. Nisi porta lorem mollis aliquam ut porttitor leo a. Tellus at urna condimentum mattis. Quis blandit turpis cursus in hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pulvinar sapien et ligula ullamcorper. Tortor aliquam nulla facilisi cras fermentum odio eu feugiat. Cursus eget nunc scelerisque viverra mauris in aliquam. Enim sed faucibus turpis in eu. Sit amet justo donec enim diam vulputate ut. 

                  Article Placeholder

                  Article Title

                  By Author Name

                  Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Lectus arcu bibendum at varius. Amet luctus venenatis lectus magna fringilla urna porttitor. Pulvinar mattis nunc sed blandit libero volutpat. Et malesuada fames ac turpis. Vestibulum lorem sed risus ultricies tristique nulla aliquet enim tortor. Nunc sed velit dignissim sodales ut eu sem integer vitae. Nec tincidunt praesent semper feugiat nibh sed pulvinar proin. Imperdiet massa tincidunt nunc pulvinar. Sed egestas egestas fringilla phasellus faucibus scelerisque. Consequat ac felis donec et odio pellentesque diam volutpat commodo. Duis ultricies lacus sed turpis tincidunt id aliquet risus feugiat. Rutrum tellus pellentesque eu tincidunt. Vitae auctor eu augue ut lectus.

                  Senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis. Maecenas ultricies mi eget mauris pharetra et ultrices neque ornare. Porttitor eget dolor morbi non arcu risus. Est velit egestas dui id ornare arcu. Velit laoreet id donec ultrices tincidunt arcu non sodales. Facilisi cras fermentum odio eu. Consectetur lorem donec massa sapien faucibus. Mattis molestie a iaculis at erat pellentesque adipiscing commodo. Laoreet sit amet cursus sit amet. Venenatis lectus magna fringilla urna porttitor. Velit euismod in pellentesque massa placerat. Purus in massa tempor nec feugiat nisl pretium fusce.

                  Fermentum posuere urna nec tincidunt praesent semper feugiat nibh sed. Id nibh tortor id aliquet lectus proin nibh nisl condimentum. Feugiat pretium nibh ipsum consequat nisl vel pretium lectus. Hac habitasse platea dictumst vestibulum rhoncus. Purus viverra accumsan in nisl nisi scelerisque eu ultrices. Lectus quam id leo in vitae turpis massa sed elementum. Sed odio morbi quis commodo odio aenean. Pellentesque massa placerat duis ultricies lacus sed turpis tincidunt. Et tortor consequat id porta nibh venenatis cras. At lectus urna duis convallis convallis tellus id interdum. Vitae sapien pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus. Quis lectus nulla at volutpat diam ut venenatis. Ridiculus mus mauris vitae ultricies leo.

                  Diam vulputate ut pharetra sit amet aliquam id diam maecenas. Egestas pretium aenean pharetra magna ac placerat vestibulum lectus mauris. Nisi porta lorem mollis aliquam ut porttitor leo a. Tellus at urna condimentum mattis. Quis blandit turpis cursus in hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pulvinar sapien et ligula ullamcorper. Tortor aliquam nulla facilisi cras fermentum odio eu feugiat. Cursus eget nunc scelerisque viverra mauris in aliquam. Enim sed faucibus turpis in eu. Sit amet justo donec enim diam vulputate ut. At risus viverra adipiscing at in tellus integer feugiat scelerisque. Est pellentesque elit ullamcorper dignissim cras tincidunt lobortis feugiat. Sit amet mauris commodo quis imperdiet massa.

                  Sit amet commodo nulla facilisi nullam vehicula. Quisque non tellus orci ac. At tellus at urna condimentum mattis pellentesque. Tempor commodo ullamcorper a lacus vestibulum. Posuere ac ut consequat semper viverra nam. Eu scelerisque felis imperdiet proin fermentum. Eget duis at tellus at urna condimentum. Tempus iaculis urna id volutpat lacus laoreet non. Quam pellentesque nec nam aliquam sem et tortor consequat. A lacus vestibulum sed arcu non. Justo donec enim diam vulputate ut pharetra sit. Sem fringilla ut morbi tincidunt augue. Sed ullamcorper morbi tincidunt ornare massa. At consectetur lorem donec massa sapien faucibus et molestie. Ut enim blandit volutpat maecenas. Odio facilisis mauris sit amet massa vitae tortor condimentum lacinia. Lobortis mattis aliquam faucibus purus in massa.

                  Diam vulputate ut pharetra sit amet aliquam id diam maecenas. Egestas pretium aenean pharetra magna ac placerat vestibulum lectus mauris. Nisi porta lorem mollis aliquam ut porttitor leo a. Tellus at urna condimentum mattis. Quis blandit turpis cursus in hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pulvinar sapien et ligula ullamcorper. Tortor aliquam nulla facilisi cras fermentum odio eu feugiat. Cursus eget nunc scelerisque viverra mauris in aliquam. Enim sed faucibus turpis in eu. Sit amet justo donec enim diam vulputate ut. 

                  Diam vulputate ut pharetra sit amet aliquam id diam maecenas. Egestas pretium aenean pharetra magna ac placerat vestibulum lectus mauris. Nisi porta lorem mollis aliquam ut porttitor leo a. Tellus at urna condimentum mattis. Quis blandit turpis cursus in hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pulvinar sapien et ligula ullamcorper. Tortor aliquam nulla facilisi cras fermentum odio eu feugiat. Cursus eget nunc scelerisque viverra mauris in aliquam. Enim sed faucibus turpis in eu. Sit amet justo donec enim diam vulputate ut. 

                  Top Five Reasons for Having a Home Studio

                  Once upon a time, making a record meant booking expensive time in a professional studio. These days, advances in technology mean that anyone can craft quality recordings in the comfort of their homes. In fact, there’s a whole genre built from access to home studios, called, appropriately enough, “bedroom pop.”

                  Here are five reasons why you should consider having a home studio of your own.

                  1. It’s Affordable

                  Professional recording studios charge by the hour. Even if that tariff seems fairly nominal (say in the $20 – $50 per hour range, which is what you might expect to pay for the use of a small facility), it can add up quickly if you’re not well-rehearsed or start getting drawn into the “just one more overdub” spiral … or if you or any of your bandmates are perfectionists.

                  So, for the price of a single session or two, you could invest in owning equipment that could give you good service for a decade or more. “Today,” says Pacific Northwest songwriter Robb Benson, “folks can grab a really affordable DAW and just go to town.”

                  Closeup of a young man with short hair, moustache and beard wearing glasses.
                  Robb Benson.

                  Benson is right about simplicity: The basic starting point for home studios these days is merely a laptop computer (which pretty much everyone already has) and an audio interface, plus DAW (digital audio workstation) software such as Steinberg Cubase, Cubase LE or Cubase AI (the latter comes bundled free of charge with many Yamaha products). Check out this blog posting for more information about equipping a home studio.

                  2. You Can Use It Anytime

                  Recording engineers and studios aren’t like dentists or doctors; there is no emergency help line to call in the middle of the night. But if you have your own studio, you have access and opportunity at your fingertips 24/7 … meaning that you can tinker with your tracks whenever you like.

                  “If I didn’t have my own studio setup, I’d be waiting to record all the time,” says Seattle indie musician Joel Myers. “My studio is a workshop, rehearsal space, office and far-out dream zone. In short, it’s my happy place.”

                  Young man in knit hat and hoodie smiling for camera.
                  Joel Myers.

                  3. It’s a Good Learning Opportunity

                  Building a home studio may seem challenging, even overwhelming. But it’s also a welcome chance for discovery.

                  You may have always thought of yourself as just a musician, but owning a home studio means you’re also going to have to learn to be a recording engineer, or at the very least acquire some basic recording skills. These days, that’s a distinct plus — an advantage that can only enhance your chances of achieving success as a musician. And it really doesn’t matter how large or small your home studio is, or how you equip it — the important thing is that the gear serves your particular needs.

                  “I’ve worked out of closets, garages, basements and tool sheds,” says Myers, adding the following piece of sage advice: “Once you’ve got the space, surround yourself with things that inspire you.”

                  4. It Gives You Full Control Over Your Music

                  Anyone who’s ever been in a professional recording studio knows that there’s a lot of sitting around waiting for the engineer and producer to set things up, tweak controls and move faders. When you’re in the hands of another person, you’re on their timetable, reliant on how they do things like position microphones or program effects … all while the clock is ticking. If they make a mistake, it costs you.

                  But in your home studio, you’re the sole driver behind the wheel. You can try placing mics wherever you want; you can dial back the bass on the kick drum or add edge to the lead vocal; you can experiment with guitar sounds and synth tones to your heart’s content. There is no middleman —just you and your (wild) imagination.

                  “In the ’90s,” says Benson, “I was constantly going into big studios, and I was not happy with the mixes [or with] paying so much money, so I finally decided I needed to try my hand at mixing my own tunes” — a decision that helped him land a record deal.

                  5. It’s a Great Way to Develop Your Unique Sound

                  When you have a home studio, there are essentially no limitations — no worries about cost-per-hour, or hoping that someone else will interpret your ideas correctly. You’re free to try a little of this or a lot of that; some of column A and all of column Z.

                  “You can experiment for days and days until you find the sound you’re after,” enthuses Benson. “Don’t get me wrong: Once you know your sound, it’s great to go to a really nice studio later on. But sometimes your home cuts are so good that they get the attention of the right people.”

                  Who knows what wonderful music we might have lost out on because the means of creativity weren’t around in the “good old” days? These days, you can record whenever and however you want. It’s a win-win for both you and your audience.

                  Photos courtesy Robb Benson and Joel Myers.

                  Check out these related blog articles:

                  How To Find (And Stay On) Your Own Unique Path

                  What Is an Audio Interface?

                  The History of the DAW

                  Essential Gear for Your Home Studio

                  The 20 Scariest Movies Since the Year 2000

                  What’s better than a chilly October evening with a blanket, candy corn, apple cider and a bag of tasty Halloween treats? A scary movie, that’s what. This collection of bloodcurdling 21st century movies are guaranteed to keep you on the edge of your seat. What can be more fun than that?

                  1. Halloween (2018)

                  Let’s start with this epic slasher film — a sequel to the 1978 original (and the 11th in the series), with Jamie Lee Curtis and Nick Castle reprised in their original roles. Once you see that creepy mask that takes you back in time, the fear starts to grow as you realize Curtis is the sole survivor from the original killing spree. You won’t sleep well after this one!

                  2. Get Out (2017)

                  This underground horror classic takes a little time for the plot to develop as the shocking secrets unfold one by one. Both the American Film Institute and the National Board of Review rated it one of the top 10 films of 2017, plus it was nominated for Academy Awards® for Best Picture, Best Director and Best Actor, with director Jordan Peele taking home a Best Original Screenplay Award.

                  3. Fantasy Island (2020)

                  From the producer of Halloween and Get Out comes this adaptation of the classic 1977 television series. It follows a group of people on the infamous island who quickly realize that their fantasies have turned into nightmares of sheer survival, complete with zombified surgeons, drug cartels, grenade explosions and plane shoot-downs. Mostly filmed in Fiji, this creeper will make you think twice about going to an island for your next vacation.

                  4. A Quiet Place (2018)

                  Most of the Earth’s population has been wiped out by extraterrestrial creatures who are blind, have hypersensitive hearing and communicate through clicking noises. That’s the premise of this post-apocalyptic flick starring Emily Blunt and John Krasinki, who also directed … and it will have the hairs on the back of your neck standing up from start to finish. During filming, the crew avoided making noise so the real sounds recorded on the set could be highly amplified in post production. Be careful what you listen for!

                  5. The Conjuring (2013)

                  The first in the Conjuring Universe franchise, this film follows the life of authors / paranormal investigators Ed and Lorraine Warren (Patrick Wilson and Vera Farmiga), whose work inspired the Amityville Horror series of flicks. Check out the cool score and soundtrack album from composer Joseph Bishara, who also wrote the music to Insidious.

                  6. Saw (2004)

                  Okay, there has to be one splatter film in this collection. Directed by James Wan, the first installment in the Saw series centers around a gruesome “Jigsaw Killer” who forces his victims to play evil games in order to survive. For a movie made in 18 days with only one set build (a bathroom), it did spectacularly well, grossing over $1.2 million dollars and becoming a cult classic. (A word of caution: The opening scene sets the tone in the worst of ways.)

                  7. Shutter Island (2010)

                  When you combine Martin Scorsese’s brilliance with a cast that includes Leonardo DiCaprio, Ben Kingsley and Mark Ruffalo, you know you’re off to a great start, whatever the genre. This neo-noir psychological thriller centers around the investigation of a missing patient at a psychiatric facility on Shutter Island in Boston Harbor. The spooky soundtrack features modern classical music from Mahler, John Cage, Ingram Marshall and Max Richter.

                  8. Candy Corn (2019)

                  This horror film takes place on Halloween weekend (what else?) and involves small-town bullies picking on a local kid. When they rough him up outside his traveling carnival trailer, things go way too far. However, with the help of some carnival friends, he rises up in the afterlife to seek revenge. Check out the freaks on the loose in this one.

                  9. It (2017)

                  Also called It: Chapter One, this supernatural fantasy is based on Stephen King’s 1986 novel of the same name. Hey, any time there are seven kids involved, all living in a small town in Maine, it makes for a good horror plot. There’s plenty of fear and survival to go around as well as stunning visual effects, plus a fabulous score from composer Benjamin Walfisch.

                  10. Coraline (2009)

                  This stop-motion animated fantasy features the voice talents of Dakota Fanning, Jennifer Saunders and Teri Hatcher, complemented with a great score by composer Bruno Coulais. The main character, Coraline, discovers an alternate world in a secret door in her house but soon finds out there are dark secrets within. The “Other Mother” scene is particularly disturbing, with screeching doors in the dark, chocolate bugs and a mind-numbingly scary Mom.

                  11. The Invisible Man (2020)

                  Architect Cecilia Kass (Elisabeth Moss) believes she is being stalked by her wealthy ex-boyfriend. However, since he apparently committed suicide, she’s convinced that he has somehow become invisible. Things take a turn for the worse in the psychiatric hospital where she is remanded and, well, let’s say the creep factor increases with each scene. Inspired by the classic novel written by H.G. Wells.

                  12. Haunt (2019)

                  This may be a slasher flick, but it’s one with a few twists and turns. Set on Halloween night, it follows a group of friends who go into a haunted house and get separated, only to encounter a series of ghoulish events that will make your stomach turn. The undulating child-like bells that accompany many of the gruesome goings-on won’t do anything to make you feel better!

                  13. The Witch (2015)

                  Subtitled A New England Folktale, this supernatural horror film is set in the 1630s, when the rules of society were not the same as they are now. It follows a Puritan family who have been banished from their colony, with evil things taking place in the woods outside their farm. A witch steals the family’s baby and uses it to create a dark ointment, setting the tone for a scary adventure … and the soundtrack is filled with creepy vocal choirs that make the whole thing even more chilling.

                  14. Terrifier (2016)

                  This slasher clown horror film is no laughing matter. Here, an insane clown terrifies a group of three women on Halloween night. There are lots of sharpened tools and deeply uncomfortable moments, augmented by a dark soundtrack from composer Paul Wiley. Art the Clown, who also appeared in the 2013 film All Hallows Eve, stars.

                  15. Hereditary (2018)

                  Written and directed by Ari Aster and featuring music by Colin Stetson, this deeply unsettling film follows a family of four through trauma, grief and an uncomfortable family dynamic that turns into a full-blown nightmare. Guaranteed to keep you up all night!

                  16. Us (2019)

                  This horror film from director Jordan Peele stars Lupita Nyong’o. When her character wanders into a funhouse off the Santa Cruz Beach boardwalk, she’s exposed to a doppelganger of herself. Later in life, her family is exposed to a gang of doppelgangers and the nightmare unfolds. The Luniz song “I Got 5 On It” makes its first appearance here, in a unique and memorable way.

                  17. The Cabin in the Woods (2011)

                  Follow a group of college students to a cabin in the forest and you’re bound to discover creepy engineers in an underground laboratory that are directing zombies and monsters to terrorize them. Of particular note: a gory “down the elevator” scene that’s filled with shock, horror and hard-hitting sound effects.

                  18. Paranormal Activity (2007)

                  This, the first in the six-film Paranormal Activity franchise, features a couple being haunted in their own home. It was originally developed as an independent picture for only $15,000, but was later expanded with some additional budgeting. Considering that it has brought in almost $200 million dollars to date, the investment was well worth it!

                  19. Midsommar (2019)

                  The premise doesn’t seem very scary at first, but things soon turns macabre as we follow a couple who travel to Sweden to visit a fabled festival that comes around once every 90 years. The only problem is that there’s a violent Scandinavian pagan cult that traumatizes them, and when the psychedelic mushrooms come out, bad trips turn even worse. Check out the cool Nordic-inspired soundtrack composed by electronic musician The Haxan Cloak.

                  20. The Ring (2002)

                  This goosebump-raising supernatural horror film has some top-flight visuals and is based on Koji Suzuki’s 1991 book of the same name. It follows journalist Rachel Keller (Naomi Watts), who investigates the legend of a cursed videotape where whoever watches it dies seven days later. The moral of the story: Be careful what you watch!

                   

                  Check out these related blog postings:

                  20 Scariest Movies Since the Year 2000

                  Scary In Surround Sound

                  Five Ways Surround: AI™ Enhances Horror Films

                  How Does a Piano Work?

                  Have you ever played an acoustic piano? If you haven’t had the opportunity, you owe it to yourself to try it sometime. The experience is completely different from playing a digital instrument, or even a small acoustic instrument like guitar, in that the sound hangs in the air all around you, filling the room if you play a key (particularly a low note) with force; however, the piano is equally capable of producing delicate, gentle sounds if you stroke the keys lightly. This is actually one of the main things that distinguishes the piano from its forebears like the harpsichord and clavichord; in fact, its very name (short for pianoforte — Italian for “soft/loud”) derived from that ability.

                  Yet the basic mechanism of the piano has hardly changed since its invention by Bartolomeo Cristofori in 1700: a series of keys that cause felt-covered hammers to strike steel strings tuned to a particular note, with the resulting vibration amplified by a soundboard — a massive wooden resonator designed to radiate a large volume of sound over a wide frequency range.

                  That, of course, is a highly simplified description of what’s really going on. In this article, we’ll take a deep dive into what occurs in the microseconds between the time you depress a piano key and the time you hear the sound.

                  It all begins with …

                  The Action

                  The mechanism that causes hammers to strike the strings when a key is pressed is referred to as the piano’s “action.” A piano key is simply a straight piece of wood that acts like a lever. When it’s moved downward (by virtue of being struck), it sets into motion a chain reaction whereby a complex series of physical components act to push the hammer toward the string.

                  Cristofori’s original design included an escapement mechanism that allowed the hammer to be “thrown” at the string. While this was an ingenious invention, it made it impossible for a pianist to repeat a note without fully releasing the key. This problem was solved by the double escapement system developed by Sébastien Erard in the early 1800s, which introduced a “repetition lever” — a component that caught the hammer and kept it suspended above the rest of the mechanism, so that the action could reset without the key being fully released. When playing a piano with a double escapement mechanism (which, in a more refined form, is employed by most modern grand pianos, including all Yamaha models), the same note can be played repeatedly up to 15 times per second!

                  Gif showing how piano key strike triggers strike on string on soundboard.
                  Double escapement mechanism.

                  Here’s a TikTok video that shows how it all works:

                  @yamahamusic 88 keys to make infinite possibilities #musiciansoftiktok #musicians #YamahaMusic #pianotok ♬ original sound – Yamaha Music

                  The Dampers

                  With the exception of the very highest notes (which fade away quickly on their own due to the short length of their strings), each piano string has a damper resting on top of it. Without dampers, all the strings in a piano would vibrate sympathetically whenever any notes were being played … which would result in a messily reverberant sound. (This effect can be created by stepping on the piano’s damper pedal, described below, though in most cases it should be used sparingly.)

                  When a piano key is pressed, the damper is lifted off the associated string, allowing the string to vibrate and create a sound. As soon as your finger is lifted from the key, the damper drops back down, instantly stopping the string from vibrating and muting the sound. Dampers are the reason why you only hear sound coming from a piano when you depress keys.

                  The Pedals

                  Closeup of piano pedals.
                  Grand piano pedals.

                  There are three pedals on a piano, each designed to change the tone of the instrument in some way.

                  As mentioned in the previous section, the rightmost damper pedal (also called the sustain pedal) prolongs the sound of the piano by lifting all the dampers off all the strings, allowing them to vibrate freely.

                  On grand pianos, the sostenuto pedal in the middle acts as a selective damper, causing only those dampers that have already been raised (by virtue of their keys being depressed) to remain lifted; the dampers that are at rest remain unaffected. The end result is that those notes that were played prior to the pedal being activated continue to ring out even after you lift your fingers from the keys, while any new notes you add are not sustained.

                  Finally, the left-most una corda pedal alters the tone of a grand piano by shifting the entire keyboard and action slightly to the right so that the hammers may not strike all of the strings. This also has the effect of causing the hammers to strike the strings with a different, softer portion of the hammer head, further affecting the sound. An experienced pianist will use this pedal to elicit a wide variety of tonal qualities … and composers will use all of the pedals to create seemingly endless effects.

                  Note that in an upright piano, two of the pedals have different names and slightly different functionality; stepping on the left pedal (called the “soft” pedal) causes the hammers to be moved closer to the strings, thus slightly reducing the volume of the sound, while stepping on the middle pedal (called the “muffler” or “practice” pedal) causes a a thin piece of felt to be dropped between the hammers and strings, thus muting the sound. (The right “sustain” pedal works the same way as on a grand piano.)

                  The Strings

                  When struck by hammers, the strings in a piano vibrate to create sound. Whether a string plays a high or a low note depends on its length, mass and tension. The strings that play high notes are shorter and thinner, while the ones that play low notes are longer and thicker. The specifications for length, diameter, and tension of the strings is referred to as the piano’s “scale.” Coupled with other design aspects, this gives a piano its unique sound.

                  Even though a modern piano has 88 keys, there are actually more than 88 strings inside it; in fact, a typical piano may have as many as 230 strings. That’s because most of the high notes strike three strings at a time, while midrange and lower notes strike two; only the very lowest notes strike just a single string. The use of multiple strings for most notes is an integral part of the sound of a piano because no two (or three) strings can ever be tuned exactly the same, even when the tuning is done by a highly skilled professional. The very slight discrepancies between the two or three strings being struck act to broaden and enrich the sound.

                  The Soundboard

                  Closeup of a soundboard with the Yamaha logo visible beneath the strings.
                  Piano soundboard (below the strings) and dampers (on the strings).

                  In many ways, the soundboard is the heart of the piano. It’s a thin wooden sheet (in Yamaha pianos, typically made from carefully selected Alaskan Sitka, Japanese spruce or Romanian spruce) that serves the important function of translating the energy of vibrating piano strings into a rich, resonant sound.

                  Piano soundboards are made from wood (as opposed to metal or some other material) because wood naturally amplifies lower-frequency sounds while simultaneously damping down higher frequencies. In other words, the soundboard serves to reinforce warm musical vibrations while at the same time reducing harsh unmusical ones. Quite a feat!

                  The Role of the Piano Technician

                  Piano technicians are trained to tune pianos and perform basic maintenance as well as diagnosing and fixing problems. Their skill can have a major impact on not just the playability but tonality of a piano — for example, if for some reason it cannot stay in tune.

                  “A well-trained and conscientious technician can actually help to lengthen the lifespan of a piano,” says David Durben, Piano Service Lead Specialist for Yamaha Corporation of America. “The person who will fill this function for you should be carefully chosen for his or her ability to perform the needed tuning and maintenance tasks, and should also be someone who can effectively communicate with you so they can meet your needs efficiently.”

                  Complex Construction = Complex Sound

                  Crosscut diagram of an acoustic piano.
                  The many parts of a grand piano.

                  As you can see from the illustration above, a piano is a very complex instrument, constructed from thousands of components, with dozens of parts for each key alone! When quality materials are used in conjunction with expert craftsmanship, an acoustic piano offers a sound that is both unique and musically compelling. If you haven’t tried playing one, what are you waiting for?

                   

                  Check out these related blog articles:

                  Here’s What to Look for When Shopping for an Acoustic Piano

                  What’s the Best Piano For Your Room?

                  What’s the Difference Between a Grand Piano and an Upright Piano?

                  Why Is a Piano Soundboard Made From Wood?

                  Why Aren’t There More Than 88 Keys on a Piano?

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha grand pianos.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha upright pianos.

                  Click here to locate your local authorized Yamaha piano dealer.

                  10 Best Classical Music Pieces for Stereo Listening

                  Hardcore metal-heads, hip-hop loyalists or EDM lovers might think, “Classical music? I don’t want to listen to that old stuff.” But whether you realize it or not, you’ve been listening to classical music all your life. Movies, commercials, TV shows, you name it. Whether they are using the music of iconic composers or the work of more contemporary classical artists (think John Williams, Yo-Yo Ma and others), the influence is everywhere.

                  Even if you’re not especially a fan, listening to classical music is a worthwhile pursuit, as it gives both your Hi-Fi system and your ears an interesting workout. For one thing, because all the instruments are acoustic, there is an “absolute sound,” so to speak. A piano can only sound like a piano, after all, and stringed instruments like the violin and cello are especially tough to reproduce properly. If you’ve heard a string quartet or symphony orchestra live, you know what I’m talking about.

                  But where to begin? If you are a vinyl lover, you know the different variations in pressings, and the challenge that presents. My advice? Just dig in and ignore those who will (always) insist that you’re listening to the wrong performance or the wrong pressing. It’s music and it’s supposed to be fun.

                  Here, in no particular order, are ten of my favorite classical music selections. They may be diverse in terms of musical approach, but they all have one thing in common: They’ll give you hours of enjoyment when listened to on a quality two-channel stereo system. And if you happen to get bitten by the classical bug, there’s this bonus: You’ll never look at your favorite TV shows, movies, and cartoons the same way again.

                  1. The Soundtrack from Seven Days in Tibet: Track 6 – “The Invasion”

                  John Williams and Yo-Yo Ma

                  Available on CD and via streaming

                  Let’s start out with one that has it all. This track starts out small, with some faint drumming, percussion and stringed instruments. The sonic landscape is big, open, airy and twinkly. At about 2:40, the hard-core drumming starts in earnest and this will tax your system to the maximum. The first time through, keep the volume control down a bit so you can get a feel for how loud you can turn your system up without damage. Yeah, it’s that good.

                  2. Dvorak Piano Trio Op.65

                  The Jung Trio

                  Available on SACD and vinyl.

                  This is one of my favorite records of all time, with an exquisite piano/violin performance that’s utterly relaxing. There’s no one standout track: just play it start to finish. Note that, if you get the vinyl version, it comes on two 45 rpm discs, with one track per side — but we can all use some extra exercise, right?

                  3. Beethoven Wind Music: Octet Op. 103, Sextet Op. 71, Quintet, Rondino 25

                  The Netherlands Wind Ensemble

                  Available on vinyl only.

                  Beethoven is not exactly known for his wind ensemble pieces, but there’s so much delicacy in this recording, if you turn it up just a little bit (but not too loud) you’ll hear an expansive soundstage with an especially “you are there” realism. In fact, in the quietest passages, you’ll even be able to hear the players depressing the buttons on their instruments. This is an incredibly soothing record, and another to just play from start to finish.

                  4. Bax: The Symphonies Symphony no. 4

                  The BBC Philharmonic

                  Available on CD and via streaming.

                  This piece is considered to be Sir Arnold Bax’s most extroverted work. Movement 1, “Allegro Moderato,” eases you into the mood, building you up through the third and final movement. What makes this recording so exciting is its sense of pace and dynamics, going from a solitary oboe one second to full-blast orchestra the next. If you have a system with a lot of reserve dynamic power, you can feel the music swell and recede in your room with ease.

                  5. The Soundtrack from Memoirs of a Geisha: Track 6 – Becoming a Geisha

                  Yo-Yo Ma, Itzhak Perlman, John Williams

                  Available on CD and via streaming.

                  This record has Yo-Yo Ma’s imprint all over it. It may not be quite as dynamic as “The Invasion” (see #1 above), but this is still a hugely expansive piece that will make you wonder where the surround sound speakers are hiding when listened to on a quality two-channel audio system. The drums are distinctly in the forefront, with the piano set way back and everything else folding in and out as the music plays — great to listen to with the lights down low.

                  6. Mussorgsky: Pictures at an Exhibition

                  Chicago Symphony Orchestra/Carlo Maria Giulini

                  Available on CD and streaming. (Original vinyl: 1976 Deutsche Grammophon)

                  This is as big and bold as it gets. The beginning Promenade starts slow, as you might expect from a Russian composer, but at precisely 2:09 into “Gnomus,” the music stops with a baton thwack and then heads to a thundering climax 20 seconds later that will totally grab your attention … especially if you’ve got the volume turned up.

                  7. Wagner: Die Walkure

                  (Any performance)

                  Available in all formats.

                  This German opera features probably one of the most recognizable pieces of classical music ever: “Ride of the Valkyries.” Trust me, even if you claim to never listen to classical music, you’ve heard this piece (or portions of it) many times before. But don’t stop there, because the entire opera is nearly three and a half hours long, and it’s all worthwhile. Not casual listening by any stretch, but the better recordings have a massive sense of scale, especially when the vocalists take over.

                  8. Verdi: La Traviata, from the Sempre Libra disc

                  Anna Netrebko with the Mahler Chamber Orchestra

                  Available in all formats.

                  The Italians invented the opera around 1600, and while many might argue that Maria Callas (considered by many to be the ultimate opera diva) was the definitive vocalist for this piece, I prefer the Russian soprano Anna Netrebko. Netrebko has a softer, silkier voice, which might just be a lot more approachable for those new to opera. This recording only has some excerpts from the entire performance, but it’s enthralling nonetheless.

                  9. Tchaikovsky: The Nutcracker Suite

                  (Any performance)

                  Available in all formats.

                  Here’s another piece that you’ve been hearing since you were in diapers — it’s been used in dozens of movies, even an episode of The Simpsons. Like “Ride of the Valkyries,” it’s a great introduction to classical music because it’s not unfamiliar — and so you may be surprised at how much you like this piece even when it’s unaccompanied by a visual.

                  10. Frank Zappa: 200 Motels: The Suites

                  Esa-Pekka Salonen with the Los Angeles Philharmonic and Los Angeles Master Chorale

                  Available in all formats.

                  Okay, this one is more rock fusion, but the late Frank Zappa always had a passion for classical music, and it shows here. Less than a minute into this 2013 Disney Hall performance, you start hearing the complex time signatures that Zappa was so famous for. It’s an especially densely packed recording — a friend of mine calls it “Difficult Listening Hour” — but, personally, I think it’s well worth the challenge.

                   

                  Check out these related blog posts:

                  Dialing in the Perfect Two-Channel Experience

                  Hi-Fi Starter Guide

                  The History of Hi-Fi

                  Top 10 Vinyl Albums For Audiophiles

                  10 Hip-Hop Albums That Sound Great On Vinyl

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha Hi-Fi components.

                  How to Record Guitar and Build a Song Around It

                  I’ve been composing and recording music professionally for the past 25 years. My creative process and the way I capture musical ideas evolves constantly with the latest advancements in digital recording software and hardware. There are a lot of high-quality options available for recording at home these days, and even the simplest of setups can yield release-ready audio that competes with that of a large commercial studio. All you need is an audio interface, quality DAW software (such as Steinberg Cubase, available in a variety of options) and a computer with reasonably fast processing power and enough disk space to host the recording software and store the audio files.

                  In this article, I’ll describe some best practices for recording guitar and then tell you how I typically build a song around the tracks I lay down. Let’s start with my …

                  Top Tips for Recording Guitar

                  1. Put on fresh guitar strings. The extra “bite” you’ll get from those shiny new strings is well worth the minimal cost and effort required.

                  2. Make sure the guitar is correctly intonated and in tune. If that E on the 12th fret isn’t a perfect octave above the open E, make any necessary bridge/neck adjustments or consult a professional luthier. You’ll hate yourself if you get the perfect take and the guitar is out of tune!

                  3. Monitor your input levels closely. Unity levels (0 db) or just below are the way to go. Digital clipping distortion isn’t musical in any way, and will ruin your recordings. If the guitar part you are tracking is extremely dynamic (that is, if the loudest parts are a lot louder than the softest ones), try using a compressor to even out the levels. You can also use a limiter set to a threshold several decibels below clipping to negate any transient peaks that may cause clipping problems.

                  4. Rehearse your guitar part until you can play it perfectly. It’s only then that you’re ready to record. Listen back to your recordings and be honest with yourself. If you could have played better, do it again. The playback doesn’t lie … and recording yourself is the absolute best way to determine how well you’re performing the music.

                  5. Take time to craft the guitar sound you are looking for. If you use effects, set the tempo to the tempo of the track in your session, then play around with tempo subdivisions to create the delay and modulation sounds you’re looking for.

                  6. Leave some of your guitar parts dry and unaffected. You can always add effects later if need be, but it’s quite difficult (and sometimes impossible) to remove them once they’re recorded.

                  7. Think like an arranger. If you plan on overdubbing multiple parts, orchestrate the textures and tones to complement one another and make sure the parts leave space for additional layers.

                  8. Save your work on a regular basis. If not, you could lose everything you’ve been working on. Most software will auto-save your projects, but that isn’t enough. I’ve lost hours of painstaking work when an unexpected power outage struck!

                  Optional Gear

                  There are some things you absolutely need in order to record guitar: the guitar itself and the aforementioned computer, DAW software and audio interface. But in addition to these must-haves, there are a few things you might also want to have on hand. These include:

                  1. One or two microphones. These aren’t strictly necessary for recording electric or electric-acoustic guitar (though they are required for recording fully acoustic guitars), but they are always great to have around, and they give you the option of plugging your electric or electric-acoustic into an amp and capturing the sound of the speaker … as well as recording vocals, of course. Some guitars, like Yamaha A Series models, offer onboard mic modeling that provides the sound of a high-quality microphone directly through the output jack. This is a great option if you don’t have any mics or if your recording space isn’t quiet enough for acoustic recordings.

                  2. Guitar modelers. These stompbox-like processors (such as the Line 6 HX Stomp, Helix and PODGo) allow for detailed guitar tone-shaping via the hardware units themselves and the software editing programs that come bundled with the products. You can record all those tones directly to your DAW via a simple analog or USB cable.

                  Closeup of console.
                  The Line 6 PODGo.

                  3. A guitar amp. It’s always great to have a quality amp or two on hand. Yamaha THR-II Series desktop amplifiers are compact enough to fit in any home studio, yet they pack a powerful punch — there’s even one model (the THR30IIA) designed specifically for acoustic guitar. They include Steinberg’s AI recording software, plus you’ll also be able to monitor the recording process and playback through the THR’s own built-in stereo speaker system.

                  4. Third-party plug-ins. Though many DAWs include a variety of effects and virtual instrument plug-ins, you might want to avail yourself of some third-party ones if they add extra control and sonic variety. For example, the Line 6 Helix Native is basically a full-blown Helix amp/cabinet/mic modeler without the physical hardware.

                  Screenshot.
                  The Helix Native plug-in.

                  Developing Guitar Parts

                  I usually begin by finding a drum loop that gives me a good groove and playing ideas over it until I come up with something I like — typically a four-bar phrase. Before laying down any tracks, I’ll experiment with different tempos until I find the one that works best and is comfortable to play over. I then tweak the levels until I have a good balance between guitar and percussion before adding effects sparingly (again, if I use any delays or modulations, I make sure they are set to the selected tempo).

                  One last re-tune of the guitar, and I hit the record button.

                  If my performance was good, I’ll continue to play over the part to explore options and find the next layer. I may record several parts to see how they develop my original idea into a complete composition. I think of this initial recording process as a kind of note-pad sketch before committing to the larger arrangement.

                  The Video

                  In this video, you’ll see me perform four parts: two acoustic guitar parts, one electric rhythm part and a solo. More information about each part is provided below.


                  Acoustic Guitar – Initial Part

                  The initial rhythm part is carrying the full harmonic structure of my idea, including those nice single-note embellishments. It’s crucial that this first part be performed perfectly, as it creates a solid foundation for the additional layers. For this part, I used a Yamaha AC5R acoustic guitar and chose the onboard Neumann microphone model, then recorded it directly to my DAW software via an audio interface. Using the onboard modeling negates the need for expensive microphones, preamps and an acoustically treated recording space … yet it sounds very clean and expressive.

                  Acoustic Guitar – Layer 2

                  As you may notice, I have a capo placed at the fifth fret for this overdub. I’m a huge fan of using the capo when layering to create alternate voicings and frequency separation from the original part. I’m also playing “spread” chords every two beats to accent the downbeat of the chord changes. I selected the Royer ribbon microphone model for this because I liked how its tonal variation helped the part stand out from the original acoustic tone.

                  Electric Rhythm – Layer 3

                  I’m playing this arpeggiated eighth-note guitar primarily on the top three strings to help it cut through the mix and sit between the other guitar parts for further rhythmic and sonic variation. For this part, I used a Yamaha PAC1611MS Mike Stern signature model electric guitar (using the bridge pickup only) and employed a Line 6 Helix for a stereo delay, adding a little overdrive to the signal chain to give it some “edge.” The delay is set to a quarter-note repeat on the left and a dotted-eighth on the right, which further widens the stereo field.

                  Electric Solo – Layer 4

                  You really do have to think like an arranger when recording music, and recording a solo should be no different. As you may know if you’ve read some of my previous blog postings, I like to create motifs (short melodic phrases that repeat) when building a solo line. Each defined phrase in this final overdub is placed on the downbeat of two, and I’m leaving space between those phrases to let the melody “breathe.” Here, I used the neck pickup because of its warm, full-bodied tonality when playing melodies past the twelfth fret. Single notes can become a little shrill in these upper frequency ranges, so this is a good way to soften those tones.

                  The Guitars

                  The Yamaha AC5R acoustic guitar features all-solid tonewoods, including rosewood back and sides, an A.R.E.-treated (Yamaha’s unique wood-torrefaction technology) solid Sitka spruce top, a mahogany neck and an ebony fingerboard and bridge. The aforementioned onboard microphone models are unique to A Series guitars, and can also be blended with the built-in SRT2 preamp for extra versatility.

                  Acoustic guitar.
                  Yamaha AC5R.

                  The Yamaha PAC1611MS Mike Stern signature model electric guitar features a light ash body that’s been treated with Initial Response Acceleration (I.R.A.), a proprietary technology that reduces the stress often found in new guitars and makes them extremely vibrant and responsive. The pickups are both Seymour Duncan: a super-smooth ’59 humbucker in the neck position and a hot-rails humbucker in the bridge.

                  Electric guitar.
                  Yamaha PAC1611MS.

                  The Wrap-Up

                  As you develop your recording skills, you’ll start to hear creative ways to shape the music through tone, dynamics and orchestration. These will refine your musicality and improve your playing … all for the greater good of the song.

                  Check out Robbie’s other postings.

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha A Series acoustic guitars.

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha AC5R acoustic guitar.

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha PAC1611MS electric guitar.

                  Click here for more information about Line 6 guitar products.

                  Songwriting Therapy

                  I recently stumbled on a video conversation between Alanis Morrissette and Liz Phair in which they talked about why they write songs. The discussion resonated with me because, (a) it’s one of my favorite subjects; and (b) I’ve had similar creative callings.

                  The part of the conversation that spoke to me the loudest came when Liz talked about how her mental health relies on her ability to go within and write songs, and how she almost doesn’t know what she’s feeling until she actually writes the song. “I find that the older I get, the more I end up weeping when I’m writing because there’s something unblocking,” she says, adding that, if she wants to communicate a feeling to someone, “rather than writing an email or text that I regret, when I write the song, it just settles everything. Somehow, the universe needed to hear it more than that person did.”

                  Wow. Just wow.

                  I’ve personally experienced this phenomenon. When something is begging for attention — whether it’s a chip on my shoulder or a thump in my heart — sitting down at a piano or with Ruby (my Yamaha TransAcoustic guitar) at the very least loosens the lid. Ideally, I slip into the “zone” and an hour later I feel cleansed. Relieved. Reminded yet again of how the process itself almost never disappoints.

                  Songwriters are lucky. We have built-in therapy. It’s self-contained, and best of all, it’s free. All we have to do is write a song.

                  Just because a single session might not always produce a commercial masterpiece doesn’t mean we can’t learn something from the untangling of feelings, making sense of them. Even when we don’t find an actual answer to a problem or a remedy for a situation, we get closer to it. Hey, we don’t get hard, fast answers from talk therapy with a professional either. It’s the meandering, the pursuit, that’s productive. Exploration is therapeutic in itself. And isn’t that what we’re doing when we write a song?

                  That said, an astute and caring counselor is a true find. They help us look at life from all different angles. For me, talk therapy in a safe, trusting environment has been a gateway for stream-of-conscious thinking. Epiphanies emerge unexpectedly when the right questions are asked (or when the silence is deafening). And the best part is that those epiphanies lead to more songs — yay! Like I do at the end of a songwriting session, I feel cleansed. Lighter. Relieved.

                  In her article Songwriting in Music Therapy for Mental Health, author Danielle Lowe looks at the therapeutic value of songwriting vs. talk therapy: “Songwriting may help clients recall difficult or traumatic memories, something that is often hard to access in talk therapy,” she writes. “Processing difficult or traumatic memories through writing and music may also provide a less daunting way for clients to approach these complex subjects.”

                  Lowe further posits that songwriting has the ability to uncover difficult memories and emotions. It can increase self-esteem and self-expression. If we want to know ourselves better and enjoy the endless works-in-progress that we are, it’s a perfect tool.

                  I suspect I chose to become a professional songwriter not only because I enjoy the process of creating that three-minute emotional ride we call a song, but also because it provided a way, from the time I was a very young girl, for me to administer self-care. To find answers to questions I didn’t even know I had. I gravitated to a musical instrument with a journal and pen in hand for a reason. It was intuitive. It made me feel … better. And that’s the reason I never stopped.

                  Like Liz, how many times have we written that letter or email, slept on it and decided not to send it? When we started composing it, we may not have even realized what we wanted to say. But our unconscious reveals itself during the writing process, sometimes in ways that are painful. As a result, by the time the sun comes up, we may choose to simply save it as a draft. And that’s okay. Not all feelings are meant to be shared.

                  I suggest you save the words for a song instead. Chances are it will be a good one.

                   

                  Check out Shelly’s other postings.

                  What Is Dynamic Range, and Why Does it Matter?

                  Every piece of music has a certain dynamic range, meaning the difference between the loudest and softest passages. Audio gear also has a distinctive dynamic range, though in this case the term describes the boundaries of what that piece of equipment is capable of producing.

                  In this article, we’ll explore the concept in detail and also explain why dynamic range is so important to the enjoyment of listening to recorded music.

                  Impacts

                  Dynamics are one of the essential ingredients — along with things like melody, harmony and rhythm — that make music pleasurable and compelling to listen to. A song that provides noticeable variations in level is almost always more engaging than one that stays pretty much the same from start to finish.

                  But if a song has too wide a dynamic range, you won’t hear the quiet parts clearly without the loud parts being uncomfortably loud. Conversely, if the difference between loud and soft is too small, the music will sound squashed and might even be fatiguing to your ears, particularly when listened to at high levels.

                  Just as a painter or photographer contrasts light and shade, a musical artist, songwriter or producer crafts arrangements that vary in volume and intensity to create drama. The variations can be subtle, like an increase in instrumentation on the second verse, or they can be more obvious, like a breakdown section (where most of the instruments drop out) after a loud chorus.

                  On a more granular level, dynamics are a big part of musical and vocal technique. For example, when a drummer plays a roll, they’re not hitting every beat at the same volume. If they did, it would sound like a machine gun, not a drum. The variations in dynamics between each beat are what give the roll its feeling and musicality. In a similar fashion, singers typically go from louder to softer from section to section or even word by word.

                  The Technicalities

                  The dynamic range of any recording is defined as the ratio of the loudest peak to the quietest, expressed in decibels (dB). For context, the human auditory system has a dynamic range of about 90 dB; a person with healthy hearing can perceive everything from a whisper (roughly 30 dB) to a jet taking off (120 dB). Note that the decibel scale is logarithmic, not linear, so the difference between 30 dB and 120 dB is even more significant than it looks.

                  Playback media have dynamic ranges too. For example, the dynamic range of a 16-bit / 44.1 kHz CD is over 90 dB — slightly greater than the range of human hearing. 24-bit digital audio has a theoretical dynamic range of 144 dB, but no playback system can equal that … nor would you want it to, considering that 120 dB SPL is the threshold of pain!

                  Audio gear that reproduces music also has a dynamic range. For equipment such as receivers, speakers and headphones, this is calculated as the ratio between the loudest sound that a unit can produce and the quietest one before noise becomes audible (the “noise floor”). The greater its dynamic range, the more headroom the component will have. Headroom is the range above the average operating level before distortion.

                  Digital audio has an absolute limit of 0 dBFS (decibels full scale). You can think of 0 dBFS as an impenetrable ceiling; turning up the volume squashes the signal up against it, producing unpleasant digital distortion that you’ll hear once it’s converted back to analog for playback.

                  Calculating distortion in an analog component is not nearly as precise. That’s because if the signal is overloading the circuit, it doesn’t necessarily worsen the sound quality, as it does with digital audio. In fact, analog audio often sounds better when it’s slightly overloaded and creating saturation. Eventually, if you keep pushing up the volume, it will distort enough to degrade the sound, but where that point may be is a matter of opinion.

                  When it comes to audio gear specs, dynamic range (DNR for short) is often confused with Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR). Although the two are similar, they don’t get calculated the same way. As we said, DNR measures the ratio between the loudest possible peak without distortion and the quietest one before noise (typically hum or hiss) is audible. SNR instead computes the difference between the standard operating level of the unit and the noise floor. With both specifications, the higher the number, the better.

                  Diagram.
                  The difference between DNR and SNR.

                  Dynamic Range and Musical Genre

                  All music has some degree of level fluctuation, but some genres tend to have broader dynamic ranges than others. Recorded pop, rock, R&B, hip-hop and country music usually have a relatively modest dynamic range — typically around 10 dB, although there are exceptions. Electronic dance music (EDM) probably has the smallest dynamic range — often in the 6 dB neighborhood — but makes up for it by creating contrast with its almost infinite array of instrument colors and textures coming from synthesizers and samplers.

                  On the other end of the spectrum are jazz and classical music, which can have considerably large differences between their quietest and loudest parts. In jazz, uptempo songs typically go from loud passages played on brass and saxophone instruments to quiet piano and bass solos. Even in jazz ballads, the dynamic range is usually relatively wide. A study of dynamic range in different musical styles conducted in 2016 revealed that dynamic ranges in jazz generally varied from 13 dB to 23 dB.

                  As a group, classical recordings have the widest dynamic range of any genre. The same study cited above found that recorded classical music typically offers between about 20 dB and 32 dB of dynamic range. While that might seem like a lot, it’s still quite a bit smaller than that of a live symphony orchestra performance, which can be as large as 90 dB.

                  No matter what kind of music you gravitate towards, using high-quality audio components such as a Yamaha AVENTAGE receiver will help you to fully experience the dynamic range of the recordings you love.

                  Front view of electronic component.
                  Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A8A receiver.

                  Don’t Touch that Dial

                  Audio engineers use audio compression to control dynamic range in the music production process. A compressor reduces the peaks of the signal, thus lowering the dynamic range and making it possible to turn up the entire song without peaks causing distortion.

                  Screenshot of soundwaves on screen.
                  With peaks removed, a song can be turned up a lot louder without distortion.

                  One reason for reducing the dynamic range in recorded music is that it’s frequently listened to in noisy environments like cars. A car on the highway can have a noise level of almost 70 dBA (dBA is a weighted scale that accounts for how humans hear different frequencies at varying volumes). If a song varies too much from loud to soft, you’ll have to keep adjusting the volume of your automotive sound system. During soft parts, you’ll want to turn it up to hear it over the road and wind noise, but then it would be uncomfortably loud during the louder parts. Judicious use of compression solves the problem.

                  Loud vs. Louder

                  Before the rise of streaming services for music delivery — back when the CD was still the dominant format — the world of popular music experienced what was referred to as the “loudness wars.” To make their music stand out on the radio or a club sound system (as compared to other tracks played before and after), songs were mastered with a great deal of compression so as to get their average levels as high as possible.

                  The unintended consequence was that the dynamic range of those recordings got smaller, making the music sound squashed, less punchy and often fatiguing to the ears. In those days, it wasn’t uncommon for songs to have a dynamic range of only 4 dB to 6 dB. Metallica’s 2008 Death Magnetic album was one of the most heavily compressed, and therefore controversial, releases of the “loudness war” era.

                  The screenshot below shows the waveforms (recorded off TIDAL) for Edvard Grieg’s “In the Hall of the Mountain King” (the area on the left) and Metallica’s “My Apocalypse” from Death Magnetic (the area on the right). Notice how much more dynamic range there is in “In the Hall of the Mountain King.”

                  Screenshot of two soundwaves on screen.
                  The difference between a large and small dynamic range.

                  Fortunately, streaming services introduced a feature called Loudness Normalization, which automatically puts a ceiling on a song’s loudness; no matter how loud a recording is, it will get automatically turned down so that it does not exceed this ceiling. As a result, when mastering for streaming, engineers no longer feel the need to reduce dynamic range to make songs louder. That has resulted in higher dynamic ranges in popular music, which are now in the 10 dB range, on average. That’s still pretty narrow, but things are improving and hopefully the era of squashing the life out of music is mostly over.

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha AVENTAGE receivers.

                  Hispanic Heritage Month: Soundscapes Through Time

                  In celebration of National Hispanic Heritage Month, I recently talked with three Yamaha artists about the deep influence the soundscapes of Latin America had on their desire to become musicians and their subsequent careers as performers and educators. Each spoke about the importance of remaining connected to one’s cultural roots in order to forge the sound of the future.

                  MUSICAL BEGINNINGS

                  Headshot of smiling man holding a trombone.
                  Domingo Pagliuca.

                  To Venezuelan trombonist Domingo Pagliuca, the presence of his father — a professional musician — was a defining influence during his childhood in Caracas. “I was fortunate to grow up listening to all kinds of music at home,” the Latin Grammy®-winning musician says from his home in Miami. “I was given a violin when I turned five, but I loved brass instruments, so I switched to trumpet a few years later [though I] had a difficult time with it. I must have been twelve when I asked my Dad if I could take up the trombone instead. At first he refused, but when I insisted, he decided to give me a chance, and said I could try the trombone for six months and see if it worked out. But it was love at first sight and I never looked back.”

                  A native of Houston, Texas, saxophone professor Johnny Salinas was also deeply influenced by his parents, with his mother’s musical taste reflecting the family’s Mexican heritage. “My Mom sang in a church choir for many years, and her father played tuba in a band in Mexico,” he remembers. “At home, she listened to banda and norteño music, including the corridos of Los Tigres del Norte, a band that incorporates wonderful saxophone licks into their songs. I followed the classical tradition as a musician, but I also suspect that, subliminally, listening to Los Tigres early on contributed to my attraction for playing the saxophone.”

                  New York-based drummer Antonio Sánchez believes that the very identity of his sound harks back to the music that he grew up with in Mexico City. “I think the individual style that we [as musicians] develop is the sum of all experiences and influences that we’re exposed to as children,” he says. “There was lots of great music in my house. My Mom listened to The Beatles, Jimi Hendrix and Cream, and my grandparents would play classical music when we sat together at the dining table. My current sound is a hybrid, with the addition of years spent playing fusion and Latin jazz. It was the influences themselves that pushed me to investigate the sonic possibilities of my instrument.”

                  THE LATIN INFLUENCE

                  Professional headshot with man in suit and tie smiling for camera.
                  Johnny Salinas.

                  Pagliuca has performed pieces by Grieg, Liszt and Gershwin with the critically acclaimed quintet Boston Brass; Salinas has played classical concerts with the Houston Symphony Orchestra and Houston Ballet; and Sánchez is well-known for his virtuoso drumming with jazz guitarist Pat Metheny and writing the score for the Academy Award®-winning film Birdman. Yet all three musicians agree that their Latin roots remain an essential component of their identities.

                  Sánchez explains, “When I first moved to New York after graduating from Berklee [College of Music], I wanted to be the most complete sideman [session drummer] in town,” he recalls. “And my sound evolved from the combined experiences of playing traditional Latin music with players from Brazil, Panama, Puerto Rico, Cuba and Venezuela. The funny thing is, once I stopped playing Latin jazz, the influences from that style were still in there, percolating in my drum patterns.”

                  “I can’t be married to just one genre,” adds Pagliuca. “Exploring new styles and contributing fresh ideas is essential to what I do. I’ve always wanted to present the trombone as an instrument that belongs in every kind of genre. It’s multifaceted — it can be lyrical, perform melodies or provide different voicings. I give 100% of myself no matter what the context may be, Latin or classical.”

                   

                  View this post on Instagram

                   

                  A post shared by Domingo Pagliuca (@dpagliuca)

                  “I am a lover of all types of music and try not to only pick one,” says Salinas. “But through my research I’ve become more aware of Mexican composers, and it’s starting to be a goal of mine to expose more people to these great composers through the saxophone. For example, I recently programmed Arturo Márquez and his Danzón No. 2 for saxophone ensemble. He’s just one of many composers that a lot of people still don’t know about.”

                  INSPIRING FUTURE GENERATIONS

                  Man playing drums on stage.
                  Antonio Sánchez.

                  Besides playing Yamaha instruments and honoring their Latin roots, all three artists have something else in common: They devote time in their busy agendas to teaching the next generation. Pagliuca offers trombone lessons online. Salinas is a visiting assistant professor at Oklahoma State University and has taught overseas in China. Sánchez presents drum clinics worldwide and organizes an annual workshop in Mexico for students from all over Latin America.

                  “I strive to instill in my students a positive spirit,” says Pagliuca. “You can achieve your dreams as long as you have discipline and refuse to give up. Nothing happens on its own, of course, but it’s important never to abandon your dreams. I’m still at the beginning of the road myself. There is a long path ahead.”

                  “The goal of my clinics is for people to become aware of their own potential,” says Sánchez. “I think you can inspire students who maybe are not as talented but can get far on the strength of hard work and discipline. I also help them understand how hard it can be to establish yourself in such a complicated field. You spend every day studying and creating and suffering, and it’s only years down the road that you enjoy the fruits of your labor. But the process is its own reward.”

                  “Music is for everyone, not only for the rich,” offers Salinas. “It really is a universal language. If you’re passionate about your craft, you can be successful regardless of any obstacles. You just need to find the particular kind of music that speaks to you.”

                  A COMMUNION OF MUSIC

                  One of the most powerful aspects of music is its ability to bring people together. Sánchez calls this the “communion” that can happen during a musical performance. “No matter where you are in the world,” he explains, “a communion is quickly established between the performers generating music and the audience enjoying it.”

                  Sánchez pauses to reflect, and you can almost hear the smile in his voice. “It’s sonic waves, and they reach people in different ways. The power of that communion is enthralling to me.”

                  Photo of Domingo Pagliuca by IndieHouse Films; photo of Antonio Sánchez by Benjamin Stoller.

                   

                  For more information, visit:

                  https://www.domingopagliuca.com/

                  https://cas.okstate.edu/greenwood_school_of_music/faculty_bios/salinas.html

                  https://www.antoniosanchez.net/about

                  Music Theory for Producers, Part 2

                  In Part 1 of this two-part series, we covered rhythmic concepts that are important for producers to know. This time around, we’ll provide a quick overview of chord theory. If you’re producing music but are not exactly sure how chords are constructed or how they relate to melodies, read on!

                  Built on Scales

                  In order to understand chord construction, it’s important to have a good grasp of intervals, which are the distances between notes. In Western music, the smallest interval is a semitone, which is also known as a half-step. A distance of two half-steps equals one whole step. So a half-step above C would be C#; a whole step above C would be D, etc.

                  Chords are groupings of three or more notes that are played simultaneously, and they are built on scale tones (that is, notes in its scale). If you know solfege (do re mi fa so la ti do), then you know what a major scale sounds like. The key of a scale is determined by the pitch of its root note (“do”). As an example, here’s an illustration of a piano keyboard with the notes of a C major scale indicated. For additional context, the solfege equivalents are presented as well.

                  Diagram of intervals on a graphic of a piano keyboard.
                  The intervals of the C-major scale.

                  All major scales have identical intervals. They’re all whole steps, with two exceptions, as you can see in the above illustration: There’s only a half-step between the third and fourth degrees (i.e., E and F in this example), and between the seventh degree and the first degree of the scale in the next octave (i.e., B and C in this example).

                  Three is a Chord

                  The most basic chord form is a triad. It has three notes and is a building block for more complex chords. A major triad is made up of the first degree (the tonic) plus the third-degree and the fifth-degree (dominant) tones in the scale. These are usually referred to as the “root, third and fifth.” For example, here’s a C-major triad:

                  Major triad notes diagrammed on graphic of a keyboard.
                  C-major triad.

                  The graphic editors in your DAW show notes in the form of a piano keyboard, although they are usually oriented vertically instead of horizontally. Here’s how a C-major triad is displayed in the Steinberg Cubase Key Editor:

                  Screenshot.
                  C-major triad in the Cubase Key editor.

                  If you lower the third in a major triad by one semitone (that is, if you flat it), the result is a minor triad. Minor chords sound sad or even mysterious compared to the happy sound of major chords. As an example, here’s a C minor chord:

                  Diagram indicating which keys are part of triad on a keyboard.
                  A minor triad consists of the tonic, flatted-third, and fifth.

                  Here’s how that same chord looks in Cubase’s Key Editor.

                  Screenshot.
                  C-minor triad in the Cubase Key editor.

                  The intervals in a major triad consist of the root, a major third (the note four semitones higher than the root) and a perfect fifth (the note seven semitones higher than the root). The reason the fifth is called “perfect” is to distinguish it from flattened (“diminished”) fifths a half step lower, and sharpened (“augmented”) fifths a half step higher. (More about these shortly.)

                  Diagram.
                  The intervals that comprise a major triad.

                  Inversions

                  Inversions are chords that don’t have the root on the bottom. They’re made up of the same notes as regular (non-inverted) chords but use one of the other chord tones for the bass — a neat trick that really changes the sound. If you put the third on the bottom, it’s called the first inversion; if you put the fifth on the bottom, it’s called the second inversion.

                  Screenshot.
                  C major chord and its first and second inversions.

                  Increasing Chordal Complexity: Sevenths, Ninths, and More

                  Chords sound more complex as you add notes to them. Adding the seventh degree of a major scale to a major triad gives you a major-seventh chord. These chords (indicated with a “maj7” at the end; i.e., Cmaj7) can be described as mellow or sweet-sounding. A stronger version of the seventh chord is the dominant seventh (indicated just as “7”; i.e., C7). It’s constructed the same way as a major-seventh chord except that you drop the seventh degree down by a half step, turning it into a flatted seventh.

                  Diagram.
                  The notes in Cmaj7 and C7 chords.

                   

                  Screenshot.
                  Cmaj7 chord in the Cubase Key Editor.

                  A minor seventh chord is a minor triad plus a flatted seventh. You can build even more complex chords on top of either major or minor seventh chords. For example, a ninth chord (written as a “9” chord; i.e., C9) is made up of a dominant seventh chord with a ninth added on top. A minor-ninth chord (written as a “m9”; i.e., Cm9) consists of a minor seventh chord with a ninth added.

                  Diagram.
                  The notes in Cmaj9 and C9 chords.

                  You might be wondering how you get a ninth when a major scale only has seven notes. The answer is that a ninth is a second (which in the key of C would be a D; in D, it would be an E and so forth) played an octave higher. Think of it this way: If you were counting up a major scale, instead of stopping after the seventh degree and starting again in the next octave, you instead continue counting. The octave above the root would be eight, and the next scale tone would be nine.

                  You use a similar method to create eleventh and thirteenth chords. Start with a dominant-seventh, major-seventh or minor-seventh chord and count up to the eleventh degree of the scale for an eleventh chord, or to the thirteenth degree for a thirteenth chord.

                  You may also run across chords with “add 9” or “add 11” or “add 13” in their name. Those are similar to ninth, eleventh and thirteenth chords but don’t have a seventh (either major or minor) in them.

                  Augmented and Diminished Chords

                  Another fairly common chord type is the augmented chord — a major triad with the fifth degree raised by a half-step. You’ll see these expressed with a plus sign or +5 after the chord name (for example, C+ or C+5).

                  The opposite of these are diminished chords — minor triads with the fifth degree lowered by a half-step. Diminished chords are written with “dim” after the chord name or the symbol “o” after the chord name (for example, Cdim or Co). Both augmented and diminished chords can have sevenths added to create augmented seventh and diminished seventh chords, respectively.

                  One other chord form you’ll run into a lot is the suspended (Sus4) chord. These are created by raising the third of a major triad by one semitone. You can also add a seventh on top to make a 7sus4 chord, such as an C7sus4. The thing about suspended chords is that they want to be resolved. In other words, after you raise the third, you should then bring it back down again. (A great example of this is Pete Townshend’s power strumming in the intro to The Who song “Pinball Wizard.”) If you don’t resolve it, it leaves the listener hanging.

                  Fitting In

                  Within any key, there are seven chords made up exclusively of notes from that key’s major scale. These are called diatonic chords. Typically, they’re referred to by their scale degree numbers and are written with Roman numerals.

                  The relationships between these chords are the same in every key. In the key of C, the diatonic chords are Cmaj7 (I), Dm (II), Em (III), F (IV), G (V), Am (VI) and Bdim (VII). In the key of G, they’re Gmaj7 (I), Am (II), Bm (III), C (IV), D (V), Em (VI) and Fdim (VII).

                  If you hear somebody refer to the “II-chord” or the “IV-chord,” etc., they’re talking about diatonic chords. You can assume that the II chord is a minor chord, the IV a major chord, and so on, unless stated otherwise (the “II-dominant-seventh” or the “VI-major,” etc.).

                  You may have also heard about songs that have a “I-IV-V” chord progression (for example, C-F-G). That’s typically referencing the standard chords in a blues song (as well as many rock songs). A common jazz turnaround is a “II-V” (for example, in the key of D, II-V would be Em to A). However, jazz players almost always add at least a flatted-seventh note to both chords, if not additional chord tones on top.

                  On Track

                  Steinberg Cubase has several really helpful features for dealing with chords and scales, including Chord Track, which allows you to enter the chords to your song into the measures they go in. You then can make any MIDI parts in the song conform to the specified chords. Similar features can be found in some other DAWs.

                  Screenshot.
                  A Cubase project that includes a Chord Track.

                  If you use Cubase’s Scale Assistant feature, you can set it to follow the Chord Track so that any notes you record will be constrained to the chord or chords in a given measure. If, like me, you’re not a good keyboard player, you can set up a chord track and then just play the same three- (or more) note chord against the whole song, and Cubase will alter the notes to fit the Chord Track.

                  Once you have a good handle on these basic principles, you’ll be able to analyze the chords you’re using in your productions and better understand what’s going on harmonically — which in turn can help you write more interesting chord progressions that can help make the songs stand out.

                   

                  Check out these related blog postings:

                  Music Theory for Producers, Part 1

                  The Basics of Chordal Harmony

                  Major Scale Modes, Part 1: Ionian Mode

                   

                  Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

                  Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

                  Case Study: A Competitive Show Choir Boosts Choral Participation

                  In response to student demand, Highland High School in Illinois introduced an extracurricular show choir to its already multifaceted choral program that includes an a cappella group, madrigal singers, chamber singers, a traditional mixed choir and musical theater. The school switched out its jazz choir for the new ensemble in the spring 2018.

                  “If my students show interest in something, I want to make sure they can do it,” says Andrew Gibb-Clark, the director of choral activities for the Highland Community Unit School District 5 as well as the high school’s fine arts department chair. “It’s very important to me to offer a variety of opportunities for the kids, and that brings in different students that might not have been here before.”

                  Show Me the Funding

                  To launch the program, Gibb-Clark conducted research, requested funding from the school board and took a measured approach.

                  First, Gibb-Clark spoke to other choir directors, including a family friend who teaches at Davenport Central High School in Iowa. “He gave me a lot of information about the types of things that we would need,” he says.

                  After deciding to forge ahead, Gibb-Clark approached the school district’s board of education with the funding request. He gave a formal presentation that included his vision, his team and the project proposal. He also invited students to speak at the meeting about their reasons for wanting the show choir.

                  “I spent a lot of time talking to the board about the positives of the program and what music does for students,” Gibb-Clark says. “I had also looked into the cons … and told the board.”

                  The show choir’s startup needs included specialty risers that are safe for dancing, lighting and sound equipment that can be moved and set up in different spaces, and instruments — such as a drum set. In the end, the board agreed to fund $60,000 in purchases.

                  “It was not an easy decision for them; it wasn’t a unanimous decision either,” Gibb-Clark says. “Since then, they’ve continued to be very supportive and are very happy with the decision that they made.”

                  Highland High School show choirTo help the board understand the value of the capital expense, Gibb-Clark has invited its members to performances and provided updates on participation, competition results and equipment use. In fact, all the audiovisual equipment bought by the show choir has been used for the other choirs and musicals while the sound system has also been utilized at graduation. “It was an investment beyond the show choir,” Gibb-Clark says.

                  To pay for the show choir’s recurring expenses, such as music, choreography and set pieces, the choir boosters have picked up the slack, and choir families have paid for costumes. Since the school started the show choir, it has become a bigger project for the booster organization, which has then put a bigger emphasis on fundraising, according to Gibb-Clark.

                  The Highland show choir operates on a small budget of $7,000 to $8,000 a year. In comparison, other schools’ show choirs have an annual budget of $30,000, Gibb-Clark says.

                  In the first year, the show choir performed only at the school but has been traveling to competitions in subsequent years.

                  The Thrill of Competition

                  The competitive aspect combined with full choreography and popular songs attract students to the show choir. It offers an experience for singers that is similar to marching band for instrumental musicians.

                  “Marching band is very competitive and gives the students something to work for whereas a lot of the [choirs are performance-based],” Gibb-Clark says. “The kids enjoy that competitive aspect, and the only place they’re going to get it in our choral program is in the show choir.”

                  While the school previously participated in a cappella festivals, where the ensemble received a rating, Gibb-Clark eliminated that aspect due to a lack of useful feedback. “It’s hard to get comments on a piece of paper and know how to turn them into meaningful things for the students,” he says.

                  On the other hand, the show choir competitions attended by Highland offer immediate and in-person verbal feedback. “After you perform, you’ll go into another room for a critique,” says Gibb-Clark. “[The students meet] with a clinician and work with them right there at the competition. And I think that’s so extremely valuable rather than just comments on a piece of paper.”

                  In addition, the show choir gives students a physical activity. “The kids have to be able to dance and sing at the same time,” Gibb-Clark says. “Being somewhat in shape was something new for them.”

                  Show choir performers attend a weeklong summer camp to get a jumpstart on music and choreography. Throughout the year, the show choir rehearses once a week after school for two to three hours. It attends three competitions, fit into the schedule to avoid any conflicting events within the music department.

                  Because of the show choir’s live band, which is managed by the band’s assistant director — Jamie Keys — and comprises eight to 10 students, the choir and band departments must have strong collaboration. “We have good communication in our department meetings, and we’re usually all on the same page,” Gibb-Clark says.

                  Along with the curricular choirs, the show choir also participates in two school concerts and a pancake breakfast fundraiser.

                  Rise in Numbers

                  Since Gibb-Clark’s first year at Highland in 2017-2018, the number of choral group members at the small school — with 850 total enrollment — has nearly doubled from 55 to 100 participants.

                  Highland High School show choir tech At Highland, each ensemble focuses on different musical genres and gives students different learning and performance opportunities. For example, the madrigals sing at the Kansas City Renaissance Festival, do 15 to 20 community performances per year and host a dinner show.

                  Gibb-Clark has put a greater emphasis on putting on professional musical theater productions. “I think the growth of the [choral] program and the strength of it is that we have so many different things that are strong on their own,” Gibb-Clark says.

                  Still, the show choir has been a big impetus for the increase in choral participation since about 50% of the high school’s singers also participate in the group.

                  In the first year, 30 students performed in the show choir and show choir band. In 2018-2019, the numbers went up to 40. In 2019-2020, the group grew to 50 members.

                  In the future, Gibb-Clark would like to create a junior varsity level show choir and host a competition. Getting to 60 members would allow the group to split in half, he says.

                  Gibb-Clark will continue to oversee the show choir overall, but he will no longer handle its day-to-day operations. He decided to take a step back after the birth of his first child in September 2020. He continues his curricular roles at both the middle school and high school as well as directing the musical and madrigal dinner.

                  “My accompanist [David Wilton] spent a lot of time doing show choirs in the past,” Gibb-Clark says. “After getting it started and putting in all the groundwork, I felt comfortable to let him take over going forward.”

                  Overall, Gibb-Clark, who had never participated in or directed show choirs in the past, says that he and his students have gained a lot of valuable experiences. “The first year that we went to competitions, we finished dead last by a lot,” he says. “It was a learning experience. The kids were OK with it. They understood that they were trying to build something and not worried about results yet. They’re learning a new art; they’re learning a new form of performance. We were focused on individual and group development rather than results. … In the second year, at every competition, our scores went up, and we beat two groups. … The biggest difference was our growth and understanding of the performing art, of what show choir is.”

                  YH-L700A Headphones Head Tracking Technology

                  When someone says, “Look at me when I’m talking to you,” that’s when the situation gets real. Not necessarily because of the potential repercussions of choosing to look in the other direction, or even the authority of the person delivering the message. Rather, it’s that sound is directional — we can tell where it’s coming from. And when we’re able to track sound to its source, our perception achieves lifelike realism.

                  The same can be said of head tracking technology in Yamaha YH-L700A wireless headphones. It enables playback to respond in real time to the orientation of your head in relation to the device playing the content. When combined with 3D Sound Field capabilities, the result is an extraordinary level of realism, making you feel like you’re actually “there,” in the best seat in a movie theater or front row of a live concert.

                  Let’s take a closer look at how it works.

                  Stereo vs Head Tracking

                  Traditional headphones play music and video content in stereo. A stereo signal is comprised of two separate signals for your left and right ear — a left and a right channel. Listening with headphones in stereo creates the sensation of sound playing in your head. Wherever you look — up, down, left, right — the playback is the same.

                  Head tracking technology transforms the two-channel listening experience into a virtual landscape that is directionally-based. Sound playback is oriented by the location of your head, instead of being fixed in a stereo left-right sound field.

                  Man in his 30's with facial hair and tattoos on his lower arms is in front of a laptop wearing Yamaha wireless headphones.
                  Photo courtesy @THETATTOOEDHUSBAND.

                  With the head tracking feature turned on, the sound stays with the screen. A gyroscope inside the YH-L700A tracks your movement, keeping the arc of the sound angled to the screen in front of you. As your head moves through space, looking left or right, the audio is precisely localized in relation to the source, i.e., where it would naturally be coming from if you didn’t have headphones on. This adds lifelike realism to not only where you listen, but how you listen.

                  The head tracking technology in the YH-L700A is also an easy way to overcome listening fatigue. It works with content from any source — phones, tablets, computers and more.

                  The head tracking feature is enabled in the free Yamaha Headphones Controller app, available for iOS and Android™ devices.

                  Earbuds and small electronic device.
                  Photo courtesy @TYNOLOGY.

                  Loaded With Tech

                  Head tracking is just one of the advanced technologies you’ll find in the YH-L700A. Additional features include:

                  • 3D Sound Field
                  • Listening Optimizer
                  • Advanced ANC
                  • Listening Care
                  • Ambient Sound

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha YH-L700A wireless headphones.

                  Spotlight on the DTX8/DTX10

                  The newest members of the Yamaha family of electronic drum kits have just been unveiled: the DTX8 Series and flagship DTX10 Series. Both offer high-quality sounds and a realistic playing experience wrapped up in beautiful acoustic drum shells with premium finishes, making them a perfect fit for touring and recording musicians who want superior performance, functionality and reliability.

                  Ready to learn more? Let’s dive in.

                  DTX-PROX and DTX-PRO

                  The heart of the DTX8 is the DTX-PRO drum module, while the DTX10 Series is powered by the new DTX-PROX. Both modules provide 14 trigger inputs, 256-note polyphony, more than 700 new voices and the ability to layer up to four sounds per pad. The DTX-PRO offers 512 megabytes of WAV ROM, and the DTX-PROX offers a full gigabyte of WAV ROM.

                  Closeup of someone's hand adjusting the dials on the electronic drum kit.
                  DTX-PROX drum module.

                  Acoustic drum sounds for the DTX-PRO and DTX-PROX were recorded in CD-quality (44.1 kHz/16-bit) stereo by professional engineers at some of the world’s top recording studios, with the resultant samples incorporating the natural ambience of those studios. The DTX-PRO comes standard with 40 new preset drum kits, while the DTX-PROX delivers 70 new kits, plus you can build up to 200 of your own custom user kits.

                  Onboard effects such as Gated Reverb, Early Reflections, Tempo Delays, Chorus, Flanger and Pitch Change can be added to specific instruments via two independent processors, while Analog Delay, Chorus, Flanger, Overdrive, Bit Crusher and Lo-Fi can be added to the entire kit using a Master Effects processor (MFX).

                  Editing Made Easy

                  The DTX-PRO and DTX-PROX make it easy to modify your drum sounds on the fly with the use of a three-knob Kit Modifier, and the DTX-PROX takes tweaking to the next level with its additional Fader Select functions.

                  Kit Modifier

                  The Kit Modifier is a set of three front-panel rotary controls (surrounded by easy-to-view LED light circles) that provide instant access to three main drum kit parameters: Ambience, Comp (compressor) and Effect. For more information, see this blog.

                  Closeup of dials.
                  The Kit Modifier controls.

                  Fader Select

                  The DTX-PROX Fader Select knob, combined with a set of seven LED Rotary Faders, gives you an even more extensive means of editing drum kits.

                  Closeup of dials.
                  The Fader Select knob (top) and LED Rotary Faders (bottom).

                  The function of the LED Rotary Faders is determined by the Fader Select knob. For example, when the Fader Select knob is set to Mixer, the faders control volume level for their respective Instruments (INST). But if the Fader Select knob is changed to TUNING, the faders are instead used to change the tuning of each instrument. These controls make it possible to quickly edit your sounds, even during live performance.

                  Training Tools and File Sharing

                  The DTX-PRO and DTX-PROX provide numerous practice tools that help you become a better drummer, faster! A programmable click can be edited for sound, note value and individual note volume — you can even import your own WAV file to use as a custom click. In addition, 10 different training tools are available to help you practice, including 37 Training Songs with original drum parts that can be muted or unmuted. For more information about DTX Training tools, see this blog.

                  Both modules are also compatible with Yamaha Rec’n’Share, a free app that runs on iOS and Android™ devices, enabling you to record audio and video of your drumming performances. Once a track has been recorded, you can email the file to friends or bandmates, upload it to a file-sharing app, or post the file directly to social media. For more information, check out this blog.

                  Close up of app on phone next to portion of DTX physical controls.
                  Yamaha Rec’n’Share works with all DTX8 and DTX10 kits.

                  Get Connected

                  There are also extensive connectivity options for a wide range of applications. For example, the DTX-PROX allows each Instrument (kick, snare, toms, etc.) to be routed to any of eight individual audio outputs so they can be recorded to separate audio tracks and/or EQ’d individually on a mixer.

                  Closeup of dials.
                  The DTX-PROX can route sounds to Main L/R or any of eight individual outputs.

                  A USB TO HOST port enables you to connect to a PC via a standard USB cable so you can stream audio and MIDI data between the DTX-PRO / DTX-PROX and any DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) software. Both modules also come bundled with Steinberg Cubase AI music production software, so you’ll be recording and editing your drum performances in no time.

                  Alternatively, you can record to the internal recorder, which captures audio at 44.1 kHz/16-bit resolution. Recordings up to 90 minutes long can be named, stored and recalled onto a USB flash drive connected to the USB TO DEVICE port. A USB flash drive can also be loaded with your favorite accompaniment or practice songs as stereo WAV files (44.1 kHz/16-bit) for playback using the internal recorder. You can play along with these files or overdub your performance to a song — a great learning tool. The mix between the song and the drums can be adjusted using the DTX-PROX Sliders, which give you separate volume control for AUX IN, Audio, Click, Output and Phones.

                  Closeup of sliders.
                  The DTX-PROX Sliders.

                  Additional connections on the DTX-PROX include MIDI In and MIDI Out, 1/8″ and 1/4″ headphone jacks powered by a high-quality headphone amplifier, and an AUX IN that can accept a 1/8″ cable, enabling connection to any music player. The DTX-PROX can also connect wirelessly to a smart device via Bluetooth®.

                  Pads That Look and Feel Like Real Drums

                  DTX8 and DTX10 Series drum pads utilize a newly designed shell constructed from high-quality birch ply, manufactured at the Yamaha acoustic drum factory. The pads are available in Black Forest or Real Wood finishes, adding the beauty and presence of acoustic drums, and can be ordered with a choice of TCS (Textured Cellular Silicone) or two-ply mesh heads by REMO® for optimum playing action.

                  TCS heads feature a unique construction that gives the rebound of an acoustic drumhead and has a treated surface that prevents sticks from sliding. The result is a natural drum feel that makes you want to keep playing.

                  Crosscut image of effect on electronic drum head when hit by drum stick.
                  TCS heads maintain consistent response because they never loosen.

                  Mesh heads can be tuned to your preference and provide excellent noise reduction, a high degree of durability, and great rebound for comfortable playing.

                  The new XP125SD 12-inch snare drum pad utilizes three sensors that respond precisely to delicate stick work, and has hit-point detection for maximum expressiveness. The XP105T 10-inch and XP125T 12-inch toms are two-zone pads that mount using standard Yamaha hardware.

                  Closeup of interior of drum with sensor.
                  The XP125SD snare pad has three sensors.

                  DTX10 Series kits come with the new Yamaha KP128 12-inch kick drum pad, which features a durable 2-ply REMO mesh head and easily accommodates double pedals. DTX8 Series kits utilize the KP90 7.5-inch rubber pad, which is large enough for two beaters, allows connection of an additional external pad and offers adjustable output level for optimum sensitivity.

                  All cymbal pads supplied with DTX8 and DTX10 kits are three-zone pads with hit-point detection that produces bow, edge and bell sounds. DTX10 kits are supplied with the new PCY175 17-inch ride cymbal pad, while DTX8 kits come with the 15-inch PCY155 ride cymbal pad. Crash cymbals are 13-inch PCY135 pads. All of these permit choking by grabbing the edge of the pad.

                  DTX8 and DTX10 Series kits use genuine Yamaha hardware that stands up to the most enthusiastic players. Snare drum pads are supported using the Yamaha SS662 snare stand, a lightweight, compact design with a snare basket that holds drums up to 12 inches in diameter. Toms mount securely to the rack using the iconic Yamaha CL-940BW ball clamp, which allows a wide range of positions. DTX8 kits are equipped with the HS-650A hi-hat stand, while DTX10 kits ship with the HS-740A hi-hat stand, ensuring reliable, smooth action. Both Series employ CS-755 long boom cymbal holders so you can place your cymbals precisely where you want them.

                  Maximum Stability

                  DTX8 kits use a Yamaha RS8 rack, while DTX10 kits utilize the RS10-HXR rack system. Both have horizontal legs for increased stability, plus sufficient space on the left side to accommodate a hi-hat stand and/or double foot pedal. The RS8 features a newly-designed clamp for the cymbal holders; this enables a wider range of positions while preventing unwanted movement.

                  Electronic drum kit.
                  DTX8 kit in Black Forest finish with the RS8 rack.

                  The RS10-HXR hex rack used in DTX10 Series kits is based on the popular Yamaha HEXRACKII. Constructed from a strong, lightweight aluminum alloy, the RS10-HXR provides tremendous flexibility for positioning while keeping toms and cymbals locked in place throughout a performance or recording session.

                  Drum kit.
                  DTX10 kit in Real Wood finish with the RS10-HXR hex rack.

                  The new DTX8 and DTX10 Series electronic drums offer a terrific combination of great sounds, functionality and stage presence. If you’re looking for superior performance during rehearsal, live performance or studio recording, you owe it to yourself to check them out.

                  What to Do When There’s No Bass Player, Part 2

                  In Part 1 of this two-part series we covered the fundamentals of left-hand bass playing. Now we’ll add more movement to your playing and cover the basics of how bass players navigate through busy chord changes.

                  How to Create Walking Bass Lines

                  The main concept of walking bass lines is to play notes on each beat of the measure, providing both energy and momentum to the groove. This style was first heard in jazz in the 1930s and grew and developed from there. You can certainly hear it in the early R&B and rock ‘n’ roll music of the 1950s (think Little Richard, Chuck Berry, Elvis and so many others), and this is a style of music and playing that we still draw on today. Here is one of the most common lines used in that style of music (note that in this audio clip, I play each bar twice):

                  Musical annotation.

                  The first three notes clearly outline the major triad, followed by a passing tone (these are notes in-between chord tones) on the way up to the flatted seventh. From this example we can already see a couple of best practices when crafting a walking bass line:

                  1) Stick to the more fundamental notes of the chord. The root, the fifth, the third and the seventh is the suggested priority.

                  2) Try to have those notes occur on beats one and three when playing in 4/4 time. Use passing tones on what are considered the weaker beats (two and four).

                  It’s fine to repeat a note — particularly the root or the fifth; it’s the constant rhythm of the line that’s most important. So a good variation of the line would be as follows (again, in this audio clip, I play each bar twice):

                  Musical annotation.

                  Connecting To Other Chords

                  The next challenge is to come up with ways to connect the bass line between different chords. The obvious choice is to approach the new chord with a note from either above or below. But that note can be either a whole step away, which is usually a scale tone note, or a half-step away, which will often be a chromatic passing tone (my personal favorite). To demonstrate, here’s the first walking bass line I demonstrated, this time played over the root chord (in this case, again, C7), then repeated (transposed) under the new chord — in this case, F Dominant seventh, which is the IV chord in the key of C.

                  Musical annotation.

                  After playing the figure under the C7 chord I move to the F7, and you can see that the transition happens with a half-step approach from below — a movement that has a nice “pull” up into the F. Another choice would be to move down chromatically from the G on beat 3 to a G-flat to go into the F, as shown and demonstrated below. This also has a nice “pull” to it.

                  Musical annotation.

                  This next example uses some repeated notes to show how you can craft simple lines based on chord tone arpeggiations.

                  Musical annotation.

                  Notice how the line climbs up through the F7 to come back to the C an octave higher. Then we arpeggiate back down to the lower octave, approach the next F from below, and finally walk down through scale tones, using a chromatic passing tone at the end to approach the C.

                  Scale Tone Walking

                  Now let’s walk up and down through more linear scale tones, with an added dash of chromatic passing tones.

                  Musical annotation.

                  In each measure, I’m always connecting into the next chord with a half-step approach, and I fill in notes on my way to get there.

                  Let’s change up the chord progression to apply these concepts to a different situation, with more chords:

                  Musical annotation.

                  As you can hear, beats 1 and 3 have strong chord tones, I’m using my preferred half-step approaches, and each chord is clearly spelled out — mission accomplished!

                  Here’s one more variation:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Add More Momentum to Your Lines

                  After you’ve gotten comfortable crafting walking lines, you can try adding this repeated note rhythmic device onto some of your notes:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Doubling some notes in this way gives your lines a little more bounce and adds energy to them. But don’t overdo it: a little goes a long way.

                  All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

                   

                  Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

                  40 Under 40 Home

                  Yamaha “40 Under 40” Music Educators

                  Yamaha launched the “40 Under 40” music education advocacy program in 2021 to recognize and celebrate outstanding young music educators. These remarkable teachers share the joy and power of music-making with their students who range from transitional kindergarteners to college undergrads.  

                  We look forward to sharing the stories of 40 music teachers each year. You will be inspired by the noteworthy achievements of the Yamaha “40 Under 40” educators who oversee music programs that are continually growing and improving.  

                  2025 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2024 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2023 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2022 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2021 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  Yamaha “40 Under 40” Music Educators

                  Yamaha launched the “40 Under 40” music education advocacy program in 2021 to recognize and celebrate outstanding young music educators. These remarkable teachers share the joy and power of music-making with their students who range from transitional kindergarteners to college undergrads.  

                  We look forward to sharing the stories of 40 music teachers each year. You will be inspired by the noteworthy achievements of the Yamaha “40 Under 40” educators who oversee music programs that are continually growing and improving.  

                  2025 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2024 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2023 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2022 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  2021 “40 Under 40” Educators

                  Continue reading

                  Six Essential Bass-Playing Techniques

                  Do anything long enough and you’ll eventually figure out ways to become better at it. As a bassist, this occurred for me over the course of many years. It started when I was a teenager, as I played along with my favorite bassists’ records. Even if you don’t know why someone does something, if you can figure out how to do it (or at least approximate how it’s being done), you can’t help but to develop some chops.

                  When you jam with others, join bands, rehearse, play gigs and go to recording sessions, you’ll undoubtedly meet exciting players who do things you may not have known were even possible. Fortunately, most musicians are happy to share their knowledge and experience … which is a very good thing, since incorporating new techniques into your repertoire is a great way to become a better player.

                  Here are six intermediate bass-playing techniques I’ve picked up throughout the years. Each enabled me to push my creative boundaries outward and expanded how I write songs, craft basslines and determine what to play in any given situation.

                  Hammer-Ons and Pull-Offs

                  A hammer-on is a technique where you bring a finger down onto the fretboard so as to make a note sound without playing that string with your picking hand:

                  The inverse of this, which you can use in partnership with hammer-ons or on its own, is a pull-off, where you lift a fretting finger up in a way that causes a note to sound:

                  These techniques fall under a legato style that allows you to play notes in a fluid run rather than specific staccato notes. Hammer-ons and pull-offs can be applied subtly or aggressively in lots of different situations. Yamaha Artist Billy Sheehan is renowned for the creative ways he combines hammer-ons and pull-offs. These serve as the left-hand foundation upon which he unleashes blistering right-hand fingertapping. Check out this video interview where Billy demonstrates how he brings it all together.

                  Glissando

                  You may not know it by its Italian name, but you probably already use it, and you’ve definitely heard it used by other players. Glissando (sometimes called portamento) is what happens when you slide from one note continuously to a second note. Unless you’re going for a special effect, it’s something you typically don’t want to execute slowly — at least not slowly enough to hear the in-between notes clearly — or it can sound a bit ragged.

                  Glissando is a great go-to move that anticipates and signals upcoming excitement in a song, but you need to nail the timing and the beginning and end notes, or it sounds like you played a clam. The idea is to play the initial note and immediately follow it with a slide (up or down) until you hit the end note. If you’re feeling slick you might bend the final note, or even end with a double-stop (see below for a definition). Here’s a video that shows how glissando works:

                  This technique can be used to dramatic effect, such as when you use it to lead into the first beat of a song or measure, or it can even become part of a repetitive pattern. But like anything, glissando needs to be done sparingly and tastefully.

                  Chords

                  In my high school days, any time I played a bass chord, my bandmates frowned. As strict traditionalists, they thought chords were the sole domain of guitarists and keyboardists, and that I, as the bassist, was supposed to be holding things down with whole notes or zombie-like 1 -4-5 progressions for them to play soulless leads over. Uh … no thanks. Instead of living on that boring musical cul-de-sac, I bailed on those bands and started practicing on my own, which led me to experiment with complex chords.

                  Conventional chords are created by at least three notes being played simultaneously, but a chord can be as simple as a two-note dyad (better known as a double-stop), which implies a chord without the influence of a third note. Double-stops can help create emphasis or heighten an emotion in a song by serving as a thickening agent that adds powerful harmonic content in the right spot. Check out this video for some examples:

                  Other techniques based on chords include arpeggios, which are the individual notes of a chord played in a pattern. I’m a big fan of bass chords overall, and have found them to be particularly effective tactics when I’ve played in power trios — the right chord choices help make the band sound much bigger and more energetic. Certain chords, especially darker voicings/shapes like an F-minor (F-A♭-C), are easier to hear (and finger) in the upper registers; when played down toward the nut, they tend to get lost.

                  Right Hand Positioning

                  You’ve surely noticed the difference in your tone when you play just in front of the bridge versus near the fretboard. As you can see in this next video, when playing over the bridge, notes are punchy and tight, and can be bright and percussive without too much harmonic content. Playing near the fretboard yields the opposite effect: the notes have rich harmonic content and are warm, sloppy and juicy-sounding.

                  If you play a bass equipped with pickups in or around those traditional locations, you’re probably already familiar with how differently things sound when you isolate one pickup or the other. But when the two pickups are blended together, you can create subtle but important tonal differences by moving your picking-hand position up and down the strings.

                  Pedaling

                  This refers to when you use one note — often the root, and often an open string, but it’s up to you — to hold down a groove, and you go back and forth between it and other notes to create a wash of melody in a percussive pattern, like this:

                  To me, the bassist whose signature style is most synonymous with pedaling is the great Peter Hook — he’s a master of creating melody and groove at the same time, such as on Joy Division’s “Love Will Tear Us Apart.” (Be sure to check out the Yamaha BBPH Peter Hook Signature BB Bass.)

                  Pedaling can be an intoxicating technique — so much so that you may need discipline to restrain yourself from overdoing it. I’ve found it best suited for songs where there’s lots of space for the bass to slot in, but regardless, you need to be careful about your attack, or the notes can sound uneven; they may even end up fighting with the string noise generated by your hand sliding all over the place.

                  Harmonics

                  On a stringed instrument, harmonics are created when you intentionally avoid playing the fundamental note (which, on a fretted bass, is created when you press down behind a fret on the fingerboard and pluck the string) and instead lightly touch your finger over that fret (or its position on a fretless bass) while plucking. The easiest harmonics to play on the bass are located at the twelfth fret, followed by the fifth, seventh and ninth frets. (There are others, but these are the most prominent ones, which is why they’re the easiest to play.)

                  As demonstrated in this video, to play a harmonic, simply hold your finger over a fret as you pluck the string. As you move your hand up and down, you’ll intermittently hear these harmonics ring out.

                  As you get better at this technique, you’ll find that there are other locations along the fretboard that generate stranger-sounding harmonics, but it gets more and more difficult to coax these sounds out of the bass unless you put in a lot of practice.

                  You can enhance this technique by letting the harmonic ring out and then quickly pushing down and sliding your fretting hand to a new fret position. When done correctly, this has the effect of continuing the sound rather than playing the fundamental note. You can also create “fake” harmonics (essentially an octave up) on any note by lightly touching your finger on a string 12 frets away from the note you’re playing while simultaneously plucking that string with your thumb.

                  Keep in mind that harmonics are high-pitched and delicate, so if you’re going to use them, choose your spots carefully or no one will hear them. If harmonics are a major component of your bassline in a song, a little compression on your signal will go a long way to bring them out in the mix so they don’t get lost.

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

                  How to Use Bluetooth® Out with an AV Receiver and Sound Bar

                  We use two-way Bluetooth® communication between our smartphones and our wireless headphones every day. The phone sends Bluetooth audio to the headphones in the form of music and notification sounds, while the headphones return voice from their microphones to the phone for answering incoming calls and accessing smart assistants. That’s a lot of Bluetooth interaction back and forth.

                  But when it comes to home audio, many of us limit ourselves to the basic Bluetooth Input function of our devices. Streaming audio content from our phones for playback through a receiver/speaker system provides a better overall listening experience, but there’s more Bluetooth functionality than just that. For example, all MusicCast-enabled products offer a Bluetooth Transmission feature for streaming audio content from your home audio equipment — such as an AV receiver or sound bar — to Bluetooth-enabled wireless headphones. This opens another level of listening flexibility to enjoy.

                  Let’s take a look at when and how to use this powerful function.

                  When to Use Bluetooth Transmission

                  Here are two scenarios where Bluetooth Transmission can come to the rescue:

                  1. Perhaps you’re hard of hearing and need to ramp up the volume of your sound system with an AV receiver. That’s fine if you live alone but can be bothersome to others living in the home. The solution? Put on your favorite set of Bluetooth headphones and engage the Bluetooth Transmission function on your receiver, then adjust the headphone’s volume control to taste while leaving the sound in the speakers at a comfortable listening level for others in the room. If no one else is listening but you and you need to keep it quiet, you can duck the master volume to the speakers all the way and still enjoy the sound through your headphones.

                  2. Let’s say you have a TV and a MusicCast sound bar in the bedroom, and you want to watch the news before you go to sleep … but your spouse wants to read a book. Again, the solution is simple: Put on a set of Bluetooth headphones and activate the transmission feature on the sound bar connected to your TV, then turn the sound bar’s volume all the way down and enjoy the broadcast through your headphones without disturbing your partner.

                  Note: The Bluetooth Transmission stream is independent from the speaker volume setting, meaning the Bluetooth stream is broadcast at a fixed level and can be independently adjusted with the volume control of your headphones. The room volume for all other listeners is controlled by the sound bar or receiver’s main volume control. Everyone gets the content at the volume they prefer.

                  How to Use Bluetooth Transmission

                  The simplest way to engage the Bluetooth Transmission function is through the free Yamaha MusicCast Controller app. Here’s how to do it:

                  1. From the app’s playback screen, touch the “sound settings” tab in the lower right-hand corner.

                  2. Scroll to the bottom and touch the Bluetooth Transmission tab. This will allow you to turn on the feature and select the available Bluetooth device to connect with.

                  Three phone screenshots.

                  Alternatively, if you’re using a Yamaha RX-V Series or AVENTAGE AV receiver with an on-screen display, you can use the settings button on its remote control to display the setup menu on your connected TV, as shown in the illustration below. All you have to do then is scroll to the Bluetooth tab and follow the instructions to connect to your headphones.

                  Photo of remote control and three phone screenshots.

                  We use two-way Bluetooth communication every day with our smartphones. It’s time to explore the full benefit of the Bluetooth Transmission feature found on all MusicCast-enabled devices including sound bars, receivers, speakers and Hi-Fi products. You may be pleasantly surprised at how it can enhance your day-to-day listening habits!

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha MusicCast.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha MusicCast-enabled products.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha wireless headphones.

                  Case Study: Giving Voice to Middle School Choir Students

                  The junior high years can be an awkward period. That’s why promoting self-esteem and self-discovery have become major components of Lydia Cox’s goals as the chorus and digital music teacher at Crosby Middle School within the large district of Jefferson County Public Schools in Louisville, Kentucky.

                  “I’ve really enjoyed my experience in middle school,” says Cox, who has been at Crosby since 2016 after three years of teaching at a high school. “It’s an awesome age. They grow a lot in those three years, and I’ve enjoyed helping to foster that growth and all the nuances that come with their emotional development.”

                  Participation Matters

                  Crosby Middle School choir student speaking in front of class Cox has a dual role at Crosby, directing 6th, 7th and 8th grade choirs as well as teaching digital music classes that are part of the school’s overall STEAM (science, technology, engineering, the arts and mathematics) program.

                  Crosby has an average of 350 students per grade. About 40 to 50 students per grade arein choir, while approximately 120 participate in STEAM.

                  In choir, Cox teaches students with a range of abilities and aspirations and takes pride in melding them together. “I have some students who enter as 6th graders and know they love singing and are very passionate about it and are going to seek every opportunity they can,” she says. “But I also have other students who are placed in the class because they need an arts class, and they’re very skeptical of singing and of choir. But I’ve seen these students really buy into the community of the program and end up being great leaders. It’s wonderful to see both sides of that scale and to have them all come together and share their voices and make music together. I think that’s a special thing about singing — students sharing a part of themselves.”

                  Cox has developed several strategies to nudge reluctant participants. For example, she uses a name randomizer to call on students for answers. To introduce the concept, she starts with low-risk questions like, “What’s your favorite color?” She also uses the name randomizer for “cheesy things” like giving a peer a round of applause. “That way, when it’s more content-related, there’s not as much fear surrounding being randomly called,” she adds.

                  Crosby Middle School choir class making solfege hand signs She’ll also use visual cues, perhaps requesting that students touch their noses when they can identify the first dynamic change or use solfege hand signs to identify the letter names of notes or hold up the number of fingers to correspond with the number of beats. “With things like that, I expect 100% participation,” Cox says. “I look for those nonverbal opportunities that 100% of students can participate in.”

                  Another technique is to give a discussion prompt and let peers talk it out. Then she’ll ask for a student to share his or her neighbor’s response. “They’re not sharing their own opinion; they’re sharing someone else’s,” Cox says.

                  Overall, Cox says that she wants to hear from every student at least once every two to three days.

                  “I think a lot about the quiet, compliant students who shows up and does their work and maybe won’t raise their hands,” Cox says. “It matters to me that I acknowledge at some point in the class that they’re there.”

                  Plethora of Performances

                  The choir classes also have opportunities to voice their ideas by playing a role in music selection. “My opinion on what music they perform and study is just one opinion in a classroom of 40 to 50 students,” Cox says. “I let them brainstorm music that we can perform. Sometimes I will present them with three choices, and we’ll listen to the three choices and talk about them, and they get to vote. [I’m] just trying to incorporate their voice and opinion as many times as possible.”

                  Students perform in two casual concerts —at the beginning and at the end of the school year — during class time. They can invite favorite teachers and staff with personalized cards.

                  Crosby Middle School choir members They also participate in three to six formal evening concerts for family, some in collaboration with the high school choir from nearby Eastern High School, plus assemblies for elementary schools or in the District 12 Kentucky Music Educators Association performance assessment for large ensembles. Since 2018, the 8th graders in choir, band, orchestra and piano have combined in a school Veterans Day program that has included multiple song selections, a joint patriotic medley, various speakers and honored guests.

                  For students who want additional singing opportunities, Cox points them toward community programs, voice lessons or honor choirs. About 30 of her students participate in all-county choir each year with about 10 in all-state choir and some who sing with the all-national choir through the American Choral Directors Association. Cox helps students audition as well as prepare for their performances.

                  Cox also directs an extracurricular middle school a cappella group called Roar and collaborates with the Eastern High School director on a junior varsity group. With only 12 to 16 students in Crosby’s ensemble, students need to be self-assured in their parts. “Students who are in Roar gain a lot of confidence and independence,” she says. “To give them that opportunity to be independent singers and to see their growth has been a real treat.”

                  In general, Cox makes sure that students feel valued with any level of commitment. “One of my goals is to provide [extra] opportunities for my students who want them,” she says. “I also want to incorporate as many opportunities [as possible] for 100% of my students to participate in, so that they all feel a part of this choir community. … It’s such a vulnerable age, and I want them to feel a part of something and to be proud of themselves,” Cox says. “Any way I can help foster that at that age — that’s my goal.”

                  Classroom Community

                  Crosby Middle School choir members Beyond just teaching the mechanics of singing, Cox strives to create a community where everyone values each other’s contributions. Each choir class elects several officers who help with taking attendance and mentoring new students. “Sometimes my strongest leaders are not necessarily the strongest musicians,” she says. “I’m looking not just for musical leaders but [also for] leaders in how to rehearse or … students who are really encouraging of their peers. … I try to find and identify one area in which they’re really strong and try to foster that area.”

                  Cox also provides informal leadership opportunities. During class, she will invite a student to stand up and lead warmups, a sectional or sight-singing activity. “[I’m] providing an opportunity for [students] to be up in front of their peers for [those] who want that.”

                  She will also talk about positive behaviors and ask students to provide affirming statements about classmates who sit with great posture or are great at rehearsing. “They identify peers by name, so that the peers hear that” and know that other students look to them as role models, Cox says.

                  During the 2020-2021 school year when students were virtual until spring break, “it made me so much more aware of caring for the student as a human being because they were going through this very difficult thing,” Cox says.

                  Therefore, she chose to focus on social-emotional activities through the lens of music. Crosby and Eastern High choir students submitted a dedication performance to a person they are grateful for and discussed why that song was chosen. “Leading up to that, we talked about what it means to be grateful,” Cox says. “They kept a gratitude journal. They were able to talk about people in their lives who they’re grateful for and why.”

                  Full STEAM Ahead

                  Students must apply to join the STEAM program. In 6th grade, they take digital music, digital art, engineering, coding, robotics and a student technology leadership program — rotating through each aspect in six-week increments. In combined 7th and 8th grade classes, students choose from three concentrations that last for 12 weeks each. Various teachers create their own courses that fit under the STEAM categories.

                  members of Crosby Middle School's digital music course In Cox’s digital music courses, students come from all parts of the school. Some have performing arts classes while others don’t. “It’s nice that they can get a different approach to the arts,” she says.

                  Cox’s 6th grade STEAM students explore the elements of music through digital means. For example, they might use an online tool to create a song in an ABA pattern.

                  For 7th and 8th graders in digital music, Cox teaches two courses: podcasting and composition. Students spend time on larger projects, selecting their own topics within the framework. In a prior year, podcasts ranged from favorite athletes to an exposé uncovering the conspiracy theory behind a local monster. The standards for the class incorporate audio recording and manipulation as well as the use of sound effects and music files. For composition, students have envisioned their own video game concepts; they then wrote music for the games while collaborating with digital arts classmates who created scenes to match the ideas.

                  “In general, my philosophy in choir or digital music is to make everything as student-centered as possible,” Cox says. “I let the students drive the learning. I try to get a feel for what they enjoy doing and how they enjoy learning.”

                  Bringing the Joy of Music to the Hard of Hearing

                  Musician and inventor Myles de Bastion has been deaf since he was four years old, and he has a lot to teach the world.

                  Photo of a man holding a guitar.
                  Myles de Bastion.

                  The president of CymaSpace, a Portland, Oregon-based nonprofit technology company that works to bring art and culture to the deaf community via innovative practices, de Bastion is both a creative individual and one seemingly in constant professorial mode. While society often refers to those without traditional hearing as “hearing-impaired,” de Bastion says many in the community actually prefer “hard of hearing,” noting that all people, even those with normal hearing capabilities, are on a spectrum.

                  Further, through his work, de Bastion says he’s learned to consider himself not afflicted with “hearing loss.” Rather, he says, he has “deaf gain,” which has made him more resourceful in his life. Evidence of this ingenuity lies in the fact that de Bastion has helped to design several unique technologies that actually show sound to those who cannot hear it — in essence, creating a form of visual music.

                  An Inventor Begins His Journey

                  de Bastion’s education and creative spark began when he was a child, playing the piano on his grandfather’s lap.

                  “It was one of my earliest memories,” he says. “I would marvel at the repeating pattern of the black and white keys. When I would copy his movements and strike a key, I wasn’t so much aware of there being a sound, but rather that the keys on the left made more of a vibration under my fingers than those on the right. That sensation was what drew me in.”

                  As a teenager, de Bastion says he became “obsessed” with music. He started to learn the electric guitar, which, he’d noticed, has a great deal of malleability when it comes to amplification and sound manipulation. He joined a band but found the experience frustrating, not knowing what the lyrics were and never totally knowing if he was playing the right part. “I wished for a system that could show me visually what was happening in the sound waves as I played,” he recalls.

                  Necessity being the mother of invention, de Bastion started inventing. With the goal of not just displaying the intensity of sound but also the notes being played and the ways different instruments weaved together, he drew up a design for a box he could sit on that would vibrate and light LEDs, with different colors representing different tonal regions.

                  Drawing for an invention.
                  Early conceptual drawing of the DUSIC Cube.

                  To turn the idea into reality, he enlisted the help of an electronics-savvy friend and in 2011, the first prototype of the “DUSIC (Deaf Music) Cube” was unveiled. It was later displayed at the Portland Art Museum.

                  Electronic box with a screen inside a glass museum case.
                  DUSIC Cube prototype on display at the Portland Art Museum.

                  Doubling Down

                  After the success of his first prototype, de Bastion, who’s also helped to create the first ever deaf arts festival in Portland, was encouraged to continue and expand his work. He began to study more about LEDs and piezo-electronics, later progressing to software coding and even more sophisticated endeavors. Yet de Bastion never saw his innovations as a cash cow. Instead, he gave them away.

                  “I leaned heavily on open-source hardware and software and free information on the internet,” he says. “As such, I never pursued patenting or claiming ownership over my ideas.”

                  Today, de Bastion has created several different manifestations of his visual sound system that use varying technologies. These machines are all bound by a scientific approach to interpreting sound as light. For example, the audible sound spectrum mirrors the visible light spectrum so that the lower frequency tones appear as warm, red colors and the higher frequency ones are shown as cooler, blue colors, with the intensity of the sound usually reflected in the brightness of the LEDs.

                  “This works well for complex multi-spectrum sound sources such as orchestral music or a rock band,” de Bastion says. “Deaf people are very visual, and so it makes sense to tell a story through light, color and movement, especially when it is in sync with sound and vibration.”

                  To visualize individual instruments with smaller, more restricted ranges of sound, de Bastion relies on repetition of color patterns. For example, when displaying a chromatic scale, the same colors will repeat with each octave. “It is important that the visualization [be] consistently repeatable for it to be functionally useful,” he explains.

                  Making It Manageable

                  For de Bastion, who started playing electric guitar at 14 and would practice for six to eight hours per day back then, music is a world in which he wants to live … and he wants others to be able to do so as well. He credits his childhood with teaching him how to stay driven and focused. “When you’re hard of hearing as a young person, you learn how to pay very close attention to other signifiers,” he says. “Persistence is key.”

                  He also finds it helpful to break up big problems into smaller challenges. “When an event or piece of information is not accessible to me,” he says, “it motivates me to find ways to break down the barriers so that I can have full access. I’ve learned that when I share my experience openly with others, people are more understanding and willing to find ways to communicate or work with me.”

                  In the end, he views all of this effort as being about connection, art and innovation. Those are the key factors that serve as the impetus behind his personal driving force.

                  Adapting to Present Realities … and a Vision for the Future

                  With many venues shut down due to the events of the past year and a half, de Bastion has turned his focus to virtual reality, working to create spaces where people can share in his inventions.

                  A quote: "If there are other beings out there, I have no doubt they have appreciation for music."

                  “Trying to perform or engage with an audience through Zoom is very limiting,” he says, “especially since sign language relies on 3D spatial awareness and video compression makes things blurry and seemingly more bland. I have been able to adapt my visual sound concepts into the 3D space. Virtual reality is a good way of doing this because we can immerse ourselves in a rich 360-degree environment that responds to our presence.”

                  de Bastion can even imagine a value to his work beyond the bounds of this planet. “Music is universal,” he says, “because everything is vibration. If there are other beings out there, I have no doubt they have appreciation for music.”

                  All photographs courtesy of Myles de Bastion.

                  For more information, visit myles.debastion.com.

                  How to Get the Best Sound When Watching Live Sports

                  Imagine Kirk Gibson’s 1988 World Series® walk-off home run. Revisit Serena Williams’ first Grand Slam® win. Picture the emotion when Tiger Woods won his first Masters Tournament®. Now imagine hearing it as if you were right there, in the middle of the action.

                  Watching great moments like these from your sofa has its benefits, but without the right audio gear with the right features, sound isn’t one of them. If you want the best listening experience when watching live sports, here are the best sound bar and AV receiver settings to use.

                  Sound Bar Settings

                  For starters, it’s best to have a sound bar with a decent speaker range and sufficient sound modes to do the job. There are plenty of different models out there to choose from, including those with compact designs and added features like voice control.

                  For the purposes of this article, we’ll use the Yamaha SR-B20A as an example.

                  Long horizontal audio speaker.
                  Yamaha SR-B20A.

                  The SR-B20A offers four sound modes to choose from:

                  STEREO – Two-channel stereo playback for playing music.

                  STANDARD – This mode is best suited for general content, including sitcoms, news, reality shows — and, in most cases sports as well.

                  MOVIE – Designed for movies, this mode utilizes virtual surround sound to optimize any film for peak performance.

                  GAME – Use this mode while playing video games.

                  Remote control with buttons circled
                  SR-B20A remote control with sound modes circled in yellow.

                  For sports viewing, try STANDARD (or, if offered, a specific “Sports” mode) first. This will give you a sense of how the mode works, such as the positioning of various audio elements (i.e., ball strikes and crowd noise) in the soundstage. Bear in mind, however, that audio engineers work with many variable, so sometimes no one sound bar mode works perfectly with every type of broadcast.

                  That’s why it’s also a good idea to try MOVIE or GAME mode as well. Some continuous action-filled sports, like football, basketball or hockey, might well benefit from these modes. Other sports — such as golf, soccer and tennis — might benefit too, but perhaps not as much, unless you are eager to hear the roar of the crowd in crucial game-changing moments.

                  As an added bonus, the SR-B20A comes with a feature called Clear Voice, a technology that brings human voices — such as that of a commentator or the sound of an umpire yelling “strike” — to the forefront, allowing you to hear it above background elements like crowd noise and wind.

                  Other sound bar features, like 3D surround sound and Bass Extension, can enhance games as well. 3D surround sound simulates the audio portion of the sporting event as coming from all around you, in different horizontal directions and varying heights. And Bass Extension gives you the rumble of a stock car engine or the boom of a tackle on the gridiron.

                  AV Receiver Settings

                  If you’ve got the space and budget, an AV receiver (AVR) will expand your options with more sound modes and more possibilities for surround sound magic. For our example, we’ll use the Yamaha RX-V6A AV receiver, which offers 7.1 channels of surround sound and plenty of audio features to boot.

                  Sound system component.
                  Yamaha RX-V6A.

                  To start, select STRAIGHT Mode, which sends the original audio through to your speaker setup without alteration. Next, start cycling through the 17 different DSP (Digital Signal Processing) Programs using the Program buttons on your remote control. Here are five that are well-suited for sporting events:

                  Remote control with buttons circled.
                  RX-V6A remote control with program buttons circled.

                  SPORTS – This, the most obvious option, places a good balance of commentator voices at the center, with the live atmosphere spread amongst the speakers to create a spacious listening experience.

                  ALL-CHANNEL STEREO – This program mixes the source down to two channels, then outputs the sound to all connected speakers to create a larger sound field. It’s a viable alternative to the SPORTS program and will work well for almost any sporting event.

                  ACTION GAME – This option is suitable for racing and fighting action games, which makes it a good choice for sports like auto racing, boxing and UFC fights.

                  SPECTACLE – Meant the match the scale of cinematic blockbusters, this program delivers expansive sound to epic big-game moments in action-packed sports like football and hockey.

                  ADVENTURE – Similar to SPECTACLE, this program delivers a sound field that restrains reverberations and maintains good channel separation while putting an emphasis on the expansiveness of the onscreen action. Sports with large visual fields, such as golf and soccer, can benefit from this feature.

                  Of course, you should feel free to try any of the other modes and/or programs that your AVR might have to offer — you never know what might work for you! In addition, AV receivers usually offer plenty of extras as well. The RX-V6A, for example, comes equipped with Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™, two of the most powerful surround sound formats available. Some sports broadcasts have been known to offer these features; the 2020 U.S. Open® (PGA) was broadcast in Dolby Atmos for the first time ever!

                  Additional features to try out on the V6A while watching sporting events include Dialogue Lift to boost human voices and SILENT Cinema for listening on headphones. Higher-tier Yamaha AV receivers, such as the AVENTAGE RX-A8A, offer Surround:AI, where artificial intelligence is used to automatically optimize sound elements such as dialogue, background music, ambient sounds and sound effects, sending them to the right speaker at the right time.

                  With plenty of modes to try, and lots of events to try them out with, the possibilities of finding a great combination for watching live sports is endless, so be bold and experiment. As the great hockey legend Wayne Gretzky once said, “We miss one hundred percent of the shots we don’t take.” Game on!

                   

                  Check out these related articles:

                  How to Get Great Sound Watching Sports on TV

                  Top 10 Sports Movies with Great Audio

                  Anatomy of a Sound Bar

                  Surround Sound Systems Explained: Dolby®, AURO-3D® and More

                  Virtual Surround Sound and Yamaha Sound Bars

                  What’s a Receiver? Part 2: AV

                  Yamaha AVENTAGE: Setting the Reference Standard for AV Receivers

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha AV receivers.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha sound bars.

                  Case Study: Shifting a Program’s Culture

                  “Band is family” rings true for many marching arts participants across the country. But making the cultural paradigm a reality rather than an empty platitude could take years of strategizing.

                  When Jenn Bock joined the Highland High School band program in Gilbert, Arizona, as an assistant band director in 2017, she observed the current climate of the program to see how she could improve it.

                  As a top band in the state for the school’s entire 28-year history, “the program was very successful, but that also brings … a competitive aspect and some anxiety amongst the kids,” Bock says. “[I was able] to make a shift where the kids are really supportive of each other and encouraging as they work together.”

                  Building on Strengths

                  Highland High School directors Kevin Bennett and Jenn Bock Joining a 22-year leader — Kevin Bennett — at the helm, Bock did not want to rock the boat. “Any time you go into a program as a second director, you don’t get a clean slate to just change it to whatever you want,” Bock says. “Kevin definitely established an amazing culture. But you always want to make the program feel a little bit more like your own. … It was really important for me to identify what my vision was — what do I bring to the table in this already established, successful program?”

                  Bock says that she spent her first year at Highland learning and observing. “In your first year of any program, … you’re there to learn as much as you are to teach,” Bock says. “Just being new is enough change in a year. Observe what’s there, what can change and what needs to change. Sometimes what you want to change doesn’t necessarily need to be changed. Being aware of what is happening in the program is really important in the beginning”

                  Bock says that she and Bennett were on the same page pedagogically. She also noticed that Bennett had established a great band motto — “Performing with passion and excellence” — that was included on all marketing materials and documents. Getting students to live the motto became one of her goals.

                  Highland High School logo and motto“It was at the top of every single paper, but when I asked any student what the motto was, not a single [one] could have told me four years ago,” Bock says. “Now if you ask, they all can tell you what the motto is, and the students bring that to everything we do,” including during rehearsals, at performances or just walking onto the field.

                  Bock asked herself, “How are we embodying that motto, and how are we making it more than just a statement on a piece of paper and more the driving force of what we do? … Eventually it just became: This is who we are.”

                  Developing Servant Leaders

                  Bock created a “servant leadership model” from the top down. The first change was simple yet impactful. To select student leaders, the staff added in-person interviews to the process. During those interviews, Bock could ask prospective leaders their viewpoints about the band philosophies.

                  Highland High School equipment crewThen, Bock created a leadership training program using developed techniques from authors and well-known music education advocates, Dr. Tim Lautzenheiser and Scott Lang. “[Students now] understand that in their roles, they’re not higher than anyone. They’re here to help everyone,” Bock says. “And that’s a huge culture shift … in a leadership position.”

                  Overall, as student leaders began to change their beliefs and behaviors, they also had similar discussions with their sections. “When ideas and comments come from and through the student leaders, I think that’s where the shift is most powerful.”

                  In 2018, Bock expanded the leadership team beyond drum majors and section leaders in the form of various crews. The list is extensive: equipment crew, field crew, truck-loading crew, stage crew, media crew, facility crew, uniform crew, spirit crew, party and event crew, librarian crew and recruitment crew. “The students are taking the responsibility and the onus of the program on themselves,” she explains.

                  In fact, even non-marching members have crews, such as the stage crew for concert setups, that they can join. “It was important to me for the non-marching band kids to feel like they’re just [as important] a part of the Highland band program as the marching band kids,” Bock says.

                  Highland High School recrujitment crewWith 250 students in a band program comprising four concert bands, four jazz bands, two woodwind choirs, a marching band (with about half of the students), two winter guards and a concert percussion ensemble, Bock believes that there are hands-on roles for at least 100 students.

                  “When I got to Highland, the two drum majors did everything,” Bock says. “Those two students were phenomenal, but they were overwhelmed and stressed. Everything fell on their shoulders in a program of [more than] 200. We should have at least 100 kids doing all the little different aspects required for our program.”

                  While the jobs may seem more typical for parent volunteers, Bock chooses to let students handle them for various reasons. From a practical standpoint, less parents were involved in the program, and more tasks fell on the directors. In addition, crew positions gave more students ownership in the program’s success. And finally, the jobs helped students discover new skillsets and passions. “Now they’re recruiting for their own crews, and they’re telling me what to do, which is great,” Bock says.

                  Creating a Feedback Loop

                  While making these changes in the past four years, Bock has asked for student feedback informally through casual conversations and formally through end-of-semester surveys. “I have a lot of conversations with the kids,” she explains. “I often ask them their opinions [because] it’s their program. I’ve always felt that the band program belongs to the students, and the director is just the person chosen to serve and lead that program.”

                  Highland High School field crewWhen students resist change, Bock is comfortable with letting them stick to the status quo. For example, Bock had considered assigning low brass instruments to students for greater efficiency, not realizing that they felt a special tradition with picking out their own, almost like a “Harry Potter” wand-selection moment, she says.

                  Bock has also surveyed parents. At the end of the 2019 season, Bock gave separate surveys to marching band students and parents. She sprinkled in questions about potential changes and whether the band would like to be more or less competitive. “Understanding what the community wants and needs from the band program and then meshing that with what you have as your vision is really important,” she says.

                  As a direct result of the surveys, the Highland band accepted an opportunity to represent the state of Arizona at the Pearl Harbor Memorial Parade in Hawaii on Dec. 7, 2021, which marks the 80th anniversary of the bombing of Pearl Harbor. “One of the changes based on the survey is to be a little more competitive,” Bock says. “Not that we weren’t competitive, but they wanted to see what more we could do. They wanted to see us challenge and push [the students] more.”

                  The band previously participated in the Tournament of Roses Parade in 2001 and the Macy’s Thanksgiving Day Parade  in 2004. “A trip to Hawaii is a great way to get people excited,” Bock says. “It’s been a long time since we’ve done big trips and big parades like this. … Our kids are very humbled by the opportunity for that experience. You can start to see the buzz happening.”

                  members of the various crews at the end of the yearBock took over as head marching band director in 2020, and for the future, she hopes to build on the excitement of the Hawaii trip to get more students and parents involved in the program, perhaps by hosting a competition.

                  “I think the most important thing [for a new director] is to be patient in shifting the vision,” Bock says. “Everyone has all these grand ideas when they get to a new program, and they want to immediately make changes. What has worked really well for me was to be patient with that shift. Just do a little bit every year. Eventually, in three or four years, you have a new culture … and nobody even noticed the shift because it happened so gradually.”

                  Portal to Another World: A Role-Playing Game Enhances Beginning Violin Lessons

                  There is nothing quite like creating a role-playing game (RPG) for a multi-modal elementary violin classroom. I did it and saw dramatic improvements in student engagement and musical skills, and you can, too.

                  First, a little background. During the 2020-2021 school year, teaching violin to every early childhood and elementary school student at Harrisburg Academy required a bit of fantastical thinking. COVID health and safety protocols included masks, social distancing, daily health checks, student learning “pods” and offering synchronous online instruction five days a week. These measures kept students safe, but they upended the way curriculum was delivered and created an environment where teacher innovation became a necessity rather than a luxury.

                  Harrisburg Academy had instituted weekly group violin lessons for all students in 2019-2020. This was a boon to the strings program, but it came with a significant risk. At a tuition-based institution, if a program does not reveal its value to the education of the students, it (and potentially an entire position) can be quickly adjusted or removed. As a pragmatic teacher leading 23 classes per week, I had no expectations of turning my hockey-player 4th graders into committed violin students. However, I did need to find an educational solution that was deliverable, measurable, scalable and sustainable for me and those students who wished they could be somewhere else — anywhere else — than beginning violin.

                  An Idea is Planted

                  Within weeks of the start of school, my elementary school students were exhibiting behavior consistent with the toughest months of the year. Having grown comfortable with the new systems, and bored of their fixed peer group, students were testing any expectation and limit, and disengaging from the classroom experience. I needed a solution to energize and engage my classes.

                  One day, a middle school student enthusiastically told me about the  Dungeons and Dragons club run by another teacher. I decided to follow his lead and do some research on RPGs. Unlike the video games of my childhood, RPGs are not driven by a specific goal. Instead, players are dropped into a world and must explore that world, engage with other players and determine their own path through the game.

                  In Dungeons and Dragons, these individual players must collaborate to accomplish tasks, solve puzzles, explore realms, battle foes and advance the story. Unlike traditional games, no one “wins” or “loses” in an RPG.  Instead, community, communication and collective creativity become primary effects of the game play — all things that overlap with an effective classroom environment.

                  Traditional RPG systems have three fundamental components: describe, decide and roll. To begin, the description is given by the gamemaster (GM), and the players collaborate to decide their action. The action is controlled by the roll of a dice and the application of a “character sheet” that identifies strengths and weaknesses of each character. The effectiveness of the action is evaluated by the GM, and play continues. To use an RPG in the classroom, I replaced the action of rolling and analyzing data with actionable statements from my violin curriculum.

                  Building the RPG Framework

                  Harrisburg Academy is an International Baccalaureate (IB) school, which means that the curriculum is aligned with a set of traits we value in education called the “learner profile.” To replace rolling dice with actionable items, I converted these learner profile traits into conditional statements. For example, the value statement: “We nurture our curiosity, developing skills for inquiry and research” becomes “If something is learned, then new worlds are revealed.” In the conditional form, that statement becomes a tool to signify when to reveal a secret, a hidden world or possibly a plot twist.

                  By applying the same principle to all 10 of the IB learner profile traits, I created an action system that was immediately aligned with my existing curriculum and allowed the RPG system to serve the curricular needs of my classroom while also creating a positive environment.

                  It took a few weeks to develop the “wow” factor of this RPG before introducing it to the elementary school. I named my system “Novice to Ninja” and introduced it to 1st through 4th grade students in the first week of October 2020. Although I anticipated that the students would enjoy the new concept, I did not anticipate just how significant of a change would take place.

                  In the very first lesson, student collaboration locked into a supportive pattern — students unified around their goal and were eager to hear each other’s ideas and riff off of one another. Virtual students, who were participating from their homes, were able to tangibly affect change in the physical classroom through their suggestions. Both virtual and in-person students were able to demonstrate the skill at hand and banter effectively with their peers. Time has not diminished the enthusiasm nor the purpose for the students. As every lesson ends with a cliffhanger, students must apply and practice their scales and repertoire effectively outside of class in case that skill might be necessary to solve the puzzle the following week.

                  close up of student holding dragon on Novice to Ninja RPG set Using an RPG to deliver my violin content and curriculum through a world of wizards and mystery was just the escape that my students and I needed. As RPGs are built from the perspective of the GM, it’s easy to manage a classroom while delivering the story and teaching the lesson. Because the RPG community is so welcoming, I found an incredible wealth of resources that helped a GM novice like me build a world my students connect with and allow me to deliver my curriculum effectively. It is easy to do, and the results are among the most rewarding I’ve experienced in my teaching career.

                  The Action System and the Fantasy World

                  The key to my successful gaming system was making the “action” about music creation. I developed conditional statements that were metrics for evaluating our performance as a group. After ransacking my curriculum maps, I converted my rubrics into statements like: “If we are unified, then our power grows.”

                  Suddenly, the success of the task students attempted, such as lulling a monster to sleep, could instantly be evaluated. Students were not handed a list of all the statements to choose from and apply. Instead, I scaffolded my delivery of them at appropriate times.

                  Once an action system is planned out, finding the premise for the entire world is critical. This is the essential question, or governing statement, that will drive the entire world. Again, I used my existing curriculum to arrive at the premise: “Violin is our tool, and music has power.” 

                  From this point, I converted the existing units of my curriculum into challenges and tasks. I made skills and repertoire solutions to puzzles and challenges. For example, “What is a scale, and how does it function?” became the premise for climbing the treacherous steps of a mountain and breaking the enchantment of a hidden castle. (Nothing breaks the spell of music better than a technical exercise.)

                  Learning to read notation was the key to deciphering a wizard’s secret code. And analyzing the form of their song correctly could put the sections of a tower in order. By the end of the first unit, I had a story where we escaped a shipwreck, scaled a rocky cliff, met a wizard and began a quest using music and technique. I just needed a world for this adventure.

                  Vitula map from Novice to Ninja RPGI named the world Vitula, which is the medieval Latin name for the group of instruments that ultimately became the violin family. In building the framework for Vitula, I needed a fantasy realm that allowed me to be spontaneous, creative and flexible. I love manipulatives and designing sets for theater, so I constructed a world that required diorama components to describe it. By incorporating digital elements, I connected the experience of the classroom with our online students to illustrate that they are integral in our community.

                  My violin program extends for seven years — from preschool through 5th grade, so I built an elaborate world that would engage students long-term. Because performance expectations for my students change from year to year, I chose not to specify performances and repertoire as requirements to advance the action. The overarching story incorporates themes, ideas and characters that are easily adjusted to the ever-changing curriculum demands of a modern school system.

                  screen shot of description of character from Novice to Ninja RPGThe first two years (known as “books”) of the story are completed. Book 1, entitled “Which Side Are You On?,” introduces the conflicts, factions and varying perspectives of individuals within Vitula. Students interact with fictionalized versions of musical figures and locations, including Val di Fieme, Ole Bull, Il Canone and the wizard Orlandini (named after an Italian luthier).

                  In Book 2, entitled “Becoming,” the story continues as students engage with professors of a conservatory system apparently in its final gasps. Interacting and learning from fictionalized figures, such as Hildegard von Bingen, Josquin des Prez and Barbara Strozzi, students discover more than the scientific roots of music. They find a secret lurking just beyond the walls of the school — a secret that has the power to change everything.

                  Components of an Immersive World

                  In my RPG classroom, the physical objects and description of the “Novice to Ninja” story defined the expectations and plans for the class, putting emphasis on the components that create the immersive experience. These are the key components I have found to make a significant contribution to the classroom experience.

                  Every world needs a map, and typically maps that are global, regional and local. A quick internet search for “map-making software” opened up a Pandora’s box of possibilities and instructional videos. By starting with a video that introduced the top free software programs, I was able to identify precisely what I needed.

                  Every world needs multi-faceted characters. Instead of intricately crafting imaginary peoples and cultures, I elected to use fantasy tropes that are already available. With a quick internet search, I found a trove of stories, histories, factions, classes and possible characters that could populate my world. I decided to select multiple factions, monsters and possible races that could screen shot of Novice to Ninja codex credibly populate my world. I did not pick specific characters that already existed because I wanted the freedom to develop my own.

                  Every world needs documentation. Whether music manuscripts, spells or guides, the documents describe the fantasy world’s time and place. Again, I incorporated my existing worksheets and standard repertoire, but inserted artwork, map detail and quotations from class that provided specific reference points to my fantasy world.

                  Remarkable Reception and Results

                  The outcomes in my classroom have been dramatic. Discovery and agency have embedded themselves in the way students approach technique. Their skills have significantly improved as the skills are not their goal. Finally, the drive for excellence has a framework other than personal expression and peer competition.

                  Students engage in the curriculum because they are engaged in the story, the process and the community. Synthesizing information and inferring from learned skills are crucial to solving puzzles that seem open-ended in the RPG. Collaboration has increased because the community’s success in each puzzle requires the creativity of many minds. Moments of reflection have also grown into a paradigm of reflection. The students are locked into the story and discuss solutions, what-if scenarios and dream about what secret will be unlocked.

                  close up of Novice to Ninja RPG set When all of this is achieved, the true power of the RPG is unleashed. By using an RPG in the classroom, I share about our real world and teach music in a way that builds wonder, respect and joy as well as increases skill level. It feels great to finally hear a beginning violinist plead, “Mr. Gamon, will you please teach me to play a scale?”

                  As a specialist in a pre-K-12th grade learning environment, utilizing an RPG has allowed me to share out into the homeroom and academic courses. Instead of working to incorporate academic units into my music curriculum, I am able to show how my tasks and assessments align with the core classroom units and to share assessment results and strategies.

                  Students build their own notebooks (entitled “A Hero’s Journey”) on their voyage of discovery, unaware that what they are carrying is a portfolio of their assessments and data on their growth as musicians and individuals. As the skills that are being taught are embedded in an adventure, students have been able to discuss how music skills impact the game play. This interaction allows them to draw parallels between this fantasy world, their own and build community.

                  For me, the magic is not in the fantasy world we created, but what is occurring in the classroom. As it turns out, when you open a portal to another world for your students, everything is possible.

                  A version of this article appeared in PMEA News, the publication of the Pennsylvania Music Educators Association. Reprinted with author’s permission.

                  Making the Switch: Flute to French Horn

                  Unlike woodwinds and trumpets, French horns and other medium to low brass instruments are not popular with middle school and high school band members.

                  The reasons so many students choose upper-range instruments seem to stay the same throughout the years. Students choose flute because their mom played it, or they want to sound like Ian Anderson of Jethro Tull in “Aqualung.” Saxophonists can’t wait to learn George Michael’s “Careless Whisper,” and the trumpet players plan to join that local ska band when they get older. Before you know it, you have a flute section of 13 and a horn section of one.

                  You can never have too many enthusiastic band students, but all too often, band directors end up with more flutes, saxes and trumpets than they can balance out with mids and lows. I’m here to offer an unconventional solution: Choose your horn players from your pool of flutists.

                  THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

                  Why It Works

                  Flute to French horn may sound like an odd switch. I know many directors who have considered moving a trumpet player to play or double on horn. However, this decision has a disadvantage: Trumpet embouchure requires a different proportion of top to bottom lip than horn does.

                  It’s easy to play the French horn with a trumpet embouchure … until the high range and tone begin to suffer. These students wear out their embouchures and can’t figure out why their instrument no longer sounds right.

                  someone playing the flute Switching flutes to French horns, on the other hand, works quite well. Here’s why:

                  • the pitch of flutes is easy to manipulate
                  • the flute embouchure is surprisingly similar to that of the French horn
                  • moving flutes to horns balances the pyramid both ways

                  The flute is a very bendy instrument. By that I mean that the pitch of the flute can change very easily. Even the slightest adjustment of corners or embouchure size can move the tuning up a note or down by a quarter tone. Because of this, flutists tend to develop a good sense of relative pitch and become very skilled at audiation, which makes them prime candidates for horn. Denis Bourikov does an excellent job of teaching purposeful note bending on flute in this video.

                  Flute and horn embouchures don’t look similar, but they feel similar. Both instruments require the players to blow down rather than straight across. Also, flutists and horn players use the corners of their embouchures to control their pitch.

                  Lastly, moving flutes to the horn section is practical. You’ll have one less high voice and one more mid-range. If you can convince two or three flutes to switch to French horn, you will end up with more balance in your ensemble.

                  Choosing Horn Candidates

                  One of the best times to find good horn candidates amongst your flutists is when you assign playing tests. Scope out the flutists who have:

                  • accurate pitch
                  • a strong upper register
                  • a visible condensation triangle
                  • small- to medium-sized lips
                  • a good attitude about constructive criticism and a drive to be challenged

                  As mentioned earlier, flutes are very bendy instruments. Choose students who have accurate pitch in both their high and low ranges, and the high range should be full and open. This means that the corners of their embouchures are already very strong, which will make the switch faster and easier.

                  Another way to check if a flutist has a high-quality embouchure is to look for the condensation triangle. Here’s how: Walk down the flute section and closely observe the side of the lip plate that is facing you. You will see a small area of condensation from where the student is blowing. The condensation might look spread out on the lip plate or sharply focused into a triangle. The latter is ideal. The shape of the condensation on a mouthpiece will visually tell you how focused or unfocused their sound is.

                  While any student can learn to play any instrument, there are certain advantages to choosing an instrument that is well-suited to your lips. For example, it’s more difficult for a person with thin lips to play the tuba and a person with very full lips to play the horn. That being said, the most important point on this list is the last one. As long as your student is optimistic and driven, they can successfully switch instruments.

                  Making the Big Switch

                  someone playing French horn Before you have flute students play horn in band, allow them to take a loaner home and try it out for a week or two. This will prevent them from feeling lost in the middle of a rehearsal. When the time comes, be direct with your class and mention the switch during announcements. This will keep classroom management in check and prevent any whisperings of “Why is Susan on the horn now?!”

                  If you are not a horn player, be sure to provide some references to local private teachers. A short horn sectional or a handful of private lessons can go a long way.

                  Early fall is the perfect time to invite your students to try out a new instrument. The pressure of band festivals and the winter concerts are far enough away so your students can enjoy experimenting.

                  Troubleshooting

                  While many flutists can make the switch to French horn seamlessly, this change of instrumentation is not without its drawbacks. Here are a few things to watch for:

                  • soft fingers
                  • fingering inaccuracy
                  • muting technique
                  • air pressure problems

                  Because your player just came from a Boehm system, they are more likely to accidentally half-valve than a student who plays trumpet. The flute requires very little pressure, but the valves on a French horn require a lot more, comparatively speaking. Also, with the French horn, the amount of time a player needs to anticipate a fingering is going to be a fair bit longer.

                  Because flutes are such malleable instruments when it comes to tuning, players who have switched to French horn may use their embouchure to “cheat” their horn into playing the correct note while using an incorrect fingering. While the note may sound right, wrong fingerings can cause problems down the road, especially when it comes to more advanced repertoire and playing scales.

                  Other things to watch for: poor right-hand muting technique and weak air pressure. Remember, muting and back pressure are two aspects that are foreign to your horn newbie.

                  Try It!

                  The struggle to perfect the pyramid of sound inside of your ensemble can seem like an endless challenge. By switching a few flutists to your horn section can make your life as a band director just a little bit easier! Why not give it a try?

                  Spotlight on The URBAN Guitar by Yamaha

                  Keith Urban laughs as he remembers his first guitar, a gift from his parents when he was just six years old. “It had these strings that sat crazy high up,” he says. “Way too high. I had to press down so hard, I could barely make a sound.”

                  Eager to spare others such a painful introduction to the instrument and share his love of playing guitar, the four-time GRAMMY® Award winner has joined forces with Yamaha to create a one-of-a-kind experience: URBAN Guitar by Yamaha, which includes a finely crafted guitar, essential accessories and an interactive lesson app, all of which were designed with the beginner guitarist in mind.

                  The Guitar

                  Keith Urban playing an acoustic guitar.
                  Keith Urban playing the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha.

                  The URBAN Guitar by Yamaha features a concert cutaway body and a thin neck that is shorter in scale than a standard acoustic guitar, providing lower string tension for ease of playing.

                  “I think acoustic guitar is a great way to start learning,” Urban says, “because you can play it anywhere, plus it’s super-light. But a lot of people struggle to get their hands around the neck — I know I did when I first started playing. So the neck on the URBAN Guitar is very slim from front to back, and the strings are very close to the fretboard, so you don’t need to press very hard to make a sound. All the things I struggled with on my first guitar have been taken into account with this design. That’s why this is such a perfect beginner guitar.”

                  Closeup of Keith Urban's tattooed arm and hand holding the guitar by the neck.
                  The URBAN Guitar strings are close to the fretboard, making it easier to play.

                  The URBAN Guitar by Yamaha sports a beautiful spruce top with a tobacco brown sunburst finish, a natural wood matte neck and rear body finish, an Indian rosewood bridge and a tortoise-shell pickguard. It even comes with a custom URBAN Guitar strap and picks.

                  The App

                  Icon for the URBAN app.

                  The URBAN Guitar by Yamaha comes with a robust lesson app that provides step-by-step instruction curated by Keith, alongside JUNO, a professional guitarist and teaching partner. Together they offer inspiration and encouragement, along with the URBAN Guitar app’s cutting-edge features that keep players engaged and looking forward to their next lesson. Users can learn up to 14 songs, including modern hits (i.e., “All of Me” made famous by John Legend), timeless classics (i.e., “Ain’t No Sunshine” made famous by Bill Withers), and Keith’s hits (i.e., “Long Hot Summer” and “One Too Many”). The entire app is unlocked with the purchase of an URBAN Guitar.

                  Keith Urban jamming with JUNO.
                  Keith and JUNO.

                  Beginning guitarists can dive right into learning chords and playing their favorite songs, with the app providing real-time feedback on fingering, accuracy and timing; there’s also an interactive strumming trainer for mastering strumming and rhythm patterns.

                  Breakthrough Moments

                  “I don’t remember the first song I ever learned,” says Urban, “but I remember the feeling of making that first chord.

                  “There’s this thing about learning guitar, when you have that breakthrough ‘a-ha’ moment,” he explains. “Maybe it’s just putting the finger positions together to make that first chord. The next breakthrough moment comes when you’re able to put two chords together and go back and forth between them. That’s when you really feel like you’re gaining traction, you’re getting the hang of it. That’s when you begin to bond with the guitar.”

                  View of Keith Urban playing an acoustic guitar.
                  The beautiful tobacco brown sunburst finish comes standard on every URBAN Guitar by Yamaha.

                  Communicating Through Your Guitar

                  “Learning to play an instrument is like learning a language,” Keith adds. “You meet somebody else that plays, and suddenly they’re speaking the exact same language that you speak, so you have something in common, this shared way of communicating.”

                  “There are so many people who don’t have a way to communicate certain things, certain feelings. For me, early on, the guitar was this voice I could say things with that I couldn’t say verbally because I was too shy; I was a bit insular. But the guitar and me, the two of us together, we became friends — really good, tight, solid friends. It went everywhere with me, we were together all the time, and as I learned how to play it, my life became bigger and more colorful, plus I felt more confidence, which was a big breakthrough for me.”

                  Perhaps it’s time to begin your journey. Check out the URBAN Guitar by Yamaha.

                  Get Moving

                  They say you don’t find books — books find you.

                  I often get weary of all the things “they” say. I mean, who are they anyway? But Lillian Boxfish Takes a Walk, a novel by Kathleen Rooney, had to have found me. The book speaks of how our synapses come alive when we move around within urban spaces (New York City in this case) — and, without realizing how suited it was at the time, a friend recommended it during a week I spent in the Big Apple walking about and coming alive myself.

                  Who knows? Maybe “they” are right after all.

                  In the story, the main character (Lillian) makes colorful observations as she strolls the neighborhood she lives in. I do the same when I’m staying in New York, taking note, for example, of how a pizza place can’t be deemed outstanding unless you can smell it from a block away. Over the years I’ve become one those ladies who can’t live without an oversized shopping cart — the kind I swore you’d never ever catch me pushing. But there I was pushing it through the city streets, which lead me to a budding lyric about how we change our attitudes over time — a tasty theme that often comes up for me when I notice how differently I navigate the world than I used to.

                  Empty highway leading into a sunset.

                  In my blog posting Long May You Run, I touched on how a daily jogging routine releases creative endorphins. But response to stimuli is a result of any form of body-in-motion — biking, rowing, even watching something else move: a swimmer in a lap pool, birds flying overhead, big ol’ jet airliners heading somewhere, rain pouring down. For me, even if the view is of a spectacular sunset, it’s the headlights on the highway that are more likely to fire up my brain.

                  Lillian’s character, a poet, speaks of connecting to the pavement in order to problem-solve. She discovers new rhythms and fresh rhymes in the energy of her pace. But she also writes about how stillness actually blocks her in that her least desirable place from which to write is where there are no distractions. Without noise and chatter, she is destined for an empty page.

                  I get it. A turn-off-the world / do not disturb mindset means no catalysts. No triggers. No outside seeping its way in.

                  Some songwriters may think this theory (though I would argue it’s more than a theory) applies only to accessing lyrics. That’s been my experience, but that may be because my song babies usually start with words. Other songwriters receive their “incoming” in musical form. Melody is language, after all.

                  Often when I feel there’s something I want to express but can’t put my finger on it, I find myself changing my orientation and moving toward action, even if it’s just a visit to the mall. My unconscious knows where to go in order to serve my creativity.

                  Creativity is not stagnant. It is energy, and energy is alive. How dull it would be if it weren’t!

                  In NYC it’s always about the walk. The sight of young lovers kissing on a stoop prompts me to ponder, “How long have they known each other? Maybe they just met. How delicious is that first kiss?” And voila … away we go.

                  Of course, it’s possible to access our feelings and put them into words when we’re just chillin’. If those feelings are powerful enough, or our memories of them stay with us long enough, songs can flourish in an immobile state.

                  That said, there are certain songs I have no doubt were conceived on the spot. For example, no one can convince me that Christopher Cross’ “Sailing” didn’t come to him while at the helm of a boat, after which he probably took the idea back to his laboratory to flesh it out. He simply could not have captured the same authentic essence if he were lying in bed facing the ceiling. Similarly, as I was flying back home to Los Angeles looking out the window from 30,000 feet, I had the thought that Joni Mitchell must have had a similar view when the analogy of clouds to angel hair and ice cream castles occurred to her.

                  I think it’s safe to say that some of the most poignant experiential songs were sparked in the immediacy and with the clarity of the moment with which they coincided — when life-in-motion was encircling and captivating the author. I’ve looked at songwriting from both sides now and I think it’s a pretty safe bet.

                   

                  Check out Shelly’s other postings.

                  Case Study: The Depth and Breadth of Music-Making at Orange Grove Elementary

                  Performing everything from Tchaikovsky to Christina Perri, students at Orange Grove Elementary School in Anaheim, California, have a variety of opportunities to stretch their musical skills.

                  They use a diverse set of instruments, starting with vocals and then progressing to hand drums, ukulele and even melodicas before hitting an extensive rotation of traditional band parts. In addition to school concerts, various grades have made high-profile public appearances, ranging from the National Association of Music Merchants (NAMM) Show to the city’s Dias De La Muertos (Day of the Dead) festival.

                  With the expectation of teaching the same students for seven or eight years from transitional kindergarten (pre-K) to 6th grade, EJ Villanueva knows that he must provide unique experiences that go beyond traditional elementary music.

                  “Because I have the ability to teach every single student every single year throughout their entire journey, I use that as an opportunity to explore different facets of music,” Villanueva says. “That can range from learning how to sing, dance and respond to music, … [to] learning how to compose, beatbox, rap, play in a rock or pop band, … everything. I’m ultimately a believer in creating lifelong music lovers and appreciators.”

                  The depth and breadth of Orange Grove’s music program seems even more phenomenal since Villanueva only started teaching there in 2018, the school has a 92% low-income population and the entire Anaheim Elementary School District had been silent — with no music classes — for approximately 20 years, shortly before Villanueva’s arrival.

                  “The music program in our district is very young,” Villanueva says. “Before that, the Anaheim Elementary School District was ‘music dry.’ Right now, we’re on the other side of the pendulum.”

                  For his efforts to strengthen Orange Grove’s music program, Villanueva has been named as a quarterfinalist for the 2022 Music Educator Award, presented by the Recording Academy and GRAMMY Museum.

                  Musical Revival

                  EJ Villanueva helping a band student Villanueva, who graduated with dual bachelor’s degrees in music education and jazz studies from California State University, Long Beach in 2016, and a master’s degree in arts and cultural management from the University of Denver in 2021, began his teaching career working with 4th through 6th graders in the after-school music program at Franklin Elementary School in the same school district.

                  At the time, many of the 24 Anaheim elementary schools had after-school music, originally through a partnership with the Pacific Symphony, and slightly more than half taught music during the school day. Music had only started to trickle back into the district in 2014. “[In 2018], there was a big hiring frenzy … and the beginnings of the full-on music program that was imagined [for the district],” Villanueva says.

                  In order to grow the program, the school district as a whole has received various grants and donations from the NAMM Foundation, The Disneyland Resort, Save The Music Foundation, Little Kids Rock and Yamaha Corporation of America. According to Villanueva, these partnerships were in large part due to the efforts of the Anaheim Creativity Council, which was formed in 2015.

                  While Villanueva wasn’t the first music teacher during the revival at Orange Grove, he took the program to another level by providing hands-on engagement. “It’s all about participation [and] engagement. … If the kids are not enjoying it, then they are not going to be as open to the learning process. You’ve got to reel them in and drop little nuggets of knowledge here and there,” he says.

                  Expansion and Progression

                  Villanueva melodicas 8411rVillanueva teaches all 600 students at Orange Grove. Each grade is divided into several classes that meet for 30 minutes per week for TK and 1st grade, 45 minutes for 2nd through 4th grades, and 90 minutes for 5th and 6th grades. During the 2020-2021 academic year when the entire school was virtual until April, he met with 6th graders twice per week.

                  The youngest students start by singing, dancing and doing hand percussion. They learn fundamentals such as rhythm and solfege, as well as polar opposites like fast and slow, soft and loud. In 1st and 2nd grades, Villanueva introduces ukulele, piano, drum set and melodica. At first, Villanueva teaches through audiation using call-and-response methods. He prioritizes students playing instruments through guided notes and labels before integrating skills in reading music as they grow and develop. In 3rd grade, students learn recorder, and in 4th grade, he focuses on modern band and some guitar.

                  EJ Villanueva showing the recorder to 3rd graders Villanueva specifically wanted melodicas, a combination wind instrument and keyboard, for younger grades. “I got the idea of incorporating melodicas after seeing some videos of children in Japan,” he says. “Plus, it’s louder than electronic keyboards, so for performance purposes, it’s great to project. It’s also a good segue into 5th grade and 6th grade when students have to learn to use their air. Not only are they developing keyboard skills, but they’re also learning breathing skills.”

                  Villanueva received funding for melodicas and keyboards through DonorsChoose, Anaheim Elementary Education Association and Little Kids Rock. After seeing his success, teachers at two other schools in the district also have melodicas through other donations.

                  “The teachers [in the district] have a lot of independence,” Villanueva says. “But we do have the universal agreement that music should be accessible to everyone.”

                  As part of the music progression, students in 5th grade engage in the exploratory wheel and  learn voice/tech, violin, ukulele, guitar, bucket drums and piano in six-week increments. These courses were chosen for the 2021-2022 school year because they are COVID safe. Prior to the pandemic, students learned traditional band instruments. The district rotates the instruments through the various schools.

                  By 6th grade, students are split into three bands of about 27 each, depending on their classroom assignments, and everyone focuses on a primary instrument. While the school doesn’t have orchestra or choir, Villanueva does incorporate singing in the ensembles.

                  Class Act and Fun Trips

                  All grades perform in the all-school winter and spring concerts with field trip opportunities sprinkled in.

                  EJ Villanueva with elementary school band In past years, Orange Grove students participated in the Class Act program through Pacific Symphony, which introduces elementary students to symphonic music. The program focuses on one composer each year — Pyotr Ilyich Tchaikovsky was studied in 2018-2019 and John Williams in 2019-2020. The symphony also assigns a professional musician to work with the students. “After they get their lessons from the professional musician, it’s up to each grade level to come up with some sort of demonstration of their knowledge,” Villanueva says. “That could range from a performance or a dance [to a presentation]. We generally make it a performance demonstration.”

                  Students showcase what they learned at an assembly, and 2nd through 6th graders end the unit by taking a field trip to Segerstrom Center for the Arts to hear the symphony.

                  “In my first year of teaching, I had no idea where each student was [musically],” Villanueva says. “In the beginning, we would start off with learning ‘Hot Cross Buns.’ But then as I became comfortable in my position, I started to be a little more adventurous. For example, we studied Tchaikovsky, so I had my 3rd graders at the time play the ‘Sleeping Beauty Waltz’ on recorder, melodica and piano. That was a little bit ambitious, but I’m glad that we did it. … Given enough effort and dedication, [even] these 3rd graders can pull off something that would typically be reserved for a middle school or a high school student.”

                  The young musicians also perform in community events — some that have become traditions while others vary every year. Villanueva has taken kindergarteners to perform for Dias De La Muertos, 2nd graders to participate in The NAMM Show and 6th graders to the Meet on Beach event in Buena Park.

                  Villanueva had planned to take 5th graders to a country-western event that didn’t end up occurring. The 6th graders also march in the annual city Halloween and Martin Luther King Jr. parades, and teachers can send a variety of groups to the district’s Music, Art and Creativity Festival.

                  “There are a couple of districtwide things, but for the most part, it’s up to each individual teacher to decide whether they want to do the field trip,” Villanueva says.

                  Student Voice and Choice

                  EJ Villanueva clapping with his young elementary school students Villanueva brings more and more new ideas to his classes because he is constantly learning through his recent master’s program as well as during freelance gigs, professional development classes such as Little Kids Rock educational events, and side work with the Dragon Kim Foundation.

                  “Because I have a lot of background with modern band …, we do a lot of popular music [like] Bruno Mars,” says Villanueva, who writes the elementary arrangements himself. “That’s one of the big things that I love about teaching elementary — it’s also a way for me to learn things for myself. I didn’t grow up deeply into hip hop until I was much older. … That’s been a fun journey teaching kids one thing and being able to apply that in my professional life as a musician.”

                  Like many other music educators, Villanueva says that he struggled with finding a rhythm for engaging students in a virtual setting during the pandemic. He decided to use the opportunity to teach musical composition — how to create drumbeats, melodies and lyrics. He also dove into societal issues, including how African and Mexican cultures influence the music world today.

                  At the final concert each year, Villanueva lets students in each grade pitch their ideas for the songs to perform. “I believe in students’ choice toward the end of the school year,” he says. “I set some ground rules. It has to be achievable, no curse words and no suggestive themes.”

                  In 2019, 6th graders played “Thousand Years” by Christina Perri. In the future, Villanueva says that he would like to incorporate more guitar and more songwriting in the upper grades as well as have the entire school perform a song together.

                  Overall, Villanueva helps students form a connection to the music. “I make sure that things that are performed are culturally relevant and achievable,” he says.

                  Case Study: Starting the Youth Chorus of Central Texas

                  The Youth Chorus of Central Texas (YCCT) serves singers in grades 3 through 12 who do not have access to sequential musical instruction in their educational environment or who seek additional experiences not afforded them otherwise.

                  Although membership is through audition, no qualified singer is denied admission due to financial circumstances. Tuition is kept intentionally low, and more than 50% of the funding for YCCT members comes from community grants and donations.

                  The chorus typically has 60-70 singers in two  choirs. Our students come from 28 schools in 13 ZIP codes, which gives life to our motto: “Bridging our commUNITY through song!”

                  Due to the pandemic, the chorus suspended operations from March 2020 until August 2021, taking a “fermata season.” However, the chorus just reopened in September 2021 with 44 singers in two choirs — a healthy number in light of recent events. We have color-coded masks for our parts groups, so it’s easy to identify who is singing which part.

                  Let’s Start at the Very Beginning — Our Background

                  From its onset in 2013, YCCT had some very fortunate backing. Lynne Gackle and I co-founded the chorus. Together, we have a combined 70+ years of experience in choral music-making and complimentary skills. Before becoming the director of choral activities at Baylor University, Gackle was the founding director of the Gulf Coast Youth Choirs (GCYC), a highly renowned organization in Tampa, Florida. I am a Waco native with significant local ties.

                  We both had the heart and desire to address the musically underserved singers of central Texas. By using the GCYC organizational materials as an example and benefiting from its successful business model, YCCT was well on its way to realizing the dream. There was no reason to reinvent the wheel; thoughtful tweaking was all that was needed to write our bylaws and our nonprofit 501c3 application.

                  Giselle Vento Banda, a 2021 Yamaha “40 Under 40” music educator, serves as co-director of YCCT. She is responsible for conducting, selecting music, teaching choreography, as well as other musical and administrative activities.

                  “The Youth Chorus of Central Texas enriches our community, singers, staff, and interns,” she says. “My early involvement with the chorus played a major role in my comfort and preparation in the classroom. As a new school year arises, I believe growth will come for both the singers and myself.”

                  YCCT students and staff on stage To help with YCCT’s launch, we selected an eclectic board of directors with a passion for children’s singing. Current board members include local public-school music teachers, Baylor music education faculty members, parents, choral musicians and community advocates. We also employ a business manager (CPA) and have an attorney who volunteers advice when called upon.

                  YCCT enjoys a unique partnership with Baylor’s choral music education students. Each semester, three to six interns work with the chorus. They gain valuable field experience, and the choristers enjoy more individual attention than the two directors can provide. We often hire a Baylor pianists and other instrumentalists to accompany the choir.

                  In searching for rehearsal space, YCCT opts for locations that are centrally located and not automatically associated with a dominant institution in the city. The neighborhood needs to be welcoming and accessible to all. We may rehearse or perform in a church or school, but it is understood that we are a community chorus and an independent nonprofit organization.

                  Upon the initial launch of the chorus, we announced our intentions via a website and a feature article in Waco Today, the monthly magazine of the Waco Tribune-Herald. We mailed packets of brochures to school music teachers and church choir directors and placed ads in programs for local symphony concerts and civic theater productions. Flyers were posted at YMCAs and libraries and at designated neighborhood hubs throughout the city. With all these things in place, the most nerve-wracking days were those leading up to the auditions. We had no idea if anyone would turn up. The first year, we had 35 singers.

                  Since its inception, the chorus has benefited from a diverse mix of financial sources. Our initial efforts were funded by a $7,000 unspecified grant from a local arts board dedicated to new organizations. Subsequent grants for equipment came from Creative Waco  and the Baylor University Philanthropy and Public Service Program. Annual requests for financial aid for singers are granted via a designated fund from the Waco Foundation. In-kind partners include our T-shirt vendor, graphic designer and printing service.

                  Rehearsal: A Three-Ring Circus

                  I compare our rehearsals to a three-ring circus. I am the ringmaster, giving instruction to the entire combined chorus. I provide sequence, teaching tools and methodology for everyone. After the standard of excellence and specific practice assignments are clear, assistant directors coordinate the two individual choirs and coach interns.

                  Florence Scattergood teaching choir students Interns act as small group facilitators for practice pods. Older choristers are spaced strategically among younger singers to ensure all have helpers nearby to aid with tasks like finding their place on the printed page, marking scores and, most importantly, providing a vocal support and encouragement.  We are aware of when and how we employ the use of the “surrogate” teacher.

                  Our covenant to the choir members is: “I will not ask you to perform any task alone for which I have not provided the necessary tools or instruction; in return, I ask that you give your best effort with your very first try.”

                  All our teaching methods and activities focus on YCCT’s values:

                  • discipline (singers will learn that musical excellence is achieved through dedication and discipline)
                  • respect (singers will learn that valuing and respecting others creates unity)
                  • kindness (singers will learn that music creates a safe environment in which kindness toward one another is vital)
                  • service (singers will learn that giving ones’ musical gift away is a valuable use of time and talent)
                  • individual creativity (singers will learn that creating music allows for beauty and self-expression)
                  • leadership (singers will learn a sense of personal responsibility, which extends beyond the choral experience into daily life)

                  The directors and interns prep together so that everyone knows all the notes and rhythms, all the parts (horizontally and vertically), each individual’s role in the ensemble, the form and the challenges of each selection. No one walks into rehearsal unprepared.

                  Tools for musical and logistical readiness are prepared so that all singers can achieve maximum success in a minimum amount of time. All efforts are made to eliminate the tyranny of the printed page. Score manipulations can include cutting and pasting to remove all but the relevant vocal line or doling out a few measures at a time. The use of different colored paper for different songs keeps everyone on the same page.

                  The YCCT Model in Action

                  Here’s how we assign parts:

                  • 1 and 2 for 2-part music
                  • A, B and C for 3-part music
                  • yellow, blue, green and red for 4-part music

                  Singers have labeled and color-coded name tags, which tell them their part assignments.

                  Example: Singer 2 B green sings part 2 on 2-part, the middle part on 3-part, and the third part on 4-part music.

                  Here’s an exercise where EVERYONE highlights the SAME part (scores may be used by any singer)

                  • 2-part music — everyone highlights part 2
                  • 3-part music — everyone highlights the middle part (students can identify their part as above the highlighted part, the highlighted part or below the highlighted part)
                  • 4-part music — everyone highlights part 3

                  Following the lesson sequence allows everyone to be successful. Skipping steps inevitably will leave someone behind. If singers already “know the answers,” they can just move through all the steps more quickly.

                  Subsequent repetitions are called REHEARSAL. Rehearsing an ensemble is NOT the same as teaching. Rehearsing is implementing and practicing what is already learned from the teaching.

                  Here’s how we introduce new knowledge:

                  • Precede a new nugget of knowledge with a verbal cue so that all students are aware that NEW TEACHING is going to happen.
                  • For example, tell students to put their fingers on measure 4 and say, “Now, look up for instructions.”

                  This is an example of our rehearsal speech. Giving instructions in seven words or less requires the instructor to be clear and concise and doesn’t waste valuable time with invaluable chatter.

                  Everybody Sings!

                  Changing groups shapes learning. Placing singers in the different choirs should be done with intentionality and purpose.

                  YCCT small group rehearsing with Florence ScattergoodOne thing we have discovered is that if the older singers are always asked to serve as models for their younger peers, their own needs are not served. Therefore, we ask the collegiate interns to model for the older chorus and, in turn, the staff models vocal and teaching techniques for the interns. Each rehearsal begins and ends with a brief staff meeting and debriefing that especially focuses on interns’ needs and questions.

                  Male interns are asked to sing with the young men whose voices are changing. This gives the students a model of a voice and helps balance the predominantly treble choir. It is YCCT’s policy to allow boys to sing through their change; some choruses age out the boys when their voices drop. We often add our small group of changing voices to the soprano 1 part down an octave. This adds a fine richness to the choir while allowing the boys the luxury of adjusting to their new voices without the added pressure of suddenly having to “hear” a new harmony part. Conversely, if a boy soprano is asked to sing tenor at school, he can still sing soprano at YCCT if he so desires.

                  During performances, we may opt to add an intern and even staff voices for special effect. For example, a popular jazz Christmas selection was performed with interns singing the challenging verses and the older choristers singing the choruses.

                  An additional benefit of expanding the singing to include the staff is that it provides an extra level of security for students when they are singing multiple challenging parts in a new acoustical environment. We learn together so that we can perform together. We came upon this idea out of necessity, and it has become a joyful expectation — another manifestation of “commUNITY through song!”

                  Real Fun

                  We’re often asked, “Is it fun or is it real?” (i.e., meaning is it kiddie play, or is it substantive learning). My answer is always, “It’s real fun!” We strive for a high level of comprehension in a short amount of time.

                  Seeing the singers for 90 minutes each week creates challenges in rehearsal attentiveness and weekly retention. Our lessons are crafted to be presented in person with child-friendly practice materials for use at home.

                  In other words, we do not use the honor choir model of learning notes on one’s own prior to rehearsal. Many children do not have musically trained parents to help them interpret the instructions; some do not have access to the necessary technology; few have the knowledge base to be expected to follow a score on their own until they have received instruction. The honor choir model is quite useful but does not serve our younger choristers. Our older self-motivated singers have used it occasionally with success.

                  We do encourage our singers to listen to specific recordings to aid in memorization; we provide the links after the music is learned.

                  Real fun includes performing at a variety of community events, including Holocaust remembrances to the Nutcracker ballet. Singing the national anthem at a Baylor’s Lady Bears basketball game has become an annual tradition as has a field trip to a Broadway touring company production. Each year several YCCT singers have been selected to Southwestern American Choral Directors Association (SWACDA), Texas Choral Directors Association (TCDA) or American Choral Directors Association (ACDA) honor choirs. We begin our year with summer camp and finish with an end-of-school social.

                  Equipment Wish List for the Adventurous Music Teacher

                  What’s on your wish list of school supplies? I’m talking beyond the basics like pencils and paper or more expensive items like a laminator or Cricut.

                  Consider the devices and equipment listed below that will change the way you teach! If your school has benefitted from COVID relief funds or your fall budget has increased due to higher-than-expected numbers, take advantage of this windfall and stock up on these supplies. You won’t regret it! 

                  headphone amplifier Upgrade the Sound System

                  Some classrooms are outfitted with audio playback capabilities such as a CD player or shelf speakers with an auxiliary cable but it’s time to upgrade your sound system to something that students can play along with.

                  An adequate PA system in the classroom is a fantastic way to engage students with instruction, reference recordings and backing tracks. The process of quieting a classroom so that every student can hear the All-State recording can be replaced with turning a nice sound system up to level eight so that students can even hear the coughing in the audience.

                  Classrooms that have ceiling speakers can also be improved with a headphone amplifier, which boosts the input signal, creating a more immersive experience for students who are listening or playing along.

                  The Power of Bluetooth and Wireless Tech

                  Wireless connectivity has reached a point where a teacher can be anywhere in a classroom. Prevent yourself from making a battle station in the corner of the room by utilizing Bluetooth audio, screen-sharing tablets, smart outlets and an Alexa device. Classroom teachers like to use proximity to their troublesome students to engage and curb behaviors. But how do we press play on the backing track if the student is across the room? Bluetooth your phone to the sound system! Bluetooth technology is a standard feature to many recent audio devices, but if your technology isn’t up to speed, consider purchasing a Bluetooth receiver that can turn any sound system with inputs into a Bluetooth speaker.

                  Bluetooth device Once your phone or tablet is connected to a sound system via Bluetooth, you can utilize your phone’s voice memo taker as a recording and playback station for your classroom. Record a difficult passage with your phone and play the recording back while speaking directly to the students who need your help. Moving the phone around the room will allow you to capture the moments that the students may not be hearing. For instance, recording close to the students who are out of tune might help you segue into the importance of listening and tuning without calling out specific students. Let the recording be the bad guy.

                  An older technology that allows teachers to walk around the room is the PowerPoint clicker, but now we can do much more than just progress to the next slide. Wireless keyboards with touchpads are a great solution to moving your entire computer! The computer can stay glued to all your outlets while you set up shop next to a student you are helping. Learn a few hot keys to change tabs in Chrome, play a YouTube video or trigger a timer to start without having to walk back to the computer.

                  For the elementary teacher who is tired of asking a student to walk to the light switch to turn the lights on or off, program your Alexa device and a few smart outlets to do this with a single voice command. Smart light bulbs can also change the color of the room to match holidays, special events and school colors (see top photo). For example, a fun way to kick off a Friday rehearsal before the big game would be to tell Alexa, “Go Cats!” which triggers the smart bulbs to turn blue. Elementary students might also appreciate sound-reactive lights that illuminate when sounds reach a certain decibel. It’s definitely a fun and visual way to teach dynamics!

                  And for teachers who already have their entire lives on a single laptop, an Apple TV or Google Chromecast allows you to wirelessly share your screen from your device to a projector or TV in your classroom. If you’re looking for more ways to present visual information, consider a wall-mounted flatscreen TV that can be strategically placed to engage students farthest from the projector.

                  Try Nonverbal Commands

                  screen shot of big button sound effects

                  Nonverbal commands can become a part of your routine if you choose to utilize wireless doorbells and soundboard applications on your phone. Plug in a wireless doorbell speaker near a noisy location in your classroom and use the doorbell to signal students to return to their seats, end their conversations or begin cleaning up. Codes like “two rings” could mean time is running out while “one ring” could mean the class is over.

                  If you need more sound options, download a soundboard application such as Big Button Sound Effects to your phone and utilize the thousands of free sounds that are available on your smart devices. I love to use the applause sound effect when students perform and the bugle call for lining up. Apps like Custom Soundboard Creator allow you to record sounds with your phone and trigger them with the press of a button. Record yourself saying any classroom command and then trigger it from your phone while you work with small groups. Themed soundboards can match the current season or most recent popular movie. Students will be excited to see what you come up with next!

                  Seating and Staging

                  alternate seating options like buckets and yoga ballsApart from technology, seating and staging have a large impact on how students act in the music room. Though traditional seating is important for posture and performance, is there space in your room for a non-traditional seating area?

                  risers with storage underneathElementary music classrooms utilize yoga balls, buckets and even cajons to allow students a chance to engage at their own energy level. Students who love to bounce around finally have an option to do so while engaging in meaningful conversation in order to keep their new favorite seat. A long communal bench might be the fun place for students to assemble their instrument, warm-up and socialize before making their way to the primary seating area.

                  Don’t let the choir have all the fun with stages and steps! Create dynamic seating by elevating your ensemble to match exactly how you want to see them at the concert. Not only will students love the opportunity to step on and off the platforms, but you’ll love storing cases and bulky items underneath (see photo to the left). Hide your items with a curtain made with some fabric and Velcro.

                  Celebrity Videos

                  The last, and possibly most ridiculous, recommendation is a celebrity video from the website Cameo. Do you want your students to pay attention while you read your syllabus? Or want them to memorize the classroom rules?

                  Go to Cameo where you pay a celebrity to say almost anything! That’s right. You can pay real artists to read your script for a set price and keep the video forever. Here’s a video of Snoop Dogg telling university students to read the syllabus! Make sure your script includes a line where the celebrity wishes they could be a student in your classroom.

                  What’s the wildest thing in your classroom? Share your photos @SwicksClassroom on Instagram or email educators@yamaha.com.

                  How a Vinyl Record Is Made

                  Have you ever wondered how a vinyl record is made? The process is both an art and a science — and, though there have been improvements in the technology of some of the machinery used in manufacturing, it’s still very much the same as it was back in the 1960s and 1970s.

                  In this posting, we’ll take you through the entire process step-by-step, focusing on the dominant vinyl format being produced today: the 12-inch LP.

                  First Things First

                  After an album gets recorded and mixed to the artist and producer’s satisfaction, the final mixes go to a mastering engineer, who gives everything a final sonic polishing in terms of both frequency and dynamics, as well as making sure that both the levels and tonality are consistent from song to song. Mastering is crucial, regardless of whether the album will be pressed to vinyl or simply released digitally. (For more information, check out mastering engineer Pete Lyman’s blogs.)

                  Screenshot.
                  Vinyl records require special mastering tools, such as this software plug-in.

                  Vinyl Realities

                  Typically, the mastering engineer will create separate files for digital release and vinyl. That’s because vinyl has several inherent qualities that affect the mastering process:

                  1. A vinyl record cannot reproduce as broad a frequency range as a digital recording. Too much high end, low end or volume can cause distortion and make the needle skip.

                  2. The closer the needle gets to the center, the smaller the circumference of the groove. This is due to a record’s circular shape. On the outside of a 12-inch LP, the needle moves at roughly 20 inches per second, but on the inside, it moves at roughly 8 1/2 inches per second. With less groove length per second of music, the resolution gets diminished. Sonically, this is equivalent to reducing the sampling rate of a digital recording from 96 kHz to 22.05 kHz — a huge difference in fidelity. That has ramifications for the artist and producer, who have to choose a song order carefully, knowing that the ones on the inner parts of the disc won’t sound quite as clear and crisp.

                  View of vinyl album without printing on the label.
                  Songs closer to the center have lower fidelity.

                  3. The amount of music a record can hold is finite. The needle on the turntable will eventually reach the end of a side. As a result, the artist and producer also need to consider the time factor when creating the song order and deciding which songs will go on which side of the record.

                  4. Vinyl records have considerably less dynamic range than digital recordings. If the mastering engineer tries to make the record too loud, it will just sound distorted. What’s more, large dynamic swings can cause the needle to jump when the record is played on a consumer’s turntable. In addition, the higher the amplitude, the wider the grooves need to be. Wider grooves mean less playing time per side, which also impacts the mastering engineer’s level decisions.

                  Making the Cut

                  Once the mastering engineer is satisfied that they’ve gotten all the songs sounding as good as possible, it’s time to create the master disc. This is also known as a lacquer master, since it’s an aluminum plate covered in a thick coat of lacquer. Some mastering engineers do this themselves; others hand the project off to a specialized “cutting” engineer.

                  In this step, the audio is routed into a cutting lathe — a large, specialized machine fitted with a cutting head that contains a tiny stylus usually made of sapphire. Whereas a turntable converts grooves on a record into sound, the electronics in the cutting lathe do the reverse: They turn the sound waves in the music into vibrations that the lathe’s stylus cuts into grooves on the master disc. The stylus gets so hot during the cutting process that it has to be cooled with helium gas the entire time to avoid a fire!

                  Turntable like equipment with cutter where arm would be.
                  A cutting lathe. (Image courtesy of Infrasonic Mastering)

                  Because the cutting is done in real time (that is, as the music is playing), one of the tasks of the cutting engineer is to manually create the spaces between songs. This is accomplished by scrolling the stylus very slightly toward the center of the record to create a gap.

                  Closeup of vinyl record grooves.
                  The spaces between songs must be manually created.

                  Check out this video for a detailed look at the cutting process.

                  Hello Mother, Hello Father

                  The next step is the making of a “stamper” disc — something that takes place at the record manufacturing plant. First, the master disc is carefully washed — it’s critical to keep dust off it — and then sprayed with silver. Next, it gets submerged in a nickel bath and electroplated. The electroplating causes the nickel to fill the grooves on the disc.

                  The electroplated master then gets pulled apart, creating two discs that are mirror images of each other. One is the original lacquer master with grooves; the other is its opposite, with ridges instead of grooves. The latter is called the “father” disc and it’s what gets used as a stamper for pressing the record.

                  At that point in the process, the master gets checked to make sure it has no errors. The lacquer master isn’t usable for that purpose, however — nor is the father disc because it has ridges instead of grooves. Instead, the father gets electroplated once more and split apart, creating a grooved “mother” disc.

                  Biscuits and Blobs

                  Once the stamper is done, the pressing plant can begin making vinyl copies. One stamper is required for every thousand records. After that, the stamper starts to wear out, and the audio quality begins to degrade. Technicians can make additional copies of the stamper by electroplating and splitting the mother disc.

                  The vinyl used starts out as pellets of polyvinyl chloride. These pellets get loaded into a hopper on the record press and are melted and squeezed into what’s often referred to as a “biscuit” — a blob of vinyl shaped like a hockey puck.

                  The stampers get loaded above and below the biscuit in the pressing machine — one for side one and one for side two. The record labels that go in the center of each side also get loaded between the biscuit and the stamper on each side. Technicians have to bake the labels in advance to get all the moisture out of them, so they don’t bubble when pressed onto the vinyl by the machine.

                  When the pressing sequence starts, the two stampers come together, squeezing the biscuit and labels with heat and roughly 100 tons of pressure. The biscuit flattens out, and the ridges on the stampers create the grooves in the still soft vinyl. At the same time, the labels get squashed into their respective spots in the center.

                  The pressing machine then trims the excess off the edges and cools the newly created record with water, and out it pops onto a spindle. Each record takes about 30 seconds to make. The machine continuously reloads new biscuits and labels and repeats the pressing process until the designed number of copies are made.

                  The Finishing Touches

                  Before shipping the vinyl records out, the plant makes a few test pressings that they send to the artist and record label for approval. Once they get the thumbs up, all the copies ordered are produced.

                  At this point in the process, the artwork for the record jacket has normally been printed and approved. The newly minted records are manually placed into the inner paper sleeves and album covers. The final step is to send the albums in their jackets through a shrink-wrap machine. After that, they’re ready for distribution — and your listening enjoyment.

                   

                  Check out these related blog posts:

                  How Does a Vinyl Record Make Sound?

                  Here’s What You Need to Know About Vinyl

                  Appreciating Vinyl Records … and the Best Way to Enjoy Them

                  Five Reasons Vinyl Is Making a Comeback

                  Top 10 Vinyl Albums for Audiophiles

                  10 Hip-Hop Albums That Sound Great on Vinyl

                  Spotlight on Vinyl Subscription Services

                  How to Connect a Turntable to an AV Receiver

                  The Difference a Tonearm Makes

                  Shopping for Vinyl

                  Caring for Vinyl

                  How to Clean Vinyl Records

                  So Your Child Wants to Play Strings

                  Your child has come home enthusiastic about the prospect of joining their school orchestra and playing a stringed instrument. That’s great news, but it can be an intimidating moment for a parent without a musical background. Of course, you want the best for your son or daughter, but without some basic knowledge about the instrument they want to learn, you might feel unprepared for this new experience in your child’s life.

                  Fear not! In this article, we’ll show you how to refocus any apprehension you may have into solid, confident next steps to make sure your kiddo puts their best foot forward. And with your encouragement, they will hopefully start a lifelong relationship with music that will bring them endless joy and satisfaction.

                  Before we begin, though, understand that there’s no “right” way to make music. We’ll provide some common beginning tips for scholastic/school music, but if your child has an interesting opportunity to pick up a string instrument outside of school — like playing folk fiddle or maybe even a Suzuki class — go for it! Any start rooted in the child’s desire and innate musicianship is a good start.

                  Violin

                  A young girl playing violin in front of an audience.

                  One of the most beautiful and well-known of all musical instruments, the violin has played a role in just about every musical genre, from classical to country, and is played on the finest concert stages the world over.

                  Getting started on a stringed instrument like the violin is different than many other types of instruments because students have the option of finding the right size violin for their body. Fractional size violins like the Yamaha YVN Model 3 ensure that young students have the best opportunity to make music whatever their physical dimensions and growth rate. Yamaha has a great “fit stick” resource that allows you to measure your child for their best violin size; just click here to request one — it’s completely free of charge.

                  The other consideration, of course, is which brand and model to buy. One way to simplify this search is by using the online Yamaha Violin Finder, which can help you gauge the right price point, sound preference and case type for your budding violinist. Whichever make and model you choose, there a few things your child will need right at the start in addition to the violin: a sturdy case, a bow and rosin (the latter helps the strings make sound). Many Yamaha student model violins come with these accessories included.

                  Viola

                  Group of children playing violas and a cello.

                  Known for its thick sound that fills out the middle range of orchestras, the viola is a great choice for students who prefer lower tones to the high register of violins. Because a viola is slightly bigger than a violin, it can reach lower notes and has a richer tonal quality.

                  Starting on the viola is very similar to starting on the violin in that there are differing sizes to make sure your child can play the full length of the instrument, no matter their physical dimensions. A good choice for a beginning violist is the Yamaha AVA5S, available in 13″, 14″, 15″, 15.5″, 16″ and 16.5″ sizes. Your local authorized Yamaha dealer can help determine the right one for your child.

                  Like the violin, viola players need a carrying case, bow and rosin to prepared for the first day of orchestra (a great attitude helps too!). Again, many Yamaha student model violas come with these accessories included.

                  Cello

                  Young girl playing a cello.

                  The cello is often the largest string instrument in beginning orchestra classrooms. Played by some of history’s greatest musicians, it has a sonorous and rich tone quality. Since it rests on the ground while being bowed, it also offers a slightly more natural playing position than the viola or violin, both of which have to be held up to the neck and rested under the chin.

                  Like the violin and viola, a bow, case and rosin are essential, but there is an additional accessory needed to play the cello: a floorstop. Cello players are usually seated when playing, so this ensures that the instrument doesn’t slide around. These are usually made of rubber or attach to the player’s seat so the endpin fits in securely.

                  Like most other student string instruments, the cello is available in “fractional” sizes so that students with smaller frames can get started earlier and utilize the full length of the instrument. There are two Yamaha student model cellos to choose from. Your local authorized Yamaha dealer can help determine the right one for your child.

                  Upright Bass

                  When you hear the word “bass,” you might picture an electric bass guitar, but here we’re referring to the upright bass, which is one of the most versatile string instruments, found in orchestras and jazz combos alike. This vital instrument imparts an important lush, low end that fills out the entire sound.

                  Full-size professional upright basses stand about seven feet tall, so they’re not always part of grade- or middle-school orchestra programs, but some classrooms may have fractional size basses that allow smaller students to explore the range of the instrument while their bodies catch up to the larger sizing.

                   

                  Whether your child has their eyes set on the violin, viola, cello or upright bass, they are stepping into a whole new world when they pick up a string instrument. It can be difficult for both student and parent in the beginning while growing pains are still being worked out, but the most important thing to keep in mind is that the effort is worth it. There are countless research models that demonstrate that playing music has a significant role to play in brain development, let alone the social and emotional skills and wholehearted sense of satisfaction that can come with practice and perseverance.

                   

                  Check out these related blog articles:

                  Does My Child Need a Better Violin Next Year?

                  Reimagining the Way Student Violins Are Made

                  Five Things You May Not Know About String Instruments

                  Five More Things You May Not Know About String Instruments

                  Teach Your Children Well

                   

                  Click here for more information about school music.

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha YVN Model 3 Student Violin.

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha AVA5 S Student Viola Outfit.

                  Click here to locate your local authorized Yamaha dealer.

                  Best Action Movie Scenes in Surround Sound

                  Nothing fires up a home theater like a great action movie. Except maybe one with full-blown surround sound! These are the kinds of exciting films that may even have you turning up your system until the neighbors start a-knocking. But then they might just join you when the action starts.

                  1. Unbroken – The First Bomb Drop

                  This World War II tale of grit and survival resonates strongly every time I see it. As veteran French film composer Alexandre Desplat’s eerie score sets the mood, a vast formation of bombers flies right into the camera, their engines filling the sound field. All is relatively quiet until bursts of flack begin and as each second ticks away, the action, intensity and fire light up your screen. After the drop, fighter jets swoop in on the bombers and your surround speakers (and height speakers too, if you have them!) get a good workout, with gunfire peppering every corner of your room. Check it out here.

                  2. Captain America The Winter Soldier – Elevator Fight

                  Going up? In this scene from the 2014 superhero film, Marvel Comics character Captain America, played by Chris Evans, takes on an entire elevator full of bad guys. All starts quietly, until Cap, realizing they’re all there to take him on, asks if anyone wants to get out. Then the action lights up and the close quarters makes for some loud and proud moments that will shake your system. It’s classic action involving modern weapons, fists of fury and lots of great camera angles. Talk about going from 0-100 mph! Check it out here.

                  3. Star Wars Rogue One – Battle Of Scarif

                  Get the subwoofer ready for some high energy Star Wars action. The CGI (computer generated imagery) in this scene includes power shields, laser cannon shot, spaceships exploding and just about everything else you can dream of in a classic spaceship battle — all zipping from the left to the right, in front of and behind you. The visuals, sound effects and sound design are nothing short of superb … all with the classic John Williams theme bursting out of the speakers. Check it out here.

                  4. Braveheart – Battle of Stirling Cavalry Charge

                  This 1995 epic won multiple Academy Awards®. It depicts the life of William Wallace (played by Mel Gibson) during the first war of Scottish Independence. This exciting scene, depicting the Battle of Stirling, grows in anticipation as the horses pick up their pace in the charge against Wallace and his band of warriors. Bagpipes, hoofs, armor and chains blend together all around you with the simmering orchestral score in anticipation of what’s about to happen. Once the horses get close, the real action explodes on the screen, with a nasty surprise for the riders. Check it out here.

                  5. The Dark Knight – Batpod Chase

                  This 2008 superhero film from director, producer and co-writer Christopher Nolan is based on the DC Comics Batman character and is the second installment in the Dark Knight trilogy. Combining stunning surround sound effects with a score by the power duo of Hans Zimmer and James Newton Howard, this scene features the Batpod (a recreation of the Batcycle) and the Joker in a runaway truck, along with helicopters, guns, armored vehicles and lots of high intensity action, all taking place at night in a forbidding urban environment. Get your seatbelts on and buckle up for this one. Check it out here.

                  6. The Bourne Ultimatum – The Window Jump

                  This is one of the most dramatic scenes from the classic Bourne Ultimatum series, with complex action that’s stunning in sequence, choreography and sound design. Add in the pulsing drums from the world music score of John Powell and it’s little wonder that this film snagged Academy Awards in 2007 for Best Sound Editing and Best Sound Mixing, as well as Best Film Editing. Check it out here.

                  7. John Wick Chapter I – Red Circle Club

                  In this power-packed scene inspired by anime and martial arts films, professional hitman John Wick (played by Keanu Reeves) is seeking revenge for the stealing of his car and the killing of his dog. Between the pumping club music, the flashing lights and the full-blown action, it’s a surround sound dream come true! Check it out here.

                  8. Transformers – Desert Battle

                  This 2007 science fiction film is interesting in the way that it combines live action with computer animation — and Steven Spielberg was the executive producer, so you know there’s a little extra oomph. This exciting scene takes place in the desert where a Decepticon (a robot that can change into animals, vehicles or other forms) attacks a group of Special Ops soldiers in Qatar. The call goes out to the U.S. Air Force, who arrive in full strength … and let’s just say, things get busy. Turn this one up! Check it out here.

                  9. Jurassic Park – T-Rex Entry

                  This is a film that needs little introduction, and the slowly building intensity of this scene — especially when listened to on a quality multichannel audio system — is absolutely masterful. As they sit in a car in a rainstorm with a company lawyer, a young boy asks his sister if she feels the pounding on the ground, as the camera pans to two glasses of water moving with each thud — an action that shakes your sub — and you know something terrifying is coming. A Tyrannosaurus Rex suddenly appears from out of nowhere … and from that moment, the stomps of the enraged dinosaur and its menacing growl are pure movie (and surround sound) magic. Check it out here.

                  10. Iron Man – Raptor Evasion

                  Here’s a scene from another high-flying adventure movie with full surround sound action, as Marvel superhero Iron Man (Robert Downey) whizzes around the sky, evading a pair of Air Force F-22 Raptor jets. It’s reminiscent of the best flying sequences from Top Gun but with a pounding hard rock soundtrack underneath and more missiles, more gunshots, more fly-bys … in fact, more everything. Check it out here.

                   

                  Want to learn more about surround sound? Here are some related blog articles:

                  Surround Sound Systems Explained: Dolby, AURO-3D and More

                  What is AURO-3D? An In-Depth Exploration

                  What’s So Good About Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™?

                  What Is Surround:AI?

                  How to Shop for a Surround Sound System

                  Home Theater In Small Spaces

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

                  Rec’n’Share in Five Easy Steps

                  Rec’n’Share is an interactive app that works with the Yamaha EAD10 Electronic Acoustic Drum Module, as well as DTX402 Series, DTX6 Series, DTX8 Series and DTX10 Series electronic drums. It’s a powerful, user-friendly tool for practicing and recording, plus it makes file sharing simple.

                  Here’s how to use Rec’n’Share in five easy steps.

                  1. Download It

                  Rec’n’Share is available free of charge from the App Store or Google Play and runs on a variety of iOS and Android™ devices. iOS devices compatible with Rec’n’Share include the iPhone® and iPad® (iOS 13.0 or later required). A list of Android devices compatible with Rec’n’Share can be found here (Android 7.0 or later required).

                  Screenshot.
                  Rec’n’Share works with a wide variety of iOS and Android devices.

                  2. Get Connected

                  The EAD10, DTX and DTX-PRO module (supplied with all DTX6 Series electronic drum kits) provide USB TO HOST ports for connection to a computer or smart device. To connect the module to an iOS device, you’ll need a Lightning to USB Type B male cable, or a USB Type A to Type B cable plus an Apple camera connection kit.

                  Diagram.
                  Connecting an EAD10 to an iOS device.

                  Android devices use either USB Micro-B or Type C Male connectors, so you’ll need a cable with one of those connectors on one end and a USB Type B Male connector on the other end. Newer Android devices tend to use the Type C connector, but if you’re unsure which one your smart device uses, check with the manufacturer. Turn the module off before plugging in the cable.

                  3. Open It and Play

                  Turn on the module and open the Rec’n’Share app. The first time you launch it, Rec’n’Share will ask for access to the device’s microphone (click “OK”), and you’ll need to agree to the terms of the software license agreement. Scroll through the three intro pages and click “Let’s Get Started” to begin using the software. Rec’n’Share will take you to the Practice page, shown below.

                  Screenshot.
                  The Rec’n’Share Practice page.

                  This is where you will be able to access your music library. The first time you use Rec’n’Share, you’ll see a prompt underneath the song title bar that says, “Touch here, then choose the music you want to play.” Tapping in the space will result in another prompt, this one asking for permission to access the media library on your device. Click “OK” to allow Rec’n’Share to access the music and videos stored on your device.

                  Now you can move on to the fun stuff: playing!

                  Select a song from your music library. Rec’n’Share will analyze the music file, display the waveform, create a tempo map and a click for you to play to, and provide a four-beat count-in (the number of pre-count clicks can be varied from one to eight).

                  Tip: If you find that the result of tempo analysis does not match the original song, reanalyze the song or try changing the Analysis Tempo Rate on the Audio Analysis page (accessed using the tool icon next to the Tempo slider).

                  At the bottom of the Practice page are three control sliders: Tempo, Click Volume, and Music Volume. The bottom two enable you to balance the mix in your headphones between your electronic or electronic/acoustic drum set and the music. The top slider (Tempo) is where things get very interesting because one of the most powerful features of Rec’n’Share is that it gives you the ability to slow down or speed up any song that’s been imported from your library. If you’re trying to figure out a complicated fill in a song by your favorite artist, simply use the tempo slider to slow it down to the point where you can hear it clearly and practice along with it. The original pitch of the song is retained even when you speed up or slow down the tempo.

                  Screenshot.
                  The original tempo of this song was 136 BPM. Rec’n’Share has slowed it down to 117 BPM (86% of the original tempo).

                  Next to the song title bar, you’ll also find controls for AB Repeat, Click On/Off, and Click Down/Upbeat. The AB Repeat feature can be used to loop a particular section of a song. While the song is playing, tap the AB button to set the start point of the loop, then tap it again to set the end point. Rec’n’Share will loop the section until you tap the AB button a third time. This is a great way to learn a complicated passage, especially since, as mentioned above, you can change the tempo of the loop while practicing along.

                  Screenshot.
                  The audio highlighted in red has been selected for AB repeat.

                  Finally, Click On/Off gives you the ability to mute the click, while the Click Down/Upbeat button toggles the click between the downbeat or upbeat.

                  4. Record

                  Whether you are using a Yamaha DTX electronic kit or an EAD10 hybrid acoustic/electronic kit, Rec’n’Share makes it easy to capture great audio and video recordings. This makes your practice sessions more productive by allowing you to objectively analyze your performances.

                  When you’re ready to record, simply tap “Start Recording” on the Practice page. Rec’n’Share may ask for access to the device’s camera; if you’d like to record video along with the audio, click “OK.”

                  Tip: If you tap Record and receive the message “The app does not have access to the camera or microphone,” check the system settings on your device and make sure that Rec’n’Share has been given access to the microphone and camera.

                  When you’re recording video, you’ll need a way of mounting your smart device to a stand. A tripod is the most versatile solution, but there are a wide variety of mounts available that can clamp your device to an unused cymbal or tom stand and hold it securely in place. Rec’n’Share includes a pre-record timer that can be set to 3, 5, 10, 15 or 20 seconds, which will give you plenty of time to get settled behind your kit after tapping Record.

                  When you are finished recording, you’ll have options to play back the recording, delete it, or save it to the Rec’n’Share library. Once saved, the beginning and end of the file can be trimmed and the balance between your drums and the song can be adjusted. These edits are “non-destructive,” meaning that you can always get back to the unaltered state of the original recording.

                  5. Share Your Performance

                  When you’re happy with the edited recording, you can share it with your friends! Tapping on “Recorded Songs” at the bottom of the Practice screen opens the library of songs you have recorded in Rec’n’Share. Select the one you want to share, then tap the upload icon:

                  Diagram.
                  The upload icon.

                  Rec’n’Share will display options for sending the file to friends via email or text message, or for uploading the file directly to social media.

                   

                  To learn more, check out these videos:

                  EAD10 – Rec’n’Share App Overview

                  EAD10 & Rec’n’Share Music Videos Made Easy

                  Joel Cassady Uses Rec’n’Share to Perform “Walk Off The Earth”

                   

                  Click here for more information about Rec’n’Share.

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha EAD10 acoustic electronic drum module.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha DTX402 Series electronic drum kits.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha DTX6 Series electronic drum kits.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha DTX8 Series electronic drum kits.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha DTX10 Series electronic drum kits.

                  Music Theory for Producers, Part 1

                  With today’s technology, it’s entirely possible to produce songs and beats in a DAW, looper or sampler without knowing music theory. In fact, one can make an argument that doing everything based on what you hear rather than what’s written on a page helps you develop your musical ear.

                  But you really need both a good ear and at least some knowledge of music theory, or you’ll be at a significant disadvantage compared to your musically trained peers. Without theory, you’re flying blind.

                  Music theory is a vast subject that’s impossible to cover comprehensively in a two-part posting like this (or even a ten-part blog, for that matter!). So what I’ll do instead is discuss some key aspects that will help you better understand what you’re doing when creating music. In this installment, I’m going to focus on rhythm; in Part 2, I’ll continue with a look at basic chord structure.

                  Quarterly Results

                  You may not realize it, but even if you’ve never learned any music theory, you’re actually dealing with it all the time because in any graphic editing window in any DAW — for example, the Project Zone in Steinberg Cubase — your project is organized in bars and beats.

                  Screenshot.
                  The Project Zone in Cubase.

                  Those bars (aka “measures”) are the same as those used in written music. They provide a way to divide a song into short sections that are easy to work with and visualize, as opposed to having to constantly look at the entire song, which could get incredibly confusing!

                  The time signature (also sometimes called “meter”) is a fractional number that describes the rhythmic content of each measure. The number on the top tells you how many beats there are in the measure; the bottom number tells you the rhythmic value (the “subdivision”) of those beats. The most common time signatures are 4/4 (four beats per measure, with each beat being a quarter-note), 3/4 (three quarter-note beats per measure), 6/8 (six eighth-note beats per measure) and 12/8 (12 eighth-note beats per measure).

                  In 4/4 time, each measure lasts four quarter-notes. The tempo will determine how fast those quarter-notes go by. At any tempo, four quarter-notes equal the same duration as eight eighth-notes, sixteen sixteenth-notes, and so on. Within a measure of 4/4 time, you can have any combination of note (and rest) durations as long as they add up to the equivalent of four quarter-notes.

                  Counting quarter-notes is easy: Just go, “One two three four; one two three four,” etc. Here’s an exercise to try: Turn on the click track in your DAW and set it to a comfortably slow tempo, say around 80 bpm (beats per minute). Now count along with the click, which by default is set to quarter notes.

                  Musical annotation.
                  Counting quarter notes in 4/4 time.

                  Next, with the click still going, count eighth notes, as follows: “One and two and three and four and …”

                  Musical annotation.
                  Counting eighth notes in 4/4 time.

                  Finally, sixteenth notes: “One ee and a; two ee and a; three ee and a; four ee and a,” and so on.

                  Musical annotation.
                  Counting sixteenth notes in 4/4 time.

                  In any time signature, the downbeat is usually defined as the first beat of a measure, or “One,” if you’re counting. Here’s how to count in some other common time signatures.

                  • 2/4: Contains two quarter-notes per measure. Count it “One two; one two,” etc.
                  • 3/4: Contains three quarter-notes per measure. Count it “One two three; one two three,” etc. Notice how different the feel is in 3/4, which is sometimes called a waltz meter.
                  • 6/8: Six eighth-notes per measure. Count it “one two three four five six; one two three four five six,” etc. This is sometimes called a shuffle meter.

                  Let Me Emphasize

                  Beyond just the count itself, the beats that get emphasized in a measure have a lot to do with the “feel” or “pulse” of the rhythm. If you’re working in EDM or one of its numerous subgenres, many songs have a “four on the floor” feel, which means that each quarter note gets equally emphasized (“stressed”).

                  Beats two and four of a measure (the backbeats) are frequently emphasized in pop, rock, blues, country and many other genres. In 4/4 time, drummers usually hit the snare drum on the two and four (“one TWO three FOUR”), and the bass drum on the one and the three (or, in this particular case, the ONE, the THREE and the “THREE AND”).

                  You’ve probably heard the term syncopation in reference to rhythms. If a rhythm emphasizes an offbeat, such as an eighth- or sixteenth-note, it’s considered syncopated. Here’s an example of a syncopated drum beat:

                  Triple Down

                  When you open the quantize window in your DAW, you’ve no doubt noticed the choices that say 4T, 8T, etc. Those refer to triplets, which subdivide a beat (such as a quarter-note, eighth-note or sixteenth-note) into three equal parts.

                  This is a concept that can get confusing because an eighth-note triplet’s duration equals a quarter note, whereas a quarter-note triplet’s duration equals a half note:

                  Screenshot.
                  Eighth-note triplets in the Cubase Score Editor and Key Editor.

                  This becomes more apparent when you try counting it. A measure consisting of straight eighth notes would be counted, “One and two and three and four and,” but the way to count a measure with eighth-note triplets is, “One trip let; two trip let; three trip let; four trip let.”

                  In the following example of eighth-note triplets, you’ll first hear a four-beat countoff and a click. The triplets, played with a tambourine sample, are panned to the left and the click track is panned to the right.

                  Eighth-note triplets are also the basis for playing a swing feel. In the following example, you’ll first hear two bars of a basic rock beat with regular (“straight”) eighth notes on the hi-hat. When it repeats, the eighth notes are “swung” — the first two beats of each triplet get played as one quarter-note instead of two eighth-notes. The kick and snare stay the same, but adding those swung eighth notes changes the feel to a shuffle.

                  The other types of triplets you’ll encounter are usually of the quarter-note variety; these are twice as long as eighth-note triplets. They’re a lot harder to count evenly, as they feel as if they’re pushing against the beat. Here’s an example with a four-beat countoff; again, the click track is panned right and the quarter-note triplets (this time played on a hi-hat) are panned left.

                  Screenshot.
                  Quarter-note triplets in the Cubase Score Editor and Key Editor.

                  Another symbol you’ll see in your quantize settings is a dot after a note value. A dotted note lasts one and a half times as long as a non-dotted one. For example, a dotted quarter note lasts for one and a half quarter notes which is the same as three eighth notes.

                  Screenshot.
                  This measure starts with a dotted quarter note.

                  The Takeaway

                  As you can see, when you’re working in your DAW, you’re using rhythmic concepts that are the same as they are in written music. Knowing what they mean will help you when you’re writing and arranging music — and hopefully this additional perspective will inspire you to keep learning.

                  Click here for Part 2.

                   

                  Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

                  Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

                  The Power of Oxygen and Green Spaces Can Boost Student Performance

                  What if you could grant your music students special powers like laser-focused attention, impressive productivity and the ability to make smarter decisions?

                  You can, and it’s a simple solution: Ensure students get fresh air.

                  A growing body of research has shown that having enough oxygen in a room can make people feel more energetic, focused and calm. For example, people working in indoor offices where carbon dioxide was being ventilated out did significantly better on cognitive functional tests, and this information can also apply to schools, according to Better Air = Better Brains,” a research study from Upstate Medical University.

                  In the research from Upstate, cognitive scores were 61% higher on problem-solving tasks in subjects on the days they spent in indoor spaces that had improved ventilation. At least eight more studies have supported these findings, reports the Irish Times in an article called A Breath of Stale Air.” The bottom line is that as carbon dioxide levels rise, people become sleepier and do more poorly on tasks.

                  Open the Window

                  row of open windows in brick building Depending on your school setting and policies, the simplest solution is to open a window or door if you possibly can — even for short periods during cold-weather months. (Be sure the window is screened and or secured in a way that it will not create a fall risk for students.)

                  If there’s not much of a breeze, a box fan or fan on a windowsill can help with ventilation, so long as fans are out of reach of small fingers. Researchers with Harvard Medical School suggest positioning the fan so that it is blowing air out of the room, not into the room. Cross-ventilation is another option — if windows can be opened on either side of a room, or a window/door combo. While this may not be realistic during a rousing practice of “Wellington’s Victory,” there may be some quieter opportunities during class to get the door open for a bit.

                  In the era of COVID, open windows may also make the classroom safer from viral transmission, according to Harvard’s School of Public Health. The National Association for Music Education (NAfME) has recommendations for both indoor and outdoor instruction on optimal air-quality while music-making.

                  Chemicals May Be Lurking in Your Classroom

                  the word Beyond simple fresh air, consider what else students might be inhaling and strive for a cleaner indoor space.

                  • Some dry-erase markers and dry-erase board sprays contain methyl isobutyl ketone, which can be associated with neurological and respiratory problems. There are non-toxic versions of dry-erase markers available (Modern Twist is one option) or at least open the window when using the white board. To clean the board safely, use a solution of 1 teaspoon white vinegar and 1 cup of water.
                  • Swap chemically scented hand soaps with natural or unscented versions.
                  • Avoid the use of room freshener sprays. If things have gotten funky in the band room — and not in good, Wild Cherry way — open the window or use a little bit of an essential oil instead of a chemical spritz.
                  • Steer away from buying dry-clean-only garments, as dry-cleaned clothing can emit volatile organic compounds.

                  Take Students Outdoors

                  One of the silver linings of the COVID era has been the increased interest in outdoor classrooms. Marching band practice has traditionally been on a field, of course, but now many music educators are heading outside for other types of instruction.

                  Schools such as Foust Elementary School in Greensboro, North Carolina, are creating clever designs that benefit both students and instructors. An article on NPR features an outdoor classroom at Foust that has fun details like tree-stump desks and a waterproof chalkboard.

                  seven elementary students sitting outdoors with teacher standing

                  Beyond air quality, being out in the natural world has powerful brain benefits, including boosting working memory, cognitive flexibility and attentional control, according to research (Understanding Nature and Its Cognitive Benefits) published in the journal Current Directions in Psychological Science. Outdoor spaces greatly benefit young people with ADHD, too, both from a behavioral and academic perspective.

                  Green Schoolyards America, a nonprofit dedicated to getting natural environments included in school settings, has an outdoor learning initiative with free resources.

                  What if you want the benefits of a green space but just can’t get your music students outdoors? Try a micro-break. Even a quick burst of the natural world can boost attention, according to research published in the Journal of Environmental Psychology. Scientists found that simply gazing at a flowering, plant-filled green roof for 40 seconds improved performance on school tasks, compared to looking at a plain, concrete roof surface.

                  Lastly, some indoor potted plants can help absorb carbon dioxide and boost oxygen. For the classroom, try a rubber plant, peace lily, snake plant or dracaena. But be careful not to overwater plants, which can trigger mold.

                  What to Do When There’s No Bass Player, Part 1

                  It’s very common for a band to include at least a singer, a drummer, a bass player, a guitar player and a keyboardist (you!). But there will be times when a gig is too low-paying to afford that many players, and often it is the bass player who is left out. The problem is that most music won’t sound right unless someone is playing those low notes and providing the rhythmic push of a good drum and bass partnership. So that role will need to be covered by you.

                  In this posting, I’ll provide you with some tips and suggestions for acting as surrogate bass player when a real one isn’t there, without sacrificing the all-important keyboard parts.

                  It’s Fundamental

                  My first piece of advice is to keep your left-hand bass playing very simple. For most styles of music (with the exception of swing jazz tunes and songs with specific signature bass riffs), you can’t go wrong just playing the root of the chord. With that as a starting point, you next want to come up with a rhythmic feel that matches the groove of the song, and especially one that matches what the drummer is playing on the bass drum. Listening to and locking in with that pattern will make the band sound good and support the groove with nice low notes to fill out the sound. Nothing flashy is really needed.

                  Here are some very common rhythm patterns that work in lots of songs (each pattern would be repeated many times, of course):

                  Musical annotation.

                  Note that in this audio clip (as well as the following six clips), I play each bar twice:

                  • Example 1 (in bar 1) is the most basic: you could just play whole notes if it were a ballad, but this adds a note on beat 4 to keep some movement going.
                  • Example 2 (bar 2) provides nice downbeats on beats 1 and 3, with an extra note on the and of 4 to push back into the downbeat.
                  • Example 3 (bar 3) pushes into beat 2, meaning it anticipates the beat.
                  • Example 4 (bar 4) is similar, but it adds another note on the and of 4.
                  • Example 5 (bar 5) is a straighter version of the pattern, where you play a note solidly on beat 3.
                  • Example 6 (bar 6) adds the note on the and of 4 to push back into the downbeat.
                  • Examples 7 and 8 (bars 7 and 8) are both common patterns heard on countless songs.

                  These next examples utilize a constant eighth-note feel for more driving rock and dance tunes (note that I add an upper octave at times for variety):

                  Musical annotation.
                  • Example 1 is just constant eighth notes, which always works.
                  • Example 2 adds a single upper octave note just before the pattern repeats on beat 1.
                  • Example 3 places the octave on beat 4, while example 4 places octaves on beats 2 and 4, where the drummer would often be playing snare drum hits.
                  • Example 5 gets a little trickier in that it anticipates into beat 3, which is a way of adjusting the pattern to match the drummer’s bass drum feel.
                  • Example 6 is a slight variation of where the octave occurs after beat 3.
                  • Examples 7 and 8 go back to steady eighth notes.

                  These next examples are more deeply syncopated, meaning they have more off-beats in their rhythm, and they occur on sixteenth-note subdivisions. These work well in funkier tunes:

                  Musical annotation.
                  • Example 1 gives a nice strong emphasis on the 1 and the 3 of the bar.
                  • Example 2 adds a note on the and of 4 to push back into the downbeat.
                  • Example 3 adds notes on both the 3 and the and of 3, while example 4 holds out the note on the and of 3 for the rest of the measure.
                  • Example 5 adds a longer note on the and of 1, and then pushes back into the top of the next measure tightly with a note on the last sixteenth of beat 4.
                  • Example 6 treats beat 2 with more syncopation, but then a more relaxed push back into the downbeat of the next measure.
                  • Example 7 is a variation of that pattern, with two off-beat hits on beat 4.
                  • Example 8 sounds a bit like a sequenced dance bass line or perhaps a driving Motown beat.

                  Adding Notes

                  Once you’ve established a library of rhythmic figures, you can expand your note choices. Bass players often alternate between the root and the fifth of a chord, so you can introduce some fifths into your patterns like this:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Like the root-only technique, these types of lines are going to work under almost all chords, except for diminished or augmented chords. For more funky or R&B tunes, you can try these approaches:

                  Musical annotation.

                  To get more color in your lines while still keeping them simple, you can introduce other notes, but these now become more conditional on the chord quality. For example, you can add the sixth note to major and dominant-seventh chords, and you can add the flatted seventh to dominant-seventh and minor seventh chords:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Finally, here are some examples of more syncopated funky feels:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Putting It All Together

                  Armed with these ideas, let’s move on to playing basic songs and chord progressions. Here are two common kinds of pop ballad bass lines, using some of the ideas from the first examples:

                  Musical annotation.

                  I’m only playing root tones in the bass, but the first is very straight and open, while the second half uses more pushes into beat 3 to match the different drum feel.

                  This next example adds in some fifths to the bass:

                  Musical annotation.

                  Finally, let’s use some of the more syncopated figures and take more freedom with the notes:

                  Musical annotation.

                  In general, remember that it’s better to keep your left hand bass lines simple, and just support the feel of the song. You don’t have to be a flashy bass player — just keep it low and in the pocket! In Part 2, we’ll cover walking bass lines.

                  All piano and bass sounds played on a Yamaha P-515.

                  Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

                  How to Get Lost in Guitar Effects … Without Losing Your Way

                  As guitarists, we have a universe of effects at our fingertips, whether from plug-ins, pedalboards or digital amps. Sure, it’s easy enough to turn on some distortion or chorus or delay, but what if you’re looking to go beyond the typical? I’m talking about things like massive ambience, droning and sustaining notes, heavy modulation, rhythmic echoes and more.

                  It’s actually pretty easy to dial in those types of sounds if you know how. In this article, I’ll offer suggestions for various abstract effects you can create with almost any kind of multi-effects processor, whether hardware- or software-based.

                  Into the Cave

                  Sustain is one of the most important tools in the guitarist’s toolbox, particularly the type where one or more notes drone as you play others on top. Ambient effects such as reverb and delay are a great way to create sustaining or repeating sounds.

                  The processor you use for reverb can probably yield a cavernous sound where your notes will reverberate for a long time. As some notes sustain, you can play others over them. You can use a hall, plate or spring reverb algorithm for this, provided it allows long decay times in the 9- to 10-second range, but if your reverb can emulate a cave or cathedral, those kinds of presets will work even better.

                  The critical parameter here is the dry/wet mix. Start by setting it to just a little over 50% and then edge it up further still, if required. If you’re plugged into a Yamaha THR-II Series desktop amp, just crank up its onboard Hall or Spring reverb effect to its highest point, which will yield a long decay as well.

                  Here’s an example recorded in Steinberg Cubase Pro, using the Line 6 Helix Native plug-in, set to a clean amp emulation. The guitar part features harmonics and open strings as drone notes. In conjunction with a long reverb or other sustaining or repeating effects, these kinds of techniques allow you to create long-holding notes to play along with; just be careful not to dampen them as they sustain.

                  Screenshot.
                  The Helix Native reverb settings for this audio clip are highlighted.

                  In general, you should avoid playing chords in a heavily reverberated soundscape, particularly if those chords include notes from the low strings. With all that reverb, it’s easy to create sonic clutter that muddles the lower midrange. If you’re playing along with other instruments, be particularly careful. You might try lowering the dry/wet mix somewhat, if needed.

                  Most reverb and delay plug-ins (and many hardware devices) allow you to cut the low end while still maintaining a lot of the reverberant properties, which will help reduce muddiness. Alternatively, you can apply a low-cut filter or EQ to the reverb or delay output, then try rolling off or attenuating some of the lowest frequencies.

                  Keep ‘Em Saturated

                  Another way to create sustain is with gain, either amp gain or a distortion/overdrive effect. The higher the gain, the more sustain. Distortion also naturally compresses your tone, which adds to the sustain.

                  This next audio clip was recorded direct through a Yamaha THR10II desktop digital amp, which is one of three models in the THR-II Series.

                  Small portable guitar amp.
                  Yamaha THR10II desktop digital amp.

                  I used the amp’s Hi Gain amp model, but set the Gain to a little less than 50%, which still supplied plenty of distortion and sustain. In the EQ section, I cut the Bass and Treble by about 30%, but left the Mid set flat. The effects used were Chorus and Echo/Rev. The latter — a combination of reverb and delay — was turned to its highest setting.

                  Knock, Knock, Knock

                  You can also use delay for rhythmic effects, especially if you go for long settings such as quarter-notes or half-notes. Playing along with the rhythm of a long delay allows you to add harmonies and create parts with a lot of motion. Here, the feedback parameter is vital. The higher it is, the more repeats you’ll get … but if you have too many, it will be difficult to play anything distinctive above all the repetition.

                  The only way to successfully create a rhythmic delay part in a live ensemble situation is to use a tap tempo control (usually a footswitch or a button) to set the delay time — simply tap it in rhythm with the song as it starts playing. Even if your drummer has an extraordinary sense of timing (in fact, even if you’re playing to a drum machine!) you almost certainly won’t stay in sync over an entire song, but you can get it close enough to make it work for at least part of the tune.

                  The Mix or Dry/Wet control is also crucial when it comes to rhythmic effects since it determines the relative level of your picked notes as compared to the delayed ones. Getting it right will generally require some experimentation and should always be based on what you’re trying to play. It’s also helpful to stay with a scale or simple mode, so that the harmonies created don’t become discordant (unless that’s what you’re trying to do).

                  Here’s an example of me playing in time with a quarter-note delay and keeping it mostly in the minor pentatonic mode:

                  Screenshot.
                  The Helix Native delay settings for this audio clip are highlighted.

                  Another way to get some pretty “out-there” effects is with reverse delay. It replicates your notes like a delay, but with the audio reversed, causing a swell effect.

                  As with all delay effects, delay time is the crucial parameter. Where you set it has to do with the tempo of your song, what kind of feel you’re going for and so on. The feedback and dry/wet mix can make the difference between something completely wild-sounding and an effected guitar that can easily fit with other instruments.

                  This next audio clip demonstrates how a reverse delay effect works within an ensemble of guitar, synth bass and drums. The guitar is running through the Helix Native plug-in, which has a reverse delay on it set to quarter notes, with feedback of just about 50%. Also applied are a long reverb and chorus.

                  Screenshot.
                  The Helix Native reverse delay settings for this audio clip are highlighted.

                  Terrifically Tremulous

                  Another effect that provides continuous repeats is tremolo — a pulsing, repetitive change in volume. On a clean or semi-clean guitar sound, it won’t sound particularly abstract. But try it on a heavily distorted tone, perhaps along with heavy reverb and chorus, and you can go to some strange places.

                  In this audio clip, the guitar has a distorted tone and tremolo set to eighth-note triplets, along with a long reverb. It starts with a non-tonal slide down the E string with the side of the pick and then starts playing heavy chords in a 12/8 feel. Notice how the tremolo continues after the last chord.

                  Screenshot.
                  The Helix Native tremolo settings for this audio clip are highlighted.

                  Acoustic Possibilities

                  If you play primarily acoustic guitar, you’re probably jealous of all these wild effects that electric guitarists use. You don’t have to be, though. If your acoustic guitar has a pickup, you could plug it into a Yamaha THR3011A WL — a desktop amp designed specifically for acoustic guitar. It features onboard effects such as reverb, chorus and echo, plus a stereo widener. If you turn their settings high you can easily propel your sound into the “extreme” realm.

                  But what if you’re completely unplugged? Believe it or not, that’s not a dealbreaker either. All you need is a Yamaha TransAcoustic guitar (there are six models to choose from), which offers built-in chorus and reverb effects that are actually created in the air. These effects also arrive at the guitar’s output jack (via the built-in piezo pickup) so you can combine them with other effects created by your amp, plug-in or hardware effects processor.

                  Closeup of three knobs on the side panel of an acoustic guitar.
                  Yamaha CSF-TA TransAcoustic guitar effects controls.

                  This final audio clip demonstrates how you can combine TransAcoustic guitar effects with those of an external amp. It was played on a Yamaha FS-TA guitar, with its built-in Chorus and Reverb on their highest settings, plugged into a THR10II desktop amp with its Flanger and Spring Reverb effects on full. As you can hear, the resultant sound has a ton of movement:

                  So next time you decide to apply an effect to your guitar, consider trying some extreme settings. Who knows? You may well come up with sounds that lead you into new areas of musical experimentation!

                   

                  Check out these related blog articles:

                  Recording Basics: Reverb

                  Recording Basics: Delay

                  Recording Basics: Distortion and Saturation

                  Erez Eisen and Duvdev

                  Working under the name Infected Mushroom, Israeli Psytrance producers Erez Eisen and Amit “Duvdev” Duvdevani have relied on Steinberg Cubase for the last 20 years. In this video, they describe their song production workflow in great detail as they walk us through one of their latest productions called “Serious Times” — a remote collaboration with the artist Hope 6 — from initially receiving the vocals to vocal editing with VariAudio to writing melodies and harmonies.

                  The recent release of Cubase 11 had a particular impact on their approach to saving MIDI files, which they generally discarded after utilizing them to generate audio tracks. One reason, as Erez explains, is that older versions of Cubase did not have a Render Tracks function that included MIDI data. “With rendering, it’s so easy to save all the previous work and then disable those tracks, putting them in a separate folder. It’s nice to be able to quickly access those tracks if you need them.” They also enthuse about the way that rendering in Cubase allows them to easily create stems.

                  VariAudio is clearly one of their favorite parts of Cubase … and not just for fixing vocals. “We use it for making scenes too,” Duvdev reports. “It’s so easy to use, and such an interesting tool.” Erez is a particular fan of the Custom setting. “It lets you sculpt the grains and the randomness of the stretches. Cubase basically gives you all the options of time-stretching in the world.”

                  “Cubase is both simple and complex, if you want it to be,” he adds. “It offers infinite possibilities.”

                  “For me, the DAW is the creativity part,” Duvdev says. “I don’t see myself making music in any other program because I just feel at home with Cubase. It’s part of our process.”

                   

                  Check out these related articles.

                   

                  Click here to learn more about Steinberg Cubase.

                  An Instrumentalist in a Vocal World: Getting Comfortable with My Voice

                  In college, my focus was instrumental music education. For over four years, I prepared myself to become a band director.

                  All that changed when I received a call from one of my previous college advisors. She wanted me to interview for an elementary school music position.

                  My second and shortest co-op experience in college was at an elementary school. While I loved the setting and the creative liberty I had with lesson planning as a primary school student-teacher, there was one thing that I wasn’t comfortable with: my singing voice.

                  My situation was stressful but not uncommon. I had just agreed to take a position that wasn’t quite in my specialty. Oftentimes, we go into music school thinking that we are going to find a job that perfectly fits what we studied. I’m pretty sure that you already know that the real (music) world isn’t like that. So, there I was: A freshly graduated, licensed instrumental teacher with a job at an elementary school. It was time to get comfortable with my voice.

                  Find Your Real Voice Type

                  I quickly learned that there isn’t a lot you can do to get comfortable with singing. I had spent countless hours singing pop songs up an octave in the car. But when I was in my classroom and was required to sing all day, I began to lose my voice. Something just wasn’t working.

                  So, I spent more time at the piano and less time singing to the radio. This allowed me to explore my range on the staff and see my limits more clearly. Pretty soon, I discovered that I was an alto, not a soprano like I had been told. While my tone was light, singing way up high was simply not a sustainable option. As I learned more about my voice, I stopped being concerned with gender stereotypes and embraced my lower register.

                  Match High or Match Low

                  young students sitting and looking toward teacher (not pictured)One week, I taught 10 classes the same singing game called “Lucy Locket.” One at a time, the students would look around the classroom for a hidden purse. The student searcher was the only one who didn’t know where the pocket purse was. The closer the searcher got to the purse, the louder we sang, and vice versa.

                  Singing “Lucy Locket” numerous time was tiring for my voice. I learned that it was OK to sing lower than your students. If they are very young, teach them that they can match high or match low with your singing.

                  At first, I was afraid to bring some songs down an octave, especially with my kindergarten students. But when I used a soprano recorder for their starting pitch, they began to catch on. After a couple of weeks, I found that my students could match high or low to me with no trouble.

                  Lean on Teaching Tools

                  Teaching tools were a powerful resource when singing in my sweet spot wasn’t enough. There are many great recordings out there that do the call and response for you. When I first started, I swore that I would only use my voice to teach music to my students. It’s great to have high aspirations for your classroom, but don’t make goals that are unreachable.

                  Later in the fall, I caught a cold and had no voice, but I still had to show up and teach. I learned that if you plan your recordings, games and transitions just right, you can teach a music class without using your voice at all.

                  By the time the middle of the year rolled around, I was no longer losing my voice regularly, even when I was ill. I found the perfect balance between using recordings and singing in my most comfortable range.

                  Get Used to Being Uncomfortable

                  To get used to being uncomfortable around my students, I had to do things that made me uncomfortable at home. As a musician and teacher, one of the best things you can do is to constantly push yourself artistically.

                  I challenged myself to learn numerous songs from the French version of “La Vie En Rose” to the pop song “Titanium.” I even tried to juggle to music and failed epically.

                  But somehow, it all translated into my classroom really well! The more I forced myself to do things that made me uncomfortable at home, the calmer and more confident I became in the classroom. Zen mind, beginner’s mind.

                  Make Some Noise

                  Part of my journey to becoming comfortable with my voice was to make noise — even bad noises. Just like with the clarinet, you have to squeak and squawk before you can play a ballad or sound like Benny Goodman.

                  On the way to and from work, I sang harmonies to punk songs and experimented with vowel shapes. It was gritty, out of tune and pretty terrible, but my car welcomed the noises just the same!

                  I always recommend singing music that can be loud and bad. To become proficient at something, you first must allow yourself to be confidently unskilled.

                  I also have a recording set up and have become good friends with it. Recordings never lie, so learn from them!

                  Understanding the Science Behind Voice Confrontation

                  Over the years, I have learned that singing is just as much about the body as it is about the mind. For me, it’s more like 60% mind, 40% body.

                  There are little tips and tricks to curb singing anxiety, such as eating foods high in potassium like bananas. This will help you out for the first couple of days but will ultimately only get you so far.

                  frustrated woman with grimace on her face and fists held upWhat helped me become more confident was understanding the science about voice and sound. I never enjoyed hearing my singing or speaking voice, and I learned that there was a reason for this. It’s called voice confrontation.

                  Your brain interprets recordings differently than your voice in real-time. This is because of conduction. When you sing, you feel your voice conducting through the bones in your ears. However, when you listen to a recording, the sound is not conducted the same way. This makes a huge difference in perceived sound.

                  The article, “The Real Reason the Sound of Your Own Voice Makes You Cringe,” and the video, “Why Do I Hate the Sound of My Own Voice?”, explains the science behind why we dislike our voices so much. Once I understood this, everything became a little easier. I realized that my perception of my voice did not represent reality. When I took what I learned to my classroom, I found that I could project with no hesitation. 

                  Increasing My Vocal Awareness

                  When I first started singing in front of my students, my voice felt disconnected and odd. I needed to increase my awareness of my voice; I wanted to be as mindful of my voice as I was of my fingertips.

                  At first, I wasn’t sure where to start. I knew that I needed to engage with my voice more often, but it seemed like there was something else to integrate.

                  One thing that increased my vocal awareness was massaging my jaw. Exercises like this helped to strengthen the synapses in my brain to focus on the vocal areas of my body.

                  two young students holding up four fingersI also studied vocal awareness videos and courses like “The Secret of Vocal Awareness Vocal Exercises.” This information taught me to hold space for my voice. Vocal guru, Arthur Samuel Joseph, believes that our voice is not just a tool that we use in everyday life. It connects us on the most intimate levels, including socially and even spiritually.

                  Just Have Fun

                  What I didn’t realize when I started as an elementary school music educator is that you don’t have to be the best vocalist to teach your students. Pupils love to play singing games, learn and enjoy themselves. With my background as an instrumentalist, I taught hundreds of kindergartners how to match pitch and simply to enjoy exploring sound.

                  YH-L700A Headphones 3D Sound Field Technology

                  In 1964, IBM announced the System/360, an industry-changing computer system that was eventually used to process data for the Apollo 11 moon landing. It was powerful for its time but mammoth in size, occupying an entire room.

                  A girl wearing headphones with a dog on her lap watching a movie on a tablet.
                  (Photograph © Emma Loggins.)

                  From that impressive beast to desktop computers, laptops and smartphones, technology has steadily evolved into a smaller, more personal form that now even includes wearables. It’s no surprise then that home theater technology has evolved from full-blown multi-channel surround sound with multiple speakers to the latest Yamaha wireless headphone technology: 3D Sound Field, which enables you to enjoy an immersive listening experience wherever you are. Now, whether you’re watching a football game or concert video on your phone, or streaming content from Netflix® or YouTube™ on your tablet, you can enjoy a cinema-like experience. It’s like being in your own completely portable personal theater!

                  Intrigued? Read on …

                  YH-L700A

                  Wireless headphones.
                  Yamaha YH-L700A.

                  The first product to incorporate 3D Sound Field is the new Yamaha YH-L700A wireless noise-cancelling over-ear headphones, which use something called a Head-Related Transfer Function (HRTF for short) to mathematically model how your ears receive sound from a point in space. This sophisticated processing considers your head and ear shape and size, among other individual details, along with knowledge of the way our brains process sound and use cues to determine where sounds are coming from. Together, this enables the localization of particular sound sources.

                  Next, 3D Sound Field takes the wireless Bluetooth® signal, which is stereo or two-channel, and expands it to five channels, with dialogue in the center and sound effects to the left and right as originally intended.

                  Comparison between two-channel in-head presentation and immersive "out-of-head" sound.

                  Yamaha engineers applied their considerable expertise with home audio sound field processing, gained over decades of developing technologies like YPAO and CINEMA DSP HD3, to create different 3D Sound Field modes, similar to the sound programs on Yamaha AV receivers. Seven available modes, from Cinema to Music Video to Concert Hall, provide the optimal headphone listening experience for every type of content.

                  Seven 3D Sound Field Modes

                  Playback can be customized based on the type of content and a listener’s preference:

                  • Modes for Movies and Shows: Cinema, Drama
                  • Modes for Music Videos: Concert Hall, Outdoor Live, Music Video
                  • Modes for Music Only: Audio Room, BGM

                  Here’s a video that demonstrates how each of these modes recreates sound in a three-dimensional space:

                   

                  3D Sound Field works with any stereo content from virtually any source, including both iOS and Android™ devices, as the audio processing is handled inside the headphones.

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha YH-L700A wireless headphones.

                  So Your Child Wants to Play Brass

                  Your child has come home with information about joining the brass section in their school band, and they are excited about the prospect of being able to play trumpet, trombone, baritone horn or euphonium. That’s great, but many parents don’t have a musical background and don’t know where to start in order to give their son or daughter the best chance to succeed in this new creative adventure.

                  It that’s you, you’ve come to the right place! We’ll tell you what the most common brass instruments are, describe how to sort through the (sometimes) complicated language about them, and provide all the information you need to get started.

                  (Note: While this article covers the four brass instruments most commonly used in the classroom, it is possible that your child has set their eyes on other members of the brass family, such as French horn or tuba. If instruction in one of those instruments is offered by your child’s teacher or a private instructor, by all means encourage your child to go for it!)

                  Trumpet

                  Young boy playing a trumpet in front of school lockers.

                  The trumpet is the highest pitched and most popular instrument in the brass family, popularized by masters of the instrument such as Louis Armstrong, Dizzy Gillespie and Miles Davis. They are a staple of orchestras, jazz bands, marching bands, concert bands and wind bands, and are often featured in film scores.

                  There are just two physical things needed to produce a sound on a trumpet: the body of the instrument and a detachable mouthpiece. The mouthpiece is what the trumpeter puts up to their mouth to make a sound by “buzzing” their lips. (The correct technique for doing so is called embouchure.) The body contains three valves to change the pitch, water keys (or “spit valves”) to relieve the condensation that collects while playing, and a flared bell at the end that directs the sound outwards.

                  Don’t worry too much initially about whether the trumpet you’re purchasing for your child is silver-plated or has a yellow brass exterior — this is something that won’t matter much for a beginner. What is important is that the instrument be durably made (preferably with tough metals like the monel alloys used in the Yamaha YTR-2330 Standard Trumpet) and that it can easily produce a clear, characteristic sound.

                  Most modern student trumpets are designed internally (in terms of the diameter of their internal tubing — something known as bore) so that beginning players can produce an immediate, rich and in-tune sound. When selecting an instrument, keep in mind that not all bores are made alike, so that trumpet that’s been sitting in your cousin’s closet since the ’90s may not be as easy to play as a newer option. Also, before leaving your dealer, make sure your child has the right valve oil so that when the instrument’s valves eventually stick (something that’s totally normal), you’ll have a way of dealing with it and can prevent future issues.

                  Trombone

                  Young girl playing trombone.

                  Easily recognized by its long, narrow slide and wide bell, the trombone is one of the most powerful instruments in the band. It has a big, bright sound and is found in almost every type of musical ensemble: symphony orchestra, jazz band, marching band, concert band and wind band.

                  The following three components are found inside most trombone cases:

                  1. The mouthpiece. This is a silver metal cup with an attached tube that connects to the receiver of the instrument. The trombonist uses this to create the sound by “buzzing” their lips with the correct embouchure.
                  2. The slide. This two-piece mechanism allows the trombonist to change their pitch. Note that this should be locked in place before picking it up out of the case to prevent any mishaps!
                  3. The bell, bell tube, and tuning slide. This “other half” of the trombone connects to the slide and translates the air coming from the mouthpiece into the trombone’s characteristically “brassy” sound.

                  As with the trumpet, it is of little significance initially whether the trombone has a silver or yellow brass finish. The most important factor is that the young player should have the best chance to create a good sound by using an instrument made of quality materials. For example, the nickel-silver on the Yamaha YSL-354 Standard Trombone can prevent the inner slide from developing dents that the trombonist will feel every time they move the slide.

                  One important note regarding trombone: Because it uses a slide instead of keys or valves, even the beginner needs to have a good sense of pitch. If your child is able to sing, hum or whistle a tune by themselves, he or she is probably are a good candidate for this instrument. Knowing whether or not they have this ability in advance can save a lot of frustration for a budding young trombonist who is unable to “hear” a pitch before they play it.

                  Euphonium/Baritone Horn

                  Brass horn.

                  The euphonium and baritone horn are related instruments and are often used interchangeably in the beginning band classroom. The main difference between these instruments are their bore sizes. The euphonium’s bore gets gradually bigger from the mouthpiece to the bell, while the baritone’s bore maintains a consistent size throughout most of the instrument, giving it a brighter sound than the euphonium.

                  Both instruments have three or four valves, and similar to the trumpet, the only thing that needs to be “put together” is attaching the mouthpiece to the receiver. Don’t worry about the number of valves or if the instrument has extra tubing to adjust for the tendency of the low register to be somewhat sharp (something called compensating) — that won’t become a factor for several years into your child’s musical development.

                  These instruments come with both upright and forward-facing bells (an example of the latter is the Yamaha YEP-211 Standard Euphonium), but for the purposes of the beginner the way the bell faces won’t make much of a difference. And similar to the trumpet and trombone, the finish — whether silver-plated or yellow gold lacquer — won’t be a recognizable determinant in sound from the get-go.

                  The most important factors to consider when starting on euphonium or baritone is that the student be able to produce a clear, characteristically rich sound and that when the instrument comes out of the case, it will work. This often means that the old euphonium in the back of the band room’s instrument closet is going to feel different than a newer instrument, and might require more time and effort to make it suitable for a beginner.

                  One last thing: Playing low-pitched brass instruments like euphonium and baritone horn requires a tremendous amount of breath support. Encourage your child to endure the initial feeling of having to literally “work” to get a big sound. In time, they will build this skill and set the tone for the rest of the ensemble.

                   

                  Whether your child is interested in trumpet, trombone, or baritone horn/euphonium, we encourage beginning brass students and their parents to take advantage of their local music resources, such as their local authorized Yamaha dealer. These folks are experts in making sure that your child is prepared for their first day of band (or orchestra) and can even connect you with instructors if your child wants to get a running start on their musicality.

                   

                  Check out these related blog articles:

                  A Guide to Parent Resources for Beginning Band and Orchestra

                  What’s the Difference Between a Trumpet and a Cornet?

                  Trumpet Trivia

                  Six Things You Never Knew About Trombone

                  Tuba Factoids

                  How to Keep Brass Instruments Clean … Inside and Out

                  Swabbing Brass Instruments

                   

                  Click here for more information about renting a band instrument, and band in general.

                  Click here for more information about school music.

                  Click here for more information on the Yamaha YTR-2330 Standard Trumpet.

                  Click here for more information on the Yamaha YSL-354 Standard Trombone.

                  Click here for more information on the Yamaha YEP-211 Standard Euphonium.

                  Click here to locate your local authorized Yamaha dealer.

                  Top 10 Video Game Themes and Soundtrack Scores

                  When they arrived in the 1970s, video games were a completely new form of entertainment. They dazzled with cutting-edge graphics and memorable theme songs, sound effects and scores. At first, people fed quarters into machines at arcades, playing Pong and Pac-Man, each game’s music providing an uptempo accompaniment as players traversed level after exciting level. Then came the advent of home consoles, which brought games into living rooms and dens everywhere.

                  Video games have given us many memorable characters and songs — think Mario and Luigi, with their indelible opening refrain and accompanying sewer music. One composer, Yasunori Mitsuda, worked so hard on the intricate theme for the famed 1995 title Chrono Trigger that he had to be hospitalized with stomach ulcers!

                  Like many of us, I’ve spent lots of happy hours with a controller in my hands trying to up my scores and achieve gaming victory. Here are my personal top 10 favorite video game themes and soundtrack scores.

                  1. Title Theme – Super Mario Bros. (1985, NES™)

                  It’s difficult to overstate how influential this music was. Even its initial three seconds are historic! Super Mario Bros., in many ways, cemented the video game revolution post-1983. It’s since spawned TV shows, memorabilia, movies, sequels and many imitations. Composed by legendary Nintendo™ music director Koji Kondo, the theme is bouncy, cartoonish and absolutely classic. Check it out here.

                  2. Main Theme – The Legend of Zelda (1986, NES)

                  Amazingly, this was also composed by Kondo (in a single day!) after realizing the song he’d hoped to use was unavailable. This rousing march sets the heart-pumping tone for LoZ’s hero Link, and has topped numerous lists for best game theme song of all time. It’s also appeared in a number of other Nintendo titles, from Super Smash Bros. to Ocarina of Time. Check it out here.

                  3. Training Montage – Mike Tyson’s Punch-Out!! (1987, NES)

                  It’s easy to get pumped-up listening to the invigorating music between bouts as boxing protagonist Little Mac trains like a pixelated Rocky Balboa. Composed by Yukio Kaneoka, Akito Nakatsuka and Kenji Yamamoto, this thrilling theme is a veritable 8-bit symphony with swells of intensity. Featured in homage in a recent episode of Family Guy, the song remains a fan favorite. Check it out here.

                  4. Theme – Tetris (1989, Gameboy™)

                  Though simply designed, gamers will likely play Tetris well into the next century. The classic 1989 version, which came with the first Gameboy, features charming music that recalls traditional Russian folk songs (specifically the 19th century “Korobeiniki”) to honor the country where the game was first invented. Written by Hirokazu Tanaka, the theme remains catchy, even dozens of levels in. Check it out here.

                  5. Original Chocobo Theme – Final Fantasy III (1990, SNES™)

                  While many memorable theme songs occur during the game’s introduction, this one, composed by Nobuo Uematsu, is heard amidst gameplay when characters ride atop Chocobo, a yellow ostrich-sized bird who serves as the de facto mascot of the Final Fantasy series. The theme has actually evolved over the decades, but started like a jaunty accordion over a brisk acoustic guitar. Check it out here.

                  6. Green Hill Zone Theme – Sonic the Hedgehog (1991, Sega™)

                  This sticky digital ditty is the quintessential musical accompaniment for a speedy main character. Sega introduced Sonic, a prickly blue ball of energy, in 1991 to help launch its first 16-bit console. J-pop songwriter Masato Nakamura composed a theme as bright and crisp as a spring day — one you can even pleasantly leave running in the background when not playing. Check it out here.

                  7. Opening Suite – Halo (2001, XBOX™)

                  Perhaps the most cinematic theme song in video game history, this opening number, composed by Martin O’Donnell, begins chillingly and quickly crescendos into battle cries and tribal drums. It introduces players to the groundbreaking title for the then-brand new Microsoft™ XBOX console. Together, the game and score make for a significant 21st century audio-visual paradigm shift. Check it out here.

                  8. To the Ancient Land – Shadow of the Colossus (2005, PS2™)

                  This adventure remains one of the most influential of its time, as does its theme song and soundscape. During gameplay, our hero traverses giant landscapes solo, looking for enemies. To pair with the expanses, composer Ko Otani utilized minimalist sound effects and ambient orchestral music for battle. The game’s atmospheric soundtrack enjoys a large cult following today. Check it out here.

                  9. Baba Yetu – Civilization IV (2005, PC™)

                  The first video game song to be nominated for (and win!) a Grammy®, this pioneering theme, composed by Christopher Tin, broke the mold. In many ways, it’s more akin to a movie score than a traditional video game tune — all you have to do is compare it to the Tetris theme to hear the sonic evolution. Check it out here.

                  10. All the Earth – Everybody’s Gone To The Rapture (2015, PS4™)

                  Composed by Jessica Curry, the layered score for this eerie title earned a coveted BAFTA award in 2016. The work is operatic, complete with dynamic, sky-piercing vocals and an orchestra. During the game, players explore a mysterious (fictitious) English village whose inhabitants have vanished. Instead of other people, though, gamers interact with glowing floating lights. Check it out here.

                   

                  Click here for three reasons to upgrade your sound system for modern gaming.

                  Click here for more information on how to use the newest gaming consoles with your sound bar or AV receiver.

                  Click here for more information on how to configure your AV receiver for gaming.

                  Case Study: Using YouTube as a Teaching Tool

                  I created Swick’s Classroom, my YouTube channel, as a solution for a non-musical substitute during my four-week paternity leave in 2018.

                  The original video had to cover all the musical details while keeping a fast pace to prevent unwanted bored behaviors. I ended up creating a point-of-view xylophone video so students could see a large xylophone on the smart board while they learned a song. That video was posted three years ago and has more than 10,000 views!

                  At that time, my district, Clark County School District, had not yet adapted Google, so sharing documents and digital video lessons with a substitute was difficult because all files were password protected. I was left with two options: trust a stranger with my work login credentials or upload my lesson to YouTube for all to see. Both felt risky at the time, but I know I made the right decision.

                  Although I never intended for my video lessons to be used by others —  most of my doubt coming from imposter syndrome — I was over-the-moon excited when my first Swick’s Classroom video hit 50 views. I thought to myself, “Wow, I helped 50 teachers!” I didn’t quite understand how views worked then, but that excitement is what drove me to make the next video.

                  My Equipment

                  I made my first eight Swick’s Classroom videos using my cell phone and a cheap video-editing software meant for making family home videos. I started watching YouTube tutorials about every software available, and I purchased the most user-friendly.

                  Tyler SwickI bought a tripod for my cell phone and a green blanket so I could record instruments and remove the background on the computer. That was all I needed to make a majority of my instrument lesson videos.

                  Your cell phone is the most powerful tool in your arsenal. I wouldn’t buy anything expensive until the content starts paying for it. Apple computers come with iMovie and GarageBand. Windows users can download DaVinci Resolve and Audacity for free. I didn’t make any money from my content for two years, and it forced me to get creative with how I make content but also made me pay attention to what students like about the videos.

                  I eventually learned the Adobe Creative Cloud programs — the industry standard — so I could animate my own videos, which is still a work in progress. As I gained confidence in my content, the goal became to one day make money from the lessons so that I could upgrade my setup and create videos more efficiently.

                  I believe the purpose of every educational video is to provide an experience that the teacher could not provide by teaching the class directly. The simplest quality to perfect is the pacing. Live instruction is constantly interrupted by questions, bathroom breaks, transitions, etc. Videos are a set pace that free up the classroom teacher to work independently from the lesson. The teacher is able to excuse students, get the Band Aid, assist with the assignment and tie shoes without the pacing suffering.

                  You don’t need 4K fancy effects, you only need a purposeful lesson with obtainable goals.

                  Positive Responses

                  Pre-COVID, students loved the digital lessons because they could continue the lessons at home, memorize lyrics or even try to play melodies on their instruments. Parents commented that their children would put the music lesson on the TV for everyone to watch. Dads would jokingly sing this week’s song to me at drop off. YouTube provided a vast accessibility that most parents allow in their house.

                  During COVID, YouTube and recorded lessons were the saving grace for asynchronous students that had limited internet access. Yes, schools adopted websites like Canvas and Google Classroom, but I found my content was limited by file size and quality. I was only able to have one 20-minute lesson posted at a time due to capacity limitations. The alternative was to post an unlimited amount of high-quality videos on YouTube and embed them into my classroom pages.

                  When our school returned to in-person instruction, parents and students were both saying “Look, it’s the music teacher from YouTube!”

                  Organized Like a Locker

                  If I could start over, I definitely would organize it better because my channel lacks both a content plan and a posting schedule! I have treated my YouTube channel like a locker for things that I need right now.

                  I only create content that I want to use in my class in the immediate future — for example, I need a video today for my kindergarten class to sing at an ocean-themed parent night, and I need a boomwhacker video tomorrow for my 5th graders. Because of this, there are no clear patterns in my content. And, similar to a library, if a video can’t be found, it will never be viewed.

                  My videos range from silly songs to xylophone tutorials to boomwhacker play-alongs to vlogging. I might have someone subscribe because they love a boomwhacker video but then the next five videos I post are not about boomwhackers.

                  If I could start over right now, I would create a unique channel for each of the different categories that teachers want. I see other channels that are 100% rhythm play-alongs, and they are successful because subscribers know what they’re going to get when the next video is posted. Unfortunately, my subscribers don’t know if they’re going to get a rant about COVID safety or a ukulele tutorial.

                  Future Plans

                  The original concept of the YouTube channel was purely to help my substitute find a video of me teaching faster and easier than the provided methods at the time. Going forward, I hope to create content that helps teachers get their students excited about music class. I spend summers looking at views, comments and data to understand what the rest of the world wants more of content-wise from Swick’s Classroom.

                  Swick's Classroom logoSeeing the views go up on a new or even an old lesson gives me a sense of gratification that I can’t get anywhere else. I really enjoy the recent vlogging because teachers need to know that they are not the only professionals experiencing this era of COVID music education. I received a comment that said, “I needed to hear this,” which was all I needed to know that it was time well spent.

                  I was excited to help 50 teachers with their sub plans when this thing started, and now the channel is approaching 1 million views! I hope to curate the channel all the way through my retirement and enjoy knowing my lessons are still being used somewhere.

                  How to Use Alexa Multi-Room Audio with a Sound Bar

                  How would you like to have a pop artist in your living room, a rapper in your den and a country singer out on the patio — all at the same time? How about a special playlist for your basement workouts, one for cooking and one for when you’re working in your home office? With Alexa Multi-room audio, you can have all that and more.

                  Amazon Alexa provides you with a robust selection of hands-free commands. Communicating over your Wi-Fi network or Bluetooth®, Alexa gives you control over not only music devices but also lights, ceiling fans, televisions, locks and thermostats, to name just a few. For this article, we’ll focus on music playback, and show you how to use the Multi-room audio feature, which lets you use the Alexa app in your mobile device to create a custom music system that will play what you want, where you want, all under voice control.

                  Room(s) to Grow

                  One of the advantages of Alexa is that you can create a setup that consists of a variety of sound bars and/or speakers of different makes, as long as they are all Alexa-enabled. For example, you could have Yamaha YAS-109 sound bars in two rooms and Amazon Echos in the others and access them all from the Alexa app. You can also use Alexa to control any Yamaha MusicCast-enabled multi-room speaker system. It’s incredibly flexible and completely wireless.

                  Long thin speaker.
                  The Yamaha YAS-109 sound bar.

                  Make the Connections

                  Connecting Alexa to a YAS-109 is easy. Simply download the Yamaha Sound Bar Controller app from the App Store for iPhone® or Google Play for Android™. With the sound bar powered on, open the app, then follow the onscreen prompts on the app to connect the unit to your Wi-Fi network:

                  Screenshot.
                  The Yamaha Sound Bar Controller app.

                  As shown in the illustration above, you turn on Alexa support by pressing and holding the Alexa button on the sound bar and then following the prompts on the Sound Bar Controller app. When you’ve completed the setup, you’ll see your YAS-109 show up as a device in the Alexa app. (Click here for more information about using Alexa with Yamaha sound bars.)

                  Create Custom Groups

                  By default, you can ask Alexa to activate individual speakers or play the same music on all speakers at once. But one of the most powerful aspects of Multi-room music is the ability to designate custom speaker groups you can turn on with voice commands in the Alexa app.

                  Groups allow for total customization of what plays where. If, for example, you have five Alexa-enabled speakers in your system (say, two upstairs and three downstairs), you can make an upstairs group and a downstairs group — or groups with any combination of speakers.

                  Here’s how to create a speaker group with a YAS-109 sound bar and other Alexa-enabled speakers:

                  1. Touch the Devices icon at the bottom of the Alexa app.

                  2. From the Devices page, touch the “plus” button on the upper right-hand corner of the screen:

                  Screenshot.
                  The Alexa app + button (circled in red).

                  3. Choose Combine Speakers.

                  4. Touch Multi-room music:

                  Screenshot.
                  The “Multi-room music” option in the Alexa app.

                  5. From the list of available speakers, select the speakers you want to include in the group.

                  6. Select a name for the speaker group, either from the preset list, which includes choices like Chill Out, Party Time and Chores, or by typing in a name of your own.

                  7. Go back to the Devices page and you’ll see your group listed under speaker groups.

                  Put Alexa to Work

                  Once you’ve completed your setup, it’s time to put Alexa to work.

                  If you use specific group names in your commands, Alexa will only play the music on the speaker group you mention. For example, if you say, “Alexa, play classic rock on Party Time,” your system will start playing your favorite hits of the ’60s and ’70s over the Party Time speaker group. Other Alexa commands (also known as “skills”) include pausing the music, making it louder or softer, or skipping to the next or previous selection in the playlist.

                  The Alexa app also offers lists of preset commands that you can enable on your app, allowing you to do everything from playing nature sounds, podcasts or audio books to turning on your favorite internet radio station. You can even ask Alexa to tell “knock-knock” jokes!

                  Screenshot.
                  Some of the available Skills in the Alexa app.

                  Targeted Audio

                  Another fun Alexa feature is the ability to create custom playlists on Amazon Music (Amazon Prime members automatically have Prime Music accounts) or other apps or music services you’ve connected to Alexa.

                  You can get creative and make playlists for various rooms or situations, i.e., “Alexa, play Laundry Music on Basement” or “Alexa, play Wake Up Music on Kids Room.”

                  Cast of Many

                  If you’re using Alexa with a Yamaha MusicCast system, the setup and command instructions are slightly different. For instance, after you say “Alexa,” you must add “ask MusicCast to” before the specific command. For a deeper dive into using Alexa and MusicCast, check out this blog.

                  Whether you’re using Yamaha sound bars or a MusicCast system, Alexa integration gives you an unprecedented level of hands-free control. You might even say that the home audio system of tomorrow is here today.

                   

                  Check out these related blog articles:

                  How to Use Alexa with a Yamaha Sound Bar

                  How to Use Alexa with MusicCast

                  How to Use Google Voice Control with Yamaha MusicCast

                  How to Use Actions on Google with Yamaha MusicCast

                   

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha YAS-109 sound bar.

                  Case Study: Implementing Student-Led Backward Planning

                  For several years, I have taken the curriculum planning and classroom management approach of backward planning and modified it to a pedagogical approach for percussion students in grades 6 through 12 within the Wakeland High School cluster in Frisco, Texas.

                  Backward planning can be utilized to organize instructional experiences and highlight expected goals to produce planned outcomes toward major events such as ensemble concerts, solo performances and many other shows. Using this approach, I have had the opportunity to teach students how to practice efficiently and set realistic timelines for themselves and within their ensembles. With modifications along the way and through numerous successes and failures, I believe that we have found our groove.

                  Wakeland High School percussion director Brian Teed with drummers at band camp

                  What is Backward Planning?

                  As educators, we are constantly setting goals, adjusting expectations and formulating inventive solutions to the unique challenges we set for our students. With backward planning, we start at the end of a process — for example, a performance — and retroactively apply benchmarks to certain dates leading up to that final performance. The most common benchmark would be to have the notes to a specific piece of music learned by a specific date, allowing for flex time before the performance to fine-tune dynamic approach and musical interpretation, which can become their own benchmarks.

                  When these benchmarks are accurately communicated, students will agree on what the outcome of the final performance will be — such as memorizing a piece or submitting the piece for festivals and competitions — and the teacher maintains this expectation. This process works well for many students but, unfortunately, not for the entire ensemble.

                  I found that even after setting benchmark expectations and having clearly communicated the performance date to the students, there was still a disconnect among some students, who were still scrambling in the final week to pull it all together. This caused the ensemble as a whole to miss reaching its full potential.

                  I tried to figure out what was causing this disconnect. After observing the behaviors of student groups from numerous grades and ability levels, I discovered that the majority of students did not know how to adequately practice. To address this, I decided to have students apply the process of backward planning to their practicing and take ownership in their learning. Essentially, the students mapped out their music goals first and then created individual practice plans, which helped encourage those students who had difficulty in starting a project by motivating them and allowing them to have a clear picture of what the end result would look like. Once students learned how to practice correctly through backward planning, many commented that they wish they had learned this skill earlier to be more successful.

                  Currently, I am the percussion director for the Wakeland High School cluster, and in this position, I have a direct impact on the way percussion curriculum is presented to a variety of ability levels, from middle school beginners through graduating seniors. I was afforded the unique opportunity to experiment on how to teach students backward planning as well as determine what students required from me and my staff to make this a successful approach to learning.

                  Beginning Backward Planning with Beginners

                  My staff and I decided to introduce the concept of backward planning to our beginner middle school percussion class where only one instrument is taught at a time. Because new techniques and rhythms are presented to the class several times throughout the year, we thought this group would be the easiest to work with to modify and fine-tune the process of backward planning. To establish a baseline, we decided to see what changes were having a positive or negative effect and to ultimately determine what was working and what wasn’t.

                  Wakeland High School drumline wearing masks Our initial step was to have students learn a short etude that was well within their ability level for a pass-off due on a certain date. We told the students that they collectively had to decide benchmark dates prior to the due date and how much of the etude needed to be learned and performed by those benchmarks. This is where we left it as we wanted the ownership of their backward planning to be solely on them.

                  The first benchmark arrived, and the class played up to the predetermined measure. We found that some students had prepared to the noted measure, some had learned the entire etude, and some had not even started. Had this been an ensemble setting, this variation in preparation would have caused the pace of rehearsal to suffer and increased the likelihood that those who had done the work becoming frustrated with those who had not. It seemed that letting students set their own benchmarks and take ownership of their individual learning did not fix our issue of inadequate preparation.

                  We modified the process and added reminders for students to practice every day and provided information on what they should be practicing. Even with this change, many students still only practiced the night before, much like cramming for a science or math test, complete with a stressful performance the next day. There was still a disconnect in how students were preparing to perform.

                  After a few more attempts, we were still struggling to have adequate preparation for the entire class. That’s when we decided to have students define more than just a benchmark on what they were preparing. At this point, everything had been covered previously — in other words, there were no new concepts or techniques. Because of this, before they picked up their instruments, we had students go through the music and make note of what they already knew. By going through the music first, students were better prepared to not only set benchmarks, but to plan their practices. Essentially, the students went through the music much like a director would a score for an ensemble, which enabled them to think through the entire etude in order to properly backward plan.

                  After implementing this change, we saw a noticeable increase in productive practice and stronger benchmark performances overall! Students spent less time in a practice room and more time playing in the classroom, and they actually pushed the pace of the class forward. Eventually, my staff and I put together an example of the etude — through recordings or demonstrations — while students studied the etude. Afterward, we saw an even greater increase in overall participation and preparation and an improvement in performance.

                  Advancing Backward Planning to the High School Level

                  We took what we learned with the beginning class and applied it to the high school level, seamlessly incorporating the process of teaching how to effectively practice by utilizing backward planning. The only difference between ensembles was the length and difficulty of what students were preparing.

                  Brian Teed, Wakeland High School percussion director at music standStudents at the higher level had not necessarily been taught how to practice, but they were achieving at an adequate level solely because of the overall time they spent on their instrument. Students were mindlessly practicing by repping a piece over and over again until they, by pure repetition, memorized the music — oftentimes with errors and limited musicality.

                  With backward planning, students first focused on the end result by studying and listening to the music, and then visualizing what the final performance would be. We saw a similar result to the beginner class — the high school students were spending less time in a practice room but were achieving at a higher level. Many students also said that they had more satisfaction after their practice sessions because of how productive they were.

                  I will be excited when the beginners who started on the backward planning process in middle school advance to high school. What parts of the process stayed with students through the years? What, if anything, has changed?

                  Every year, we are faced with new challenges and opportunities to modify our backward planning approach. As teachers, we must constantly adapt and meet our students where they are to help build them up as performers and valuable members of our ensembles.

                  Live Drumming Is Back: Tips for Gigging with Electronic and Hybrid Drum Kits

                  It’s time to get back on that stage again!

                  Gigging with an electronic or an electronic/acoustic “hybrid” drum kit is a little different from performing on a fully acoustic kit, but it’s a great way to treat your audience to a large variety of drum and percussion sounds, bringing an extra dimension to your performance. Here are some tips for ensuring a successful live gig with a Yamaha DTX6 Series electronic kit, or by using a Yamaha EAD10 with your acoustic drums to create a hybrid set.

                  Hear, Here

                  By using an electronic drum kit, you’ll have access to a large number of drum sounds wherever you play, without the need for expensive microphones and stands … plus you’ll have total control over the volume of the kit. All Yamaha DTX6 Series electronic drum kits come with a DTX-PRO module, which is loaded with hundreds of high-quality, professionally recorded drum and percussion sounds that can be recalled instantly.

                  Closeup of control panel.
                  Yamaha DTX-PRO module.

                  The biggest difference in gigging with an electronic kit versus an acoustic kit is that you’ll need a way for you and your bandmates to hear the drums onstage. Yamaha DBR Series powered speakers are great for this purpose because they can be positioned vertically for use as PA speakers or placed horizontally on the floor for use as wedge monitors.

                  View of front of speaker.
                  Yamaha DBR15 powered speaker.

                  The low-frequency response of a speaker has a big impact on the sound of kick drum and toms. Generally, larger woofers have better low-frequency response, so the DBR12, with its 12-inch woofer, or the DBR15, with its 15-inch woofer, are good choices for reproducing drums. If you really like your low end pumping on stage, consider adding a powered subwoofer such as the compact Yamaha DXS12mkII, which can generate bass down to 42 Hz, or the heftier DXS18mkII, which goes all the way down to a chest-thumping 32 Hz.

                  What’s the Connection?

                  You’ll get maximum flexibility by connecting the audio output from your electronic drum module to a line input on the PA mixer, and then using an aux output to send audio from the mixer to a wedge monitor, headphones or in-ear monitors. This ensures that you’ll be able to hear the drums in your monitor along with a mix of other instruments or vocal microphones. To learn how to use aux sends to create separate monitor mixes, see this blog post.

                  Graphic showing the flow of audio signal through various components.
                  Using a mixer to route audio from a DTX-PRO to a stage monitor and the main PA speakers.

                  EAD10: Expand Your Palette

                  The Yamaha EAD10 Electronic Acoustic Drum Module instantly transforms your acoustic drum set into a hybrid kit. All you have to do is mount its Sensor Unit (which contains a pair of high-quality condenser microphones and a kick drum trigger) on your bass drum hoop. The microphones capture the entire kit, and the kick trigger can play any of the hundreds of drum or percussion sounds built into the EAD10 instrument library.

                  Closeup of small electronic unit.
                  The EAD10 Sensor Unit.

                  Multi-zone snare and tom trigger inputs on the EAD10 accept the output from a clip-on drum trigger such as the Yamaha DT50S, or from Yamaha XP Series and TP Series drum pads. Attaching a DT50S makes it possible to layer electronic sounds with the acoustic sound of the drum, while XP or TP Series pads permit you to expand your acoustic kit with electronic percussion, cymbals or effect sounds.

                  Closeup of a snare drum with sensor attached.
                  The DT50S can be mounted on any snare or tom.

                  A big difference between performing with the EAD10 and an electronic kit is that you don’t need a monitor system in order to hear your acoustic drums onstage — though you will need a monitor to hear triggered sounds and effects. You’ll also need to connect the EAD10 to the PA system (the same way you’d connect a DTX-PRO module, as described earlier), so the audience hears the EAD10 microphones as well as the triggered sounds.

                  Secret Weapon

                  One of the great things about playing Yamaha DTX6 Series electronic drums or a hybrid kit with an EAD10 is that you’ll have control over the mix and be able to add effects to your drums. However, understand that the mix you’ve been hearing in your headphones while practicing may not sound the same when the module is played through a big PA system. For example, you may find that the kick or toms are very loud compared to the rest of the kit when heard through a PA. That can happen when the headphones you’ve been using for practice don’t have great low-frequency response, causing you to compensate by making the kick and toms louder; or, if the headphones lack clarity in the high frequencies, the snare EQ may be too bright or may have more reverb than necessary.

                  This is where the recorder function on the EAD10 and DTX-PRO is your secret weapon: simply record yourself playing for a few minutes onto a flash drive during practice or rehearsal, then during sound check, play the recording back over the PA speakers. Walk out into the room to listen: you’ll be able to make better judgements about the mix, EQ and effects, and you can even have the band play along with the recorded drums to check the balance between instruments.

                  By the way, the DTX-PRO lets you build 200 User Kits, and the EAD10 offers 200 User Scenes, so you’ll be able to keep your practice settings while creating new Scenes or Kits for playing live.

                  Using Pre-Recorded Tracks

                  The EAD10 and DTX-PRO provide several different ways to play live shows with pre-recorded tracks. A laptop running DAW software can be connected to the TO HOST port, or you can transfer a stereo mix of the tracks to a USB flash drive and use the internal recorder to play files directly from the drive. A third option is playing audio from your phone or MP3 player into the EAD10 or DTX-PRO AUX IN jack. Using your phone or a flash drive is a convenient way of working because it reduces setup time and eliminates the need to bring a computer to the gig. The volume of the tracks can be balanced with the volume of the drums using the Audio/Click control knob on the EAD10 or the Audio control knob on the DTX-PRO.

                  In situations where you need to play along with a click, the EAD10 and DTX-PRO have the ability to route the click only to the headphone output, so you can listen to the click in your headphones while preventing it from being heard by the audience.

                  Effects

                  One of the great things about playing DTX6 electronic drums or an EAD10 hybrid kit is that they have a wide variety of built-in effects, including Reverb, Delay, Flanger, Phaser, Modulation and Compression. These effects can be used to enhance or change the sound of your drums.

                  Accessing effects on the DTX-PRO is easy using its Kit Modifier section, which has separate knobs for control of Ambience, Comp (compression) and Effect: Simply turn the knobs to dial in the sound you want.

                  Closeup of dials.
                  The DTX-PRO Kit Modifier.

                  The EAD10 also allows instant access to effects from the front panel, with dedicated controls for Reverb, Effects and Trigger (volume of the triggered kick sound).

                  Closeup of dials.
                  The EAD10 control panel.

                  Note that in both the EAD10 and DTX-PRO, the function of the Effect knob depends upon the preset scene loaded into the unit. To demonstrate, here’s an audio clip of drums played with the EAD10 preset scene P001 “Arena”:

                  In this scene, the Effect knob controls a compressor. Compare the previous clip with the next one, where the Effect knob has been turned up to add compression. You can hear the drums get louder, and the volume of the kick drum becomes more consistent.

                  Turning down the Reverb produces the considerably less interesting sound heard in this next clip:

                  And here’s how the drums sound with the Effect (compressor) and Reverb knobs all the way down:

                  As you can hear, changing the Effect or Reverb controls in a preset scene drastically changes the sound of the drums and offers a wide range of creative options.

                  Playing electronic or hybrid drums onstage requires a bit of planning, but it gives you the ability to deliver a wide range of acoustic and electronic drum and percussion sounds — all at the touch of a few buttons. It’s an approach worth exploring as you get back into live gigging!

                   

                  Check out these related blog articles:

                  There’s a New Kit in Town

                  Get More from Your EAD10 with V2.0 Firmware

                   

                  Click here for more information about Yamaha DTX6 Series electronic drum kits.

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha DTX-PRO module.

                  Click here for more information about the Yamaha EAD10 acoustic electronic drum module.